Molten Dragon For OWL

The Invisible Boat
The Invisible Boat

Ever wonder about the living beings who drive the wild untamable fires
and the
in the west? Here is a tale that makes pictures for us all of the powerful
beings driving such natural events forward! These are important pictures
and the
to draw us close to nature in a different way from our ordinary thinking.
Molten Dragon
The children who helped the elemental world to clean the water and release
Molten Dragon
the water sprites from the Binagatorials in first The Invisible Boat, are called
upon once more in this tale of suspense and adventure to help our living Earth
to tame the Molten Fire Dragon. Using their invisible boat, a gift from the
beings of the earth and their own grandfather, they navigate to the place of
most need on the earth — the center of the raging fires in the West. The dwarfs
of earth show themselves only to those whom they can trust not to dismiss
them as imaginary.
The author continues the fun, thrills, and lively characters from the series
opener (The Invisible Boat, 2014) in this follow-up for fourth graders and up.
Müller’s ending nicely brings all the good guys together for a conclusion that’s
logical and satisfying. The author’s descriptions, especially of settings, are a
joy, with well-chosen details to linger over, whether the location is a fantasy
landscape, a magic shop, or a detective’s office. As before, the book has an
urgently serious message of ethical responsibility to the environment, but it
doesn’t feel preachy thanks to the story’s highly colored adventures.
Eric G. Müller waldorf publications

A fine tale with well-conceived quests, strong characters, exciting
confrontations, and a delightful resolution.
Eric G. Müller teaches high school literature and

drama at the Hawthorne Valley Waldorf School in New
York, and he is the director of Teacher Education at the
Alkion Center there. Born in Durban, South Africa, he
studied literature and history at the University of the
Witwatersrand, Johannesburg. He continued his studies
at Emerson College, England, and the Institute for
Waldorf Pedagogy in Witten-Annen, Germany, where
he specialized in drama and music education. He has
published two novels and a collection of poetry. His love
of the living earth and of children is abundantly clear in
this story! www.ericgmuller.com
by Eric G. Müller
ISBN 978-1-943582-98-3
38 Main Street
Chatham, NY 12037 9 781943 582983
The
Invisible Boat {
and the
Molten Dragon
To my grandchildren
and all the beings
in the realms of nature.
The Invisible Boat
and the
Molten Dragon
Book Two
{
by
Eric G. Müller
Printed with support from the Waldorf Curriculum Fund
Published by
Waldorf Publications
The Research Institute for Waldorf Education
38 Main Street
Chatham, NY 12037
Title: T
he Invisible Boat and the Molten Dragon
Author: Eric G. Müller
Editor: Charlton Campbell-Hughes
Proofreader: Maya Morgan-Skillen
Design & layout: Ann Erwin
Cover illustration: Martina Müller
© 2017 by Waldorf Publications

ISBN #978-1-943582-98-3
Contents
Part One
On the Eve of the Winter Solstice
1 ∙ Voice of the Birds 11
2 ∙ Thus Spoke the Ice 15
3 ∙ They Remember 17
4 ∙ Preparing to Set Sail 20
5 ∙ Through the Great Gates of the Carved Dome 24
6 ∙ To the Bricanus Mountains 28
7 ∙ Guided by the Hawk 31
8 ∙ Into the Mineshaft 34
9 ∙ Follow Kangshmoot 37
10 ∙ Through the Ear 41
Part Two
Attending the 77th Earth Council
11 ∙ King Brathnar’s Hall 44
12 ∙ Festivities 49
13 ∙ The Threat 54
14 ∙ The Task 58
15 ∙ Off to Crystal Canyon 63
16 ∙ Close to the Edge 67
17 ∙ Leap of Faith 70
Part Three
In the Depths of the Canyon
18 ∙ The Long Fall 74
19 ∙ Landing in a Thermal Pool 77
20 ∙ Lava Fields 80
21 ∙ Hold Up 85
22 ∙ A Friend 88
23 ∙ Birthcave 91
24 ∙ Natural Waterslide 95
25 ∙ Chased by Kraftabots 100
Part Four
In Search of the Liquid Light
26 ∙ Two Trunks 103
27 ∙ High-Voltage Attack 107
28 ∙ The Soft Realm 110
29 ∙ The Flora Express 114
30 ∙ Pelted by Pips 121
31 ∙ The Fields of Lughshmarah 125
32 ∙ The Tree of Life 130
33 ∙ The Seed Bearers 134
34 ∙ The Weeping Rain Forest 138
Part Five
Returning Home
35 ∙ Merry-Go-Round 143
36 ∙ Coral Castle 147
37 ∙ Surprise Reunion 151
38 ∙ The Queen’s Welcome 155
39 ∙ Gifts and Julie’s Query 158
40 ∙ Fnumbavats’ Glow 161
41 ∙ Back in the Cold 164
Part Six
In Pursuit of the Task
42 ∙ Hearing the Call 168
43 ∙ The Shadow 173
44 ∙ Flimsk 175
45 ∙ The Mask 180
46 ∙ Off to the South 184
47 ∙ Sovereign Lady of the Sky 190
48 ∙ The Lily Box 195
49 ∙ Theft 199
50 ∙ Fight for the Fnumbies 203
51 ∙ Water Fay 207
52 ∙ Rain at Last 211
53 ∙ Quenching the Land 214
Part Seven
In Search of Massud
54 ∙ The Parchment 219
55 ∙ Roop Reveals 224
56 ∙ Waiting for Roop to Wake 228
57 ∙ Asking for Help 231
58 ∙ The Search Begins 236
59 ∙ One More Clue 240
60 ∙ Finding the Red Clown 242
61 ∙ The Magick Quill 248
62 ∙ Meeting Massud 253
Part Eight
The Secret of the Quill
63 ∙ Trapped 256
64 ∙ Holding Hands 261
65 ∙ Massud’s Story 264
66 ∙ Returning the Mask 268
67 ∙ Dinner Party 273
68 ∙ Followed 279
69 ∙ Breaking and Entering 285
70 ∙ Treasure Lost and Found 288
71 ∙ The Dagger 293
Part Nine
Meeting the Sun Dragon
72 ∙ Relaxing in the Park 289
73 ∙ Out West 303
74 ∙ Approaching the Fire 308
75 ∙ Piercing the Flames 310
76 ∙ Zeerfitz, the Fire Dragon 313
77 ∙ D’Ahura, the Sun Dragon 316
78 ∙ Dropping Sunseeds 319
79 ∙ Zuratrat, the Molten Dragon 323
80 ∙ Conference on Fist Rock 328
81 ∙ Prepare to Strike! 333
82 ∙ United in Battle 336
Part Ten
In the Garden Where Fire and Water Cross
83 ∙ Back to the City 343
84 ∙ The Reward 347
85 ∙ The Decision 351
86 ∙ The Truth Revealed 356
87 ∙ The Adults Speak 362
88 ∙ Back on Honey Creek Farm 366
89 ∙ Annabel Steps into the Water 370
90 ∙ Handing over the Key 375
91 ∙ Treasure 380
92 ∙ Parting 383
93 ∙ Plans, Visions, and Waiting 387
94 ∙ Honey Creek Farm School 391
part one
On the Eve of the Winter Solstice
1 { Voice of the Birds
A feral pigeon cooed softly outside the window, patiently

pulling Leo from his dreams—coo-rook’doo-coo, coo-rook’doo-coo.
Yawning and blinking, he climbed down from his bunk bed,
careful not to disturb Julie, and tiptoed over to the window,
pulling the curtains aside. The pigeon lingered for a moment
before flying from the ledge, leaving Leo jumping into the air,
whispering, “Yes, yes, yes!” He looked back over his shoulder at
Julie, but she continued to sleep, her long auburn hair covering
half her face and the top of the comforter. He wanted to shout
with excitement but held back, pressing his nose flat against
the cold windowpane. Snow!
Big, fat snowflakes floated slowly down in front of him,
covering the city in white. As he lost himself in the laced
curtain of white gliding down, he suddenly remembered it was
also the first day of vacation, which ushered another muffled
“Yes!” from his throat.
Below, he saw Mr. Thompson brushing snow from his car.
As usual he wore two pairs of glasses: one on his nose, and
the other pushed up on his bony forehead. Leo smiled as he
watched him get into the car, skid, and drive off, leaving two
neat tracks in the snow. Apart from that, the streets were quiet
11
The Invisible Boat and the Molten Dragon
and empty. It was the first snow of the season and Leo wanted
to get out as quickly as possible.“Hey, Julie, guess what?” He
couldn’t resist waking up his sister.
Julie groaned and mumbled, “What?” adding, “and keep it
short,” knowing that he’d tell her, whether she liked it or not.
“It’s snowing!” No reaction. “Come on, let’s go and have
some fun.” He tugged at her comforter impatiently. At that
moment, Sidney, their Basset Hound, scraped against the
bedroom door with his paws and yowled dolefully.
“Oh no! You’ve gone and woken Sidney.” She rolled over.
“So much for sleeping in on our first day of vacation.”
“Yeah, but snow! Just take a look.”
Julie sat up, resigned. “Okay, pull the curtains aside all the
way so that I can see.” Leo obliged, and then let Sidney in, who
immediately jumped on Julie’s bed and licked her face. “Easy,
easy does it.”
Leo hastily slipped into his clothes. “I’ll get the sleds from
the basement.” He rummaged through the drawer for some
mittens. “I’ll tell Annabel that we’re going over to the park.”
“Just go. I’ll be down soon,” said Julie. Leo rushed out, his
shock of blonde hair flying. “Hey, and take Sidney with you,”
she called after him.
“Fine.” Leo grabbed a stale blueberry muffin, whistled
softly, and Sidney came running.
Minutes later, the three children were in the park, Leo
pulling Annabel, whom they picked up at her first floor
apartment on their way out, on a red plastic sled, with her
crutches tucked neatly on the side of the sled. Meanwhile Julie
tried to contain Sidney straining against the leash as he sniffed
all over. They were alone in the park that morning, the first to
leave their footprints in the snow.
12
Part 1 » On the Eve of the Winter Solstice
“It hasn’t snowed here in three years,” Annabel remarked,

looking around, smiling. “And it’s the first time I’ve been out
in the snow.”
“Really? Why didn’t you go out last time?” Julie asked.
“I wasn’t allowed because of my weak legs.” She paused. “It
was the winter after my brother disappeared.”
“Oh yeah, sorry, I forgot.” Julie and Leo always felt bad
for Annabel whenever she mentioned her legs or Massud, her
missing brother.
“Don’t forget,” chirped a voice from the woods on their left,
as if to change the subject. They stopped and looked around;
even Sidney stopped sniffing and lifted his snout from the
snow. But all they saw was a tufted titmouse hopping between
two boughs.
They hadn’t gone five steps when another voice tweeted,
“Don’t forget,” this time from their right, clear and bright.
Startled, they turned their heads. They saw a lone red cardinal
perched on a slim, bare branch of a beech tree, his red puffed
feathers in stark contrast against the white snow.
As the three children looked at each other questioningly,
they heard about a dozen high-pitched voices cheeping
repeatedly, “Don’t forget,” right above them. Looking up, they
saw a flock of black-capped chickadees fluttering in circles
before flying away, while three woodpeckers drummed along in
time on a hollow sugar maple.
They stood in silence. “Awesome,” Leo laughed, breaking
the silence. “Sounded to me like the birds were singing don’t
forget.”
They nodded and waited in silence, but heard nothing
more. “Let’s go on,” Julie proposed, looking puzzled. Annabel
peered to the left and right, as if she were trying to locate the
13
true source of the voice. Was somebody hiding between the

trees?
The path led them to the lake, which was frozen over. They
stopped and looked across to Lion’s Head, the island in the
middle of the lake. Snow had gathered on its head, making its
mighty mane appear even grander.
“Let’s walk over to it,” Leo suggested.
“Will the ice hold?” Annabel wondered.
Julie bent down and knocked the ice. “Sounds pretty solid
to me.” She stood back up. “Yeah, let’s do it.” Tentatively they
stepped onto the ice, pulling Annabel onto the lake.
“Oh, this is fun. The sled is so much easier to pull on the
ice,” said Leo. He scurried and scampered along, pulling hard
on the sled as he ran.
“Hey, not so fast,” Annabel shouted, gripping the sled
tightly and laughing as she slid along, the thin blanket of snow
scattering into the air. Sidney barked and jumped excitedly
beside them.
“Slow down,” Julie warned. At that moment, Leo slid and
fell down hard, onto his behind. The ice cracked, echoing
across the lake. “Careful,” said Julie, dropping to her knees
in fright. As they waited, they heard the ice below them creak
and groan.
14
2 { Thus Spoke the Ice
As soon as Leo attempted to get up, the ice cracked again.

“Stop,” Julie yelled frantically. “Lie down flat and crawl slowly,
slowly back to the bank.”
“But I need to get Annabel.” She had slid into the middle
of the lake. He tried to crawl closer to her, but the nearer he
came the more the ice protested.
“You’ll crack the ice if you come any closer. You’re too
heavy, and the ice is too thin here.” Annabel’s voice quivered.
She lay as flat as possible in the sled and Leo could see only her
black extensions laced with beads falling over the edge of the
sled. “Go back before we both land in the water.”
“Hang in there,” Julie called over. “I’ll try from this side.”
Julie crept cautiously toward her. “Throw me the rope.”
Annabel took the rope and threw it as best she could toward
Julie. But as Julie edged closer, the ice rebelled, grinding and
growling.
“You’ll crack the ice too,” Annabel exclaimed nervously. All
at once, and to everybody’s surprise, Sidney ran up, grabbed
the rope with his teeth, and steadily began dragging the sled
to safety.
“Good boy, Sidney,” Leo shouted. Sidney pulled the sled
while Julie and Leo inched toward the shore, each movement
releasing a crack, grunt or pop from the ice. Finally, they made
it to safety, and it felt good to feel the firm ground beneath
their feet again. Leo rummaged in the depths of one of his
many pockets for a dog treat and gave it to Sidney. “You’re the
best dog ever, and you really deserve this cookie.” Leo patted
Sidney between his ears and rubbed the bony knob on his head.
15
Suddenly, a large branch from a pine tree, heavy with snow,

snapped and fell onto the ice with a terrific thud. It sounded as if
the breaking branch was bellowing, “To-day!” The huge tree limb
broke through the ice and was submerged, while the ice barked
and snarled, “Remember, remember, remember…” It was repeated
from every corner of the lake, like a drone. It came from beneath
the ice, each crack like a mouth, a hundred mouths, muttering,
“Remember, remember…” The children froze—out of fear, not cold.
A tone of foreboding sounded through the ice’s sharp voices.
All of a sudden, it did not feel like a fun first day of vacation
anymore. At last, silence was restored. Snow dust drifted
down, settling on Leo’s hat and the girls’ furry hoods. Sidney,
untroubled by the falling branch or the voices of the ice, shook
himself vigorously, sending mini snow flurries into their faces.
“Okay, time to go home,” Leo stated. “I’m really hungry.
Julie, how about you make us some waffles?”
“Or I could make some popovers,” Annabel suggested.
“Oh, I love your popovers,” Julie responded, trying to
sound upbeat.
“Me too.” Leo pulled the sled a bit too abruptly up the
embankment toward the path, which almost caused Annabel
to topple from it.
“Hey, watch it, boy.”
“Sorry. But the idea of popovers got me all excited.” Sidney
agreed, pulling Julie along in anticipation of something tasty.
16
3 { They Remember
“I wonder what we’re supposed to remember,” Julie mused

aloud, just before they crossed the road.
“So you heard it, too?” Leo said, thinking only he’d
imagined the voices.
“Loud and clear. There was no mistaking the words,”
Annabel confirmed. “But what are we supposed to remember?”
A gust of wind blew puffy snow off a parked van, stinging their
faces, while a second squall sighed.
Coming to the front steps of the brownstone apartment
building where they lived—first floor Annabel and her aunt;
top floor Julie, Leo, and their parents, with Sidney, the dog—
they helped Annabel up and handed her crutches to her.
Together they climbed the stairs. “My legs have been hurting
again, lately,” Annabel admitted. “For a while they were so
much better.”
“I’m sorry to hear that,” Julie said, holding the door open
for her. Leo patted her on the shoulder. In the hallway they met
Mr. Travers, a retired bus driver, carrying a toolbox.
“Good morning, little munchkins. Enjoying the snow?”
“Yes, Mr. Travers,” they answered in chorus.
“What’cha fixing now?” Leo asked, fascinated as always by
Mr. Travers’s ability to fix anything.
“Well, today it’s the furnace. It broke down this morning,
and I’d better get it fixed before the whole building cools
down. We wouldn’t want to have a cold solstice now, would
we? Cheerio, munchkins,” he said and walked off whistling,
down to the basement.
As soon as he was out of earshot, Julie said, “I know exactly
what we’re supposed to remember.”
17
“What?” Leo and Annabel asked.

“I’ll tell you, but first, let’s get inside and warm up. And
Leo, go tell Mom we’re eating popovers at Annabel’s.” Leo
leaned the red sled against the wall and dashed upstairs while
Julie helped Annabel to her apartment.
Three minutes later, Leo was back, yelling as he entered,
“So what should we not forget?”
“The solstice. That’s what,” Julie said while greasing the
popover pans with softened butter. “As soon as Mr. Travers
mentioned the solstice, I remembered.”
“Of course.” It suddenly dawned on Leo and Annabel.
“Tomorrow is the solstice, the shortest day of the year.”
“How could we forget our invitation to the 77th Earth
Council under the Bricanus Mountains?” Annabel cried,
whisking the flower, eggs, and milk together. “We really should
have remembered that.” She repeated the words on the dwarfs’
invitation that she’d memorized by heart: “Be ready to sail on
the eve of the winter solstice.” Suddenly, she stopped and lifted
the eggbeater into the air. “That’s tonight!” And with that
statement, Annabel took a pinch of salt, threw it into the
batter, and whisked so furiously that her shiny dark skin was
soon speckled with yellow.
None of them dared say anything, each one struck by a
pang of guilt. Understandably, after their many adventures
that had ended in the banishing of the Binagatorials from the
sewers, they’d had enough of sailing in Swan Boat. Meanwhile,
school life had taken over, and the boat in the bottle remained
untouched on the windowsill next to the crystal from Lost
Cave. By and by, the memories had faded, even those of Curly
Beard, Grilpy, and Wilamelee. Julie, Annabel, and Leo felt an
18
acute sense of shame. Now it all flooded back to them. They

knew what had they had to do.
With hardly a word, they put the popovers in the oven and
waited for them to rise, to pop. A few minutes later, as they
enjoyed one popover after another topped with whipped cream
and raspberry jam, Julie finally said what needed to be said:
“We all know what it means, right? We have to leave tonight.”
“No, you will have to leave earlier than that.” A commanding
voice came from above and behind them. “In fact, within the
hour.” They looked up and saw Curly Beard on the topmost
kitchen shelf, leaning against an old-fashioned coffee grinder
and looking down at them. He was wearing thick brown furs,
black leather boots, and a green woolen scarf that covered most
of his beard. Slung across his shoulders was a short lethal-
looking axe. A shiny brass bugle hung from his belt. “Ready
when you are, and when you are ready, we will go far.”
19
4 { Preparing to Set Sail
“Curly Beard!” they shouted in happy harmony.

“Curly Beard, it is.” He smiled. “Alas, it took you a while to
remember, even though it is December. I had to get the birds
and the ice to prod your memories.” The children still felt
ashamed. How could it have slipped our minds?
“Did you say we have to leave within the hour?” Julie asked,
wondering whether she’d heard correctly.
“I did indeed, so hurry and gather what you need.” He
stood up and stepped forward. “Make sure you bring the three
golden coins and your three hats that King Brathnar gave you.”
“How long are we going for?” Annabel asked, feeling a
twinge of fear at the prospect of going on another trip. Memories
of the last adventure flashed up.
“That all depends, but definitely less than a single stretch
of the sun through the day and longer than a moon’s cycle
through the night.” Curly Beard jumped down onto the closet,
and hopped from one shelf to another until he stood in the
center of the round kitchen table, looking up at them.
“But we can’t be gone for so long. Even a whole day will
make our parents worried,” Leo said, pushing his hair off his
forehead.
“Ah, they won’t notice a thing because we’ll be going
through the Great Gates of the Carved Dome.”
“What’s that, and how’s that going to change anything?”
Curly Beard smiled. “By my axe, just relax. You humans and
your nonstop questions! When will you begin to trust? In that
way, you haven’t changed. And I haven’t the time to explain
everything. Besides, the more I answer, the more you’ll ask.
No! No time to lose, but more to win. Simply heed my words:
20
When entering our realm through the Dome, you’ll return betimes to
your home.” As he sang this runic rhyme, it worked its spell and
eased their qualms.
Curly Beard sniffed the last popover. “Smells good. Now
that you’ve had your fill, go get Swan Boat, hats and coins, and
hurry back in the twirl of two trolls dancing a tango…,” and he
danced five staccato steps in quick succession, “…while I help
Annabel clean up and collect her clothes.”
Julie and Leo raced upstairs, with Sidney close behind.
Mr. and Mrs. Temple sat in the kitchen, sipping coffee and
eating fresh croissants from the corner store. “Looks like you’ve
already had a fun morning in the park. How about that snow?
Pretty cool,” Mr. Temple said, throwing Sidney the horn of his
croissant, which the fast-growing puppy caught with a thwack
of his slobbery muzzle.
“Yup, and we’re going out again,” Julie responded, trying
to sound as casual as possible. “We’re just going to get a few
things from our room. Then we’ll go back downstairs to play
with Annabel again.” Julie and Leo scampered off.
“You have fun on your first day of vacation.” Mr. Temple
daubed a dollop of raspberry jam on his croissant.
“Be sure to be back for dinner,” Mrs. Temple added.
“Will do,” Julie replied. Leo carefully pocketed Swan Boat
in his cargo pants, while Julie took her school backpack and
emptied all the books on the bed. “We can put some spare
clothes and stuff in here. We need only one backpack between
the three of us.” They rummaged through their drawers, adding
only an extra sweater for each of them.
“I’m ready.” Leo’s side pockets bulged with little knickknacks
that he considered essential.
21
“Do you have your hat from King Brathnar?” Julie reminded
Leo.
“Oh, I almost forgot,” said Leo. He opened the drawer
again and groped underneath boxers and t-shirts for the flat
hat with the two tassels, and pushed it into the same pocket as
the boat.
“Okay, ready.” Julie nodded, and turned to go. Sidney, of
course, wanted to come along, wagging his tale and pawing
Leo’s leg. “No,” Julie ordered a bit too harshly. Sidney sat
down, swallowed, cocked his head, and looked up at them with
sad, droopy eyes. “Maybe some other time, okay?” She fondled
his ears.
Leo also felt sorry for him. He took a bouncy ball from
his pocket and threw it into the living room, shouting, “Fetch,
Sidney, fetch.” As soon as Sidney hustled after the ball, they
escaped through the front door. “Bye, Mom, Dad—see you
later.” The door slammed shut and they hopped down the
stairs.
They found Annabel and Curly Beard waiting in the
kitchen, spotlessly cleaned, with a brown paper bag and flask
on the table. “You’ve made sandwiches again,” Leo noted.
“Yummy.”
“Good to go?” Curly Beard asked, though it sounded more
like a command. The children nodded. “Excellent!” he said
and sang a little march: “So on that note, take out the boat,
because we’re ready now to float.”
Leo pulled out the bottle with Swan Boat inside, uncorked
it, and said, “Come out to us again, dear Boat.” Immediately
the mast and sail folded back against the deck, and the boat
slipped smoothly through the bottleneck. Hovering in front of
them, it shook itself so that the rigging jingled and it glowed,
22
happy to leave its glass harbor and go off sailing again after
all these months. Leo corked the bottle and put it back in his
pocket. “Here we go again!”
The children held hands, smiled at one another, breathed
deeply, and said in chorus, “On the boat.” At once, they found
themselves on the boat’s tiny deck. They’d shrunk and the
kitchen around them now appeared enormous.
Curly Beard had already boarded and taken his seat at the
tiller. “Take your seats, hold on tight, for here we go, not too
fast and not too slow.” The dwarf steered the boat into the
living room, straight for the unused fireplace. They entered the
hearth’s dark, cold mouth and sailed up the sooty chimney.
23
5 { Through the Great Gates of the

Carved Dome
They shot out of the red brick chimney, flying into the
falling snow. “Leo, shut the ethmaroll,” Julie shouted, blinking
against the surge of snowflakes that settled on them like large
cotton balls. Leo didn’t have to be told twice. He’d already
pulled the lever next to the rudder beside Curly Beard. At
once, the smooth transparent cover slid into place, shielding
them from the cold and snow. Looking down, they saw that the
roads were mostly empty, except for the snowplows clearing the
streets. A few children had gathered in the park to sled down
the hill on the far side of the lake.
As they approached downtown, they could see that the
pavements were congested, as usual, with people shopping
and going to work, though hardly any cars braved the streets.
They sailed on leisurely between the skyscrapers. Julie watched
ice skaters spinning, jumping, dancing, chasing, racing, and
pirouetting in the outdoor rink, while Leo counted taxis, and
Annabel wondered if her missing brother was somewhere in
one of the buildings below.
They expected to go straight up north to the Bricanus
Mountains, but Curly Beard steered due west. They wondered
why, though none of them asked. Soon the city and suburbs were
left behind. Snow continued to fall thick and fast. Occasionally
they could make out a river, looking like a black ribbon curving
through the white valleys and fields below them, or a village
with smoke rising from the chimneys and dim yellow lights
shining from the windows.
As they sailed along, Curly Beard hummed softly, and the
children began to feel drowsy. Before long they drifted off into
24
a light sleep. Julie’s head rested against the smooth ethmaroll,

while Annabel leaned against Julie’s back. Leo curled up on the
narrow bench, his head on Annabel’s lap, her dark brown arm
with the silver bracelet around his shoulder. Curly Beard smiled
and started singing in the ancient tongue of the Issimlarooth,
the northern dwarfs, descendants of the Kultayuga dwarfs who
traced their heritage all the way back to the Kultayugom Age.
It was a song often sung to young dwarfs about to set out into
the unknown, a song of courage, strength, and determination.
Julie woke up with the bright sun shining in her face. She
blinked and looked around, wondering what had happened to
the snow. Suddenly, she let out a shriek, which startled Leo and
Annabel. They sat up, blinked and yawned. “What’s wrong?”
Leo asked sleepily.
Julie pointed straight ahead, beyond the boat’s beautiful
swan figurehead. “Look!” Leo and Annabel gasped at the sight.
By now, they were sailing high above the snow clouds, the deep
blue sky above them. It’s what they saw in front of them that
caused alarm. Dead ahead was an enormous gray skull perched
on a pedestal of white clouds. Colossal eye sockets stared
straight at them. “Tell me we’re not going there. It’s ghastly!”
Julie cried. As they approached, the bony jaw slowly opened.
“No choice,” Curly Beard replied and picked up speed.
“That’s Skull Mountain.”
“It’s so ugly,” Annabel whispered. “I don’t like to look at
it.” Leo took her hand and squeezed it comfortingly. He didn’t
say a word, but felt afraid. By now the jawbone had opened
wide and they sailed straight toward the dark crater, fenced by
teeth the size of skyscrapers.
“Welcome to the first of the Great Gates of the Carved
Dome,” Curly Beard chanted, as complete darkness devoured
25
the boat. But their eyes quickly adjusted, and to their surprise
they saw a second giant head rising up within the vast dome of
the skull. At once, their fear faded as they beheld the strange
and extraordinary beauty of a woman’s visage in front of them.
The huge woman’s hair was long, wavy and deep green,
falling thickly over her shoulders like dense grass, some long
sleek strands curling across her forehead. Even her petal-
smooth skin had a light green tinge. Her eyes were fresh purple
pools, glistening through the darkness; her gaze was fixed on
the distance, through the skull’s enormous eye sockets. In the
corners of her large full lips, like fleshy amaryllis petals, lingered
a faint smile. Her slender long nose, like a noble palm tree, gave
her features dignity. “She’s so beautiful,” Annabel whispered,
her shiny eyes peering up at this majestic countenance. The
others nodded.
Curly Beard steered the boat straight toward her nose, and
before they quite realized it, they were flying up through her
left nostril, once more engulfed in darkness. Seconds later,
they entered yet another great chamber within the head of the
beautiful lady in green. This time they met with an immense
horse’s head. Though much smaller than the previous heads, it
was still bigger than the largest skyscraper in the city.
“It’s the most elegant horse’s head I’ve ever seen!” Julie
exclaimed. She loved horses. “A chestnut, like I’ve always
wanted.” Its bulging dark sparkling eyes looked down at them,
and its two pricked ears—both reddish, touched with a streak of
white—faced forward with interest. Curly Beard aimed the boat
for the ears, and they entered darkness a third time.
They emerged into a great dome supported by five arches,
each one with a large hole in the center that let in the light.
“We can now fly out of the Great Gates of the Carved Dome,”
26
Curly Beard said festively, as they ascended toward the first of

the round holes.
“It’s like an oculus,” Julie said. “I learned about it in school
when we studied ancient Rome. There’s this really old building
in Rome called the Pantheon that has one.”
As soon as they’d passed through the first opening, another
larger oculus appeared at the center of the green dome, followed
by an even bigger dome and oculus. Passing through this
last massive opening, they were back in the bright sunshine.
Looking down, they noticed that they’d emerged from the top
of the skull.
“We’ve made it through the Great Gates of the Carved
Dome,” Curly Beard said with enthusiasm. Wondering what
time it was, Leo took out the silver and gold pocket watch he’d
received from his grandfather: 5:13 p.m. it read. As the three
children gazed down at Skull Mountain, it slowly evaporated,
only large puffy clouds remaining in its place.
“What happened?” Leo asked. “I thought they were
supposed to be carved.”
“And so they were,” Curly Beard replied. “Carved out of
vapor by my good friends the sylphs—or the Erasilamins—as we
call them. Instead of stone or wood, the Erasilamins carved
these three grand heads out of clouds.” Curly Beard smiled
mysteriously. “Having gone through the Great Gates, you
are now ready to go to the Bricanus Mountains to see King
Brathnar, who is eagerly awaiting you.”
27
6 { To the Bricanus Mountains
“Food, anybody?” Annabel asked, grabbing the brown

paper bag from under the bench.
“Always,” said Leo, who thought that Annabel’s sandwiches
were the best. “It seems like forever since we sailed on Swan
Boat. Well, it sure makes me hungry.” He grabbed a peanut
butter and jelly sandwich and bit off a huge chunk.
“Do you always have to gobble your food down like that?”
Julie scolded, as she chose a cheese and tomato sandwich,
looking at it appreciatively before taking a bite.
“The first bite is the best,” Leo responded and chomped
away at his sandwich.
“And don’t talk while chewing. You got stuff all over me.
Gross!”
“Sorry, Sis,” and he took three small bites in quick
succession. Julie just rolled her eyes. Curly Beard smiled,
leaned back against the railing, and took out his pipe, filling
it with sweet-smelling herbs before igniting it with two drops
from a vial. Once again, the children were enchanted by the
colors of the vapor, the pleasant aromas of flowers and fruit,
and the shapes that formed in the air, in this case, a dancing
bear, a locomotive with five wagons, and a clown juggling six
bowling pins.
“Why exactly does King Brathnar want to see us?” Annabel
wanted to know, while pouring hot chocolate from the thermos
for Leo and Julie.
“And why on the eve of the winter solstice?” Julie asked,
blowing over the hot chocolate to cool it down.
“There you go again—questions, questions.” Curly Beard
laughed, puffing into the faces of the children three panda
28
bears, which dissolved as soon as they touched their noses. “It’s

an honor that he invited you to the festival. It starts off the
Celebration of the Sixteen Luminous Sun Nights,” he said and
puffed tiny beach balls that exploded like fireworks.
“Oh, that was amazing!” Leo yelled in delight, and Annabel
clapped her hands.
“But why does he want us there?” Julie continued, not
letting up.
“Because during these sixteen nights and days, we prepare
for the coming year and all that needs to be achieved by us
on this Earth. We’re not the only ones preparing. Queen
Marquellamoosh, the honorable Lady of the Waters, will also
be having her own festivities, as will the High One—remember
him?”
“Of course,” Julie responded. “He’s the Lord of the Winds
of the East, West, North, and South. The Wind King! I’ll never
forget him.”
“Good, I’m glad to hear it. Indeed, they all have their feasts,
even the elusive Zeerfitz, the Fire Dragon, and his flaming host,
whom you have not met and maybe never will.” Curly Beard
paused, puffing thoughtfully on his pipe before continuing.
“But this year, our festivities, which are like seeds to the future,
are in danger.”
“In what way?” Leo looked worried, and even stopped
chewing.
“I will let King Brathnar decide how much he wants to tell
you. For now, just enjoy the rest of the ride with me by your
side.” Then Curly Beard pointed with the stem of his pipe at a
cloud that looked like a giraffe skiing down a mountain. “Look
down there!”
29
Enjoying their sandwiches and hot chocolate, the children

peered over the railing, enchanted by the shapes in the ever-
moving clouds. As they sailed farther north, the clouds
thinned. They could see more of the landscape below: forests,
hills, and rivers winding through the snow-covered valleys and
mountains. It was getting dark and streetlights lit up the villages
scattered about. For a moment, Julie thought she got a glimpse
of their old farmhouse at the foot of Puff Mountain, but then
a cloud passed by and she could not be sure.
30
7 { Guided by the Hawk
“We’ll need all the help we can get,” Curly Beard said, as
he directed the boat down to a large snow-covered clearing
in which a gnarled dead walnut tree stood, the twisted bare
boughs and countless branches appearing like the frozen limbs
of a furious giant. As they approached, they saw a solitary hawk
perched on the topmost twig. “And there is our first helper.”
No sooner had Curly Beard uttered these words than the
large bird spread its strong wings, rose with royal grandeur, and
flew toward the forest. An instant later, it disappeared between
the trees. “This is going to be tricky,” Curly Beard muttered,
putting his pipe back in his fur coat. “Hold on, we’re in for
some twists and turns,” he chuckled. “After him, you intrepid
vessel!”
Leo thought he saw the swan figurehead nod, but couldn’t
be sure because in that instant he was thrown back as Swan Boat
abruptly shot forward. The forest was dark, even though the
trees were bare. Gracefully, the boat zigzagged its way through
the trees. However, it didn’t feel quite so elegant in the boat,
and Annabel felt a bit queasy, especially when the boat nicked
some twigs and branches.
Fortunately, the obstacle course did not last long. Coming
out of the forest, the sharp-eyed hawk flew into a narrow ravine
that cut deeply through a mountain. Below them they could
see an old unused dirt road. The gully widened and merged
with others until they led into a massive canyon-sized pit.
“What’s this?” Annabel asked, not liking the look of this
desolate landscape.
“I think I know,” Leo yelled, with both dismay and delight.
“It’s an old quarry.”
31
“An abandoned mine land site, to be exact,” Julie added.

“Whatever, it’s spooky,” Leo retorted. Mine dumps of waste
rock covered the plateau on the far side of the mountain. A
yellow-green river ran through one of the gorges, into which
rills of muddy water drained from smaller pits that had filled
with filthy water. Rusty fuel barrels, hand cranks, train wagons,
bulldozers, trucks, and machinery, discarded tools, and scrap
metal littered the place. Decaying barracks, broken-down
chimneys, wrecked cranes, and corroding cogs and wheels were
scattered about. The elegant hawk flew straight for the biggest
mineshaft that looked like a black eye and was propped open
by rotting timber. Just before it settled on a rusty railing, it let
out a shrill cry that echoed eerily across the sheer cliffs of the
mountain. Next to the hawk was a corroded metal plate that
read, “DANGER, DO NOT ENTER.”
Curly Beard waved and shouted words of thanks to the
hawk. At once, the royal bird soared into the air and bade
farewell with another resounding cry that echoed off the
wounded mountainsides.
“Why are we here?” Annabel whispered, not liking the
gloomy surroundings one tiny bit. “I thought we were going to
a festive occasion with King Brathnar.”
“We are, but I am taking every precaution to ensure your
safe arrival. Nobody must know of your coming. Nobody must
even get a glimpse of you. It certainly stirred things up when
you came last time.” Curly Beard stroked his long beard. “Since
then, the Granapods have attacked us many times to punish us
for sheltering you. But they were sneaky, attacking or trapping
dwarfs when they were alone or in twos or threes. And that’s
not all. The Granapods have let our other enemies know that
you will be coming again. Now there are guards and spies at all
32
the entrances to our realm. Sadly, there are many vile creatures,
apart from the Granapods, who wish us harm. This means, of
course, that they are also the enemies of all you humans.”
“Why?” Annabel wanted to know, chilled by what she’d
heard.
“Simple! They want power. And they especially want to
control humans, destroy their dominance, and take away their
freedom. That way they can control Earth, which would enslave
not only the dwarfs, but also Queen Marquellamoosh and the
Erasilamins, as well as the others—known to you as the fairy
folk—all the way up to the High One, who rules and guides the
winds. We’d all be under their hateful dominion.” Curly Beard
paused, looking grim. “And we can’t allow that to happen.”
“I understand that, but I still don’t get why we are here,”
Julie said.
“Because there are some entrances into Earth’s inner realm
that they don’t know about, or places they’d never think we
would use. This abandoned coal mine is one of them. And that’s
why we need help. The hawk, who is one of our messengers on
Earth’s surface, not only showed us the way, but the creatures
who are our enemies cannot meet the piercing gaze of a hawk,
forcing them to look away. It was an extra precaution.”
At that moment, hundreds of bats shot out of the black
mineshaft and surrounded the boat.
33
8 { Into the Mineshaft
The children shrieked in fright at the sudden attack. “No

need to fear. They mean no harm,” Curly Beard assured them.
“They heard the hawk’s call and came to help. They too are our
guides.”
While circling the boat, the largest bat flew close to the
ethmaroll and appeared to be talking to Curly Beard, though
the children couldn’t hear a sound. The dwarf nodded and
made distinct signs with his hands. Once more, the bat, with
great urgency, seemed to say something, though they still
couldn’t hear anything. Curly Beard nodded again more slowly.
He stroked his long beard for a few seconds and followed with a
decisive wave of his hand toward the dark and bleak entrance.
At once, the large bat rejoined the circling colony, and back
into the tunnel they flew. “We’re going after them, so hold
tight!” Curly Beard steered the boat beyond the tumbledown
barricade and, at once, darkness swallowed them up.
After a few seconds, the boat gave off its own dim light
and the children could see the coal tunnel, slanting downward,
deep into the mountain. They had to dodge between old mine
carts—some mangled, others derailed and tipped over, a few
pushed to the side, and several still filled with coal.
At length, Julie asked Curly Beard, “What did the bat tell
you?” By his stern look, it was clear he was in no mood to reply.
“And why couldn’t we hear what the bat was saying?” Leo
wanted to know.
“Well, that’s easy,” Julie said. “Bats have such high voices
that human ears can’t pick up the vibrations.”
“All the things you know!” Annabel said, impressed.
34
“Well, it pays to pay attention in school.” Julie cleared her

throat. “But I still want to know what the bat told you, Curly
Beard,” she insisted.
“I didn’t want to tell you, but I suppose you have the right
to know.” Without taking his eyes off the tunnel, Curly Beard
continued. “The bat, whom I have known for many years, is
called Kangshmoot. He warned me of the dangers of entering
this forsaken coal mine. But, as I explained to him, it is the
only way to get to King Brathnar’s castle in time and without
being seen. As I said before, the other entrances have spies who
are lying in wait for your coming, which they want to prevent
at all costs.”
“But what specifically did the bat say?” Julie could be very
persistent. Leo called it stubborn. “Something bad, yes?”
“Kangshmoot let me know of the risks involved.” Noting
the anxious look on the children’s faces, he added, “But I am
aware of the perils. I assure you that I will do my utmost to get
us safely through this mine, and in good time.”
“Watch out!” Annabel yelled. Right in front of them, some
decaying planks and structural timber had fallen across the
tunnel, barring their way. Curly Beard deftly yanked the tiller
to one side and they narrowly missed one of the slanted and
cracked prop pillars, but not without the boat’s first scratching
against an old protruding nail, which caused a little spark.
Leo fell off the bench, but he giggled and immediately got
up, saying, “This is fun!”
“As you can see, this old mine is in danger of collapsing,”
explained Curly Beard. “That’s what Kangshmoot warned
me about. Unfortunately, we’ll have to pass through shafts
where even the bats never dare to go. If we brush up against
any loose timber, as we almost did, the surrounding area could
35
collapse.” As he said that, Curly Beard almost rammed into a

pile of rubble that dropped from behind some stacked planks.
Again the boat nicked some rocks, releasing more sparks. “We
have no other option; we must go through here.” Curly Beard
looked straight ahead and his eyes glinted. Julie knew better
than to ask any more questions this time.
The children, on their first journey to King Brathnar, had
enjoyed passing through the wondrous Great Caves; but now
they had the same heavy feeling in the pit of their stomachs
they’d had when they’d sailed through the sewers under the
city. This trip to the Bricanus Mountains was not turning out
as they’d imagined.
The tunnel, with its increasing twists and turns, had become
narrow, and the bats in their flight stirred up thick, decades-
old coal dust that had settled on the timber, the ground, and
toppled roof beams. As they sped down deep into the mountain,
a bright flash suddenly blinded them, followed immediately by
a loud bang, the force of which almost hurled the boat into the
rocky wall. They looked over their shoulders and saw a cloud of
flames rushing along the tunnel right toward them!
36
9 { Follow Kangshmoot
At a junction of the many shafts, the colony of bats flew one

way and Kangshmoot flew the other. “Follow Kangshmoot!”
Curly Beard shouted to the boat. The swell of flames divided
and chased along both tunnels. Looking like massive red sails
billowing in the wind, the flames roared behind them.
“The shaft is collapsing!” Julie yelled above the mounting
rumble. Kangshmoot turned into a side tunnel, but the swift
flames followed. As the earth trembled, more rubble dropped
from above. Behind them beams and timber crumpled beneath
the toppling rocks as the blast-waves of flames thrust forward,
undeterred.
The twisty tunnel made it impossible to go any faster.
Annabel sank to the floor and hugged the mast tightly. Leo
no longer thought it was fun and looked fearfully at the giant
fist of fire that was almost upon them. “The tunnel’s coming
to a dead end!” Julie screamed in exasperation. “What are we
going to do?” There was no side tunnel to veer into. “We can’t
go on.”
“Not on, but down. Don’t frown,” shouted Curly Beard as
Kangshmoot disappeared into a vertical shaft and he let the
boat drop down after the courageous bat. They plunged into
the depths. Looking up, they saw the tongue of flames curling
after them, licking the sides of the shaft, stopped just short of
the boat due to the lack of air. The red flames above them grew
smaller and smaller as the boat plummeted into the depths. It
took their breath away, and all three of them pressed their eyes
shut, holding as tightly as possible to the straps, bench and
mast. They kept on free-falling, on and on. Julie felt nauseous,
37
and Leo counted the seconds, though once he reached one

hundred, he stopped. Annabel lost all sense of space and time.
Just when they thought they could bear it no longer, the
boat slowed down and eventually came to a stop. None of
them dared utter a word, waiting for what would happen next.
The boat hovered in complete silence. But only for a moment,
because from above they heard a growl that quickly became a
roar. Kangshmoot struck the boat’s hull hard with his leathery
wings before flying off. “Ah, no time to rest,” Curly Beard
hollered and followed Kangshmoot hastily along the narrow
tunnel.
An instant later, the vertical shaft through which they’d
dropped collapsed in a heap of rocks and dust. “Made it!”
Curly Beard said and smiled as the boat rounded a corner into
a larger chamber that was filled with buckets of coal, picks and
shovels, even some broken helmets, rusty flashlights, tattered
vests, and worn-out boots. “And not a moment too soon.”
In the center of the chamber lay a bulky drill with a broken
drill bit. Kangshmoot settled on the swan’s head, while Curly
Beard landed the boat smoothly next to the massive drill. The
boat gave off its calming light, and the children could relax
at last.
“What just happened?” Leo looked puzzled and stunned.
“Where did that fire come from so suddenly?” Annabel
asked, just as flummoxed. Julie, who usually had all the answers,
shrugged, and wiped the hair from her face, sighing deeply.
Now that they were, at least temporarily, safe, Curly Beard
could explain. “Explosions are common in old mines, especially
coal mines where fine particles of coal dust are easily ignited.
The fire was probably caused by a spark when we scraped
against the nail or from the falling rubble. There are poisonous
38
gases that leak through these mines; once the gases and dust
exploded, it caused the cave-in.” They sat in silence, the buzz
and echo of multiple explosions still ringing in their ears.
“Well, one thing’s for sure,” Julie finally concluded. “We
can’t return through these mines. We’ll have to find another
way to get back home, which won’t be easy if they’re all guarded
by Granapods or other monsters.” Julie looked over at Curly
Beard, who was pulling his beard and nodding.
“Not to worry, you won’t be sorry. And on another day,
you’ll find a way,” he purred comfortingly, which immediately
put them at ease. “But we’re not there yet, so let’s get set. Let’s
move on, and from here be gone.” The little rhyme made
Annabel laugh. And it made Kangshmoot fly from his perch
and point his wing down a hole next to the broken drill bit.
Curly Beard acknowledged Kangshmoot with a salute, and
opened the ethmaroll.
The children were surprised by how cool and fresh the air
was. “The air comes from the hole in the ground, through
which we have to go,” Curly Beard explained, knowing what
they thought. It no longer surprised them that he could
answer their questions before they asked them or even thought
of them. Meanwhile, Curly Beard took out some dried fruit
and tossed it over to Kangshmoot, who caught it between his
sharp teeth. “It’s a delicacy, found only in our realm. A token
of our appreciation.” He shut the ethmaroll and pushed the
tiller down to reduce the boat’s size. They all waved goodbye to
Kangshmoot before descending the narrow drill shaft. Again,
they were engulfed by darkness.
After only a couple of minutes, they were delighted and
somewhat surprised to find the shaft opening into a light-filled
cave with a glistening floor. They landed next to the other part
39
of the broken drill bit. “In the miners’ attempt to discover

how far down the coal went, the drill hit against this hard
stone, which immediately broke the drill bit. No drill would
be powerful enough to get through this stone.” Curly Beard
chuckled.
Strangely, the children felt safe again, but they wondered
what kind of stone they’d landed on. It looked like it could
be crystal, though it was smooth and rounded like the gentle
swells of a peaceful ocean. And where did the light come
from? Could it come from beneath the stone? Looking down,
they thought they saw slight movement. “You’ll find out in
a moment,” Curly Beard said, his eyes twinkling. He pulled
up the tiller and the boat grew in size again, which made the
children feel better.
Curly Beard steered the boat slowly along the glistening
stone floor, while Julie opened up the ethmaroll. Excitedly,
they pointed to little colorful clusters of gemstones growing
like flowers out of the floor. They marveled at the beauty,
especially after the gloomy and ugly old mine. But it was
nothing compared to what they saw when they sailed toward
the spiral edge of the large gap in the smooth floor.
40
10 { Through the Ear
“Oh, it looks like a large ear,” Annabel observed as the

boat slowly approached the opening. The others laughed and
agreed, admiring the beautiful shape of the ear carved into the
glistening stone floor, streaked through with soft colors. The
boat hovered right above the hole. They couldn’t quite make
out what was on the other side since the ear’s hole spiraled
through the glassy milky stone. A fresh wind blew up through
the funnel, ruffling their hair as they sat in the boat and looked
down over the railings.
“Where does it lead?” Leo wondered.
“You’ll find out in a moment,” Curly Beard answered, “but
first…” and he jumped onto the roof of the boat’s cabin, took
out his bugle and began to play. To their surprise, he played
one long note, starting off very softly and only gradually getting
louder, adding a little trill at the end of it, before playing a
second note. Again, he started softly and ended in a trill, which
sounded like the chirp of a bird. While playing, he swayed and
turned to the four directions. The clear tones echoed off the
cave walls and filtered through the opening below them. After
the third drawn-out note and trill, he put away his shiny bronze
bugle. “Now they know we’re coming,” he explained and sat
down cross-legged on the cabin’s roof. “Steer her through the
canal, Leo.”
Leo was glad for the opportunity to sail the boat and took
hold of the tiller. Carefully, he navigated the boat down and
through the spiral cone, curving round until the canal opened
up to reveal a vast and magnificent landscape spreading out
below them. For some seconds, they had to blink their eyes at
the sudden brightness. Wisps of clouds sailed beneath them.
41
“I know where we are!” Julie cried and smiled.

“Where?” Annabel asked, rubbing her eyes, still trying to
adapt to the light.
“We’re in King’s Valley. Look, there’s the Crater Lake of
Liquid Light,” and she pointed to her right, getting excited.
“You’re right. And there’s King Brathnar’s castle.”
“It all looks very small from up here,” Leo noted, squinting
his eyes.
“Yes, indeed. You have just entered King’s Valley through
the crystal firmament. Furthermore, you have entered through
one of its many ears,” pointed out Curly Beard.
“What do you mean ‘many ears’?” Julie inquired.
Curly Beard shifted and let his legs dangle over the side of
the cabin roof. “This large realm beneath the earth has many
ears, both above and below, so that we can listen to what is
going on in our precious Earth’s crust. Through these ears, we
can hear many things. Over the last few years, we have heard
much that is disturbing. It’s one of the reasons you are here.
What we’ve heard affects you humans as much as it does us.”
“So the ears are like microphones, set up all over the place,
right?” Leo concluded.
“You could say that, though it’s a rather crude comparison.
These ears were carved eons ago in the ancient Palta-Yugom
Age, when you humans got your present physical form. These
ears pick up not only sounds, but also the thoughts, feelings,
and goings-on of all creatures on Earth—visible and invisible.
Most are in harmony with us. But over the last few decades,
that has changed.”
Leo wanted to ask another question, but Curly Beard
jumped off the roof and closed the ethmaroll. “Enough. The
eyes of our enemies are as strong as our ears. We might still be
42
spotted, even from afar. I sense them penetrating the King’s

Valley from their hideouts. We’re safe here, but we must not
take any chances. Sorry, Leo, but it’s best I take over again.”
Curly Beard sat down next to Leo. “The preparations for the
ceremony are almost complete, and we don’t want to be late.
Hold on. We need to be speedy.” He grabbed the tiller and
said, “Swan Boat, take us to King Brathnar’s castle.”
The boat jiggled its riggings and swooped down like an
eagle, with Leo hollering in delight.
43
part two
Attending the 77th Earth Council
11 { King Brathnar’s Hall
From high above King’s Valley they sailed down rapidly,

straight for King Brathnar’s castle. It appeared even more
splendid than they remembered. The gardens that flourished
on each of the seven levels of the tiered edifice were lush and
colorful, even from a distance. Seven sturdy and massive crystal
pillars rose out of the mountain and supported the castle.
Glistening and shimmering, each one a different color, their
light reflected in the fountains, ponds, and waterfalls that
were dotted all over the castle’s gardens. From high above, the
castle appeared to have many more spirals, towers, turrets, and
fortifications than they remembered.
Sun River shone gently as it meandered through the rolling
valley. On the far side, they saw the spectacular Crater Lake
with its vivid vapors rising slowly into the air. With a shudder,
they recalled the narrow bridge across the lake, along which they
had to walk on their first visit, surrounded by the thick swirling
mists and the nightmarish images that had attacked them.
They also saw the rocky cliffs and ledge, high above, on which
they’d stood after coming out of the underground cavern. They
spotted the steep stairs leading down to the terrain of boulders
through which they’d hurried to escape the Granapods.
44
Part 2 » Attending the 77th Earth Council
Leo felt a stab of pain in his side where he’d been stung
by one of the ghastly Granapods. He felt nauseous at the very
thought of having almost died in the belly of the terrible boulder
monster. But it was a fleeting memory, replaced immediately
by the vision of the beauty around them.
Curly Beard steered the boat to the third level of the castle,
next to a lily pond that was sunk into the marble floor between
two tall silver-barked trees with long, droopy branches, each
of which had only two large heart-shaped leaves that fluttered
mildly in the breeze like flags. The small fountain in the center
of the pond burbled happily. Leo pulled back the ethmaroll.
Eager to get out, they held hands and sang, “Out of the boat.”
At once, they stood on solid ground again. Leo took the
bottle from his pocket, uncorked it, and let the boat fly back
into its shell of glass. He rolled it in his square of soft fleece
and put it back into his pocket, which he buttoned shut as an
extra precaution.
“Follow me,” commanded Curly Beard. “Though we’ve
made good time, we cannot rest before meeting King Brathnar.
And remember, don’t speak until we’re spoken to.” Julie gave
Leo a stern stare, which meant did you hear that? Leo ignored
her. “For now, chew on this,” added Curly Beard as he handed
them each a little brown lump that he’d taken from his round
leather bag. “It will freshen you up, clear your minds, and help
you listen to King Brathnar’s words.”
The dwarf candy tasted both sweet and sour; the children
were amazed at its effect on their senses. It was like a refreshing
breeze blowing through their ears, eyes and noses, right into
their minds.
Curly Beard lifted Annabel onto his sturdy shoulders, and
off they went. The children thought they would go to the top
45
of the castle where they’d first met King Brathnar, but Curly
Beard led them through vaulted passages, courtyards, archways,
carpeted corridors, and pergolas, until they stood in front of
a great door. The door was fashioned from gray-green granite
slabs, carved with intricate geometric patterns and inlaid with
polished gemstones.
Curly Beard halted, grabbed his shiny bugle, and blew five
tones—long, short, long, short, long—to herald their arrival.
Three breaths later, they heard an answering call from behind
the solid granite door, except that the melody and rhythm were
in reverse. As the last note echoed through the hallways, the
two wings of the massive door swung open, revealing the biggest
hall they’d ever seen. Before them was a space illuminated with
dozens of ornate chandeliers that shone with hundreds of
flickering candles which were carved in the shape of animals or
plants. Lining the smooth, solid walls, torches sputtered.
The vast hall was empty except for one plump dwarf who
sat cross-legged on a pink marble mushroom right in front of
them, dressed all in green from cap to boot; even his belt was
green, albeit a darker shade. His long red beard was wrapped
around his neck like a scarf, the end of which was tucked neatly
into the top pocket of his tunic. His eyes were closed and he
had a wide smile on his face. “Well, what are you waiting for—
show me,” the dwarf said in a high, squeaky voice, holding
out his hand, his eyes still shut. The children looked puzzled.
Show what?
“The gold coins,” Curly Beard whispered. “They are your
entrance pass.”
Julie, Leo and, Annabel understood immediately, quickly
rifled through their pockets for the coins, and dropped them
into the bulbous dwarf’s cupped palm. He closed his smooth
46
hand around the coins, chuckling. “Feels truthful.” When he

opened his hand again, the children gasped. The coins had
disappeared. “Welcome and proceed,” the dwarf said in his
high-pitched, singsong voice.
As the small group started walking into the grand hall, the
dwarf held out his other arm and opened his fist, revealing the
three coins. “You’ll be needing them.” Surprised, the children
took the coins, which felt cool to the touch and gave them
a spurt of energy that rose right up into their heads, leaving
them even more fresh and alert than the dwarf candy they had
eaten earlier.
“Good, now keep walking,” Curly Beard whispered,
nudging them on. “And put the coins safely back into your
pockets.” As soon as they bypassed the guardian dwarf, who
hadn’t once opened his eyes, thousands of dwarfs appeared
from nowhere, wearing caps of all shapes and sizes—pointy,
droopy, poofy, long, short, thin, with and without tassels,
decorated, colorful, and plain.
The dwarfs parted as Curly Beard and the children walked
toward the raised throne. As soon as they came to a stop in
front of the regal throne, King Brathnar appeared, as if he had
been sitting there all along. As on their first audience with
him, he wore a long purple gown, across which was sewn a
crimson band of jewels. A large diamond stitched into his hat
sparkled in the candlelight, highlighting the flower of the seven
petals right above it, the Flora Hermeticus, the rare flower they
had found on the day of their departure from Honey Creek
Farm. Julie wondered again, as she had many times before, at
its significance.
King Brathnar stood up and turned to the expectant
throng. His face looked more riveted and furrowed than
47
before. The silence was intense. Slowly, he scanned the crowd,

his penetrating eyes changing color, depending on where he
looked. At last, he lifted his staff and struck a three-tiered
signal. His deep, sonorous voice filled the hall, “Kai-te-oon… lo-
kos!” The intonation was immediately repeated by all, with a
loud stomp of every dwarf foot.
“Welcome to the 77th Earth Council that traditionally
opens on the eve of the winter solstice to launch the
Celebration of the Sixteen Luminous Sun Nights. Never have
so many of us gathered together before. And never have we
had dwarfs represented from so many parts of the world. And
most certainly, we have never had any humans join us in this
opening ceremony,” said King Brathnar as he looked at the
children for the first time. “It is our greatest honor to host
you.”
Hearing these words of welcome, the dwarfs let out a sharp
shout of approval, followed by a deep hum while tapping their
chests with their fists. “Now please, take your seats,” said the
king as he motioned for the children and Curly Beard to sit on
the four chairs made from sturdy, knobby tree roots, to the left
and right of the throne. Curly Beard carefully lifted Annabel
off his shoulders and placed her gently onto one of the chairs,
while Julie and Leo sat down to the king’s left. Once seated,
King Brathnar intoned, “Let the ceremonies begin!”
48
12 { Festivities
The dwarfs stepped back to make a large space in the center

of the hall. Groups of dwarfs came forward to the sound of
drums, bugles and pipes. At various points in the dance
that followed, the rest of the dwarfs joined in with specific
movements, hollers or bugle blasts of their own. It took the
form of a pageant, each group dancing and singing for a while
until they made way for the next. The children noticed that each
group wore different hats and, as Curly Beard later explained,
each hat represented dwarfs from different parts of Earth, and
different occupations.
The dancing was followed by a series of games in which
the dwarfs showed off a multitude of skills; the children were
entranced by them all. Leo, in particular, was fascinated with the
first set of activities, the Throwing of the Axes. First, one group
after another of dwarfs, in fast succession, stepped forward
and, with perfect synchronicity, threw their axes into the air,
spinning and twirling them, higher and higher, always catching
them just before they reached the ground. The children felt
carried away by the thunderous sound of hundreds of dwarfs,
chanting and slapping their boots in rhythm.
As the roar came to a sudden stop, Julie pointed to four
large square boards being erected against the back wall of
the hall, each one as big as their bedroom wall. The children
wondered what would happen next. Curly Beard smiled at Leo
as he squirmed in delight to see a group of twenty dwarfs swiftly
throwing their axes; within seconds, the broad boards were
pounded with scores of axes. Other dwarfs came forward and
threw their axes with the same lightning speed and precision.
Group after group stepped up and threw.
49
Annabel gasped in amazement, “Look at what they’re

making!” Filling with excitement, the children could see a
pattern emerging, becoming clearer and clearer, as the axes
created the familiar shape of the beautiful Flora Hermeticus.
Once completed, the dwarfs chanted three words in perfect
unison: “Pah-rish-ta-hom, pah-rish-ta-him, pah-rish-ta-ro-ro-rom!”
Next, a large tree trunk was carried in and erected in the
center of the hall. Another squadron stepped forward, dividing
themselves into four groups; Leo counted twenty-four in each.
In the ensuing silence, they lifted their axes with both hands
and hurled them at the tall thick trunk. With one solid thud,
all the axes struck the tree, all lined up, one above the other, in
four straight lines, from the bottom to the top.
For a few seconds, the tree trunk stood, swaying slightly, but
moments later it fell into four directions—split lengthwise into
four equal-sized pieces. Before they hit the floor, the dwarfs
caught the sections of the quartered trunk, retrieved their axes
and ran back out, carrying their respective logs amidst another
roar of “Pah-rish-ta-hom, pah-rish-ta-him, pah-rish-ta-ro-ro-rom!”
Feats from the forge followed, where the dwarfs showed
their skills in metalwork. Julie was intrigued by the different
methods of blacksmithing and jewelry-making that were
presented with such skill and swiftness that it seemed almost
magical. She was riveted as she watched the dwarfs stoke fires
and smelt what looked to be different metals. It seemed to take
only a blink of the eye before they were filling the hall with the
ringing of hammers as they shaped the metal, and within a
short time, they had produced dazzling rings, bracelets, daggers,
swords, shields, buckles, and much more.
In between the various activities, the dwarfs sang, danced,
and chanted, which was Annabel’s favorite part of the festivities.
50
The songs were short, fast, and rhythmic, one blending into
another, to which the dwarfs danced with stunning dexterity.
Annabel couldn’t help but laugh out loud in appreciation at
seeing the dwarfs move their feet so nimbly, throw each other
up in the air, do somersaults while twirling around with the
utmost coordination. It made her legs tingle and she wanted
to get up and dance herself, except that she knew she couldn’t.
She wondered if she would ever be able to walk again, let alone
dance. But she quickly dismissed the thought and, for the
moment, took great joy in watching the dance of the dwarfs.
This part of the introductory festivities ended with a
storyteller, surrounded by a chorus of dwarfs who would sing,
chant and recite verses at specific points in his story. The
storyteller stood on a marble plinth that was carried into the
center of the hall by eight stocky dwarfs. He wore an earth-
brown tunic that shimmered in many different colors at his
slightest movement. His hat was made of feathers from larks
and nightingales. Instead of boots, he wore pointy, forest-green
velvet slippers that curled up in front, ending in a little bronze
bell. He wore pantaloons, striped orange and yellow, from
which more feathers hung. In his hand, he carried a curved
harp made from the root of an oak tree, the strings made from
the hair of elves.
The dwarfs who had carried him in took out their pipes,
filled them with sweet-smelling herbs, lit them with a drop of
liquid from their vials, and blew the vapor toward the storyteller,
enveloping him in a haze. As the cloud rose above his head,
the storyteller began to speak in a deep, sonorous voice. The
children could not understand his language, but the story came
alive in the vapor above him. Image after image appeared as the
story unfolded like a film in front of the assembled crowd.
51
Gradually, the children not only saw the story, but Curly
Beard could tell that they also understood the meaning of the
words. The story was spoken in the ancient tongue from the
Palta-Yugom Age. Only much later, would the children find it
strange that they had suddenly understood these runic words.
The story recounted the history of the dwarfs in the
Bricanus Mountains—deeds they had performed over the eons
and battles fought with foes of every ilk. The storyteller spoke
of their once-close relationship with the humans, but which
had weakened over time as humans lost their ability to see
and speak with the dwarfs. He told of how the last vestiges of
contact had dwindled over the last two hundred years, kept
alive only through stories, myths, and legends.
The story ended with a plea for the dwarfs to prepare
themselves for a great battle that lay ahead of them, followed
by a warning: “To win this battle, the key with the insignia
of the seven-petaled flower must be found.” As these words
were pronounced and repeated by the chorus, all the dwarfs
uttered a low, guttural sigh that rumbled from the depths of
their throats. In the cloud of vapor above them, the children
saw the seven-petaled flower appear.
The plumaged storyteller continued: “To prepare for this
battle, the help of all four realms of earth, water, air, and fire
must be joined. But even then, the battle cannot be won,”
he paused and looked at the children, “without the help of
humans. Although humans have forgotten us, we must find
a way to work together or the world will be destroyed.” Again,
the dwarfs uttered a cry of dismay.
“But there is hope!” cried the storyteller. “A growing hope.
The hope is deep within Earth, slowly seeping to the surface.
And we have in our midst, three humans who recognize us—
52
who see us, hear us, and understand us,” and he gestured
toward the three children sitting on the tiny stools at the foot
of King Brathnar’s throne. “They have already proven in their
fight with the Binagatorials that we can rely upon them. With
their help, the legacy of the Bricanus Mountains and, thus, the
whole world, will live on.
“These children will restore the connection between our
realm and the realm of the humans. There are already many
humans who believe in us. That is good, but not good enough.
With the help of these brave children, humans will not only
believe in us, but will be able to experience us—to see us, hear
us, and talk with us. The veil of blindness will be lifted and
we will meet each other as equals in the battle for survival of
this beautiful pearl of a world—our world.” The storyteller
bowed. The cloud above his head floated down and enveloped
him. When it thinned and cleared, he was gone. The children
glanced at one another, their eyes wide with wonder as eight
dwarfs carried the empty plinth away, amidst the rumble of
appreciation from the thousands of dwarfs.
King Brathnar stood up and silenced the crowd with a sharp
thud of his staff. “This brings us to the serious and essential
part of our solstice ceremony. It is a time when we look to the
past and prepare for the future. It brings us to the reason I have
invited our three venerable and worthy visitors into our midst—
an action, which breaks all protocol. But we live in unusual
times that call for unusual measures.”
King Brathnar looked over the sea of dwarfs who peered at
him with expectation. “My plan is simple and straightforward,
but its implementation will be complex and nigh impossible. It
will take the greatest courage. And we all—every one of us—have
parts to play in this far-reaching plan. Here it is—listen well!”
53
13 { The Threat
King Brathnar grew in size as he stood and stared across

the throng of dwarfs, his eyes roving from left to right, ablaze
with the words he was about to speak. As he lifted his staff,
the dwarfs began to hum softly, getting louder and louder the
higher he raised his mystic wand. The higher he lifted the staff
of power, on top of which was fixed a finial of an exquisitely
carved seven-petaled flower, the taller he became, until he
looked like a giant to the three children.
With his arms spread wide, King Brathnar pointed the staff
toward the coffered ceiling, from the center of which hung the
biggest and brightest chandelier. By now the dwarfs’ humming
had grown into a deep-throated rumble. In the next instant,
the gigantic king thrust the rod down hard on the granite
floor. A lightning bolt shot up through the staff, flying into
the middle of the hall where it exploded into tens of thousands
of sparkling shards that fell over the dwarfs like a blessing and
a bid for absolute attention. Tiny sparks fell on each of the
children, which sharpened their senses and warmed the blood
in their veins.
“Light.” The word echoed around the spacious hall. King
Brathnar paused. “Light comes in many forms, and has many
functions. It bestows beauty, life and warmth to all beings—seen
and unseen—on this grand Earth. It redeems the darkness and
draws us to its hidden secrets—secrets waiting to be discovered
when the time is ripe. Light brings truth to knowledge. It gives
strength and courage. Light, as it shines and sparkles around
us, gives form to the countless creations of this bountiful Earth
of ours—the small and the big, from the hardest stones to the
most fragile and tender blossoms. All that is in the state of
54
becoming needs light, and since the beginning of time we have

gloried in this light, this gift from the sun, moon, and stars,
and the mighty immortals who inhabited them. We have taken
it for granted, believing it would last forever.”
King Brathnar stopped and bowed his head. In the ensuing
silence, a chilly wind blew through the large hall, almost
extinguishing the flaring torches mounted all around the
massive marble walls as well as the scores of candles fixed on the
surrounding chandeliers. Jagged shadows, like demons, danced
and jumped about. The children, gripped by cold fear, felt in
their pockets for their hats that could render them invisible.
Only the quiet presence of Curly Beard and the mighty king’s
voice reassured them.
“Regrettably, the light on this Earth is endangered. Amysta
Pheric, the new age of light, is sorely threatened.” Another gust
of wind blew through the hall and their hearts. “The threat
has grown in force over the last few centuries, but has never
been more severe than now. The light is threatened from above
and below.” King Brathnar lifted his staff to stress his point, to
which the dwarfs responded with a drawn-out, deep, guttural
drone. “First, the light from above Earth will lessen; this has
already begun. Darkness will descend in many forms, blocking
out any life-giving light. We will witness ever-lengthening
storms, hurricanes, tornadoes, and ongoing floods. Massive,
motionless clouds, as well as fog and heavy mists will block any
sunlight from shining through.”
Once again, the huge hall darkened, the dimmed candles
and torches flickering unsteadily as the king continued. “Smog
from factories, vehicles, planes, and power plants will not only
shroud the cities, but spread far and wide over the countryside,
so that no place will be free and safe from the murky, poisonous
55
vapors in the sky. Some places on Earth will be plagued by

drought while other places will drown in deluges.”
As they listened to King Brathnar’s words, Leo and Julie
couldn’t help but fear for their beloved farm where they had
spent their childhood. The somber king continued. “Even as
the skies darken, lush green meadows, orchards, and farmlands
will dry out and wither. Lightning strikes will cause vast wildfires
to spread across the land, covering the skies with thick swaths
of dense smoke. The lifeless land will turn into deserts, causing
dust storms to blacken the skies. And these new deserts will be
unfit for life of any kind.”
Annabel cringed as she listened to the description of such
devastation, imagining the beautiful array of nature’s colors
turning to gray and black. The king was not yet finished.
“Volcanic eruptions will add to the spreading seas of
darkness. What outer light remains, coming from below, will
be unfit for life, for without the balancing light from below,
it will be blinding—which, itself, is a form of darkness. This
deathly bright light will force wildlife to flee their destroyed
lands. Humans, should they choose to remain, will be forced to
wear dark glasses or to take shelter indoors.” As he spoke, his
voice got louder, echoed by the rumbling drone of the dwarfs.
Then, as before, he lifted his staff high into the air.
“Do you understand?” he boomed. “The inner light that
nourishes, nurtures and warms all life on Earth is in peril. The
forces behind the darkness have only one aim—to extinguish
all light!” Once again, he thrust the staff down with a mighty
thud.
Rockets of light shot at the burning torches from the
mouth of the seven-petaled finial of his staff. The torches flared
and then burned out rapidly, leaving plumes of heavy smoke
56
hovering above the multitude of dwarfs. Again, the hall was

thrown into shadowy silence. The children held their breaths
as King Brathnar took a step forward. “And yet, there is even a
greater threat.” His voice had dropped to a whisper, yet somehow
powerful enough that all could hear.
The children had never seen him look more serious. “The
world is out of balance. We, the dwarfs, together with the other
invisible beings, are part of a delicate balancing act. We have
even contributed to current upheavals caused by humans and
their careless actions in order to avoid more severe catastrophes.”
Suddenly, his voice rose; the children’s hearts pounded.
“Hear me well and heed my words: The greatest threat to light
lies with forces that desire the destruction of the inner light
and our shared world. The darkness to follow will allow greed
and other evil impulses to flourish. There are monstrous beings
who are the true cause for the extremes in the weather.”
King Brathnar looked straight down at the children. “And
this, as friends of dwarfs and all who are threatened, is where
you can serve our cause. I will now reveal the reason I have
called you to this winter solstice celebration, which happens to
overlap with the 77th Earth Council—a rare event. Know that
it is only the seventh time that this convergence has occurred,
and the first time that humans have been allowed to partake. So
listen well, for Earth’s fate depends on you.”
57
14 { The Task
Leo felt a shiver go up his back. Julie swallowed and pursed

her lips. Annabel’s eyes widened, and her mouth opened in
anticipation of King Brathnar’s words. “Let me be clear. Only
humans can help prevent the outer threats to Earth. Humans
have created many of the problems we face, and humans will
have to solve them. We have arrived at a crucial turning point
of time in the history of this Earth”—he pointed at the children
with his staff—“and you are called upon to play an essential
part in its survival.” He leaned forward. “You are aware that
the Crater Lake of Liquid Light is the source of light in our
realm under Earth. However, have you asked yourselves where
it comes from?”
The children quietly shook their heads, never for a moment
taking their eyes off King Brathnar. As he stepped down from
his throne, he shrank in size; the children felt less intimidated
even though his voice lost none of its power. “This light, it
comes from even deeper down in Earth.”
Then the king’s voice became warm and friendly. “You see,
this inner light has not always been here, and this valley of ours
has not always been lit up. It was only about two thousand
years ago that we noticed the clear waters in our Crater Lake
begin to glimmer faintly; over the years, it gained in strength
until it gave off the light that you have witnessed. It has seeped
upward, all the way from somewhere near the center of Earth.
It is this renewing, inner light that can give fresh life to all
the plants, animals and humans.” As Annabel listened, she
imagined the distressing dark gray and black images changing
into the vivid, beautiful colors of nature that she loved.
58
“I spoke of the outer light that is being threatened, but the

greatest threat to Earth is the threat to its inner light. We are at
a crucial point. The current state of the inner light is, in part,
to blame for the events that cause the dimming of the outer
light. Confusing, but true! So much depends on this inner light
reaching Earth’s surface. If we are successful in our mission, we
can protect the inner light and ensure that it continues to rise.
When the inner light meets the outer light, much of Earth’s
suffering will be remedied.
“There are many creatures down here that do not want this
inner light to reach the surface of Earth. We need you to help
us get this new, rejuvenating light, which comes in the form of
condensed liquid, to be brought as a gift to Earth. It is the new
Water of Life. So, in the name of all the dwarfs, as well as the
beings of water, air, and fire: Will you help us?”
The children did not know how to respond. What would
the task demand? What would they have to do? Would they
encounter creatures like the Granapods, Binagatorials, the
Croomps, or even worse? The task seemed impossible—a
responsibility too great to bear. They felt more keenly than ever
that they were only children.
“You will receive help, and your chances of success are
heightened because you are children with hearts still open,
and not hardened adults,” King Brathnar said, as if he’d
read their thoughts and sensed their fears. “You will not have
to carry the burden alone. We will help you, as will Queen
Marquellamoosh. She knows of our meeting. And because the
light is in the form of a liquid, she will be able to help you when
the time comes. Likewise, the Lord of the Winds—the High
One—is ready to offer his breath to the mission of spreading
the inner light across the outer earth. Even the elusive, never
59
resting, Zeerfitz, the Hot One of the million ears and billion
tongues, has agreed to give his aid. We all have witnessed how
you conquered the Binagatorials. You have proven yourselves
more than once, and our hope lies with you. So I ask you again:
Will you help us?”
The children looked at one another, but still didn’t know
what to say.
“May I speak?” It was Curly Beard.
“Speak Ribbadon, Lord of the Caves.” King Brathnar
stepped back and seated himself on his throne.
Curly Beard stood up and faced the children. “The
last conversation I had with your grandfather included the
theme of the Liquid Light and how it was in danger of being
extinguished.” Though Curly Beard addressed the children,
his voice was loud enough for all the dwarfs to hear. “I had
initially asked him to help us, but he said he was too old for
such an adventure. He added, however, that he thought his
grandchildren might be able, eager, and worthy of such a task.
He saw your potential and believed in you. That talk we had
led to him hiding Swan Boat in the tree house for you to find
when the time was right.”
Curly Beard paused, pulling thoughtfully on his beard
before continuing. “When I first came to visit you and showed
you how to sail the boat, I had come with a mission. Remember
that first journey when we went down the drain?” Julie and Leo
nodded. “Well, you will also remember that I came three days
late.” Again they nodded. “I told you that I had wanted to take
you to the Bricanus Mountains to meet King Brathnar.
“Well, I wanted to ask you to go on this very adventure. But
King Brathnar felt that it was too early for such an undertaking,
60
that it would have been too much for you at the time. Besides,
the Binagatorials urgently needed to be dealt with.
“King Brathnar was right. You proved yourselves, and it
prepared you for this task. So, in the name of King Brathnar
and all the dwarfs gathered here on this solemn occasion on the
eve of the solstice, I too ask you: Will you help us in our task
to bring the Water of Light from Earth’s depths to its surface?”
Curly Beard looked deep into the children’s eyes, turned and
bowed to the king, and solemnly took his seat once again.
As the children looked at one another, they saw the answer
shining clearly in each other’s eyes. As one, they stood up and
confidently exclaimed, “Yes, we will!”
A great shout of approval rang out from the horde of
dwarfs, and they took off their hats and threw them into the
air. The sight reminded the children of the thousands of bats
they had seen at the entrance to the mines, an encounter that
now seemed to have happened a long time ago.
King Brathnar stepped back to his throne. “It is settled
then. You are courageous and fill us with hope and wonder. I
will inform you of the details of your task later.”
King Brathnar looked over the dwarfs, who replaced their
hats and fell into silence. “Venerable dwarfs of Issimlarooth,
realm of the Northern Dwarfs, and all the stalwart dwarfs who
have come from the far corners of this earth, thank you for
traveling here for this important moment in the history of your
world. Over the next two weeks, we will work together to deepen
our connection to the inner light, the outer light, and the future
of the meaning of all life on precious Earth. I pronounce this
festive opening to our Celebration of the Sixteen Luminous
Sun Nights on this solstice eve now concluded!” King Brathnar
61
lifted his staff into the air and struck a three-tiered signal, and
shouted, “Krash-ma-ruck!”
“Eoma-klado-mie,” was the deafening response from the
throats of the dwarfs, followed by all them stomping their boots
three times in unison, which was then repeated twice more.
The children were caught up in the energy of the chant
and likewise shouted and stomped their feet, even Annabel
joined them as best she could. After the last stomp, the dwarfs
dissipated like morning mist in the sun, and the children were
left alone with Curly Beard and King Brathnar.
“Follow me,” King Brathnar ordered, and he led the way
along a wide, high-vaulted passageway. Curly Beard swiftly
lifted Annabel onto his strong shoulders, and the small group
of unlikely visitors followed the dwarf king, their hearts full of
awe at the faith invested in them.
62
15 { Off to Crystal Canyon
Torches mounted on the walls lit their way as the group

approached a junction at the far end of the passageway; two
smaller corridors led to the left and right. They took neither.
Instead, King Brathnar stepped behind a colossal marble pillar
and pushed an inlaid quartz button. A stone slab slid open
and the king led them up a narrow, dark spiral stairway. Leo,
who loved to count things, counted seventy-two steps before
they reached the landing on top where King Brathnar opened
a thick wooden door.
The children followed him into a small low-ceilinged room.
They immediately noticed that three cots stood against the
walls. In the center of the room was a round table that was—
to their delight and surprise—neatly set with delicious-looking
food and drink.
“It’s been a long day for you. Eat, relax, and be sure to
sleep. You will need all the rest you can get. Those beds, though
narrow and short, should be comfortable enough. I will be back
for you soon.” King Brathnar turned to go.
“I thought you would tell us something about our journey,”
Julie prompted politely.
“And so I will, but first you must gather your strength. For
now, just eat and sleep.” He turned to Curly Beard who had
gently lifted Annabel down from his shoulders. “Ribbadon,
you come with me. We have plans to discuss.” With that he
tapped his staff on the ground, turned and left. Curly Beard
followed close behind.
Leo ran to a small square window. “Wow, look at this view.
It’s the best!” Annabel hobbled over, helped along by Julie.
“No luxury hotel could beat this view—not anywhere!”
63
Their tiny room was at the top of one of the seven towers
jutting out of the pyramidal castle. It overlooked hanging
gardens filled with exotic flowers and dotted with myriad
stone pathways. Some paths led to courtyards with bubbling
fountains with fantastic statues of all sorts of creatures. Other
paths meandered through lush hedges shaped into arches that,
one after another, led to small ponds with bridges of hand-
hewn, silvery branches. Julie pointed out her favorite, a bridge
that crossed cascading waterfalls that sparkled in the light.
Annabel loved the bridge that led to a little island in the pond;
in its center, rose a petite pagoda with a bright red roof. She
thought it such an inviting place to sit and dream.
All of this and more were within the castle walls that rose
high above the lush and gently rolling valley, with Crater Lake
in the distance. The children were lost in the spectacular beauty
of the view until Leo interrupted, “Hey, you two! ‘Eat and
sleep,’ that’s what King Brathnar ordered; so let’s start eating.”
The plates, cups, and silverware were all very small, as were
the pots, serving dishes, platters, and bowls, all filled with
aromatic dishes. Each mouthful, however, was a tasty delight
and as nourishing as ten bites. The three children ate and
drank in silence. The cool drink from the crystal jug in their
thimble-sized cups made their ears tingle with pleasure. After
the meal, they felt uncannily tired. Each chose a cot, slipped
under the soft blankets, and was sound asleep within seconds.
It felt like they’d barely slept when King Brathnar ushered
them out of bed. “Get up. The time has come to go. A big
day lies ahead of you.” The dishes had been cleared and three
small, metal flasks were placed on the table, each one finely
wrought in the shape of an oval. Hanging from the three chairs
were three black cloaks. “Put these on. They will serve you well
64
in many different ways. And tuck the flasks into the inside
pockets.” The children forced themselves awake and did as they
were told.
“Very good. Now here’s the plan. Are you listening?” They
nodded. “Today is what you humans call the winter solstice,
which we dwarfs celebrate at Crystal Canyon. It is the oldest,
grandest and deepest canyon in our realm under the Bricanus
Mountains. Since time immemorial, we have harvested most
of our crystals from this place of grandeur. Today, we will meet
on the large plain that lies before the canyon to continue the
celebration and to proceed with the deliberations on the goals
and questions of this year’s 77th Earth Council.
“For hours, carts and wagons have been loaded up and
leaving the castle, transporting food, drink, banners, flags, and
other accessories to the place of celebration and deliberation.
A cart is waiting for us to leave as well. But caution is advised.
You will have to remain hidden. Nobody, not even the dwarfs,
can know that you are on one of the carts. Nobody can know
of our plan.”
“What exactly is our plan?” Julie asked, putting on a black
cloak.
“For the moment,” explained King Brathnar, “all you need
to know is that you will go to Crystal Canyon, hidden inside
one of the carts. Remember, the eyes of evil are spying on us,
and no place is safe from their gaze. We have our ears, but they
have their eyes. So you must remain hidden from all, and it’s
best you do not know too much in case you are caught.” The
children shivered at these words, but they kept quiet. “I will tell
you more once we have reached the canyon. But go we must,
for we are late already.”
65
King Brathnar led them down the narrow spiral staircase,

along the first corridor to the right, and down another flight
of stairs that brought them to a covered courtyard. They were
alone, except for a well-built wooden cart. “Jump in, quickly
now!”
Julie and Leo helped Annabel into the cart after which
they hopped up. “Now open the trapdoor at the far end.”
Leo obeyed. “There’s enough space for the three of you down
there.” King Brathnar climbed up onto the cart and stood next
to them. “Remember, you must not be seen or heard. I will
be pulling the cart, but not as king.” Instantly, King Brathnar
changed into Ektanaan, the dwarf Julie and Leo had once met
on top of Puff Mountain, although he now appeared taller and
stronger.
The children laughed and crawled into the secret space
under the floor. King Brathnar, in the guise of Ektanaan,
closed the trapdoor, jumped down, took hold of the handles
of the cart, and pulled it out of the courtyard with ease. “Off
to Crystal Canyon!” Ektanaan quipped and began whistling a
happy tune.
66
16 { Close to the Edge
It was dark and cramped in the cart. But there were some
tiny holes through which the children could peek. Ektanaan
pulled the wagon out into the large outdoor square where
many other carts and wagons were waiting to be loaded up with
goods for the great festivities. While Ektanaan stood in line,
he traded jokes with those around him. Nobody knew he was
King Brathnar. Soon enough it was his turn.
Through their little spy holes, they saw dwarfs approaching
with large sacks on their backs that they threw into the back
of the cart, each one landing with a great thud that knocked
the children around in their tight hideout. Once fully loaded,
Ektanaan tied a large tarp across the cart so that nothing
would fall out. Unfortunately, it also covered the peepholes,
leaving them in complete darkness. The children clutched one
another’s hands as the cart suddenly lurched forward. They
were on their way!
Hundreds of carts, wagons, and trolleys meandered out
of the castle, with Ektanaan and the children amongst them,
making their way down the valley, away from the Crater Lake
of Liquid Light. The dwarfs often broke into song, sometimes
in unison, sometimes solo. Or they recited ballads about
days gone by, battles fought and won, treasures found, and
the heroic achievements of their forefathers. It was a cheery
mood. However, the journey was bumpy, and Leo, most of all,
wished he could see where they were going. After a while, the
rhythmical motion of the cart made the children drowsy and
they dozed off.
Eventually, the cart arrived at the great plain that spread
out in front of Crystal Canyon. Tents, pavilions, and stalls had
67
already been set up, with more under construction. Thousands

of dwarfs were busily at work getting everything ready for
the festivities ahead, which would last until the final bugle’s
blast, signaling the end. But for the moment, the children saw
nothing; they heard only the shouting, hammering, and joyful
laughter of the dwarfs.
After his goods were offloaded, Ektanaan pulled the cart
to the edge of the canyon and parked it next to a row of neatly
organized piles of crystals, which made up the previous year’s
harvest. After the celebrations, the entire collection would be
hauled back to the castle for cutting and polishing.
Ektanaan sat down and leaned against a large purple
amethyst, smoking his pipe and waiting until all the other
dwarfs had parked their wagons and departed. Even after
they’d all gone, he continued to sit, puffing patiently. Not until
the Dwarfs’ Band and Bugles had opened the day’s ceremony
with triumphant fanfare, did he get up and open the trapdoor.
“You can come out now,” he whispered, offering Julie, then
Annabel, and finally Leo, his hand, as they emerged from the
tight hideout, stiff and tired. They climbed down from the cart,
stretched, and yawned, glad to move their bodies again. It had
been a long, bumpy journey. But as soon as they saw Crystal
Canyon, they forgot all about their cramped muscles.
The edge of the canyon was only a few feet away. They had
not been prepared for the giddying scale of it. As he looked
across the vast expanse, Leo stumbled back and tripped over a
pile of stacked emeralds. The canyon that dropped below them
glowed and glistened with crystals of every size and color, as far
as the eye could see. The children went down on all fours and
carefully crawled to the edge. They felt the pull of the depths,
yet the beauty of the spectacle was even stronger, and they
68
couldn’t get enough of the feast of colors that spread beneath

them for miles, into the furthest distances. The canyon was so
deep that they could not see to the bottom.
Ektanaan put away his pipe. “Yes, it’s magnificent, but
there’s no time to enjoy its beauty. Though none of the
Kraftabots is likely to be anywhere near here while the dwarfs
are celebrating the solstice, we can never be sure.”
The children could barely pull themselves away from the
magnificent view. Wherever they looked, one beautiful scene
after another presented itself to them. Some of the biggest
crystals were the size of towers or church steeples, while others
grew from the canyon walls like flocks of birds, arranged in
intricate patterns that wove together like a tapestry or a mosaic.
“Come, come, you’ll get to see more of this, though to reach
those views will take more courage than you’ve ever had to
muster,” Ektanaan warned as he hurried them along.
69
17 { Leap of Faith
Ektanaan led the way past many mounds of mined crystals

to an outcropping where they could get the best view. The
ledge jutted out over an abyss, with a sheer drop to a vast earth
rift on all three sides. Although none of the children wanted
to step out onto the overhanging ridge, the beauty drew them
forward, step by tiny step. The murkiness in the depths was
partly covered with swirling seas of mist.
Ektanaan let them enjoy the panorama of the crystals
hanging and growing out from every part of the canyon for
a few more moments before saying, “Now take off the black
cloaks you are wearing and pull on the four tassels that are at
the end of each corner.” The children removed the cloaks and
pulled on the tassels so that they easily slid out like smooth
cords. “Now gather them together and hold them out to me,”
instructed Ektanaan. As they did so, he quickly tied the cords
around their ankles and wrists, one by one.
“Why are you doing that?” Julie wanted to know, intrigued,
but bothered by an uncomfortable hunch. Ektanaan took a
step backward to inspect the children.
“Your adventure is about to begin in earnest! Up to now,
you have been in our care and protection. Now you must
pursue your mission on your own. You have to enter the depths
of Earth to find the source of the light.” He saw fear fill their
eyes. “Rest assured, others will help you if you make the right
decisions. I have made sure that you won’t be entirely on your
own,” Ektanaan reassured them.
“You aren’t coming with us? What if we don’t make the
right decisions?” Annabel cried in dismay, remembering how
forsaken she’d felt when they were about to step through the
70
wall of vapor into the Mists of Def-a-Khan on their previous

adventure.
“You’ll make the right decisions if you listen and stay awake,”
said Ektanaan coolly. “Put your trust in trying. Remember,
though we might fall, we can always find a way to get back up.
And no, I cannot accompany you. I need to protect and rule
my kingdom. The dwarfs are expecting me at the festival and I
am already late.”
“What about Curly Beard—can’t he come along?” Annabel
persisted.
“You will meet up with him at another time. For now, I
have other plans for him. Everything has its place, and we have
to act according to the rhythms that keep life in order.”
“So what are we to do? Walk all the way down to the bottom
of the canyon?” Annabel’s chin quivered at the thought of
hobbling down without her crutches.
“No, you don’t have to walk down, though you do have to
get to the bottom of the canyon,” answered Ektanaan. He did
not seem concerned.
“We can use the boat, of course!” Leo exclaimed, already
reaching for it in his pocket.
“No, don’t even mention it,” Ektanaan snapped harshly,
taking a swift step forward and gripping Leo’s hand tightly. Its
mere mention will attract the enemy. No…” He looked sternly
at each one of them. “You have to jump.”
“Jump!” they cried.
“Yes, jump. There is no other way. Have faith in your cloaks;
they will carry you down safely like a parachute.”
“But they’re so small,” cried Julie, who was the tallest and
heaviest, and who didn’t have much confidence in the cloak
that barely covered her body.
71
“But they are very effective,” Ektanaan said with a smile.

Leo got excited. Finally, something about this adventure
sounded like it was going to be fun. “So it’s like wingsuit
flying—you know—the extreme sport that people do when they
jump off high buildings and cliffs and things.”
“You mean base jumping,” Julie corrected him. “But that’s
the most dangerous form of skydiving there is! And for that,
you need a great deal of training.”
“There is a difference,” Ektanaan explained. “These cloaks
have been fashioned by the most skilled dwarf tailors, who
learned their craft from the elves. Trust me, you will be safe.
But you will need courage to jump.”
“There’s no way I’m jumping,” Julie declared.
“Nor I.” Annabel sniffed and wiped away a tear.
Leo peeked over the edge and shook his head. “No, no, no
waaaay am I gonna jump.” Suddenly it didn’t seem like fun
anymore.
“Take out your flasks, the ones I gave you earlier, and take a
big swig,” commanded Ektanaan. The children took them out,
unscrewed the caps, and took a gulp. The cool drink sizzled
and swirled in their mouths, tasting better than any fruit punch
they’d ever sampled.
“Good. It is the draught of courage. We dwarfs drink it
before we go into battle. And it is nourishing.” Ektanaan took
his little walking stick and tapped it on the ground. At once, he
grew larger and changed back into the tall, regal King Brathnar.
“You are now ready to jump. It will be your greatest leap of
faith. Step forward to the edge.” He stepped up to the canyon’s
sharp rim with them. “One last bit of advice: Give your golden
coin to whomever asks for it. You do still have them, I hope?”
They felt for their coins and nodded. “Good! Now jump!”
72
He touched each of them lightly on the shoulders with

his staff, prodding them. Instantly, their courage flared, like
a momentary flame. Julie and Leo jumped together. Seeing
Annabel hesitate, King Brathnar tapped her legs with his
staff, which gave her leg muscles a surge of strength. The rush
of power thrilled her and, with a gentle push from behind,
she jumped over the edge into the depths of the glittering
Crystal Canyon.
73
part three
In the Depths of the Canyon
18 { The Long Fall
The children found themselves free-falling past sheer

crystal cliffs. They would have screamed, but the extreme speed
of their plunge took their breaths away. None too soon, their
cloaks spread out above them, and they felt a jerk that slowed
them down, though they still dropped at a rapid pace.
Julie, Leo, and Annabel soon realized that the slightest
movements of their legs or arms changed their direction. Once
they discovered the way to steer, they piloted away from the
cliffs as their cloaks stretched and billowed above them like
small parachutes.
Looking up, the children could barely see the rim of
the canyon anymore. So they turned their attention to the
immense beauty that spread around them. The sight of the
spectacular crystal formations almost made them forget they
were descending into the unknown. However, the vista was not
to amaze them for long—the farther they fell, the darker it got
and the less the crystals sparkled.
Julie looked at the others nervously as they left the light
behind them; she tried to note just how far from her Leo and
Annabel were descending. In no time, they entered a shadowy
74
Part 3 » In the Depths of the Canyon
realm, scarcely able to see each other anymore. Then, before

Leo could even count to five, they entered thick, swirling mists
and couldn’t see anything at all.
Annabel was the one who gasped aloud, but new fears rose
in every heart: How long would they continue to drop? Where
would they land? How would they land? Would the landing
be hard? What would they do? What if they were separated?
Would they meet terrible creatures like the Granapods?
To lessen their fears and to take their minds off the present
position, each adventurer tried mightily to think of pleasant
things. Leo thought of his dog, Sidney, and how nice it would
be to play at home or go running through the park with him.
Julie wished she were curled up comfortably in her bed, reading
an exciting book; falling through the air in some underground
abyss was a bit too exciting and real for her. Annabel imagined
herself in her bedroom, painting a landscape with her
watercolors while the sun shone through the window.
However, all their sweet dreams flitted away when they
heard a faint hissing sound coming from below. They had no
idea what it could be, and all three heartbeats increased rapidly
as the sound heightened their fears. The distant hiss grew, and
soon changed into a chaotic chorus of wheezing, whistling,
fizzing, and whooshing, swooshing sounds. And still the
children fell, the air around them getting noticeably warmer.
Wafts of steam enveloped them. The air was not as hot
as they had feared. In fact, it was even pleasant, like warm
whirls of vapor. The warmth was welcome, because of the chill
farther up in the vast canyon. The patchy swaths of warm vapor
increased, as did a howling, squealing, gurgling, and rumbling
sound. At every moment, Annabel, Julie, and Leo worried they
would hit or bump into something unexpected.
75
There was nothing the brave trio could do but trust the
situation. Even if they could put on their magic hats, what
use would they be now? They pictured King Brathnar and his
reassuring smile, and they heard his words ringing in their ears:
Rest assured, help will be with you. What kind of help?
And still they fell. The sound had grown to a deafening
thunder. They were sprayed by warm water from underneath,
which quickly became stronger and stronger jets of water,
slowing their fall. Eventually, the three children tumbled into
massive curdling, foaming fountains of bubbling warm water.
Spouts and spurts of water caught, carried and twirled them
about, till they plunged into a swirling pool that felt like a hot
bath, except that it smelled awful, like rotten eggs. Frantically,
they paddled to keep afloat while their eyes searched for a
shore of some kind. It wasn’t easy, hampered as they were by
the cloaks tied to their limbs.
Julie was the first to feel the ground beneath her feet.
Luckily, she could make out a bank close by, strewn with sharp-
edged black boulders. She crawled up onto a pebbly beach
between two boulders. Immediately, she untied her cloak and
looked back into the foaming water. Where were the others? “Leo,
Annabel… are you alright?” No answer. “Can you hear me?”
But her voice was lost amidst the noise of the bubbling geysers,
dampened by the roar of the giant geyser that was discharging
steam hundreds of feet into the air from this large, hot pool
into which they’d plummeted.
76
19 { Landing in a Thermal Pool
Julie stood on the stony bank, straining her eyes to catch a

glimpse of the other two children. She’d climbed from the hot
pool onto a nearby rock as quickly as possible to get a better
view, but it was too dark to see clearly. She thought she heard
a splash in the calmer, cooler section of the thermal pool.
“Annabel, Leo, is that you? Can you hear me?” she shouted
as loud as she could. No answer. She jumped off the rock and
hurried along the stony embankment. She cupped her hands
in front of her mouth and shouted, “Leo, Annabel, where are
you?”
“We’re over here, but I think Annabel is hurt!” Julie could
barely hear Leo, but was relieved that he and Annabel were
together. Julie strained her eyes through the swirling darkness
trying to find them in the misty waters. Then, all at once, she
saw Leo wading toward the shore, dragging Annabel behind
him, struggling to keep her head above water. Julie leapt into
the water and together they pulled Annabel onto the stony
bare bank and lay her down. They heard her groan and cough
before she spat out water.
“At least she’s alive and breathing,” said Julie, bending over
her friend. “Annabel, can you hear me? Look at me!”
“Come on Annabel, we made it. We’re safe.” Leo took
her limp hand and rubbed it gently. Leo’s voice, though
encouraging, was quivering.
Julie stroked her cheeks. Her eyelids fluttered. “Where am
I?” Annabel opened her eyes. “What’s going on?”
“Try to sit up,” Julie shouted over the din of the surrounding
geysers, gently pulling the limp girl into a sitting position.
77
“We’re at the bottom of the canyon,” Leo yelled, relieved

that Annabel was talking.
“Of course… now I remember.” Annabel smiled faintly. “As
soon as we entered the stinky steam, I began to feel dizzy…
yuck, what a stench… nasty! I think it was the smell; it was too
much for me. I don’t even remember falling into this pool.”
She paused. “I could have drowned.”
“Luckily, we all landed close to one another,” Leo said. “I
saw you plunge into the pool only a few feet away from me, so
I swam over to you straight away.”
“Thanks for saving me.” She squeezed Leo’s hand in case
he couldn’t hear her, which made him blush, though it was too
dark for anybody to see.
“Are you able to stand?” Julie asked, getting up herself.
“We’ve got to find a quiet place where we don’t have to shout
to be heard. Besides, we’re completely soaked and need to
dry off.”
“Right! A place where we can get away from this stink, heat,
and noise,” said Leo.
Annabel shook her head to clear her mind, and pushed
herself up without help, surprising them all. The power that
she’d received from King Brathnar’s staff was still lingering in
her legs, and she could even totter along with Leo’s help.
“Where should we go?” Leo shouted, looking around.
“Away from these noisy geysers,” Julie said, taking the lead.
“We’ll figure it out as we go.”
They climbed up onto a low ledge that turned out to be a
path that led along the river. The canyon’s vertical cliff rose
on their right. There was only one way to go: down, along a
smooth, narrow trail that led away from the geyser basin.
78
Soon the trail merged with another, wider path so that they
could walk three abreast, with Julie and Leo on either side of
Annabel, supporting her. After rounding a corner, the sound
of the thunderous geysers grew faint and was soon left behind
as they made their way over the stony terrain. By now, their
eyes were used to the semi-darkness and they walked along in
silence for a while. Annabel felt the power in her legs beginning
to wear off and she had to slow down. She knew she wouldn’t
be able to hold out too much longer, though she didn’t want
to say anything, lest she slow her friends down.
79
20 { Lava Fields
By now it had become eerily quiet all around them. The

path had veered away from the river and they could feel the
immensity of the canyon as it spread out all around them.
Ever so gradually, it grew lighter. The children were puzzled, as
the source of the light clearly wasn’t from above. Thick, slow
moving swirls of steam and mist still hung heavy over them,
firmly blocking out the light from the King’s Valley.
At first, they could barely make out the smoggy light
flickering ahead of them, half hidden in a smoky haze. Their
path was leading them toward ever-widening fields of black
lava. They halted on a ridge and looked down on a large rugged
landscape. Ancient lava beds spread out in front of them, far
into the murky distance. The path wove around hundreds of
small, active volcanoes. It looked like a moonscape strewn with
many little campfires, each one a miniature volcanic eruption.
When Annabel saw how far she would have to hobble on
her weary legs, she lost all courage to continue. “I can’t go on!
My legs won’t carry me anymore. It’s too far; I’m too weak,
and I don’t have my crutches. I’m sorry.” She began to shiver.
The water into which they’d dropped had been warm, but
now that they were away from the steamy geyser basin, it was
considerably cooler.
“Take a swig from my flask,” Julie ordered. “Here,” she
said, unscrewing the lid and holding it up to Annabel’s lips.
She drank gratefully, feeling the tingle spread through her body
again, right down into her legs.
They waited another minute and then, without a word, the
trio continued. As they approached the lava fields, they could
hear mini eruptions and see belches of smoke. Some volcanoes
80
were as small as molehills, others the size of barns. Some didn’t

erupt at all, but leaked rills of lava over the rims of their craters.
Luckily, there were no big volcanoes right next to the path.
What was most fascinating and strange to the children,
as they wound their way through these erupting lava fields,
was the lightning that could be seen in the plumes of ash and
smoke. Some lightning bolts jumped out of the mouths of
the volcanoes, even hopping across to other nearby ones. The
play of colors and lightning made the children almost forget
the forlorn situation they were in. It was like watching little
electrical storms. By the time they reached the middle of the
erupting volcanoes, they came to a standstill and stared in
wonder. “What is going on here?” Leo whispered, in awe.
“I don’t really know, but I assume that they’re electric
charges, maybe produced by static electricity,” Julie answered,
puzzled. “I’ll have to ask my science teacher when we get back
to school.” Only once she’d said those words, the children
realized how strange these thoughts of home sounded. School,
and any part of their normal life, seemed so far removed from
their present reality.
“I don’t know what it is,” Annabel responded, “but let’s
stand close to one of those little erupting volcanoes. It will be
warm there and our clothes should dry out very quickly.” Julie
smiled at her friend’s quick thinking.
“Good idea!” Leo ran up ahead to a volcano the size of a
flowerpot that jutted out onto the path—not that he was cold,
only curious. In no time, they had surrounded it, transfixed
by the mini eruptions that came up to their shoulders every
few seconds. Each time it erupted, they cheered at the colorful
display of volcanic lightning. “Watch out you don’t get hit by
the lava!” Leo yelled, hopping in delight.
81
“Or the lightning,” Julie warned. The moment she said

that, one of the lightning bolts zapped her on her hand, which
she had moved too close to the plume. “Ouch,” she squawked,
tumbling backward. For a brief moment, Julie thought she
was on fire, though it didn’t feel like she was actually burning.
Within seconds, however, the blue flame that flickered
around her body was gone. “That was weird,” Julie mumbled,
examining herself and finding she was none the worse for wear.
“Looked cool, though,” Leo added, chuckling nervously.
“Well, we’re as good as dry. Let’s get going,” Julie com-
manded, not wishing to be zapped again.
They continued in silence through the wonderland of
volcanoes, eruptions, plumes of ash, and hissing, crackling
electrical discharges.
Suddenly, Annabel laughed. “Look at you!” She pointed
to Julie as her eyes sparkled. Leo looked over and also began
laughing.
“What?” Julie retorted.
“Your hair!” Julie’s long auburn hair was sticking straight
out on all sides. On top of her head, it stood up two feet into
the air. She tried desperately to flatten it, but the more she
tried, the more it flayed all around her, gleaming and crackling
with static electricity.
“Stop laughing. It’s not funny.” Julie looked embarrassed.
Annabel stopped, feeling guilty, but Leo continued. Annoyed,
Julie slapped him on his shoulder.
“Ouch,” he cried, as a strong current of electricity from
Julie zapped him. Then, his hair began to stand on end as well.
He tried to slap Julie back, but missed and hit Annabel. At
once, she was zapped, and her dreads began to float and bob
around her, ablaze with a blue glow.
82
“Oh, I’m sorry,” Leo cried and grabbed her arm. Immedi-
ately, he was zapped again, but it wasn’t as strong this time.
“Argh, now I’m sorry!” giggled Annabel.
“I think all the static electricity is now discharged,” Julie said
as her hair fell and hung down her back again. “I think we were
all charged up as we stood around the volcano, especially me.
We’ll have to be more careful as we continue to walk through
these lava fields.” Julie tried to focus their attention on their
mission again. There was no time to waste.
“I do wish we could use our boat,” Leo mumbled to himself.
At once, Julie, who’d heard him, punched him on the arm.
“Sorry, I forgot,” Leo whispered, remembering King Brathnar’s
stern words and tight grip on his hands when he’d mentioned
the boat before.
The children walked on in silence. The active volcanoes
dwindled and soon they were walking amongst big, shadowy
black boulders that stood like towers on one side of the path.
On the other side, the land began to fall off, forming a steep
cliff. As they peered over the edge, they could just make out
the glinting shards of huge crystals below. “That would be a
really bad place to fall!” commented Leo, wagging his head
as he imagined superheroes throwing their enemies into the
abyss below.
“Hush!” Julie glared at him. She motioned for them to
start walking again. Fortunately, the path was quite wide. The
children stayed close to the boulder wall as they went, and
Annabel no longer felt nervous about the sheer drop on the
other side.
What was strange, however, was that although the landscape
was changing, they could still hear the sound of hissing and
83
crackling coming from the darkness behind them. What was

making those sounds? Julie didn’t dare say anything, but she
believed they were being followed.
84
21 { Hold Up
Julie wanted to hurry on, but she knew she couldn’t force
Annabel to go any faster; that she was even shuffling along so
bravely was impressive. The occasional hissing that Julie heard
reminded her of someone panting or breathing heavily. When
she looked over her shoulder, she thought she saw something
move.
“I think we’re being followed,” Annabel whispered.
“So you heard it, too?” Julie asked, surprised.
“So did I,” Leo added. “I think it’s because I mentioned…
you know what.”
“Don’t even think about it.” Julie put a finger over Leo’s lips.
Around the next boulder, Julie motioned for Leo and Annabel
to crouch. Pressed tightly against the boulder, they listened, but
heard nothing. Julie pointed to her pocket and mouthed just
one word: “Hats.” The others knew exactly what she meant.
The time had come to put them on, justified by the danger.
But before they could even put their hands into their
pockets, a massive, dark shape thudded heavily in front of
them. Leo grabbed Annabel and Julie’s hands and squeezed
them in fear. Annabel let out a squeal and Julie gasped. They
had never seen a creature that scared them more. It looked like
nothing on Earth!
The huge, glowing beast towered over them. It had two
triangular heads, with three eyes each that glimmered like small
red light bulbs. The mouths were like toilet plungers, and the
two noses like chrome metal beaks. For ears, it had antennae
that stuck out like horns; blue lightning flickered electric
discharges from one antenna to the other, covering the head
like a storm of hair. The two heads were fixed onto a large oval
85
torso that was made of strips of steel, through which a ghastly

green light shone. The arms looked like they were fashioned
from a large Meccano-Erector set—each arm having two elbows
and reaching almost to the ground. Its legs, on the other hand,
were like two massive stumps, each the size of an elephant. The
creature swayed back and forth from one pneumatic stump to
the other, a clumsy movement that sounded like the air brakes
on buses or trucks when the compressed air is released. Was
this one of those Kraftabots that King Brathnar had warned
them about?
Ever so slowly, Leo reached to put his hand in his pocket
to retrieve his hat, but the monster opened its two mouths
and hissed a volley of air at them, hot enough to scorch them.
They jumped to the side. Something akin to a laugh erupted
from the two plunger mouths, sounding like the shriek of a
locomotive letting off steam, followed immediately by another
surge of burning air.
Instinctively, the children shielded themselves with the
cloaks that King Brathnar had given them, saving themselves
from being scorched. But they couldn’t evade the putrid smell
of the vile breath, even worse than the stench of the geyser.
Annabel groaned and fell to the ground. Again, the creature let
forth a cackle of steamy guffaws, and the electric hair went wild
in a tangle of blue and white discharges.
The creature stomped forward on its two elephantine legs
and extended one of its long crane-like arms, that let out a
high-pitched hum. “Give boat,” it wheezed. Its red eyes blinked
rapidly as it stated its demand. It took another step that shook
the earth beneath their feet. “Give boat. Now!” it screamed as it
hurled another stream of steam at them. They stumbled back,
86
Julie pulling Annabel to safety behind the boulder as best she

could. “Give boat and I let you go!” It took another step closer.
“We don’t have the boat!” Julie shot back.
“You not. Boy has boat,” and the creature pointed one of
his two claw-like fingers at Leo. A thin laser beam shot out,
pinpointing Leo’s pocket exactly. Leo felt the laser’s heat
penetrate his pocket. The boat began to feel like an insatiable
itch on his leg. He felt the urge to scratch it, to get it away
from his body. “Give boat. Now!” the monster repeated. The
itch grew unbearable. Leo put his hand inside his pocket and
searched for the fleece.
“Don’t give it to him!” Julie shouted. Her voice brought
him to his senses. Thinking quickly, Leo pulled his hand out of
his pocket and covered his legs with his cloak, which lessened
the itch. The overwhelming urge to give up the precious boat
passed.
With a screech as loud as a searing chainsaw, the monster
struck them with another salvo of steam and lunged at them.
87
22 { A Friend
Leo rolled to the side, drawing the monster’s attention

away from Annabel and Julie who were still behind a boulder.
They ducked, trying to make themselves as small as possible.
Their hearts thumping wildly, the children looked desperately
at one another. There seemed to be no hope for escape. What
should they do?
They heard something swoosh above their heads, followed
by a metallic thwack and an ear-splitting, shrill shriek. The
beast clutched its breast. Both its heads writhed in pain and
anger. In the dim light, they could just make out an axe
embedded deep in the oval torso. As the large mechanical arms
tried, unsuccessfully, to dislodge it, the green lights beneath the
metal strips flickered and darkened.
The monster pulled and tugged at the axe, and the
children’s stomachs churned as they watched thick, oily blood
spill over the path. With a pained roar, it yanked the axe out
of his belly and lunged at them once more. They drew back in
terror, but the monster began slipping in its own oily blood.
First it wavered forward, then suddenly backward, its huge
arms flailing and, finally, it toppled over the edge, right into
an outcropping of sharp crystals that pointed up like a sheath
of spears.
The children emerged from their hiding places as they
heard one last yelp and a final grunt; they peered over the edge
of the cliff to see the creature lying motionless, the electrical
currents between its antenna ears spluttering and dying, the
last lights of its blue hair and red eyes snuffed.
Suddenly, a shadowy figure jumped out from behind the
boulder above them. It scrambled down the cliff side onto the
88
body and retrieved the axe from the death grip of the mechanical
arm, and, in the blink of an eye, was standing before them.
“So you’ve come. I must confess I had my doubts of ever
seeing you down here.” The voice sounded familiar.
“Grilpy, it’s you!” Annabel shouted in delight, the first
to recognize the dwarf who now stood in front of them, legs
astride and smiling brightly.
Grilpy wore a quilted coat over his chain mail. On his head,
he sported a blue velvet hat, and his strong legs were covered
with woolen tights. His leather shoes were pointy. “So, so happy
to see you!” he said, bowing slightly. All three children laughed
and ran toward him, patting and stroking him.
“King Brathnar did say that someone would meet us down
here. We had no idea it would be you,” said Leo, dancing and
clapping his hands, and pumping his fists.
“And there’s nobody we’d rather see than you,” Julie added.
“I wondered why you weren’t at the solstice ceremony.”
“I’ve been busy,” said Grilpy. “I’ll tell you about it when
I get the chance, but we need to get away from here as fast as
possible. Other Kraftabots are already on their way. We’re not
safe here.” Without another word, he lifted Annabel onto his
sturdy shoulders and began to trot down the path.
Julie and Leo followed directly behind. Grilpy was right. A
few minutes later, after entering a gorge, they could hear the
stomping of Kraftabots, hissing, and wheezing on the path in
front of them.
“Why are we running straight toward them? Don’t we
want to get away from those vile monsters, the craftyslobs, or
whatever you called them,” Leo said, frowning.
“The Kraftabots,” Grilpy corrected him. “They’re coming
toward us because they know that one of their own is down.
89
We have to hurry to get to my hideout before they see us.

So run. Run!” They broke into a sprint, which seemed self-
defeating, because they were running straight toward the cluster
of Kraftabots that sounded like a herd of stampeding buffaloes.
“Almost there!” Grilpy ran even faster, Annabel clutching
his shoulders tightly. “Watch out, it gets steep here.” Rough-
hewn steps led farther down into the gorge. By then, the terrible
stench of the Kraftabots was upon them. Annabel felt faint and
her head began to bobble. “Here we are,” soothed Grilpy.
At the bottom of the steps was a large boulder. Grilpy lifted
Annabel from his shoulders and, rolling the rock to the side,
revealed a tunnel. “In you go, quickly.” Once they’d all crawled
in, Grilpy rolled the rock back into its former place. It was
completely dark inside the tunnel. They were safely hidden,
and not a moment too soon, for seconds later, they heard the
pneumatic stomp of many Kraftabots passing by. They sat in
perfect silence until the din had faded.
Despite the darkness that enveloped them, Grilpy filled
his pipe. “Follow me by the light of my pipe. Annabel, you
will have to crawl along as best you can for a short while.” His
thoughtfulness made her smile and gave her the extra incentive
she needed to keep going. Leo followed her closely and Julie
took up the rear, the threat of the Kraftabots still haunting her.
90
23 { Birthcave
The crew of four zigzagged up through a maze of tunnels,

some lined with piles of gemstones stacked to the ceiling, until
they came to a staircase. They could see, in the dim light of the
pipe, that each step was made from a different colored crystal.
“Up here,” Grilpy whispered. At the top was a door crafted from
petrified wood, inlaid with polished gemstones. Grilpy put his
whole fist into the keyhole and used his fingers to unlock the
door. “Only I can open this door,” and he smiled as he bade
them enter. “Welcome to my birthcave, my first home.”
“Your birthcave?” Annabel asked, entering and looking
around at the sparse but cozy surroundings.
“For us dwarfs, birthcaves are as important as birthdays for
humans. I come from a long line of guardians of caves at the
bottom of Crystal Canyon. Our birthcaves are sacred. Most
dwarfs are born—to use that vague word—in a cave, grotto, or
hollow near the surface of Earth, but I belong to a small group
of dwarfs who come from the depths of Earth’s crust. That is
why King Brathnar sent me down here to be your guide.
“This cave has been empty since my father became the
guardian of the shiny metals on the other side of the canyon.
For generations our families have been guards and lookouts.
For many years I trained to be a guard in the Great Caves,
where I first met you. I would still be there had you not come
along to help us dwarfs confront the growing threat of Zuratrat
and his minions.
“The Kraftabots weren’t here when I was young. It was a
happier time and place back then. But word spread about the
new light that was forming in the center of Earth and how it
91
would slowly seep up to the surface to aid humankind and the

planet. Zuratrat appeared with the sole mission of stealing the
power of the inner light for himself, thus preventing the light
from ever reaching Earth’s surface.”
Grilpy sighed,“I’m sorry. Here I am talking away, when I
should be a good host. Please sit down.” He gestured to some
gemstone stools covered with cushions of moss. He lit a lantern
from his pipe, and the soft light spread a warm glow throughout
the room of polished rock. On the far end was a window, finely
fashioned from a large sheet of clear crystal. Leo walked over,
peered out, and saw that it overlooked the path through the
gorge. He could see the faint bobbing lights of what must surely
be a horde of Kraftabots winding their way toward the place of
their fallen comrade.
“Are you sure the Kraftabots won’t find us here?” Leo asked
worriedly.
“I am,” Grilpy reassured him. “They know that some
dwarfs still live down here, though they’ve managed to chase
away most of the dwarfs who used to dwell in this part of the
canyon. And even if they did find the tunnel that leads up to
this grotto, they’d never be able to crawl through it, nor open
the door that can be unlocked only with fingers like my own.
Those creatures are too big and clunky.”
“They look more like machines,” Leo mused, gazing at the
huddle of Kraftabots, which had now discovered their dead
companion in the distance.
“They are. Or should I say, they are a cross between
machines and living beasts. They are the brainchild of Zuratrat,
the powerful monster King Brathnar warned you about.
Zuratrat is the cleverest creature imaginable. He also rules over
the Krafooms—dwarf dragons with claws and short bat wings.
92
Though clever, Zuratrat lacks the intelligence to understand

other living creatures who are not under his control, and that
is why he has not been able to conquer the dwarfs or discover
where we hide out.
“There are other dwarf guardians besides myself down here
in the canyon, each one with a different mission, each guarding
a different location. I am responsible for Grippin Gorge. It’s
also where I get my name from—Grilpy means ‘little cave,’ or
‘little grotto.’ Grippin means ‘place of many grottoes.’ This
gorge is filled with many little caves that used to be the homes
of dwarfs, or storage spaces for mined metals and gemstones.”
He smiled at the children; although they were trying to act
interested in his story, they were bleary-eyed with fatigue.
Grilpy took out a crystal pitcher and filled three crystal
glasses with emerald-green liquid. “Here, have some juice that I
milked from the roots that jut through the borders of the Soft
Realm at the far end of Grippin Gorge.”
“The Soft Realm?” Julie asked. She was trying to form a
map in her mind of everything Grilpy was speaking about.
“It’s where we have to go in order to find the source of the
Liquid Light,” Grilpy explained as he handed them the juice.
“Wow, this tastes really good! It makes my ears tingle.” Leo
laughed. “It’s even better than the courage juice in the flasks.”
“Everything makes your ears tingle,” Julie quipped. “But
I agree—it’s dee-lish.” Annabel just smiled and savored the
juicy sap, taking small sips, closing her eyes, and smelling the
unusual fragrance.
“Glad you like it. Here, chew on this as well,” Grilpy said,
handing them a few nuts. “They come from the same tree.”
While they ate and drank, the dwarf took out three mats from
a stone drawer and rolled them out on the ground. “You can
93
lie down here and take a nap, after which we’ll go to the Soft
Realm.”
“Can’t we stay here a bit longer? It’s such a nice place. I feel
so safe here,” Annabel said, slipping into her mouth another
nut, which reminded her faintly of roasted chestnuts.
“I wish we could, but the Kraftabots know by now that you
are somewhere here in Grippin Gorge, and they know that
you’ve been helped by a dwarf. They’ll be after us. So it’s only
going to be a catnap, I’m afraid.”
The exhausted children lay down. Grilpy sang a little song,
and within seconds—helped along by the drink—they were fast
asleep. While they slept, Grilpy slipped off into an adjoining
room, sharpened his axe, buckled on his bugle, and restocked
his pipe pouch with aromatic herbs. Returning, he filled the
children’s flasks with the emerald root juice and put some
more nuts into his pocket. That done, he tapped them gently
on their shoulders. “Hope you had a good nap. Time to go to
the Soft Realm!”
94
24 { Natural Waterslide
Instead of going back down the stairs and through the

maze of tunnels, Grilpy pointed them toward a narrow niche
next to the large crystal window. Looking out, they could see
another battalion of Kraftabots stomping along, their little red
and green lights blinking and flashing as they searched behind
boulders and rocks all along the path of the gorge. “Never mind
them. Step inside here.” On either side of the niche were two
rough-hewn benches. “It’s going to be a tight fit, but sit.” Julie
sat on the one bench as Annabel and Leo squeezed onto the
other. Grilpy stood between them. He muttered a few words
under his breath and they rose through a shaft.
“Oh, is this like the elevator thing in King Brathnar’s
castle?” Leo asked, excited. “You know, the one in his huge
marble pillar?”
“Same power, but not as refined.”
“I still wonder how it works,” Leo said, looking at the
obsidian rock on the side as they slowly ascended.
“As I said, the Earth holds many secrets, and humanity will
discover this source of energy when people have become more
responsible.” Grilpy’s voice fell to a whisper. “Not even Zuratrat
knows about this force, even though he is so clever. If he had
this power, he’d be a step closer to controlling humanity. And
if he could harness the Liquid Light, he would succeed. But
hush, it’s best we not talk about this.” They sat for a long time in
silence, letting themselves be lifted slowly but steadily upward.
They came to a stop at the top of Grippin Gorge, one of
the many little gorges at the bottom of the vast Crystal Canyon.
As Julie got up, Grilpy held her back by the arm. “Wait. Let
me first explain a few things.” She sat back down. “We have
95
to get to the Soft Realm as quickly as possible. That’s why I

brought you up here. However, we are very close to the realm
of Zuratrat. He will have sent out more of his Kraftabots and
Krafooms to look for us. If we are caught, then our mission will
be lost. We will be lost.”
“Who is he? What does he look like?” Annabel spoke with
a soft voice.
“He can rarely be seen, only felt. At the most, one can sense
a faint fog. However, one can smell him; he stinks worse than
the breath of the Kraftabots.”
“Oh, a bit like a miasma,” Julie said.
“You and your big words.” Leo rolled his eyes and shook
his head dismissively, though under his breath he repeated the
word ‘miasma’ three times to better remember it.
“Right. He is a force that freezes everything, even though it
will feel as if you are burnt.” Grilpy checked that each child was
listening carefully.
“When I touch dry ice, it feels like I’m being burnt,” Leo
said, trying to show off his own cleverness.
“Yes, except that when you are around Zuratrat, every part
of you freezes, even your feeling and thinking.” Grilpy lifted his
hand, sticking out his little finger to make his point. “And then
he will use you as a robot, and there’s nothing you will be able
to do about it. Nothing.”
“Sounds terrible.” Julie shuddered.
“But,” added Grilpy, “deep in the depths of the biggest volcano
of his land, there lies his body—a dragon form of immense size—
into which his foggy being will slip when the Great Battle of the
Four Elements takes place. Nobody knows when that will be,
but it is prophesied that it will happen as soon as the Sacred Key
is found, the key with the seven purple petals.”
96
“But what should we do now?” the children asked in unison.

“We need to walk over this ridge to an old waterslide. It will
take us close to the Soft Realm. It’s our only hope of evading
the Kraftabots.”
“And if we don’t?” Annabel’s voice quivered.
“Then they’ll capture us and take us to Zuratrat and, well…”
Grilpy shrugged.
“So what are we waiting for?” Leo asked, who liked the idea
of escaping down a waterslide.
“The changing of the guards. Kraftabots change their
lookouts regularly. All their attention goes into the change. And
that’s when we’ll make a dash to the old natural waterslide.”
Grilpy gripped his bugle as if ready to announce their plan.
“How will we know when the guards change?” Leo asked.
“You’ll hear it. It sounds like…” At that moment, they heard
a high-pitched siren accompanied by static—buzzing, crackling,
and hissing—coming from far below them. “There it is. That’s
it! Follow me. Hurry!” Grilpy lifted Annabel onto his shoulder
with one swift movement and jumped out of the niche, darting
along the narrow ridge.
Julie and Leo followed close behind, trying to keep up.
As they hurried past a large black boulder, they could see a
large plain to the left of Grippin Gorge, covered with towers,
smoking chimneys, pylons, and factories with cables and wires
strung like spiderwebs across large sections of the terrain. Huge
antennae were set up all over this electrically charged wasteland.
Electric currents zoomed through the sky from one antenna to
another.
“The realm of Zuratrat,” Grilpy shouted over his shoulder.
“It’s where the Kraftabots live. And behind them, the Krafooms.
Hurry, we have only a short time before the new guards are
97
in place. And you can be sure they’ll have their flashing eyes
focused on this ridge.”
On the other side of the ridge was Grippin Gorge, and
beyond it lay the vast expanse of Crystal Canyon, much of it
lost in darkness. A large cliff face obscured their frontal view.
“Almost there,” Grilpy announced, waving his short, strong
arm to encourage them forward.
Grilpy reached a rocky outcrop that jutted up at the end
of the ridge and looked like a clenched fist. In the middle of
it, they saw a dried out, natural waterslide. “This is it. Take
the cloaks that King Brathnar gave you and wrap them tightly
around your shoulders and waists. Brace yourself for the best
waterslide ride you’ll ever have in your life,” instructed Grilpy,
smiling as he tried to make the adventure sound like fun. Then
he put Annabel down on her feet and helped her fasten her
cloak as he nodded to the others to follow suit.
“But there’s no water?” Leo protested.
“Correct, and there hasn’t been for decades. No worries,
you’ll slide well enough with these cloaks, and the stone is
as smooth as glass all the way down to the bottom, caused by
thousands of years of rushing water. It is true, some parts will
be a bit bumpier without water. You see, ages ago this was all
part of the Soft Realm—a beautiful garden with plenty of water
and lush vegetation. It’s hard to imagine, but it used to be a
fertile paradise.” Grilpy scanned the region with sadness in his
eyes.
“Zuratrat was able to kill off part of the Soft Realm for his
own purposes, and he is more determined than ever to enter
into that domain. He has pushed forward all the way to the
one and only entrance on this eastern front. So far, he has not
been able to break down the fortifications of the Soft Realm.
98
But he’ll never give up, especially now that he knows that the
source of the Liquid Light is hidden somewhere within that
Soft Realm. He hopes that if he captures you, it will help him
succeed with his wicked design.”
Grilpy looked Julie and Leo up and down, inspecting them
to see if their cloaks were tied securely enough. “Good. Lie back,
feet first, and let yourself slide. Nothing to it! The water chute
will take care of the rest. Don’t try to stop or steer. Now watch.”
The children stared at him, wide-eyed with nervousness. He
smiled as he lifted Annabel onto the slide. “I used to come here
when I was a little dwarfie. It was fun! Of course, there weren’t
any Kraftabots around back then.” And turning to Annabel he
said, “Don’t worry, I’m right behind you.” He gave her a little
push and off she slid. Grilpy gave a little leap and disappeared
down the slide with a whoosh.
Leo had wanted to ask how long it would take, but Grilpy
and Annabel were already out of sight. “Come on, Leo,” Julie
shouted. “Let’s not get left behind.” She pulled the cloak
around her, stepped onto the slide, lay back and let go of
the sides.
“Hey, wait for me!” Leo shouted after her. But she was
already gone. Quickly, he jumped onto the slide, legs pointing
to the front, and propelled himself down the slide as if he was
on a bobsled, shouting, “Yahoo!”
99
25 { Chased by Kraftabots
Leo loved slides. During recess in his school in Limia, the

village near their farm, he’d always been one of the first to go
down the slides in the schoolyard. And in the summertime,
Julie and Leo often enjoyed the natural waterslide at the spot
where Honey Creek entered Hawk Gorge. But those were short
slides, and Leo had wished they were longer, much longer. His
dream had now come true. Not only was this slide longer, but
steeper, curvier, and faster too.
While Annabel squeezed her eyes shut and prayed for the
ride to be over and Julie feared for her life, Leo whooped for
joy, leaning into every turn to gain speed. Soon he was catching
up to his sister. By now, her hood had come off and her red
hair flailed wildly behind her like a bristling fire. Leo would
have crashed into her had the slide not leveled out and come
to an end in what once must have been a pool. Grilpy and
Annabel were waiting for them. Before they came to a stop,
Grilpy said, “We’ve got to go at once. I fear the Kraftabots are
already on to us.” Glancing sternly sideways at Leo, he added,
“Helped along by your whooping.”
“Sorry. It was so much fun, I just couldn’t help it.” Leo
hung his head, ashamed.
“No fun for me,” Julie muttered. “I thought I’d be flung
right out of the slide and dashed to pieces.” Without another
word, Grilpy lifted Annabel back onto his shoulders, turned,
and ran out of the empty pool and onto the path that stretched
before them. Annabel clutched the collar of Grilpy’s quilted
coat as tightly as she could. Leo and Julie followed, and they all
ran on in silence.
100
The path, filled with stones and potholes, was like an

obstacle course, forcing them to veer left and right to avoid
stumbling. The jagged cliffs on either side blocked out what little
light there was. As they ran, they heard the distant thudding of
the Kraftabots behind them. Leo felt guilty about whooping
and hollering while zooming down the slide. He’d put them
all in danger by unintentionally alerting the Kraftabots of their
whereabouts.
Grilpy ran even faster. Julie was amazed at the endurance
and strength of the sturdy little dwarf as she did her best to
keep up. She was relieved that he was carrying Annabel and
that she could hear Leo panting, right behind her.
They could all feel the ground tremble under the impact
of the creatures’ heavy bodies. The Kraftabots were gaining
on them and sounded like a herd of elephants—where were
they all coming from? The small band broke into a desperate
sprint, dodging rocks and boulders. The path widened just
as the sound of many boots behind them got louder and the
creatures’ stench swathed the children. “Almost there,” Grilpy
shouted. “Faster, faster!”
Leo looked back and spotted the first of the Kraftabots
appearing on the path behind him, its lights blinking and the
static between its horny antennae zapping to and fro. Ahead
of them, they could make out a sheer wall of rock. They made
one last dash across the barren plain toward what looked to
be a towering, impenetrable wall. To their dismay, when they
arrived, the path had come to an end. There was nowhere else
to go!
“What now?” Julie demanded, bending over and panting
hard, as she glanced nervously sideways at the fast-approaching
101
Kraftabots. She noticed that the dwarf did not seem hopeless,
even in the face of impending danger.
Grilpy pointed them toward a spot in the center of the wall
that the children had not noticed. It was a huge door, made of
bulky planks of petrified wood that matched the color of the
wall. A large iron ring was mounted in the center. “This metal
ring is a knocker. Knock!” he shouted.
“I can’t. I’m totally exhausted.” Julie sank to the ground.
“One of you must knock! This door will open only to
someone who has never knocked on it before, someone who
has never before entered the Soft Realm. And I have, though
only once.”
By now, the Kraftabots had arrived near the clearing in front
of the massive door; they began to close in on the small group,
hissing and crackling, grunting and wheezing, overpowering
them with clouds of steam and stink. Grilpy drew his axe up
menacingly, glancing at the children with a wild expression in
his eyes. “Knock!—knock! Now, before it’s too late!”
102
part four
In Search of the Liquid Light
26 { Two Trunks
As Julie tried to lift herself off the ground, Leo dashed up to

the iron ring, grabbed it with both hands, and clanged it three
times against the immense door as hard as he could. Behind
them, more and more Kraftabots emerged, crowding into the
barren plain in front of the impenetrable wall and colossal
door. Steam hissing from their two-headed mouths and ears,
the burning reek of their breath made the children feel faint,
especially Annabel, whose head flopped onto Grilpy’s shoulder.
Hefty Kraftabots slowly stepped in unison toward the children,
grinning. They clattered back and forth, their double arms
swinging like stiff clubs at their sides. The lights on their robot
bodies blinked in sync as they hissed and wheezed, closing in
on the children. It was clear that they intended to capture, not
kill, them.
Leo grabbed the heavy metal ring one more time and beat
the door even louder. The Kraftabots laughed, which released
clouds of dark exhaust fumes from their mouths. The smoke
ate into the children’s eyes and lungs, causing them to cough
uncontrollably. Grilpy quickly put Annabel down, snatched up
his axe, and stepped in front of the children, ready to throw
his weapon. The Kraftabots halted and ceased their laughter.
103
Though there were many, none wanted to be struck by the

deadly axe.
Leo knocked for the third time, even more frantically. The
metal felt cold to his hands. Ever so slowly, the Kraftabots
marched forward, warily eyeing Grilpy. They wouldn’t be
halted much longer, that much was clear.
Leo was about to knock again when two small flaps opened
on either side of the metal ring. To his surprise, two trunks,
similar to those of an elephant, stuck out and sniffed the air.
The trunks swirled around, seeming to double as mouths, and
asked in unison: “And who might be pa-thomping on my eastern
door in the dead of time?”
“Please let us in, otherwise…” But Leo couldn’t say another
word, as both trunks swiveled over his mouth and face before
the ends went cocking up like two ears.
“Hoola-hummala-heelee-haw. What have we here? I’ve never
smelled this voice before. Fizzily-foozily-fascinating.” The voice of
one trunk sounded deep, like a double bass, in contrast to the
other trunk that was high, like a flute. “But I smeeley-smooley-
smelliley more.”
Immediately, the trunks stretched out and flitted over the
heads of Annabel and Julie, who was now back on her feet.
“Splendidly-goodely-good,” the trunks sang in a duet. “I like these
newly-new visitors who have come pa-thomping on my dimshy-
damshy door.” The trunks spoke, or rather sang, like friendly
grandparents.
Meanwhile, the Kraftabots had closed in, only about a
stone’s throw away. If the creature behind the door kept on
taking its time, they’d be lost. “Please open the door for us—let
us in.” This time it was Julie who begged, feebly stroking one of
the trunks as it swayed above her.
104
Part 4 » In Search of the Liquid Light
“Let’s have a good lee-laa-look at what we have hee-haa-here to

see if we want you ga-shmulzing into my Gardenpire.” Suddenly,
two eyes popped out of the trunks, looking like large glass
beads attached to a curly cable that stretched in and out when
the eyes rolled and turned. “Ha ha, how hoo-hoo strange: Three
leeviley-lovely smells and another sweetiley-swatiley voice. Who
might you be, and from where might you hail, for I’ve never
trunked any of you before?”
Grilpy turned around and stepped up to the door. “Please,
Rossellippsill. The Kraftabots are scheming and steaming to
capture and perhaps even kill us.”
Both eyes now focused on the dwarf. “Oodeley-doodely, if it
isn’t the Thief of the Rocks, the Dwarf of the Twinkle Hands,
the Boot-man of Dance, the…”
“Yes, yes, it’s I. But can’t you smell, see, and hear that the
Kraftabots are here? They’ve been sent by Zuratrat. If they
capture us, it will also be a threat to the Soft Realm.” At the
sound of the name Zuratrat, both trunks stiffened and the eyes
flashed with a fiery glint. “Please, let us in,” pleaded Grilpy in
his deepest voice.
“Sure, sure, I’ll let you in.” The trunks relaxed again, but the
glint in the glass-bead eyes remained. “But you have to give me
something shiny.” Both trunks pointed toward Leo, addressing
him. “I like shiny things. The law of the land demands it.”
At once, Leo remembered King Brathnar’s words of advice
about giving away the golden coins. He plunged his hands
into his pocket and felt for the large golden coin on which
was embedded the emblem of the seven-petaled flower. It had
slipped to the bottom of his pocket, beneath the boat, and he
had trouble getting it out, losing precious seconds as he fumbled
around. At last, he got hold of it, and held it up toward the
105
trunks without hesitation. The left trunk gently took it, while
the right trunk inspected it closely. “Most jolly piece of wee-waa-
wonder-good. You must come in at once! Why, for trunk’s sake,
have you been waiting out there so long?”
The children were ready to leap through an open door,
but nothing happened. It seemed Rossellippsill’s invitation
had come too late. As soon as Grilpy had turned his back, the
Kraftabots had started up again, chugging, spluttering, and
plodding toward them, forming a tight semicircle around them.
The children froze in terror as hundreds of the bulky creatures
filled the bleak plain in front of the eastern entrance of the
Soft Realm. They released a deafening war cry and charged,
their lights flashing brightly, odorous steam coming from every
orifice of their robot bodies, and the antennae releasing high-
voltage discharges. It was too late; there was no hope of escape!
106
27 { High-Voltage Attack
“Ooohhh, leevily-lovely! The cuty-shmooty beasties of the biggily-

beast come to pay us a little shmeezy visit. It’s a goody-good thing-a-
ching that us did wait,” chanted Rossellippsill.
The children and Grilpy were pressed against the door,
urging it to open with their strong hearts, while bracing
themselves for the attack. Why wasn’t the door opening? Why
was Rossellippsill taking her time? Why did her two trunks
continue to sway around and talk so casually?
Snorting and dripping oily saliva from their gaping
mouths, while spewing vile fumes, the Kraftabots suddenly
came to a stop, only a few feet from the children.The largest of
the creatures, which stood the closest, pointed all four arms at
them and discharged a current of electricity. All except Grilpy
shrieked in pain at the sudden shock, their bodies collapsing
in spasms. The Kraftabots cackled at the pain their leader had
inflicted, beating their metallic chests with their four fists,
which sounded like bumper cars crashing into one another.
Although the hearty dwarf had remained standing, Grilpy’s
hair stood on end from the high-voltage zap, his cap lifted right
off his head, while his beard crackled like exploding popcorn,
with little blues flames zipping across his face. Before they
could recover, the hulking Kraftabot zapped them again with
another load of electric current. All four fell to the ground
again, writhing in pain, just as the door slowly opened.
Julie was barely aware the door was finally opening. It seemed
that help was happening far too slowly. At this rate, they’d be
struck a dozen times before the door was fully open! Again, the
biggest, most menacing Kraftabot stepped forward and zapped
all around them, making it impossible to move without being
107
electrocuted. It was clear that he was playing with them like a

cat plays with a mouse. The other Kraftabots rattled their huge
arms and raised a raucous cheer, clearly confident that they
had caught their prey. But the Kraftabots were in for a surprise!
Suddenly, more flaps opened up in the wall around
the door, and out slid lots of trunks, pointed right at the
Kraftabots. The trunks took aim and, like cannons, shot liquid
balls in rapid succession that burst when they hit their targets.
With the first volley, the largest Kraftabot short-circuited and
plunged to the ground, hissing and shuddering. The little lights
in the bodies of the other Kraftabots that stood nearby flashed
in anger as they plodded forward to grab the children. They
too were hit with a volley of liquid cannon balls and crashed to
the ground in a wild cacophony of twisted metal, their clumsy
arms squirming in the air, while the antennae gave up their
blue threads of fiery static, and the little lights on their bodies
flickered and snuffed out in little puffs of smoke.
“Mighty fine spee-spaa-sport! Come, you punky-klunky sizzlers.
What are the rest of you waiting for? Step forward and receive
your thrashing!” came the singsong voice of the two trunks
with the eyes, while the other trunks catapulted more giant
spitballs at the approaching Kraftabots.
The Kraftabots were falling over one another, and the toxic
smell of burnt rubber, plastic, and melted metal filled the air.
Without pause, the trunk platoon lobbed the spitballs at them
with such fury that an army of hundreds would have had a
hard time evading the well-aimed liquid strikes. The Kraftabots
turned around and hastily shambled off, many of them falling
over one another in their frenzy, bellowing like befuddled
walruses as they disappeared back up the gorge. “Tell Zuratrat
not to meddle with me and my realm!” bellowed the voice from
108
within. The trunks stretched out, squirted one last torrent

over the stragglers as they fled and trumpeted in triumph like
a herd of jubilant mammoths before finally curling up and
withdrawing behind the closing panels.
By now, the large door was wide open. “Wee-waa-welcome,
my newly-new friends. Welcome to my Gardenpire! I will show
you around and around. It is splendidly ree-raa-rare for us to
get any visitors,” Rossellippsill said, referring to herself both
in the singular and plural. “We are most happily happy. Step
inside, step inside.” She welcomed them warmly, as if the life-
threatening struggle had never happened.
109
28 { The Soft Realm
The children had watched the battle in numbed silence.

Recovering from the shock, they pulled themselves up and,
after a last glance at the desolate plain, strewn with fallen
Kraftabots, turned and entered the Soft Realm.
Grilpy and the three wide-eyed children in his care found
themselves at the mouth of a large, pulsating green tunnel.
Everything around them was in movement, even the ground
under their feet. It felt as if they were within the canal of a
gigantic intestine. A soft light shone through the throbbing
tunnel walls. The smell, though not bad, made Annabel’s
stomach churn, but she took a shallow breath and set her will
against giving into the pungent air as she saw Julie and Leo
looking up calmly with obvious wonder.
But the bizarre nature of their surroundings was nothing
compared to the sight of Rossellippsill, the owner of the two
trunks. She towered above them, or maybe it would be more
correct to say domed above them. The main bulk of her body
was like an enormous sponge ball, the size of a blue whale.
Her head, if one could call it that, grew out of her body like
a second dome from which the two trunks protruded. The
other, smaller trunks that had shot the liquid cannon balls at
the Kraftabots also belonged to Rossellippsill and were quickly
retreating back into the lower dome of her large plump body—
the way the feelers of snails withdraw into their bodies.
“So oozy-snoozy nice to see you—even you, Dwarf with the
Sneaky Axe.” The two trunks of her head bent low over Grilpy.
“This time you won’t cut down anything, will you? Otherwise
I’ll have to trunk-a-thump you,” Rossellippsill’s two trunks
chortled happily.
110
“I was just trying to…” began Grilpy.

“Of course you were. No matter,” she acknowledged as she
tugged gently on his beard with the lips of her left trunk. “Let’s
not stand around idly talking of knick-knack-nothings. Come
right in and see the wonders of my Gardenpire.” The double
voices of her trunks were welcoming, and the children, feeling
comfortable in her presence, couldn’t help but giggle.
Rossellippsill began to waddle down the spacious rolling
tunnel, her cumbersome body moving like a sea lion on dry
land. Keeping up with her was difficult because the ground
shook and wobbled every time she shifted her weight forward.
Grilpy didn’t like it one bit; anything less than the firm ground
beneath his feet made him feel awkward. Julie, still drained
from worry, struggled to keep her balance. Annabel, dizzy
from the awful stench of the Kraftabots and the tangy air in
the tunnel, began to feel queasy again as she swayed back and
forth on top of Grilpy’s shoulders. Leo was the only one who
was enjoying himself, hopping around, imagining that he was
walking across an enormous waterbed.
They all noticed, however, that the sides of the walls were
lined with the tiniest of little tentacles that slithered back and
forth around thousands of mouths that lined the quivering,
living passage. It reminded Julie of sea anemones. Looking
closely, they detected that, though the overall color was light
green, the tentacles were highlighted with many shades of pink
and orange.
“And here we are already,” Rossellippsill’s double trunks
sang with pride. The tunnel opened up like the petals of a giant
flower. It appeared that they had walked through something
akin to a giant stalk and were now looking down onto a vast
garden. It was at least the size of Crystal Canyon, if not bigger,
111
and it was filled with the most diverse and extraordinary

vegetation. The plants were in constant movement, of immense
size, and growing at such speed, that the children’s jaws
dropped in astonishment. They didn’t know where to look
next. “Our Gardenpire!” Rossellippsill sang proudly. “Doesn’t
it inspee-inspaa-inspire?” All of Rossellippsill’s trunks reappeared
from the huge dome of her body and danced in harmony with
the continuous movements of the plant world around them,
as if they were conducting them. Watching the kaleidoscope of
the ceaseless activity was dizzying; the children soon discovered
that it was best to focus on one small area at a time.
Julie and Leo recognized a few of the plants, except that they
were huge and growing and decaying at a tremendous speed.
It was like seeing the growth of an oak tree developing from
seed to tree within minutes, each branch reaching hundreds of
feet into the air. Flowers like bluebells, snowdrops, and violets
had petals the size of billowing sails. Annabel marveled at the
colors; she would love to paint such a scene.
However, most plants they’d never seen before. Woody
vines curled and climbed through the sky for miles, appearing
and disappearing constantly. Feather-leaved fronds from palm
trees were the size of yachts; and mushrooms the size of circus
tents popped up almost instantaneously. Petals, seeds, fruit,
spores, pips, nuts, and other plant particles were falling and
flying through the air, sometimes in clusters and sometimes
alone. Some plants appeared and dissolved like morning mist.
This dance was accompanied by muted sounds that stroked
their visitors’ ears with the music of becoming and decaying,
like the muffled sounds of an orchestra tuning up.
Endless paths of all sizes zigzagged through the Gardenpire,
and even these were in a constant state of curving, looping, and
112
straightening, and of changing color and texture—sometimes

hard, sometimes soft. The children were mesmerized. Grilpy
whispered, “Remain alert. Don’t relax, not even for a moment.”
His expression was serious, but as soon as Rossellippsill looked
at him, he broke into a wide smile.
“Which are your favorite plants?” Julie asked Rossellippsill,
thinking how her mother would love to be down here right at
this moment, looking at this incredible botanical spectacle.
“So glee-glaa-glad you asked. Come you little sweeties, stroll
and enjoy.” Rossellippsill began galumphing down along the
tongue-like path that led from the giant stalk into the lush
jungle below. She pointed out one plant after another, naming
them and their wonderful properties like a docent at a living
museum.
“Be sure not to touch any of the plants,” Grilpy warned
softly. “Some are highly poisonous, and any contact could be
disastrous.” Julie, who’d thought of picking a few samples to
take back home and show her mother, checked herself and
refrained. “Keep to the path and don’t reach out to touch
anything, no matter how beautiful and tempting.” The children
nodded.
113
29 { The Flora Express
Rossellippsill veered off onto side paths and little clearings

now and then, pointing out plants of different shapes and
sizes. What made it so interesting is that one could observe
their entire growth from seed to flowering in such a short time.
The growth pattern alone was beautiful to behold.
There was nothing Rossellippsill didn’t know about plants.
Julie listened especially carefully, having inherited her mother’s
love for botany. “All the plants on the surface of Earth are
found here—every one.” Rossellippsill stopped to look down at
the children, her two trunks swaying as the eyes bobbed around
like little lanterns. “Yes, even plants long extinct, and those
that will rise up in the near and distant future.”
“Oh, can we see those, the future plants?” Leo shouted with
excitement, always interested in what the future held in store.
“No, your bodies are not ready or prepared for such
sightings,” Rossellippsill snapped. Her tone surprised the
children, but then she softened her voice. “Besides, many of
them would frighten you, and we wouldn’t want that. But I can
show you some of the extinct plants. There are millions that
are no longer in your world above ground, but the memory of
them lives on down here. This is the mighty storeroom of every
plant that has ever existed and ever will exist,” she said, waving
her trunks about.
“Luckily for you humans, not every plant that grows down
here will grow on Earth’s surface. Some, I’ve been able to keep
within the borders of my realm, otherwise they would have
destroyed or wiped out a large part of the human population.
What you see around you is an expression of Earth’s soul—
114
how it was, is, and will be.” The children looked up at her in
wonder.
“So will there be dangerous plants growing on Earth in the
future, and is that why you don’t want to show them to us?”
Julie anxiously pressed for more information.
“There are many secrets that Earth has stored within,”
explained Rossellippsill. “Some plants are best forgotten,
whereas others are waiting to surface. In my realm, plants can
also be recreated, changed or formed anew. There is no illness
that cannot be healed by the plants down here.” She waved her
trunks around to take in the whole sweep of the vast garden.
“But there are also many poisonous plants that could wipe out
millions of humans if their pollen swept across your continents.
In the future, it will be increasingly difficult to keep them safely
down here.”
“Why is that?” Annabel asked, not liking at all what she was
hearing.
“Because of the murky rain.” The trunks had stopped, and
Rossellippsill’s voice took on a most serious tone. “You see,
everything has a consequence: on Earth, if there is no rain,
nothing can grow; down here, we have enough moisture, and
we don’t need clouds and rain for growth. Yet we still need
rain—but of a different sort. Our rain takes the form of all the
thoughts and feelings of humans. Every one of them drops
down into our Soft Realm, making the plants grow or die.
“We are dependent on the good thoughts and pure feelings
of you humans. In the wholeness of Earth, we are all one, always
interconnected. Whatever we do, say, think or feel always leaves
some effect. Unfortunately, storms of hateful feelings create
the plants that spread poisons. If they get too plentiful, there
115
is nothing that will prevent them from appearing on Earth’s

surface, with terrible results. And there is nothing I can do
to stop them from appearing in your surface realm. You see,
whatever happens above has its effects down here, and whatever
grows down here has the potential to reach above to the surface.
“So our love-filled feelings can counteract tornadoes of
hate, greed, and arrogance,” Julie concluded, intrigued by the
idea that her thoughts and feelings might have botanical value.
“Ever-cleerly-clever girl!” the two trunks sang.
“Can we see the plants of the past?” Annabel asked shyly,
not wishing to hear any more about the poisonous plants of
the future.
“Of course, we can, and we will. No need to look so glee-
glaa-glum. There is a lot that can be done, especially because
of people like you.” The two trunks chuckled happily and
soothingly. “Hop onto my bee-baa-back and we’ll whiz off to the
land of ancient warmth.”
The children looked up helplessly at Rossellippsill, not
knowing how to mount such a huge, dome-like creature. “Ah,
of course. I forgot, how thoughtless of me. Here, let me help
you.” Four trunks reached out from her big soft lower dome,
embraced the children around their waists and lifted them
with ease onto her back. “Just hold onto my arms and you’ll
be safe.” Grilpy and the children followed her instructions, but
they did not expect what happened next, nor how tightly they’d
have to hold onto those safety-bar trunks.
Rossellippsill waddled along the path to where giant ferns
grew in fast succession, their fronds reaching hundreds of feet
into the sky. “Hold on, we’re boarding the Flora Express!”
Rossellippsill shouted as she sat on an enormous fern. The next
moment, they were lifted high into the sky by the unfurling
116
frond and catapulted through the air. “Yee-haw!” shouted Leo

as they took off.
As they flew, Rossellippsill extended several of her other
trunks that functioned like arms and caught hold of some
lianas that were netted over the jungle of moving flora below.
Annabel breathed a sigh of relief that they had landed safely,
but the very next moment Rossellippsill plopped onto a massive
butterbur that shot them up with even greater speed. Again,
the trunks emerged to latch onto vines and branches, ensuring
a safe landing.
This unusual mode of travel quickly took them across
vast expanses of the Gardenpire. They all noticed that it got
increasingly warm; the tropical vegetation was in an even greater
state of flux, and the fragrances were more pronounced and
pungent. Looking down and around, Julie barely recognized
any of the flora. And, except for Leo, none of them enjoyed
being flung about from one plant to another. At last, they came
to rest.
Rossellippsill had landed on a grass-covered ledge with a
grand view of the valleys that wove across the land. “As far as
your eyes can see are plants that exist no more in your realm.”
The children nodded in wonder; they had never seen such a
variety of leaves.
The leaves themselves were of different colors, reminding
Julie of flowers. Leo loved the free-flying plants that sailed
through the air, first as seeds, then as leaves, before twirling
into the verdant undergrowth below. Other plants shot their
stalks up straight into the sky like spears before dissolving into
fine mist. Annabel marveled at the leaves that soared like a
flock of birds through the air, held together by a supple twig
that twisted and curled around like a snake. Even Grilpy was
117
impressed by the endless variety. “Come, let’s walk the warmth

walk,” suggested Rossellippsill as she began to blaze a trail
through the high grass that sprayed up on either side.
For a while, the four small passengers rode along in silence,
hypnotized by the ferocious beauty of the plant life, eons old.
At length, Julie asked, “Is there any chance that any of these
plants will grow up above, in our land, again?” She was looking
at a ravine covered with the most beautiful flowers that puffed
little blossoms into the air like colorful clouds. She wished that
there could be something similar on the surface of Earth that
she could grow herself.
“For some flowers yes, but you humans would have to learn
to care for Earth. These are plants that lived up there when
Earth was young, and some are fragile. Now Earth is much
older, and the growth energy of youth has been largely spent.
But through loving attention, renewal can take place.”
“And that is why these young humans are here,” Grilpy said
proudly. “Earth is changing, and so are humans.”
“Good to hear. That makes me hee-haa-happy!” exclaimed
the delighted creature whose rotund body was shaking like a
bowl of jello.
Grilpy whispered to the children: “I think she likes you. I
wasn’t sure she would.”
Yet as they moved along in silence, from one extinct
plant to another, feelings of sadness that Earth was no longer
adorned and beautified lingered. Leo and Julie thought of
their grandfather, how he used to point out plants and their
healing properties. They thought of all the flowers they had
picked back on Honey Creek Farm, making beautiful bouquets
to display on their kitchen table and on windowsills.
118
Suddenly, they looked at one another. “Are you thinking

what I am thinking?” Julie asked quietly.
“I think so… Do you want to ask her?” suggested Leo.
“I don’t dare. You ask.” Julie prompted. “You’re the one
who gave her the gold coin.”
Rossellippsill interrupted their whisperings. “Is there any
plant in particular that you would like to see, existing or extinct?
Don’t be sheeley-shalley-shy—just ask.”
Leo looked again at Julie. She nodded, egging him on.
He was just about to ask their question when Rossellippsill
showed them a Sigillorica. She offered a lengthy description
of the tree that had flourished eons ago in the Carboniferous
period. When she seemed about to launch into another
lengthy explanation, this time of the Cladophlebis fern from
the Triassic age, Leo plucked up the courage and spoke up.
“Actually, there is one plant we’d love to see.”
“Yes. And which one might that be, my golden coin boy?”
asked the gargantuan guide, pleased as punch that the lively
boy was interested in her garden.
“Can you show us the Flora Hermeticus?”
At once, all the trunks retreated into Rossellippsill’s
voluminous body; even the two trunks from the head shrank,
the lips closing to a squint, the two eyeballs barely visible.
For a while, she said nothing, and even the interior sound of
nature’s growth slowed down. The children felt uneasy. Grilpy
wondered if they had just lost their chance of ever finding the
source of the Liquid Light.
Finally, Rossellippsill spoke; her guests all noticed her
irritated tone. “Of all the millions of plants down here, you
want to see the Flora Hermeticus—or Lughshmarah, as I prefer to
call them. Hmm, I should have expected that, since you come
119
in the company of a dwarf. Yet it surprises me. It should not,

but it does.” For a few moments, it looked and sounded as if
the two trunks were talking to each other.
“I should have known from the moment the boy gave me
the golden coin, marked with the seven petals, it was. I should
have known.” The two trunks turned toward the children.
“This plant you wish to see holds a special place amongst all
flowers. It is more a plant of the future, and therefore, I’m
reluctant to show it to you—though admittedly, it does already
exist on Earth, though barely.”
“But we too are of the future,” Annabel said, surprising
herself at the confidence and determination she felt rising
inside her.
“Indeedy-deed you are,” Rossellippsill chuckled, the two
trunks with the eyes slowly reemerging from the head. Then,
she turned serious again. “You see, it is a rare plant on Earth,
and already threatened with extinction.”
“Please show us. You see, we actually found that flower once
near the farm where we used to live,” Leo added, remembering
how he’d spotted it on the last day before they left Honey Creek
Farm.
“Ah, you did, did you? The Lughshmarah reveal themselves
only to a chosen few.” Rossellippsill’s eyes grew wide in surprise
and hung above the trunks as if thinking. At last, she said, “Fine,
I will show you. They are located in the Great Northwestern
Plateau. We’ll have to use the Skimmer Trees to get there, so
hold tight.” She gathered the foursome again onto her back as
she made this pronouncement.
120
30 { Pelted by Pips
They couldn’t tell whether Rossellippsill was angry or not,

but the children, and Grilpy too, noticed her friendly talk had
stopped. No longer did she point out the names and properties
of the various plants they passed. Twelve of her trunks emerged,
six from each side of her bulging body, and they carried her
forward like the synchronized legs of a caterpillar. Her large
body didn’t touch the ground at all anymore, but hovered,
allowing them to move with surprising speed.
They left the flowers from ancient times behind, hovering
through a valley and up a hill, her trunk legs moving faster
and faster, gaining momentum. On the other side of the hill,
they saw a large forest spread out before them, the large boughs
of the trees rotating through the air as if they were throwing
baseballs, while their tree trunks surged upward in their speedy
growth. Though the trees didn’t grow as fast as the flowers,
they were still rising and falling rapidly.
Rossellippsill paved a path through the six-foot-high grass
and, as she reached the dancing forest, she jumped into the air
and climbed up to the forest’s crown with the help of her many
trunk-limbs. The children were impressed by how agile such a
bulky creature could be. Once on top, she let the boughs swing
her from tree to tree, as if she was an oversized baseball. Now
they understood what Rossellippsill meant by Skimmer Trees
as they flitted across the top of the forest like stones skimming
across the surface of a lake. They had a wonderful view: in the
distance, mountains and hills from which more plants rose and
fell in the eternal cycle of growth and decay.
After many miles, the forest came to an abrupt end, and
Rossellippsill landed gracefully on the ground. She didn’t slow
121
down, not for a second. They’d entered a swampy area and the
ground beneath them shifted back and forth. Large swaying
rushes now lined the path. Her leg-trunks waded through
muddy red water, dotted with lily pads, the size of satellite
dishes, some of them raised above the water on long, slender
necks. Reeds jutted from the water like lethal spears. What
appeared to be flesh-eating swamp plants, similar to the Venus
flytrap, swayed menacingly over the children’s heads.
They shuddered, because the plants’ teeth were the size
of daggers; they could easily imagine a whole person fitting
into a plant’s basin. Fortunately, other swamp flowers were
intoxicatingly beautiful, singing to them like alluring sirens.
These marvelous plants resembled animals, though they were
stuck to the ground, unable to wander off.
“Ignore them,” Grilpy whispered, seeing the glazed look in
the eyes of the children, who had already let go of the embracing
trunks of Rossellippsill. “They mean you harm,” and he
slapped them on their shoulders. “Every one of these plants is
dangerous. They’ll stab you, eat you, drown you, smother you,
or…” At that moment, something whizzed past their heads, “…
pelt you,” Grilpy finished. “Cover yourselves with your cloaks.
Now! Some of these plants are shooting at us with their seeds.”
Luckily, the children were already wearing their cloaks and
just needed to pull the hoods over their heads. “Don’t forget
to cover your arms, legs, and hands as well,” instructed Grilpy,
as he pulled his pointed hat down over his own head and
wrapped himself in his quilted coat. They covered every bit of
themselves with their cloaks as best they could. “Now lay your
heads down flat. Make yourselves as small as possible.”
Rossellippsill gathered speed to get through the swamp as
quickly as possible. Leo and Annabel did as they were told, but
122
Julie couldn’t resist peeking through the cloak to see what was
going on. It was all too interesting, and the swamp flowers and
plants too beautiful.
At first, the children thought it was just by chance that the
seeds shot into them, but it became apparent that the plants had
launched a full-scale attack. The swamp plants must resent the
intrusion, concluded Julie. The plants escalated their attack,
hitting them with seeds the size of tennis balls, which hurt and
left bruise marks that would last for days to come. Some of the
plants leaned in and, like peashooters, shot at them. Each shot
that connected, stung and caused them to yelp and squeal in
pain. “Rossellippsill, help us! You may not care about dwarfs
like me, but they could kill the children if this continues,”
Grilpy shouted.
Rossellippsill stopped, extended all of her trunks to ward
off the fast-shooting seeds. “You’re behaving very badly to our
guests,” she scolded. “Very naughty indeed.” But like yapping
guard dogs, the plants ignored her reprimand and kept pelting
the children with seeds. Rossellippsill pointed her two dome
head trunks at the plants: “What’s gotten into you? I know that
you are just doing your job—not letting anybody through the
swamp—but you need to stop. Now!” Unfortunately, the plants
didn’t, or couldn’t, stop.
To the children’s surprise, Rossellippsill laughed and
said, “Doo-daa-dearie me, I taught you a little bit too well
when I instructed you to stop whoever comes, even if it’s
your Gardenpire queen.” She laughed again. “So we’ll just do
something differy-different.” Rossellippsill stretched out all her
trunks, huffed and puffed, and simply blew all the seeds away,
while continuing to wade swiftly out of the swamp.
123
Despite Rossellippsill’s merriment, Julie, who’d been

peeking at the events from underneath her hood, was alert
when she saw a stray seed shoot her way. It would have hit
her straight in the eye but she was able to react quickly and
protect it with her hand. Seeing the danger, Grilpy leapt up to
block the seed, but he was too late. It burned right into Julie’s
bare palm.
124
31 { The Fields of Lughshmarah
The pain was excruciating, like ten wasp stings in one.

Julie’s hand became a limp flame of pain, unable to grasp the
hood over her head. She tried frantically to protect herself with
the other hand. She didn’t look onward anymore, but pressed
her head down into the soft body of Rossellippsill that smelled
faintly of cabbage and basil. The searing pain made her dizzy
and her head went numb. She fell into a delirious sleep.
“Alright, my fruities, you are safe from those pesky pea-
shooters.” Rossellippsill put them gently back on the ground.
“You can take off your cloaks now,” she said as she lifted Julie off
her back. Settled on the ground, Julie collapsed—unconscious.
Leo and Annabel were shocked and worried. “She’ll be feeling
fee-faa-fiddily fine in no time. Just stretch her out on the grass,”
Rossellippsill reassured them. Her voice was warm and friendly
again.
They sat in the midst of a meadow of thick grass that
sprouted beneath them like bubbling green water. Growing in
this verdant meadow were purple seven-petaled flowers as far
as the eye could see. “Julie, wake up! Look, you have to see
this.” Leo shook Julie gently. “Not just one, but thousands and
thousands of Flora Hermeticus!”
Julie opened her eyes and tried to focus her eyes where Leo
was pointing; a smile crossed her face. Unlike all the other
plants, the Flora Hermeticus was not in constant motion of
growth and decay, but swayed gently in the mild breeze. Behind
them, the children could still see the other plants erupting and
disappearing right up to the sky’s hazy ceiling. But in front of
them it was calm—a large lake of purple flowers. For a while,
125
they all just stared in amazement. Julie’s hand did not burn
anymore, though it was still swollen and limp.
“There is no more splendidly-goodely-good a place as this in the
entire Soft Realm!” Rossellippsill beamed, enjoying the wonder
on the children’s faces. “And beyond the flat hills is the Green
Wall that marks the northern boundary of my Gardenpire.”
Rossellippsill withdrew all her trunks into her body except for
the two head-trunks, and made herself comfortable on the
bank of grass at the edge of the purple meadow.
“Once upon a time, this whole northern area was a black
desert—the only desert in my realm—a desert of rough black
sand.” As Rossellippsill related this, she spoke in her deep
grandfatherly voice. “I could not get anything to grow here, no
matter what I did. Then, not too long ago, maybe two thousand
years or so, as measured by your time, water began to bubble
out of the dark sand.
“This new spring was very small at first, the size of a rose.
But the water that bubbled forth glowed like gold.” The children
looked at one another with widening eyes but remained silent,
listening. “Slowly, the spring grew to the size of a rosebush.
Seeing this in the desert puzzled me most certainly. But I was
most mystified when I saw the first seven-petaled flowers grow
around the spring—the Lughshmarah, as I called them, which
means the glory of one light in many colors. First there were seven,
then around each of them seven more grew, and so on, until
the valley became what you see now: Lughshmarah covering
the low hills, spreading all the way to the Green Wall of the
northern boundary.”
Rossellippsill paused and looked over the vast purple
splendor. “But tending them was difficult. Some of the plants in
my realm were jealous and wanted to destroy them, something
126
which had never happened before. The Lughshmarah were the

flowers of the Golden Liquid, and I knew that they needed
more care and protection than any other plant.
“The most dangerous enemies were the poisonous plants
of the future, created by the evil thoughts and feelings of
the human beings that I told you about earlier. I had to do
something to safeguard the Lughshmarah! So I diverted some
of the evil thought-rain to the volcanic region on the outer
edges of my eastern realm.
“This strategy served its purpose; the spring and the
Lughshmarah flourished in safety. However, the rains of hate
allowed the rise of Zuratrat, who grew almighty through the
poisonous thoughts of humans. He built an empire in my
eastern realm while it turned into a wasteland.”
Rossellippsill sighed heavily, and concluded her story.
“It was a difficult choice: I chose to sacrifice my eastern
land and let him be, to build instead a large wall to protect
my Gardenpire. Ever since then, Zuratrat and his Kraftabots
have been trying to enter my realm to destroy me and keep
for themselves the Golden Liquid.” Her two eyes searched the
faces of her audience, and her voice warmed again as her two
trunks smelled compassion in the children’s hearts as they
listened to her tale.
“But the Golden Liquid belongs to the whole Earth!”
she cheered. “That is why I planted my guard plants in the
swamp that surrounds this hallowed meadow on the Great
Northwestern Plateau. However, it is most unfortunate that my
trusty guards cannot distinguish between good and bad, which
is why they continued to pelt us. They were just following
my orders. At least nothing serious happened.” Rossellippsill
127
seemed to have already forgotten their close call, though she

ended her story with the largest sigh yet.
“Actually…” Julie lifted her limp hand and began to tremble.
The swollen hand hung lifeless from her wrist and had turned
a grayish blue.
At once, Grilpy jumped up. “Oh no! I must put something
on that immediately.” He rummaged through the inside
pockets of his tunic, underneath the quilted coat.
“No, nothing will heal this…” This time it was Rossellipp-
sill’s high voice that spoke. “…except for one thing…one
splendidly-goodely-good thing. The only plant that can be touched
in my realm without danger is the Lughshmarah, and no other
plant can equal its healing properties. Here’s what we’ll do.”
Rossellippsill faced Leo with her two trunks and spoke with
both voices again. “First, pick seven flowers,” she commanded.
Leo wandered to the edge of the purple field that spread out
before him as far as he could see. He chose seven large, vibrant
blossoms and returned. With a worried look on his face, he
handed them up to the huge creature. Julie did not look good;
Leo hoped Rossellippsill’s cure would work on humans.
Rossellippsill had waited patiently. She took the flowers
carefully in a trunk and held them in front of Leo. “And now,
breathe on them,” she instructed.
“Oh, that’s what Mom did back on the farm, and then the
flower turned into many colors,” Leo said excitedly, his spirits
rising.
“Exactly,” Rossellippsill confirmed. Leo brought the purple
bouquet close to his mouth and gently breathed over the
flowers. Immediately, the rainbow colors emerged. “Now, pluck
each petal—they will turn into a powder in your hand. Then,
rub the powder onto your sister’s wound.” Leo did as he was
128
told, rubbing the powder into Julie’s palm. At once, Julie felt
refreshing sparkles rush through her palm, and within seconds,
life returned to her hand.
“Thank you!” Julie gasped, glad to be able to maneuver her
hand with ease again. Annabel marveled at the instantaneous
healing that had taken place right before her eyes. No one
noticed her rubbing her legs gently with her hands. She was
thinking how wonderful it would be if she were instantly
healed, but she pushed the thought out of her mind and filled
it with relief for her friend.
“After a few more minutes, the swelling will go down,
too,” cooed Rossellippsill. “But now, let’s go to the spring of
Ahrumkarista—the Golden Heart. It’s the source you’ve been
searching for.”
129
32 { The Tree of Life
Rossellippsill lifted the children onto her back. She huffed,

slightly annoyed, when the dwarf mounted her back as well
as the sweet children. She set off into the soft field of purple
flowers, taking care to trample as few of them as possible with
her huge leg-trunks. “Enjoy the ride! There will not be any
plants aiming to hurt you here in this meadow of peace. And
you, little dwarf with the brambly beard, come sit on my head
and scratch me behind my trunks as we walk.”
In this manner, the little group set off through the lush
purple fields of Lughshmarah. Rossellippsill was in a jolly
mood again, and whistled a jaunty duet through her two large
trunks. They strolled leisurely toward the largest hill, on top of
which stood a giant tree. It rose high into the sky, becoming
one with the roof above. As they approached, the tree appeared
more like a stalactite and stalagmite that had joined together.
Many of the boughs and branches had also fused with the Soft
Realm’s ceiling.
The strangely shaped tree was farther away than the children
anticipated. The closer they got, the more impressive the tree
appeared. And unlike any other trees in the Gardenpire, it
stood solid and did not move, did not grow and decay right
before their eyes.
As Rossellippsill approached their destination, the children
realized that most of what had appeared as the hill actually
formed the base of the tree. She walked up the hill’s slope until
they came to a clearing of golden-white sand that surrounded
the massive tree. Rossellippsill placed the children and Grilpy
down into the soft, grainy sand. Julie and Leo felt like they were
130
sitting on a beach surrounded by a vast ocean, except that it was

a sea of purple flowers.
“Welcome to the hallowed Spring of Ahrumkarista.”
The three children looked around but didn’t see any water
anywhere, golden or otherwise.
“Where’s the water?” Leo asked, disappointed. He was
thirsty and wanted to drink and wash his face.
“Listen for it,” Rossellippsill said and cocked her two trunks.
They held their breaths and listened. At first, they didn’t hear
anything.
“I hear it!” exclaimed Annabel. Sure enough, as Julie and
Leo’s ears got used to listening, they too could hear the sound
of water as it gurgled, babbled and murmured.
Still, there was no water to be seen. Leo, thinking the spring
might be on the other side of the tree, walked around it, which
was like walking around a house. “I still don’t see anything.”
Leo rounded the tree trunk with such a disappointed face that
Julie laughed aloud. She was clearly feeling much better.
Rossellippsill chortled through her trunks and said in her
low and high voices, “Go up to the lee-laa-leafy tree and put your
ears against its tee-taa trunk.”
As soon as the children did, they could hear the rush of
water as it rose up through the massive tree trunk like a mighty
river of sap. With their ears pressed on the tree trunk—if you
could call it that—it sounded more like the roaring, rushing
and swashing of an alpine stream.
“This is so cool,” Leo shouted, “like a river inside a tree!”
Annabel giggled, and Julie just formed the word amazing with
her lips.
“Yes, over the millennia the tiny little spring grew into this
great tree, always leaving a little bit of residue behind—these soft
131
grains. This sandy deposit, or golden salt, slowly formed a small

wall around the spring, sprouting taller and taller. It formed
the hill, over which—as you can see—grass started growing, and
finally it grew into this tree. Taller and taller it grew, until, after
many centuries, it touched the roof of my realm, which is there
to keep the plants from expanding out into the surface of the
world. This is indeedy-deed the Tree of Life.” Rossellippsill’s
trunks spread out in pride.
“So where does this liquid go to?” Julie wanted to know,
looking up into the boughs high above her.
“That is an excellent question! The water goes to a safe
place. Go on, dwarf with the brambly beard—tell them.” For
the first time, Rossellippsill nodded respectfully in Grilpy’s
direction.
“In truth, I never understood it before,” Grilpy answered,
and he almost hopped on the spot with excitement. “It all
makes sense to me now!”
“Come on, come on, tell us!” insisted Leo, who could barely
control his curiosity.
“Ah, humans are always so impatient,” Grilpy answered,
smiling. “I’m sure you can figure it out, just like I did. Think.”
“Should we know?” Leo asked.
“Yes,” and Grilpy said no more, taking out his pipe and
lighting it.
“I know, I know,” Annabel suddenly blurted out, her white
teeth glistening. “It flows into the Crater Lake of Liquid Light.
Am I right?”
“Of course. Yes, you must be right,” Julie laughed. “Why
didn’t I think of that?”
“There you go,” Rossellippsill said. “You’ve filly-begilly-
figured it out. The dwarfs of the Bricanus Mountains became
132
the protectors of this very special water. It enters their domain,

and, thereby, evades the dominion of Zuratrat.”
“And now, it is needed in our world to give new life to
nature,” Julie said. For a moment, they all remained silent,
pondering the meaning of their discovery.
“Now that we are at the source of the Liquid Light, what do
we do? King Brathnar did not tell us that,” Annabel asked. “He
just told us to find it.”
“Yeah, now what?” Leo jumped up and down, ready to take
off on a new adventure.
“It’s simple! We just need to bring it to the surface of
Earth,” Annabel suggested.
“So why didn’t we just take the water from the Crater Lake
of Liquid Light? That would have been so much easier,” Julie
thought aloud.
“Maybe it is not as pure. In the crater, the Liquid Light
mixes with normal water. Here, the Liquid Light is in its pure
form,” Annabel offered, glad when she noticed Rossellippsill
nodding with her two head-trunks.
“I suppose so, but it still does not answer the question of
how we are going to bring this water to Earth’s surface,” Julie
argued.
“Ah, but I can tell you that, my courageous friends. Here’s
what you must do,” Rossellippsill said, and folded her two
trunks in wise satisfaction. She took a deep breath, ready to
start another lesson.
133
33 { The Seed Bearers
“But first,” Grilpy interrupted, “it’s time to strengthen

ourselves with a swig from the flask.” Grilpy had noticed that
all three children looked tired, pale, and frail. “Let’s sit a while,
enjoy the gurgle of the spring inside the tree and the calming
view of the Flora Hermeticus, or Lughshmarah, as you prefer to
call our seven-petaled flower.” He gave Rossellippsill a warning
look that let her know she should follow his lead and allow the
children to rest.
They were glad for the respite, though it would be all too
short. Rossellippsill ignored the dwarf’s plan. No sooner had
they taken a few sips from the flask than she inquired, “Are
you dee-daa-done? No time to wee-waa-waste!” Though they would
have liked to rest a little while longer, they felt refreshed enough
for the next task and nodded in unison.
Grilpy tugged his hat over his eyes, hiding his frustration
at not being able to care for the children as he wished. He
stomped off as Rossellippsill resettled her huge mass for the
new lesson. Leo wondered whether dwarfs counted to ten,
took three breaths, or had a magical way of calming themselves.
Whatever his method, it seemed to work quickly, and Grilpy
returned soon, composed and ready to listen.
“Here is what you need to do in order to get the pure Water
of Life up onto Earth’s surface.” Rossellippsill looked at them
to be sure they were listening. She needn’t have worried; the
children knew this is what they had journeyed so far to do,
and their hearts were beating rapidly as they gave her their full
attention. “First, you need something in which to carry the
Liquid Light.”
134
“How about our flasks?” Leo suggested. “Except they are

not quite empty yet.”
“Good, Leo. We’ll need two flasks; so if you and Annabel
empty what’s left into Julie’s flask, we’ll be see-saa-set.” The
children followed her directions and Rossellippsill proceeded
to dry the flasks by blowing into them, ensuring that not a drop
of natural water was left.
The first step accomplished, Rossellippsill continued her
instructions. “Now, carefully scrape off some of the bark from
the Tree of Life. Catch the bigger granules in the cup of your
hands and pour them into one flask.” The children each chose
a patch and gently scraped off the golden-white bark, which
crumbled easily into their hands. “The beads coming from the
tree are the strongest, though the sand at your feet will also
work.”
“So we’re not taking any actual water, just these grains of
bark?” Julie asked, a little disappointed.
“Think of the grains as seeds… seeds from the Tree of Life—
except that, of course, they are more than seeds. You can think
of it as dried Liquid Light.” Rossellippsill was so pleased at this
thought that several trunks rose from her enormous body and
began waving in the air.
“A bit like instant coffee or powdered milk?” Leo blurted out.
“Something like that, except that your example is a
decidedly coarse comparison,” Rossellippsill answered with
a scolding tone. “Each grain of this sand is pee-paa-powerful
beyond your imagination and, when dropped into water, will
spread its rejuvenating force. The seeds are called fnumbies,
short for fnumbavats—life words of the sun. They can also be
called sunseeds or sunbeads.”
135
“Fnumbies. Oh, I like the sound of that. Fnumbies,

fnumbies, fnumbies,” Leo repeated again and again, enjoying
how the word rolled off his tongue.
“I prefer sunseeds,” Julie said.
“Of course, you would.” Leo rolled his eyes.
“Well, I like sunbeads the best,” Annabel chimed in. “It
reminds me of the beads in my hair,” and she twirled her
extensions with the colorful beads around her fingers.
“Have some reverence for these fnumbavats. Stop arguing
and keep to your task,” Rossellippsill admonished. They felt
ashamed and continued their work in silence.
Once the first flask was full, they wanted to fill up the
other, but Rossellippsill stopped them. “No, you have enough
for now. Their power will go a long way. The other flask is
meant for something else.
“But before you go, take a look at this.” Rossellippsill squirted
a bit of her own liquid at each of the three patches where they’d
scraped off the bark. At once, the surface of the tree became as
smooth as glass, and they could look right through the golden
trunk and see the Liquid Light flow in a steady stream up toward
the Crater Lake of Liquid Light above them. It lasted only a
few moments before it misted over and grainy granules began
to form again, obscuring the view of the interior. The children
blinked in amazement, giggling at the magical sight.
“Good. Now that you have found the source of the Liquid
Light, and you have some of it in a flask, we are almost ready
to go.” Rossellippsill turned from the tree and faced the purple
flowers. “But first, I want to give you a personal gift. This gift
will help my realm as much as it will help your world. However,
I warn you that you must use it in the right manner.” Without
another word, Rossellippsill spread some of her many trunks
136
over the field of Lughshmarah and began to sniff. “Now lift up

your second flask.” Julie lifted hers toward Rossellippsill who
carefully dropped the seeds from the Flora Hermeticus into it,
one trunk’s supply at a time until it was full.
“Now you humans have both the seeds from the rare seven-
petaled flower and the sunseeds from the Tree of Life. You have
become the bearers of inner Earth’s most valuable gifts. You
have become Seed Bearers. Every age has their Seed Bearers.
Some of the greatest sages of this Earth have been Seed Bearers.
“Do honor to that station. With it comes great responsibility.
What you carry in seed form has the power to renew Earth
beyond your greatest dreams. Bear them well. I put my trust in
you, as did King Brathnar.” Rossellippsill solemnly bowed her
dome-sized head and cupped her trunks. “Now the time has
come for you to go.”
“Where are we going now?” Leo wanted to know, feeling
overwhelmed by the illustrious charge. The girls looked
perplexed too, looking to Grilpy for a clue.
“You need to get back to your own world. You have a job to
do.” Rossellippsill’s trunks began to wave in the air.
“But how do we get back? Do we have to face those terrible
Kraftabots again?” Annabel did not like the thought of that
one bit.
“Oh, nee-naa-no,” chirped Rossellippsill when she heard
the fear in the girl’s voice. “They would surely capture you this
time! No, I’ll show you a much faster way. Put your precious
flasks into the pockets of your coats. We’re off to the mighty
rain forest of the South, through which you must go to find
your way back home.” With that, she lifted the children onto
her wide back, while Grilpy quickly jumped up and took his
place on her head to scratch behind her trunks.
137
34 { The Weeping Rain Forest
Rossellippsill whistled another happy duet through her two

trunks as they set off. The children snuggled up comfortably
across her spongy-soft back. After they had left the lush fields
of Lughshmarah and approached the swamp, Annabel asked,
“Will we be pelted by those nasty plants again?”
“No, don’t worry. We’re taking a different route, and
the trees and bushes between here and the South are docile
and sleepy, like cows and sheep. So sit back, relax, and enjoy
the ride to the south of my grand Gardenpire!” And they
did just that, as Rossellippsill soared above the valley. The
children enjoyed the landscape this time as it rushed below
them, especially Julie, who by now had firmly decided to study
agriculture or horticulture when she got older, following her
mother’s passion.
They passed through orchards where the trees flourished
and prospered, many of them heavy with delicious-looking
fruit. Julie noted that different species were mixed together.
Rossellippsill deftly plucked some fruit with her spare trunks,
squirted them off with water and gave them to the children.
“Safe and savory for you to ee-aa-eat.” Seeing and smelling the
ripe fruit sparked their appetites. They had never tasted any of
these fruits before, so their curiosity was sparked as they bit into
the fruit with gusto. The snack was a pleasant and refreshing
way to pass the time as they sailed over the treetops.
“So are your ears tingling yet?” Annabel asked Leo, noting
how the juice ran down his chin.
“Mmm-mmm-mmm,” Leo answered, smiling and nodding
vigorously, his hair flying about.
138
The fruit from Rossellippsill’s realm made them more

astute and observant, as if the lenses of their senses were
now polished. In the distance, they detected the most active
movement of vegetation yet, especially compared to the tame
orchards they were leaving behind. Plants twined in and out of
one another in an ever-interweaving tapestry. Leaves, blossoms,
stalks, stems, petals, fronds, pistils, trunks, branches, boughs,
and twigs shot into the heights, only to disappear, dissolve,
decay, wilt, rot, spawn, fly, clasp, cling, creep, explode, and
shrink—on and on and on. As they entered this vegetative
tumult, the children were gently swathed by a fine, warm mist
that lent their faces fresh luster.
“Welcome to the Weeping Rain Forest, or the Juvia
Naboriliam.” The farther they stepped into the active breathing
jungle, the damper, darker, and more mysterious it got. They
heard drops of water dripping on the large leaves above them
that served as umbrellas, keeping them from getting soaked.
“Most of the rain never makes it all the way down to the
ground. It’s so warm that it evaporates or is absorbed by the
thirsty trees,” explained their bulbous tour guide.
Indeed, the deeper they entered the forest, the hotter it got.
Soon the heat went beyond the comfort stage, and all three
children felt sluggish and found it hard to breathe. But Grilpy
was resilient and Rossellippsill was as happy and agile as ever,
bouncing and propelling along at a jaunty pace. “Shortly, we’ll
arrive at the Circle of Giant Trees.”
Even now, the children marveled at the size of the trees
around them. The biggest trees they’d seen above ground were
dwarfed by the size of these trees that rose like observation towers
around them and disappeared in the twirling mists above.
139
“Ah, here we are, at the Royal Circle of Seven, the greatest,

tallest and oldest of the trees in my Soft Realm,” Rossellippsill
announced. The children could see that the roots alone were
larger and thicker than those of most trees on Earth. It would
take more than a hundred children holding hands to encircle
even one of these giant trees. “They are also the slowest-growing
trees in my Gardenpire, taking over a year to grow. You are lucky
to see them now, at the height of their growth. In a few days,
they will collapse and start all over again, and then you would
have had to wait another year before leaving the Soft Realm.
This is your only safe way out,” stated Rossellippsill crisply.
With that, she jumped into the round clearing, nimbly
stepping over a cluster of wriggling snakelike roots, and began
climbing up the center shaft of the Circle of Seven, her many
trunks swiftly grabbing the boughs and branches around her.
She was so nimble that it felt like they were being whisked up
in an elevator.
The trees reached all the way up to the craggy ceiling,
where the children spotted a dark hole in the rocky center
that seemed to lead even farther up. Long strands like seaweed
dangled down from the hollow, interspersed with ferns and
moss. Rossellippsill curled some of her trunks around the loose
cords and pulled herself up into the hole. A tunnel gradually
curved, then leveled out into large flat slabs of stone, layered
on top of one another. The leathery, slippery tentacles grew out
from between the slabs.
“Many of the plants up here have fossilized,” Rossellippsill
explained. “When Earth was young, these massive plates of
stone were once plants. Now they are harder than granite.”
Rossellippsill pointed to a cavity between two of the largest
rocky plates that stuck out like open lips.
140
“Now listen carefully, you plucky warriors of good,” she

said in her dual voice. The shiny eyes stopped bobbing at the
end of her two large trunks and peered seriously at the children
and Grilpy. “Walk on up between those two slabs of stone until
you come to the Merry-Go-Round—you’ll know what I mean
when you see it. Ride it, and it will help you to get back to
Earth’s surface.”
With that, Rossellippsill carefully lifted all four of them
from her back and placed them onto the outer ledge of the
stone slabs. “Now go, my nee-naa-newly newfound friends. You
have to return home, and I have to take care of my realm.
Important tasks are waiting for us all!”
“But what about the sunseeds from the Tree of Life? What
must we do with them once we are home?” Julie asked.
“I cannot answer that for you.” Rossellippsill’s trunks
became still. “You will have to find that out by yourselves. It
will become evident by and by. Maybe Queen Marquellamoosh
can help you.”
“Queen Marquellamoosh? How? When? You know her?”
The children’s questions came spilling out.
“You will meet her soon. But beware. There are many who
want the seeds of Liquid Light—the golden fnumbavats—for
themselves. So take care and be on guard,” she warned. “And
yes, I know Queen Marquellamoosh, though I’ve never talked
to her. My many trunks tell me about everybody who cares for
plants. Now gee-gaa-go.” Rossellippsill waved her many trunks in
the air once again.
“Let’s do as she says,” Grilpy whispered, lifting Annabel
onto his shoulders and taking the lead. He nodded his quiet
thanks to Rossellippsill.
141
“Goodbye, Rossellippsill! Thank you for all your help! We’ll

never forget you,” the children shouted.
“I’m gladly-glad you came. Knowing that there are courageous
humans like you, gives me great hope for the health of Earth
and for its future. And, dwarf with the brambly beard, you are
always welcome in my Gardenpire. I give you permission to
knock on my door at any time. Tell King Brathnar that I am
grateful that he protects the Liquid Light in his kingdom.” With
that, Rossellippsill waved farewell with her two main trunks
and retreated through the hole and down the Royal Circle of
Seven, while the small band of four turned around and began
to make their way up through the shallow crack between the
two massive slabs of cold, gray stone.
142
part five
Returning Home
35 { Merry-Go-Round
The stone slabs were wet and slippery, and the travelers had
to watch their steps. Rivulets trickled and flowed all around
them, dripping from strands of seaweed, vines, and other root
systems that grew from the rocks. But the sound of the lapping
water was pleasant and the cool air was refreshing in contrast
to the tropical heat of the Soft Realm.
“Whew, I’m thirsty,” grumbled Leo as he cupped his
hands, squatted down, and scooped some water from a puddle,
swigging it hastily. “Yuk, it’s terrible!” he griped as he spat it
out. “It’s salty and bitter.”
“I’m not surprised,” Grilpy laughed.
“Why not?” Leo spluttered.
“Because the ocean is above us, and the roots of plants
absorb its salt. This makes the water taste unpleasant. Besides,
the water here is stagnant.”
“What? The ocean is above us?” Julie exclaimed. “What if
the slabs should collapse under all that weight?”
“Ah, don’t worry. Earth’s crust is very thick. Nothing will
collapse. The slabs may shift now and then, which could cause
earthquakes. But don’t worry. I can sense when that is going
143
to happen, and it’s not going to happen anytime soon. So stop

fretting.”
“But I’m still thirsty,” Leo moaned, unhappy about the
salty-bitter taste in his mouth.
“I’ll find you a place where the water is sweeter. But come
on now. No time to tarry,” encouraged Grilpy as he continued
walking.
It was too dark to see clearly. Leo wondered how it was that
the dwarf could see his way with no problem, but he decided
not to ask and simply took out his flashlight to illuminate the
way for himself and the girls. Annabel and Julie nodded to him
in thanks, grateful for the light.
They walked on in silence. The crack widened, and soon
they saw hundreds of slabs strewn about like giant playing cards
or wafers. Occasionally, one could hear them grinding against
one another, which filled the children with dread. As they
continued upward, the stone slabs underfoot got smaller and
formed a natural stairway.
Grilpy stopped next to a furrow in the rock through which
some water flowed. “Here we go. This water should do. It has
been well filtered by the earth.”
“Ah, at last,” Leo exclaimed, putting his mouth directly
into the furrow and slurping greedily. Grilpy lifted Annabel
from his shoulders, and the girls took their turns after Leo. The
water wasn’t alpine fresh, and they could still detect a faint salty
taste. Nevertheless, the children were grateful that Grilpy had
found a way to relieve their growing thirst.
“Take some sips from the flask as well. It will do you good
and give you the strength you need,” Grilpy suggested. Julie
unscrewed her flask, and they passed it around. Two sips each
and the flask was almost empty. Invigorated, they continued in
144
Part 5 » Returning Home
silence, except for the sound of their footsteps and the constant
dripping of water around them.
Suddenly, from up ahead, they heard eerie sounds:
“Whoooooo, whoooooo!”
“What’s that?” Annabel inquired nervously. They stopped
and listened.
“It’s the Merry-Go-Round that Rossellippsill told us about,”
Grilpy answered. “We’re getting close.”
“Well, it doesn’t sound very merry to me,” Julie commented.
“It’s more like the desperate howling of some lost phantom.
Makes me feel lonely and desolate.”
They trudged up and along more slanted slabs of rock,
careful not to slip on the wet surface. Reaching the top, they
looked into an inky chasm that was surrounded by a crown of
stalactites that pointed down at a calm, subterranean pool.
“Why did Rossellippsill call this the Merry-Go-Round?”
Leo wanted to know, having pictured the colorful carousels at
the County Fair. “Doesn’t look anything like a merry-go-round
to me,” and he pointed his flashlight into the sheer depths of
the dark waterhole. The water began to swirl and spiral below
them. As it picked up speed, the water level rose.
“It’s a bit like a rising vortex,” Julie noted.
“Yeah, a vortex like in a flushing toilet when it’s jammed,”
Leo said, snickering. But he stopped as soon as he saw the
strong force with which the whooshing pillar of water rose
up right in front of them, shooting toward the rocky ceiling.
When they looked up, they noticed a gaping hole in the center.
As the funnel of water surged through the hole above
them, it shrieked, wailed, and howled, “Whooooooooo,
whoooooooo!” They instinctively covered their ears.
“It’s a climbing whirlpool!” Annabel shouted over the din
of rushing water. The roaring spectacle lasted less than a minute
145
before it suddenly stopped, and they again looked down into a

quiet pool of water.
“Or a blowhole—well, sort of,” Julie declared. “I learned
about it in school.”
“There she goes again,” Leo mumbled under his breath.
“Water is probably pushed up a shaft of a vertical sea cave,
most likely by strong ocean currents.”
“You’re right,” Grilpy confirmed. “The strong movement
of the ocean is blasting the water up and through the shaft
above us, but with one difference.”
“And what’s that?” Annabel wanted to know.
“You’ll see, but first… Leo, take out Swan Boat. It’s time to
get back in.” Grilpy nodded toward Leo’s pocket as he tightened
his belt and adjusted his quilted coat.
“Yesss!” Leo shouted. “I feel so much safer in the boat.” He
took out the little bottle, uncorked it and let Swan Boat out.
The boat glowed in satisfaction, glad to be sailing again. They
all held hands and readied themselves to embark.
Once aboard, the children felt their confidence returning.
Leo shut the ethmaroll. Grilpy sat down at the boat’s stern
and took hold of the tiller. The water had just begun rising
again, spinning round and round, higher and higher. As it
reached their level, Grilpy suddenly steered the boat right into
the center of the maelstrom. At once, they went into a tailspin.
“Hang on tight!” Grilpy shouted above the roar of water.
Instantly, they were reminded of the time when they had created
the whirlpools in the reservoirs down in the sewers to get rid of
the Binagatorials, except that now they were catapulted upward
like a rocket, right through the narrow shaft. It felt like they
were caught up in the dark, howling, deafening throat of a
monster, “Whoooooo, whoooooo!”
146
36 { Coral Castle
Holding tightly onto the handles, they all joined in,

howling, “Whoooooo, whoooooo”—even Grilpy—as they
spiraled up through the shaft at a tremendous speed. It seemed
never-ending, until at last they were released from the shaft.
Suddenly, it was completely quiet around them, and the boat
gradually stopped spinning.
The children found themselves laughing at this latest
adventure and wondering where they were, for it was too dark
to see. Then the soft light of the boat steadily began to radiate
and they saw—to their surprise—that they were gliding just
above the ocean floor.
“I see what you mean,” Annabel said to Grilpy. “This
blowhole is different, because it blew us into the ocean and not
into the air.”
A wonder world met them and the children looked around
in awe. Schools of fish swam by, thousands of fish in each one.
Wherever they looked, they saw fish of every size and shape, a
few giving off their own light, glowing in various colors. They
marveled at the strangeness of these deep-sea creatures. Some
were even transparent and had smaller fish swimming happily
inside of them. Others had curved teeth that were bigger than
their bodies, jutting out of their jaws. The three children’s faces
were pressed against the ethmaroll as they pointed out one sea
creature after another.
“Look at that one—it has twelve horns!”
“That jellyfish looks like a soap bubble the size of a hot-air
balloon!”
“Oh, and that one is like a flying saucer about to land!”
147
“Wow, there’s a squid the size of a blue whale—just like in

the story books!” They watched, mesmerized, as it gracefully
glided by, the fluid tentacles slowly coiling through the water.
There were lantern fish, starfish, spider fish, eels, dragon fish,
and various crabs. There were even fish that looked like flowers,
until their mouths or eyes became visible amongst the luminous
petal fins. Some had eyes that gleamed like gemstones, while
others looked as dull as blobs of gray lead. Some of the bigger
fish looked like animals, reminiscent of panthers, jackals or
possums. There were even creatures that could have come
straight out of a horror movie.
“Why do so many of them look sad, angry or trapped in
their own bodies?” Annabel wondered aloud.
“You’re right,” Leo answered as the boat passed through
a wide ravine, “except for those.” He pointed to a herd of
seahorses, each one of them smiling as they moved gently
through the water. They were much larger than the ones the
children had seen in aquariums. Each seahorse was the size of
a cat or dog.
“Hey, I think they’ve noticed us and are coming toward
us!” Julie exclaimed, excited, because she loved all horses, even
seahorses. The seahorses undulated right up to Swan Boat,
several even touching the ethmaroll with their muzzles.
There were hundreds of them, jostling to get a view of the
children until, parting, they made way for the largest of the
seahorses to come forward. He was about twice the size of the
others, with a slim white stripe on the bridge of his nose and a
long mane of golden brown hair that wafted over his graceful
neck. He whinnied, though it sounded soft and distant
All the other seahorses whinnied as well, reminding the
children of the high-pitched, far-off giggling of babies. The large
148
seahorse with the wavy mane peered at each one of them, then
winked with his big marble eye, and swam up ahead, while the
rest of the seahorses flanked the boat.
“They want us to follow their leader,” Grilpy observed.
“So what are we waiting for?” Leo quipped.
Swan Boat had already begun to follow the seahorses. “See,
she knows what to do,” admired Annabel as she patted the
boat on its railing.
The large seahorse with the wavy mane led them through
the ravine and up a mountain of colorful corals. The higher
they rose, the lighter it got, and the more corals they spotted.
Flitting in and out of the corals were the most beautifully
colored fish they’d ever seen. Julie noticed that hardly any of
them looked sad. They waved at the children with their silky
fins, smiling and winking as they passed by.
Once they reached the summit of the underwater mountain,
the travelers looked over a valley surrounded by a crown of
smaller mountains, in the center of which stood a castle built
entirely from corals. It surpassed King Brathnar’s castle in
stature and was even more colorful.
The castle didn’t have any towers or ramparts like the
Dwarf King’s castle, but many more tunnels, arches, caves, and
grottoes embedded throughout the sprawling palatial edifice.
It was more of an expansive citadel than a palace, and home
to countless sea creatures, great and small. And the corals were
alive: Some had wriggling tentacles; others swayed with the
current. Annabel pointed out the corals covered with curtains
of different-colored seaweed and sponges. Leo liked the huge
ones that looked like pipe organs and others that appeared like
elegant, shiny rods standing to attention. Julie liked the small
ones that made up a tapestry or a hanging carpet. They all
149
loved the coral colonies that glowed in the dark and the ones
that shone like glossy pelts of animal fur. They marveled that
some looked to be as hard as stone, while others were rubbery
and could stretch like elastic bands.
“What on Earth is that?” Annabel asked, her hands above
her head, mouth wide open.
“It’s Coral Castle, home of Queen Marquellamoosh,”
answered Grilpy, his voice filled with reverence, for he had also
never seen this type of splendor before, and he had a deep
appreciation and love for all things beautiful. “I am guessing
that she is expecting us and has sent her best horses to lead us
here.”
“How can she know we’re coming?” Leo asked.
“It’s her ocean, and she knows everything that happens in
her waters. As soon as we came shooting through the blowhole,
she would have known that we had arrived.”
Grilpy was right. On seeing Coral Castle, the seahorses
began to gallop—if you can call it that—toward their royal home.
Swan Boat whinnied herself and, without prodding, bolted
after them.
150
37 { Surprise Reunion
As they approached Coral Castle, they heard beautiful

singing, faint at first, but growing clearer the closer they came.
Guided by the seahorses, they were sailing toward the wide
coral gate when shadows from above suddenly blocked out the
light. They looked up and saw six blue whales swimming down,
singing as they positioned themselves, three on either side as
escorts. Moments later, the gate slid open, allowing Swan Boat
to pass through. The whales ended their festive chorale in a
welcoming finale, which sounded remotely like a fanfare of
bugles and horns.
Leaving the herd of seahorses behind, Swan Boat sailed
into a spacious coral courtyard, which reminded the children of
an arena or football stadium. The six majestic whales ushered
them in before turning around and swimming back up to the
surface of the ocean. Grilpy was impressed. “You got quite
the royal welcome. The word of your deeds must have spread
amongst the ocean dwellers.”
They heard rapid tapping right above them on the ethmaroll.
They looked up. “Wilamelee!” they shouted at once, in unison.
Indeed, it was the water sprite who had helped them so much
in their mission to overcome the Binagatorials. They hadn’t
expected to see her.
Though still delicate, she looked bigger than before. Her
green serpentine hair was even thicker and longer. The skin
of her body was still as smooth and soft as a soap bubble, but
the tiny shimmering scales that covered other parts of her body
radiated with richer colors. With her little webbed fingers, she
beckoned them to follow her. The troop of four was overjoyed.
151
Wilamelee led them from the courtyard through coral

tunnels and passageways, upward through numerous chambers,
corridors, and stairwells until they arrived at a large coral cave.
To their surprise, the boat popped up above the surface of the
water, and they moored right next to a coral wharf carpeted
with soft algae.
Grilpy pulled back the ethmaroll and Wilamelee jumped on
the boat and hugged each of the children and the hearty dwarf.
The children were careful not to squeeze too hard, because the
little green shimmering nymph was so delicate.
After their cheerful greeting, Wilamelee said, “You can rest
here before your audience with Queen Marquellamoosh. It’s
our biggest and most beautiful air pool.”
“Air pool?” Leo repeated questioningly.
“Yes. Just like you have swimming pools to cool off or enjoy
a swim in, we have air pools to take a rest from swimming and
to feel our own heaviness. Wilamelee likes to come here and
relax.” The little water sprite smiled.
Three flying fish flew out of the water, somersaulting in
unison. “And as you can see,” giggled Wilamelee, “the flying
fish love to come here to dive up into the air. It’s also the
favorite place of leisure for the dolphins when they come to
visit. But now, make yourselves comfortable on one of our
sponge loungers, while we get you some delicious sea fruits.”
She dove back into the water while they disembarked, stretched,
and explored a bit before reclining on one of the coral deck
chairs or soft sponges.
“It’s a good thing we came here.” Grilpy took out his pipe.
“Otherwise, you would have run out of air.” It had happened
to them once before, and the memory of being stuck in their
boat, covered with slimy goo from the Binagatorials, was not a
pleasant one.
152
They didn’t have long to wait. Wilamelee reappeared in the

company of a large smiling sea turtle, on whose back bottles,
bowls, and plates were precariously balanced, held in place by
only his shell’s leathery ridges. The sea turtle slowly clambered
up the coral steps out of the water. “Welcome! Welcome! Please
help yourselves,” he said. “I’ve prepared the dishes myself.”
“Meet Loutilias, Queen Marquellamoosh’s chief chef. He
prepares all her meals.” Wilamelee quickly removed the dishes
from the turtle’s back, which served as a tray, and placed them
on a coral table in front of the guests. Next, she uncovered the
platters and bowls to reveal a great variety of delicacies.
“But isn’t this feast meant for the queen?” Julie asked.
“So it is,” Loutilias answered, “but you are honored guests
and worthy of her food. Besides, she is not very hungry today.”
The sea turtle sighed, but then, shaking his head slightly,
brightened again. “Now, please, please start eating. I so want
you to enjoy the food, and it loses its flavor if left in the air for
too long.”
The travelers did not need to be told twice. Though
everything had a slight salty tang, the food was delicious. Even
Grilpy filled his plate a second time. They soon felt strengthened
and satisfied.
The sea turtle, who looked a bit like a coral himself, smiled
faintly as his leathery eyes darted from one child to the other.
When he was sure that they had eaten their fill, Loutilias said,
“Did you like it? Did you? Oh, I hope that you did! Now please,
please, be so kind as to put the dishes back on my back.”
The children thanked Loutilias repeatedly as they helped
collect the dishes, each child pointing out their favorite dish
and delighting him by asking how he had prepared it. The old
sea turtle was as nourished by their interest and compliments
153
as the children had been nourished by his wonderful food.

Wilamelee organized the bowls, plates, and platters so they
wouldn’t slip off the turtle’s hard shell. Once loaded, Loutilias
waved farewell with his front flipper and slid off the smooth
algae ramp into the water without the slightest splash.
Wilamelee turned to them. “His foods have helped to heal
Queen Marquellamoosh of her severe sadness, and some of his
special dishes have reduced her crying, even making her laugh.
And also…” She began to giggle, putting her tiny webbed hand
in front of her dainty mouth, “…he has a good voice too, though
he rarely sings in front of others. Because he is so old, he knows
many songs from all the oceans and ancient times. He comes
from a long line of singing sea turtles, and his ancestors taught
him well. He is the only one left who remembers the songs
from the deep-deep that go back thousands of years when the
world’s oceans covered different coastlines and continents.”
She paused, and seemed about to add something more, when
she changed her mind. “But now it is time to meet Queen
Marquellamoosh, who is expecting us at Coral Barrier Bay.”
“Is it far to go?” Annabel did not want to go anywhere. She
wished she could just rest in the air pool and watch the flying
fish jump out of the water.
“Seven nautical miles above us, and another seven to the
west,” replied Wilamelee as she darted back toward Swan Boat.
154
38 { The Queen’s Welcome
Together with Wilamelee, the foursome boarded their

trusty vessel. Julie pulled down the ethmaroll and once again
the boat sank down into the water like a submarine. This time,
Leo sat by the tiller and steered the boat wherever Wilamelee
directed. Immediately after passing through the wide coral
gates, she pointed straight up. The six blue whales guarding
Coral Castle sang a farewell song as the little boat passed, rising
slowly but steadily, keeping close to the endless coral reef.
The higher they rose, the lighter it became. Leo, in his
excitement to be steering the boat, tried to rise up too quickly.
Wilamelee cautioned him to slow down. “She’s right, otherwise
we’ll get the bends,” Julie agreed. “It has something to do with
the decrease in pressure.” Although it annoyed Leo that Julie
always seemed to know everything, he slowed down, especially
when she said, “Seriously, it can result in eardrums bursting.
People get dizzy and numb, especially in the legs, which can
lead to paralysis.” Leo didn’t like the sound of that at all.
Although the children were anxious to be on their way,
there was so much to see that they didn’t mind their slow
ascent. The species of fish changed with the depth, becoming
more colorful though less luminous. The scenery was a never-
ending delight for the children to watch.
At length, they popped through to the ocean surface. The
sun shone brightly and the water was smooth, with only a few
ripples caused by a gentle breeze. Leo slid back the ethmaroll
and they all breathed in the fresh sea air with relish. They saw
that they were shielded from the rough ocean waves in the
distance by a protective coral reef all around them.
155
“Let’s find a sheltered place to dock the boat,” Grilpy said,

standing at the boat’s prow looking around. Wilamelee jumped
on the railing next to him and pointed toward an alcove
nestled within the largest coral. Leo steered toward the natural
harbor, and as they approached, they saw that thousands of
water sprites perched all over the corals, many of them looking
almost identical to Wilamelee.
“See, they’re all waiting for us and for Queen Marquella-
moosh,” Wilamelee said in her high, watery voice, glad to see
the smiling nymphs on the corals and waving to them with her
webbed hands.
“How did they know that we were coming?” Annabel asked.
“Oh, in our world we know as soon as a thought is formed
or a feeling is put into action,” the water sprite explained.
When the boat reached the coral bank, the nymphs clapped
their webbed hands and gurgled in delight, which sounded like
the happy ringing of little silvery bells.
The water sprites had already prepared a place for the
children and the dwarf to sit. They’d covered the corals with
algae and seaweed against which the visitors could comfortably
recline. Swan Boat was cheerfully floating in a small cove, the
swan figurehead gazing out over the bay, looking forward to
seeing Queen Marquellamoosh again.
They did not have long to wait. As soon as they’d made
themselves comfortable, the calm waters stirred, twirled, and
whirled. To the accompaniment of countless flying fish, Queen
Marquellamoosh, in all her majestic glory, began to rise out
of the water. When her mighty head was above the water,
innumerable sylphs appeared like a fine mist surrounding her.
As they fluttered around her like a haze of hummingbirds, it
looked like the queen wore a rainbow veil.
156
“You have come, and we meet again.” The queen spoke

slowly, with a strong, welcoming voice that spread across the
bay like a gush of wind. “You, the children with the eyes to
see, ears to hear, and hearts to understand, I greet you.” She
paused, just long enough for the children to spot some tears
of joy roll down her gleaming cheeks. “Know and be assured
that all the creatures of the seven great oceans welcome you
and your dwarf friend to my vast realm. Now hear and heed
my words.”
157
39 { Gifts and Julie’s Query
“I have been expecting you, though I wasn’t sure of your

arrival. Before you tell me how you came to be here, I have a
small gift for each one of you humans.” The queen signaled to
three sea nymphs who swam up to the rocks where the children
were seated and gave each one a small coral chest with latches
carved from seashells. “If you are ever in need, open it and you
are sure to find something that will aid you. But do not open
it before you truly need it, for then the gift would be wasted.”
The corals were of exceptional beauty and form, each one
different, though all resembling the shape of an ear. They
wondered what was inside, but Julie nodded to the others and
they all put the little chests safely in their pockets next to the
other precious gifts. “Thank you, Queen Marquellamoosh,”
they murmured in unison.
“And, dwarf with the crystal smile, I have not forgotten you.”
The queen beckoned to another nymph, who swam forward
and handed him a similar coral chest. “You, on the other hand,
may open it right now.” As soon as he did, he chuckled. While
the children craned their necks to see the contents of the gift,
Grilpy took out his pipe, took a pinch of emerald-green powder
from the chest, and stuffed it into his pipe.
“I thank you from the bottom of my beard, most gracious
Queen Marquellamoosh. There is no better pipe powder in
all the deepest kingdoms of the dwarfs. Dried coral powder
mixed with the seaweed from the seven seas is the most sought-
after aroma among all the dwarfs. No other supreme vapor can
give us a tingle right down to our toes!” The queen nodded
graciously. For the rest of their audience, Grilpy puffed away,
grinning and wiggling his toes in delight.
158
Turning again to the children, Queen Marquellamoosh

asked, “Now what do you have to tell me? What paths have
you traveled? What has brought you here?” They looked at one
another, not knowing quite how to respond. Annabel and Leo
gestured for Julie to take up the report.
Although unsure of herself, Julie stood up and faced the
regal queen who towered above her, though most of her body
was submerged in water. She gathered her courage and, in order
to save precious time, came right to the point, leaving out many
of the details of their journey as she told of King Brathnar,
Crystal Canyon, their encounters with the Kraftabots, and
their adventures in the Soft Realm.
“We found the Tree of Life through which flows the Water
of Life. The dwarfs call it the Liquid Light. We have with us that
which are called the sunseeds, sunbeads or fnumbavats. They
are the seeds of Liquid Light, which we gathered by scraping off
the bark of Ahrumkarista, the sacred tree, which is the source
of the true Water of Life. Rossellippsill, the protector and ruler
of the Soft Realm, helped us; without her, we would not be
here. She also gave us the seeds to the Flora Hermeticus from the
fields of Lughshmarah.”
Julie paused, looked down at Leo and Annabel, then back
up at the queen. “But we have one question, and Rossellippsill
thought that you might know the answer. How should we use
these precious sunbeads, the fnumbavats, and the seeds from
the Flora Hermeticus?” Julie’s voice carried loud and clear across
the waters.
“You speak well, girl with the fine long hair of the morning
sun.” A slight smile hovered around the corners of Queen
Marquellamoosh’s mouth. “It is an honor to hear from the
mighty Rossellippsill, the warden of the Soft Realm deep
159
beneath our oceans. Your news fills us with renewed hope.

I have waited a long time for the new and pure waters from
Earth’s marrow to reach the world’s surface, even if only in
the present form of sunbeads or sunseeds. Know that these
fnumbavats are far more than seeds—they are transformers…”
The queen seemed about to explain, but changed her
mind. “But to answer your question: The fnumbavats will need
to be sown around Earth. Thereby, it will become less dense
so that the Liquid Light, which up to now reaches only King
Brathnar’s realm deep under the ground, will be able to rise
to the surface, to mix and mingle with the streams, lakes, and
rivers.” Lost in thought, the regal being had a dreamy look in
her eyes and a faint smile on her lips.
“So how exactly do we go about doing that?” Julie prodded.
“Can you tell us?”
160
40 { Fnumbavats’ Glow
“Show me the fnumbavats, those sunbeads from the Tree

of Life,” commanded the queen in a watery voice. Annabel
took out the slate-gray flask and opened it. The granules
shone like golden nuggets, brilliant even in daylight. Queen
Marquellamoosh leaned forward, which immediately created
some dangerously large waves. At the sight of the light from
the shiny seeds, the sea nymphs broke into a dance, and the
sylphs started to sing, fluttering their wings with excitement.
As they sang and danced, the glow increased so that even the
flask gained in color and gleamed golden, like a little sun in
Annabel’s hand.
“Dear children, you might not realize it, but what you
have brought up from Earth’s depths is greater than the most
precious treasure ever found.” The queen held her breath in
reverence.
“What do you mean?” Julie could not grasp their true worth
and power. “They’re so small, and they dissolve in water, and
easily crumble into dust.”
“The fact that they dissolve and crumble is part of their
value,” the queen said. “Earth is old. Very old! It has weakened,
and what you have is the best medicine for aging Mother Earth.
More than that—it is the essential medicine. Let me give you a
glimpse of its power.” The queen looked at Annabel. “Girl with
the radiant eyes and deep royal smile, do us the honor and pick
out one of the smallest sunbeads.”
Annabel carefully chose one that was the size of a grain of
rice. Though small, it shone like a bright star in her dark palm.
She closed her fingers around it so that it would not fall. To
the children’s surprise, her little fist began to glow from the
161
inside out, like a piece of coal or a lantern. “Now drop it into

the water, Annabel.”
The nymphs stopped dancing and the sylphs ceased their
singing. Annabel sat up straight and paused for a moment. She
knew that something wondrous was about to happen. Then,
leaning forward, she dropped the kernel into the water.
As soon as it touched the water, she drew back in surprise.
Light spread and radiated out across the entire bay. Within
seconds, the blue water became honey-colored, not just the
surface, but right into the depths. Even the scattered white
clouds above them gained a golden sheen.
The children stared in amazement and Grilpy forgot to take
a drag on his pipe. The bay rippled with life, and flying fish
shot from the water with joy. The light spread beyond Coral
Bay, out into the ocean, and soon dolphins and whales were
jumping and diving with vigor.
“Now do you see? You’ve had a glimpse of its power. The
places on Earth that are dead and dying will be revived with
these life seeds. It is your task, dear children, to bring the
fnumbavats to these ailing locations,” the queen said earnestly
with motherly warmth in her voice.
“How will we know which places need it most?” Julie wanted
to know, suddenly feeling the full weight of their commitment.
“It will become evident.” The queen nodded solemnly.
“But there must be countless places that need to be
enlivened.” Annabel looked perplexed.
“True, but you have to start somewhere, no matter how
small. Besides, you will not be able to do it all by yourselves.
You will need the help of others.”
“But who? Can’t you take some and plant them yourself in
the places you know need it the most?” Leo asked. He had no
doubt that the queen would know best.
162
“I could, but this task can be fulfilled only by humans.

We can guide and help, but you must do the sowing.” Queen
Marquellamoosh smiled reassuringly. “I have to bid you
farewell. Go home. Look with your hearts to find the places
that need the fnumbavats the most—and plant them.”
With that, Queen Marquellamoosh began to sink down
into the water. “Find those who will help. But remember, not
all offers are helpful.” She sank lower and lower. “And beware,
there are those who want to steal and destroy your treasure.
Guard it well. Farewell, for now.” With these final words, she
sank beneath the waves that broke against the coral reefs on
which Grilpy and the children sat. As the queen disappeared
into her watery world, so did the sylphs, followed finally by the
nymphs. The five were left in silence, staring over Coral Bay
that still shimmered faintly golden.
“Wilamelee, too must bid farewell,” the little sprite said,
and got up reluctantly. “But we will see you again. Until then,
Wilamelee wishes you good planting,” and she dove into the
water amid the ripples left by the others of her world. The
four travelers watched her swim off and disappear amongst the
corals under the sea.
“We should also get going,” Grilpy announced crisply,
packing away his pipe and powder before slapping his short,
thick thighs and standing. “It’s time to sail back home and for
you to sleep in your own beds again.” The children stood up as
well and stretched, taking a last look at their marvelous lounge
chairs and thinking about their feast, the audience with the
queen, and her final instructions. Grilpy lifted Annabel once
onto his broad shoulders and the group climbed down to the
little coral alcove where Swan Boat waited patiently.
163
41 { Back in the Cold
The skies darkened on their flight back home, as Leo

steered, zigzagging through the gathering clouds. He thought
to himself, quite proudly, that he was really getting the hang of
captaining the little boat. Gusts of chilly winds pummeled the
boat, and Julie quickly shut the ethmaroll.
Once they reached the mainland, Grilpy took over steering
the boat. The dwarf directed the boat above the clouds and
increased speed. Leo frowned just a bit when he realized that
the dwarf knew, better than he, which way to sail. It was so cold
that ice stars formed on the outside of the ethmaroll.
“I’d forgotten all about the winter,” Annabel remarked.
“Me, too,” Julie admitted. “In fact, I didn’t think much of
home at all.”
“Me, neither. That’s so weird.” Leo laughed, but then grew
serious. “Oh no, how long have we been gone?” The children
looked at one another in sudden shock.
“I don’t know,” Annabel whispered. “It seems like days.”
“Or even weeks,” Leo added, putting his head in his hand,
groaning.
“No, it can’t be weeks.” Julie rubbed her forehead, as if
she wanted to clear her mind. “What will Mom and Dad say?
Surely by now they’ll have called the police. They must be
totally worried.”
“And Aunt Miriam! She’ll be going crazy.” Annabel wrung
her hands, frantically.
“What are we going to tell them?” Julie bit on her lip and
took a deep breath.
“Don’t worry. Everything’s going to be alright,” Grilpy
assured them.
164
“How can you be so sure? We’ve been gone so long.” Julie

continued, muttering under her breath while trying to calculate
exactly how long they’d been traveling.
“I’m sure because…” and Grilpy pointed to a huge cloud
mass in front of them. Instantly, the others recognized it.
“Skull Mountain!” Leo shouted. “Somehow, it doesn’t look
so scary anymore.”
“Do we have to go through it again?” Annabel asked.
“Yes, we do, but in reverse this time.” Grilpy steered the
boat toward the huge hole at the top of the skull. “Curly
Beard brought you to the Great Gates of the Carved Dome
for a special reason. Therefore, we have to return through the
gates. And here we go!” They passed so rapidly through the
three domes, they barely had time to appreciate the splendor of
the magnificent horse and the beauty of the grand grass-green
woman.
The moment they flew out of the skull’s enormous
jawbones, Grilpy said to Leo, “Take out your pocket watch and
tell us the time.” Leo fumbled for the watch he’d received from
his grandfather.
“Hey, it’s 5:13 p.m., the exact time we entered Skull
Mountain! My watch must have stopped. Oh no, I hope it’s
not broken.” Leo moaned.
“Oh, Leo! Maybe you weren’t careful enough with it. It was
always so reliable.” Julie scolded her younger brother, distressed
that something so precious to her grandfather might be broken.
“No, no. It is still quite reliable.” Grilpy smiled. “As I said,
you don’t have to worry. Your watch is ticking again. It stopped
only when you passed through Skull Mountain. No time has
passed. Your parents have not missed you. As far as they know,
you have been gone only for the afternoon.”
165
“How’s that possible? I know we’ve been gone for more

than an afternoon,” Julie declared.
“You passed through the Great Gates of the Carved Dome
in order to overcome time. That was the main reason Curly
Beard brought you to Skull Mountain. In our realm, the laws
of time do not adhere; they don’t count in the same way as they
do in your world. It’s one reason it is so hard for humans to
believe in us, and why they forget about us so easily. For most
humans, our world appears like a dream, and dreams are not
bound by regular time. They are hard to hold onto and mostly
forgotten, just like the memories of us.”
The children shook their heads in amazement. Julie and Leo
were relieved that they didn’t need to worry about their parents,
nor Annabel, about her aunt. They could now concentrate on
how determined they would need to be to remember all that
they’d learned and experienced. They had a valuable treasure
to remind them. Yet they knew how easily one could forget.
The evening sun peeked through the clouds as they neared
the city. Swan Boat descended and the children were delighted
to see their park with Lion Rock below them. Grilpy aimed
for the chimney of their brownstone and, moments later, they
were back in Annabel’s apartment.
The children sighed as they looked around the familiar
surroundings, which they felt they had last occupied many
days ago. The passengers quickly debarked and Leo let the boat
retreat back into its bottle.
“What now? What’s next?” Leo asked Grilpy as they stood
in the living room.
“Just rest and gather your strength for a while.” Grilpy stood
on the coffee table next to a wooden bowl filled with mixed
nuts. He smiled at the spirited children who—after all they had
166
been through—were eagerly asking about their next task. How

fortunate it was that these little humans were so brave at heart
that they would take up this vital work! “You’ve had quite an
adventure, so take it easy now. What you must do with the
treasure you received will become clear soon enough. You’ll
know when the time comes. Whatever you do, the decision
needs to come from you. Rest now and replenish yourselves.”
“Really? We just wait? No more help from you or Queen
Marquellamoosh?” Julie became flustered. She felt the weight of
responsibility on their shoulders and fearful that they wouldn’t
be good at making the decisions that clearly lay ahead.
“I didn’t say there would be no help. But yes, now you have
to determine when, where, and why you need our help, and
how we can best serve you.” Looking up at their dismayed
faces, Grilpy laughed and said, “Don’t fret. You’re tired and
need some sleep. Trust that you will recognize what needs to be
done, or…” and he paused, “…left undone.”
“But we will see you again, Grilpy?” Annabel asked
cautiously.
“Yes, you’ll hear from me, no worries. So until then…” The
sturdy dwarf bowed his head and, in the next instant, he was
gone. The children stood alone in the fading light of the room,
kept company only by the church bells down the road that rang
out six times in the cold evening air.
167
part six
In Pursuit of the Task
42 { Hearing the Call
No sooner had Grilpy left than the children realized how

tired they were. “I could fall asleep right here.” Leo yawned and
collapsed on the floor, curling up on the carpet.
“You can’t do that. Get up,” Julie ordered. She knew that
Leo could literally sleep anywhere. “We all need sleep, but in
our own beds. Come on, let’s go.”
“Fine. Enough already,” whined Leo as he hauled himself
back up, rubbing his eyes. “But shouldn’t we make a plan, talk
about what we’re going to do?”
“No way. I can’t think about anything right now,” Annabel
responded, yawning. “Let’s meet up tomorrow. We’ll talk some
more then.”
“Good idea.” Julie pulled Leo by the arm. “We’re outta
here.”
Once they were gone, Annabel wrote a note to Aunt
Miriam to let her know that she’d gone to bed early and left
it on the kitchen table. Then she carefully placed her cloak
and other treasures in the bottom drawer of her wardrobe and
put the flask of sunbeads and the coral chest underneath some
of the letters and get-well cards she’d received from Massud,
her brother.
168
Part 6 » In Pursuit of the Task
As she got ready for bed, Annabel allowed herself to feel

the longing that tugged at her heart when she remembered her
missing brother; she wondered, as she had so many times before,
where he might be at this very moment. She also thought of
Queen Marquellamoosh’s words, assuring her that she would
meet him again, though she might not recognize him. At least
the queen’s promise convinced her that Massud was still alive.
Annabel sighed and, checking to make sure that she’d
pushed the drawer shut, she climbed into her waiting bed
and fell asleep almost immediately. She didn’t even hear Aunt
Miriam come in five minutes later to check on her, give her a
kiss on the cheek, and pull the blankets over her bare shoulders.
Meanwhile, Julie and Leo couldn’t slip off to bed as easily.
Sidney came running and barking toward them even before
they’d opened the door. They were glad to see him, despite
his jumping and slobbering. Sidney went into a sniffing frenzy
at all the unfamiliar smells that still clung to them from their
exploits. They were glad he couldn’t talk, or he would have
given away their secrets.
“Did you have fun playing in the snow?” Mrs. Temple asked,
putting down her pen and looking up. She was sitting at her
desk, correcting the final draft of her doctoral dissertation.
“We did, though we mostly played indoor games with
Annabel.”
“You both look exhausted, and your clothes are all rumpled.
I’d just ironed them. Your games must have included some
roughhousing, am I right?”
“Mom, you guessed it,” Julie admitted. “But don’t worry.
I can easily do the ironing.”
“Me too,” Leo added. “I did a pretty good job on my pants
when I tried.”
169
The door opened and Mr. Temple entered, his thick black
hair sprinkled with a layer of snow. “Hi, one and all,” he called
out as he shook his head like a poodle. “It’s coming down thick
and fast again.” He smiled as he took off his coat, shaking it
just as vigorously. “For a while, it had cleared, but I guess it’s
not over yet,” and he shook his coat again.
“Not all over the floor! Oh, Gerald.” The children giggled
at their mother’s exasperated expression.
“Angie, it’s only snow. Anyway, I’ve got some Chinese take-
out and a pizza, so we don’t need to cook.” Their father was
clever thought Julie; her mother would be distracted by the
fact that he had saved her from having to take time from her
writing to fix a family meal.
“Bit of a weird combination, don’t you think?” Mrs. Temple
remarked.
“Sure, a weird combo for a weird family,” her husband
joked as he placed the food boxes on the coffee table. “So let’s
get to it!”
“Dad, you’re in a good mood today!” Leo said, getting up
from the couch and peering into the pizza box.
“Of course!” exclaimed his father as he rubbed his hands
together. “Snow always makes me feel so fresh and awake.”
Julie and Leo did not feel so fresh at that very moment, but
their father’s cheeriness, coupled with the aromatic smell of
pizza wafting from the cardboard boxes, gave them temporary
energy.
“Just don’t make too much of a mess,” Mrs. Temple warned.
She could never quite get used to the casual fast-food, take-
out culture. She’d grown up with three meals a day, which the
whole family ate together around the table. Gerald had grown
up fixing his own food and sharing TV dinners. Now, they
compromised.
170
After the meal, Mr. Temple brewed himself some coffee and
sank into his favorite, plush armchair to read the newspaper.
Mrs. Temple continued working on her draft, while Julie and
Leo cleared the table. And, as usual, Mr. Temple interrupted
his reading with comments. “Hey, listen to this. While we’re
having an unusual amount of snow, they’re having record-
breaking droughts down South. The world’s going crazy.”
“It’s not so much the world that’s going crazy,” Mrs. Temple
interjected, “but how we humans are treating the world—that’s
what’s crazy. It’s what we do to Earth! Just take a look at the
oil and chemical spills—now that’s crazy! Or how we ignore
the human waste in all its forms: the toxic and nuclear waste,
andthe islands of plastic that contaminate the oceans. Think
about all the industrial disasters that pollute Earth.”
“Wow, Mom, you got really passionate there,” Julie noted,
chuckling at her mother’s intensity. Mrs. Temple just grunted
and returned to work on her draft.
“Of course, you’re right, Angie.” Mr. Temple ruffled the
newspaper into place. “But this weather issue is really serious.
It’s supposed to be the rainy season down South but the
drought from last summer has just continued. Most lakes and
rivers have dried out completely. A state of emergency has been
declared. Even some of the biggest reservoirs are dangerously
low.”
“Yeah, we had our flood in the summer, while they didn’t
get a drop of rain,” Julie stated. “A flood down there would have
filled up their water reservoirs. But here it caused tremendous
damage.”
“Yup, as I said—crazy!” Mr. Temple took a sip of coffee and
continued reading. Julie looked over at Leo and nodded for
him to follow her into the kitchen.
171
“I know what we have to do,” Julie whispered to Leo while

putting the Chinese leftovers into the fridge.
“What do you mean?” Leo asked, nibbling on a pizza crust.
“Now I know what our next task is.”
“What?” Leo was so taken off guard that he stopped sharing
his pizza with Sidney.
“It’s totally clear. We have to do something about the
drought.” Julie fixed her gaze on her younger brother. “Don’t
look so puzzled. The drought that Dad just read about! It’s
obvious. It’s an emergency. Something needs to be done.”
They heard their father shout out, “And what’s worse is
that the water is not only scarce, but it’s contaminated due to
sewage, abandoned mines, and toxic waste from factories.”
Leo stopped chewing and looked worried. “You’re right.
We’ve found out what we have to do—but how?”
“Yeah, that’s the question.” Julie shut the door of the
refrigerator. “We’ll talk more about it tomorrow with Annabel.
Anyway, I’m dead tired. I’m off to bed.”
“Me, too.” Leo finished the last bite of pizza and pushed
Sidney’s nose out of the empty box. “Sorry, fella. There’s no
more for either one of us.”
172
43 { The Shadow
Tired as she was, Annabel slept in fits and starts. Her sleep
was disrupted by recurring nightmares of a Kraftabot chasing
her. She was running with Leo and Julie when she suddenly
remembered that she couldn’t run. At once, her legs turned
stiff like sticks. She couldn’t even shuffle, and she saw her
friends run off, leaving her behind. Worse, her whole body
refused to move, and her mouth was glued shut, making it
impossible to scream for help. There was no escape! Just as the
Kraftabot jumped on top of her, she woke in a cold sweat. Her
heart was pounding so wildly that she didn’t dare go back to
sleep lest she dream of a Kraftabot again.
Recovering, Annabel stared out of the window. Stars
twinkled gently. “It must have stopped snowing,” she whispered
to herself. She felt for her crutches, got up, and hobbled over
to the window. Leaning against the windowsill, she peered out.
The roads and the park below were covered with a thick layer
of new snow, partly lit by lamplight. Not a soul was in sight. Her
eyes lifted back up to the stars, and a scoop of moon peered out
from behind the trees. Her heart stopped pounding and she
felt at peace.
Minutes later, as she turned to go back to bed, she thought
she saw something move near the bottom drawer where she had
placed her treasures. She leaned forward, but saw nothing. The
moment she looked away, she again saw a movement, which
stopped again as soon as she fixed her gaze on the drawer.
Annabel made as if she was looking away, but watched the
drawer from the corner of her eye. She saw a shadow the size
of a squirrel try to pull something from the drawer. Quickly,
Annabel lashed out with her left crutch. The shadowy creature
173
let go and darted out through her bedroom door, leaving it

slightly ajar.
Whatever it was, this shadowy thing was hardly as fearsome
as many of the things she had seen on her recent adventures.
Annabel followed without hesitation. In the faint moonlight
that shone into the passageway, she spied the shadow jump
up onto the shoe rack. For an instant, she saw it clearly—its
body was like a flat head, and the arms and legs were stubbles,
though it still moved with great agility. The next moment, it
scampered up to the coats, down the passageway, and was gone.
She ventured forward, one crutch lifted up in case it jumped
out at her. Although it was too dark to see anything clearly,
she didn’t want to switch the light on in case she woke Aunt
Miriam. For a while, she waited, looking out for the slightest
movement, but saw no more.
Back in her room, Annabel checked the open drawer. Her
cloak was pulled from its place. The coral chest from Queen
Marquellamoosh was visible and so was the cap from King
Brathnar. Then she saw that the flask of sunbeads had been
dragged from underneath Massud’s letters to the edge of the
drawer. A wave of fear shot to her face. She breathed deep and
swallowed hard, realizing that this creature had been looking
for something. Did it try to steal the sunbeads? Where did it
come from? How did it know she might have what it wanted?
Was it an animal or something more sinister?
Luckily, she’d woken up just in time and nothing was
missing. She quickly rolled up the flask in the cloak, tucked
it under two sweaters, pushed the drawer shut, and shoved a
chair in front of it. To be on the safe side, she also closed the
door of her bedroom. Satisfied with her precautions, she went
back to bed and slept soundly till morning.
174
44 { Flimsk
Julie’s first thought as she stepped into the living room

early the next morning was, it stinks and the air is stale. The
others were still in bed. Even Sidney, lying on his blanket in the
corner next to the fish tank, didn’t budge. He barely opened
his eyes, and wagged only the tip of his tail before continuing
to sleep.
Julie went to the window next to her mother’s potted
plants that she had brought in from the balcony before the first
frost in the fall. “I’m sure you also want some fresh air,” she
murmured while opening the window, noticing that a large red
hibiscus had flowered. Julie leaned out and took a deep breath
of fresh air.
“Ah, at last! Thanks you, I’m soooo gladst. And next time
yous eats chop suey, please eats it in the kitchen.” Julie spun
round. Who said that?
“Heres I am.” The voice came from the cluster of potted
plants. Julie couldn’t see anybody. “Yes, warmer, warmer; yous
looking in the rightst direction.” Julie peered behind the aloe
and the spider plant. “Nopes, colder.” Julie looked up at the
jade plant. “Yes, warmer.” Now she followed the heart-leaf
philodendron that stretched along the side of the wall up to
the ceiling. “Oops, colder again.” She looked down at the pot
of geraniums. “Ah, hotter.” At last, she looked at the newly
opened red hibiscus. “Hots, hots, hots—yes!”
“A fairy! You’re so beautiful!” Julie could hardly contain her
excitement. The little being sat on top of the red hibiscus, its
slender legs drawn up to its chin, its transparent wings reflecting
gentle colors that were arranged in patterns and changing
with the slightest movement. A faint glow surrounded the
delicate being.
175
“Congratulations! I’ms the one and only Flitra-Mistra-

Tilly-Nabob-Langstrim, but you can call me Flimsk,” the fairy
chirped in a fast, high-pitched but very clear voice. “But I ams
not a girl fairy. I’ms a he-fairy, just so’s you know.” With that
he shook his wings, let his feet dangle over the edge of the
hibiscus, and spread his thin arms, fanning his fingers.
“Flimsk. I can remember that. Good to meet you, Flimsk.
You look just like the fairies in my picture books, except that
you are a boy fairy.”
“Well, I didst that on purpose, only so yous would recognize
me.” Flimsk fluttered into a standing position. “I canst appear
in any shapes I want. Like this,” and he changed into a butterfly
with an oval, smiling face.
“You still look like a fairy.” Julie tried not to look too
impressed.
“Or like this,” and he changed into a slim bumblebee. “Or
like this,” and he transformed into a hummingbird. “Or like
this.” Now he looked like a dragonfly.
Julie laughed. “You might look different every time, but
you still look like a fairy to me—friendly and smiling. You have
wings and you are small.”
“I don’tst have to be small. Looks girl, I canst be bigs and
huge. I canst be gigantic.” Instantly, he expanded in size to
equal Julie, except that he was now almost transparent, like a
haze, and as delicate as a rainbow. He still had wings, though
he curled them up so they were barely visible, like two folded
umbrellas under his arms. “See, I canst be whatevers I wantst
to be—tall, small, fat, thin, whatevers.”
Julie laughed again. “Yes, yes, you do look like a giant now,
and I’m sure you can change into anything,” she said, though
she thought Flimsk still looked like a fairy no matter what
shape he chose.
176
“See, I toldst you,” and he shrank to his original size and

sat back down on the hibiscus, his legs crossed, toes wriggling
contentedly. “Oh, and another thing. We’s don’tst likes to be
called fairies. It’s an old word that offends some of us. It’s too
cutesy. It’s become a bit of a no-no-no word with us fairy folk,
especially us younger ones. Makes us sound weak, and we’re
anything but weak. In fact, we’re really strongst.” Again, he
fluttered into standing and suddenly performed a routine of
bodybuilding poses. “See? We’s got it. But of course, we’s don’t
want to parade our prowess,” and he humbly fluttered down
onto the rim of the blue enamel planter.
“Anyway, thanks for opening the window. The chop suey-
pizza air wast making my wings frown,” said Flimsk as he
wrinkled his tiny wings, letting them droop like a wilted salad
leaf. The next second, he fluttered back up and landed on the
wide, waxy leaf of a schefflera.
“Well, it’s good to meet you, Flimsk. I’m Julie.”
“Okayst, Julie, nows that we’ve introduced each other:
Willst you come?”
“What do you mean? Come where?” Julie was a bit startled.
“Yous and the other two boateers?”
“Boateers?” Julie still couldn’t make sense of what Flimsk
was asking.
“Yes, yous, the boy with the sunny hair, and the girl with
the midsummer night’s face and two moon eyes.”
“Oh, you mean my brother, Leo, and Annabel, our friend
from downstairs.”
“Exactly. Those two.” Flimsk rose up in a kind of pirouette
and settled back down, smiling as if everything was now clear.
“Where do you want us to go?” asked Julie, still not
understanding.
177
“Didn’t I just explainst all that?” Flimsk fluttered over to

the aloe.
“No.” Julie couldn’t stop smiling, watching the fairy flutter
hither and thither.
“We’s heardst that you needed help in helping, so I’s was
sent to invite you.”
“Who sent you? And invite us where?” Julie persisted.
“Yous still don’t know? My, everything takes so ever-all long
with yous humans.” Flimsk’s wings fluttered in frustration.
“What takes so long?” Julie was shaking her head, waiting
for the fairy to realize that he had not yet explained himself
at all.
“Fine, I’ll startst again from the very beginning. But this
time, listen.”
“Of course.” Julie sat on the edge of the coffee table and,
trying hard not to giggle, looked up at Flimsk.
“I’s been asked by Swinglashna, our Sovereign Lady of the
Sky, to invite you to her realm. I canst lead you and your fellow
boateers to her. She canst help you.”
“How does she know about us?” Julie’s interest was piqued
now—they’d have yet another realm to explore.
“Last night, yous decided that yous wanted to do something
about the drought in the South, isn’t that rightst?” Flimsk
leaned forward, as if urging her to understand.
“Yes.”
“But you don’tst know hows to go about helping, isn’t that
rightst?”
“Yes, that’s rightst—I mean right,” Julie confirmed, smiling
at her slip of the tongue.
“So theres yous are! She heardst your intention, she knows
about your treasure, and she canst help. How long do I needs
178
to go on for? It’s so clear!” With that, Flimsk flew into the air,
circled around the parlor palm tree and landed back on the
blue flowerpot.
“Yes, of course we’ll come,” Julie nodded cautiously. But
I’ve got to wait until my two boateers are up. I also have to take
Sidney, our dog, for a walk. And before that I’ve got to make
breakfast. Besides…”
“Yes, yes, yes, yous don’tst have to speakst a whole bookst
about what has to be donest. While yous getst ready, I’ll fly
back to tell Swinglashna that you’ll be comingst. I’ll be waiting
for yous right here by the flowers when the cuckoo in that boxt
on the wall pops and callst ten times.”
“Make it eleven, just to be safe.” Julie was running through
a list of tasks in her head. They’d just gotten home with barely
time to take a breath, and now they’d have to rush off again.
“If it must be, but I couldst fly right around Earth in that
time. My, yous humans are slow.” Flimsk fluttered his wings
once again and then, suddenly, out the window he darted.
“Who were you talking to?” Mrs. Temple asked, appearing
in her dressing gown.
“Oh, hi Mom, I was just, um… talking to the, um… the
hibiscus. Don’t you think it’s beautiful? It must have opened
this morning. That deep radiant red—love it.” Julie bent over
the flower as if she was about to hug it. She smiled to herself,
thinking how simple this single bloom was in comparison to
the ones she had seen in the Soft Realm.
“Ah, I’m glad I’m not the only one who talks to flowers.”
Mrs. Temple walked into the kitchen. “Come Julie, help me
get breakfast ready. What do you think… should we make some
apple pancakes?”
179
45 { The Mask
The sound of Aunt Miriam grinding coffee woke Annabel.

Though tired, she got up and dressed quickly, wanting to spend
some time with her aunt before she left for work. As Annabel
entered the hallway, she remembered the strange encounter of
the night before.
The memory of the shadowy creature flashed up. Annabel
hobbled down the hallway and inspected the shoe rack and
coats with her crutch, but nothing was amiss. She started to turn
away when a chill rushed through her body. Of the many masks
hanging in the hallway, the one immediately above the coat rack
caught her attention. Though she’d passed it by thousands of
times, she’d never given it a closer look. The toad-like creature
with stumps protruding from its sides resembled the grotesque
creature she’d seen the night before. She shuddered.
“Annabel, sweetie, come join me for breakfast. I’m making
waffles. The hospital called, and my shift has been changed. I
don’t need to be in until 8:45 this morning.” Annabel’s aunt
seemed delighted to have more time to spend with her niece.
“Sounds delicious. Let me help you.” Annabel was glad to
have something cheerful to occupy her mind.
“Fine. Sit down and cut some kiwis and a mango to put on
the waffles.”
While they prepared breakfast, Annabel asked, “Tell me
about those masks hanging in the hallway.”
“Oh, they’re from Africa. Most belonged to your parents,
but the rest I brought over, relics from our tribe representing
our ancestors. They would have been destroyed had we not
taken them.” Aunt Miriam set the table with the colorful
dishware that always made the breakfast table look cheerful.
180
“What do you mean destroyed? How?” Annabel was sure

she’d never heard this story.
“Oh, there was a lot of upheaval in my part of Africa. First,
there was a drought. Then came the locusts. Finally, our tribe
was threatened by war. That’s when I heard I was needed here.
I was lucky to get out. I was the last in line of our ancestors.
You see, I was a healer in Africa, and it was my responsibility
to care for these masks. I healed people with herbs and I was a
keeper of ancient healing traditions. Anyway, it was good that
I got out in time. A few weeks after I left, my village was burnt
down, overrun by soldiers of the new dictator in the country.”
Aunt Miriam had a faraway look in her eyes, and the pain in
her heart was easy to sense.
“That’s terrible! Well, I’m glad you’re here.” Annabel
stopped cutting the fruit for a moment and leaned against her
aunt, stroking her. “Which masks did you bring?”
“I brought only four. The ebony mask with the long face
belonged to your great-great-granduncle—he was considered
one of the greatest chiefs our country had ever seen because he
unified all the warring tribes. The three smaller ebony masks
belonged to his sons and grandsons who also ruled for a while.”
“What about the mask above the coat rack?” Annabel was
anxious to learn about the toad-like mask.
“Oh, that mask has nothing to do with our family, and I
don’t know much about it.” Aunt Miriam poured the mix into
the waffle iron and gently lowered the lid. “Apparently, your
brother, Massud, brought it home one day, shortly after your
family moved here. I have to confess, I’ve never liked it. But I’ve
kept it because your mother told me how excited Massud was
when he first brought it home. She said that he’d purchased it at
a flea market because he felt it gave him a personal connection
181
to Africa, which he’d never had—and because it was cheap.”

Aunt Miriam checked the waffles to see if they were done.
“Well, I don’t like it much either—never have,” Annabel
said a bit too hotly, remembering how it had pried open the
drawer. She held the serving platter as her aunt began to pile
the steaming waffles on it. After all her adventures, waffles had
never looked so good.
“I’ve often thought of getting rid of it, but then I think
of Massud, and how upset he might be if it were gone.” Aunt
Miriam lifted the last golden-brown waffle onto the plate.
“Well, let’s enjoy these.”
The sun shone through the kitchen window, casting a warm
light across the breakfast table and the bouquet of red roses on
the kitchen counter. “Do you think he’s still alive?” Annabel
had never talked to Aunt Miriam like this before.
“Of course, I do! I think of him every day,” Aunt Miriam
said encouragingly.
“So do I.” Annabel sighed, glancing out the window as if
her brother might be approaching their building at this very
moment.
“This conversation is making you sad. Cheer up!” Aunt
Miriam put a waffle on Annabel’s plate. “Here’s some maple
syrup. Let’s eat.”
“Yes, let’s,” replied Annabel, clapping her hands. “Waffles
always smell so good.” She didn’t know what she would do
without Aunt Miriam. But now she was more determined than
ever to find Massud, to make good the promise to her mother
to find her brother. She’d promised her mother that she’d
never forget Massud and to look for him when she was older.
That time was drawing close.
182
“Well, these waffles are so good that I’ll have one more
before I’m off to the hospital.” Aunt Miriam raised her
eyebrows and gave Annabel a smile that warmed her as much
as the delicious homemade waffles.
“Well, those patients sure are lucky to have you. If I were in
the hospital, you’d be my favorite nurse.” Annabel smiled back,
glad that Aunt Miriam was staying a few more minutes. “I think
I’ll have another waffle myself, though I’m already stuffed.”
183
46 { Off to the South
“Yes, I know it’s my turn to take Sidney for a walk, Leo.

Come with me anyway. I need to talk to you.” Julie grabbed her
brother’s coat as she got her own.
“But I really don’t feel like it,” Leo whined. “I just want to
set up my model train set and hang out.”
“Sorry, but this is more important.” Julie whispered so that
her parents wouldn’t hear. “Remember, our task?”
“But we can talk about that with Annabel when you get
back. Leave me alone!” Lying on the carpet in the living room,
Leo was still in his pajamas. Julie knew it was almost hopeless
to convince him of anything when he was tired and half asleep.
“Fine, I’ll go by myself. But you’d better be dressed and
ready when I get back because we won’t have much time before
we have to go again.”
“Go where?” Leo sighed. He was in no mood for more
adventures right now.
“That’s exactly what I wanted to talk to you about.” Julie
hissed as Sidney barked impatiently, scratching at the door.
Leo groaned, closed his eyes, and rolled over on his stomach,
covering his head with his hands. “I’m so tired. I don’t feel
like going anywhere.” Sidney barked again, followed by a long,
drawn out yelp.
“Sidney’s going to pee if you don’t take him out this
minute,” Mrs. Temple shouted from her bedroom.
“I’m on it,” Julie yelled back, then turned to Leo. “Be ready,
or else!”
“Or else, what?” Leo countered, but she ignored him and
stormed out, her hair flaring behind her.
184
Julie’s annoyance subsided as soon as she strolled through

the peaceful park. The streets were noisy with snowplows,
snowblowers, and people shoveling the pavements or scraping
ice off their windshields. In contrast, the park was a quiet
sanctuary, with only a few people walking through. She
thought back to Flimsk and the fairy’s unexpected visit, and
couldn’t help but smile. She was looking forward to seeing
him again. She wondered where he would take them and who
Swinglashna, this Lady of the Sky, could be. At that moment,
she heard someone behind her shout, “Watch out!”
Two boys on a blue plastic sled hurtled down the hill
straight toward Julie. She jumped out of the way, pulling
Sidney with her. “Sorry!” they shouted in passing, laughing as
they veered into the path and continued down toward the lake
at the bottom of the hill.
It made her think about how strange and different her
life had become compared to most other children her age. If
she told those boys of the adventures she’d had recently, they
wouldn’t believe her; they’d think she was crazy, or even tease
her. Yet it had become so normal to her.
At the same time, Julie knew that if she, Leo, and Annabel
were really going to save the environment around them, they’d
need the help of other people, especially other children—but
how, without being ridiculed or laughed at?
Sidney tugged her up the next hill. When they reached the
top, Julie saw dozens of children with their sleds, frolicking in
the snow, throwing snowballs and building snowmen. It made
her feel lonely. For a moment, she wished she didn’t have to go
on another journey, that she could just join the fun. But it was
time to go back.
185
To Julie’s surprise, Leo was dressed and sitting in the middle

of his train tracks that he’d built up while she was gone. “I’m
glad to see you’re awake. You were a bit of a jerk earlier on,
you know that?” Julie scolded. Leo didn’t respond, but took
another bite of a rolled-up pancake that he’d snuck from the
kitchen. “If Mom sees you eating pancakes here on the carpet,
she’ll… oh, whatever.” Leo just looked at her and grinned,
showing chewed-up pancake between his teeth. Julie unleashed
Sidney who jumped for the last morsel of pancake that Leo
threw his way, catching it perfectly. “Why are you smiling like
that?” Julie asked suspiciously.
“He’s smiling because we promised to bring him back some
more tracks for his train set, to make up for the ones that got
damaged when we moved here,” Mr. Temple said, putting on
his coat.
“And maybe some trees and a mat of ready-made grass,”
Leo added with a twinkle in his eye. He got up and sat down at
the breakfast table across from his sister, and they both began
eating the apple pancakes, slathering them in butter and syrup,
devouring them as if they’d had nothing to eat for a week.
“Maybe. But what about you, Julie—want anything? We’re
going downtown to do some shopping.” Mr. Temple smiled
at his hungry children as he put on his favorite brown leather
gloves. They’d been a gift from Julie and Leo, who had worked
for their mother by doing extra chores for months to save up
the money to buy them.
“No, nothing. Well, maybe a bag of Gummi Bears.” Julie
smiled at her father appreciatively. She knew that her parents
were concerned about whether she and her brother were happy
with the family move to the city. It had been hard to leave
the farm.
186
But so much had happened to Julie and Leo since then.

They were carrying out their grandfather’s legacy in a way that
Julie imagined they might never had done if they’d stayed on
the farm. Certainly, they never would have met Annabel. Julie
was sure that the three of them had some special purpose.
“I think we can manage that,” Mrs. Temple said, tying a
burgundy scarf loosely around her neck. “And what are you
going to do today?”
“The usual. Play with Annabel and work on my train set,”
Leo answered, getting up and stepping back into the lemniscate
of train tracks.
“Have fun! We’ll see you tonight,” Mr. Temple added. “Oh,
and how about you guys cook dinner for us tonight. Anything
you want. But just for the record, I’m in the mood for spaghetti
primavera—with a lot of cheese.” He waved briefly to the
children and turned to his wife. “Come on, Angela. Let’s try to
catch the 10:36 bus.”
As soon as they were gone, Leo asked, “So what did you
want to tell me earlier?”
“I’ll tell you at Annabel’s.” Julie looked at the cuckoo
clock. It was already 10:30. “Hurry, we’ve got to leave in thirty
minutes.” She hurried out the door with Leo close behind.
As soon as the three of them were sitting in Annabel’s room,
Julie told the others of her meeting with Flimsk, the fairy who
didn’t like to be called a fairy. She connected his appearance
with their decision to do something about the drought down
South. “Flimsk heard us, and now he wants to meet us at 11:00
o’clock sharp. He wants to introduce us to the Sovereign Lady
of the Sky, whoever she might be.” Julie concluded her story
with a shrug. She’d told them everything she knew.
“The what of the sky?” Leo asked.
187
“Her name is Swinglashna. I don’t really know, but I guess

we’ll find out.”
“Should we take the sunbeads with us?” Annabel asked.
“Of course. And the coral chests—you never know.” Julie
got up to go. “Okay, so let’s go back up and wait for Flimsk. It
is almost time.”
Annabel opened the drawer and carefully took out the flask
that safely held the golden granules. Again, she thought of the
terrible-looking mask that had tried to steal the fnumbavats,
but she kept that to herself. When they were leaving, Annabel
shuddered as they passed the mask hanging on the wall. What
she didn’t notice was a creature stepping out of the mask and
slipping through the door just before Leo shut it fast.
As soon as the cuckoo popped through the little trapdoor
and began to sing, bobbing up and down with each two-tone
call, the children looked around for the fairy. Promptly, at the
eleventh call, Flimsk appeared on the red hibiscus. “Goods.
Are yous ready? Let’s go,” he said, breaking into a big smile.
“Are you coming with us on the boat?” Annabel asked,
staring in wonder at the tiny creature standing on the flower,
arms crossed.
“Of course. Why isn’t boats out of the bottle yet?” asked
the impatient fairy. Leo, who’d been fiddling instead with his
train track, ran to the bedroom, fetched the bottle and rushed
back. On the way back, he grabbed his jacket. Once the boat
was out of the bottle, they held hands and said in chorus, “On
the boat.”
They found themselves aboard, and Julie shut the ethmaroll.
Annabel gave the flask filled with the sunbeads to Leo, who
tucked it safely in the inside pocket of his jacket. “Where to?”
he asked and sat down at the tiller.
188
“Outs the window, south, and ups,” Flimsk answered

at once. “If we hurry, we shouldst be there in five.” Flimsk
fluttered onto Leo’s shoulder.
“Five hours?” Leo exclaimed. “That long?”
“No, silly. Five minutes. But if yous don’tst gets a move
on, then it will take five hours, so let’s windst.” Before Leo
could say another word, Flimsk gave the command: “Zipsy off
to Swinglashna,” adding, “as fast as yous canst.”
Swan Boat slipped through the crack in the window and
catapulted into the thick of the wintry clouds. Flimsk released
a high silvery-pitched whoop of joy. “That’s whats I’m talkin’
about. Heres we come, my Sovereign Lady of the Sky!”
189
47 { Sovereign Lady of the Sky
“Hey, you’ll get us killed!” Julie cried, trying to steady

herself, clutching the handles on the side of the boat.
“Of course nots.” Flimsk giggled, sounding like a jubilant
skylark, while he fluttered to the boat’s bow, breaking into a
dance, pumping his tiny fists in the air. The children pulled
themselves upright and looked over the railing. Everything was
a blur.
“How fast are we going?” Leo yelled, plopping back down
next to the tiller.
“I don’t know, but it’s too fast for me,” Julie answered.
“And you don’t have to shout just because we’re going so fast.”
“Sorry,” Leo said, “but, you’ve gotta admit, it’s pretty
thrilling.” Flimsk agreed and chirruped away in his songbird
voice.
As the boat left the city behind them, they could make
out the countryside below. It was turning into a clear day. The
clouds and snow gave way to sun and green fields. The villages,
hills, lakes, and rivers withdrew rapidly into the distance the
higher they went. Their ears popped from the pressure change.
“I have some chewing gum somewhere,” Leo said, rummaging
in one of his many pockets. He found a pack and handed each
one a stick. Still, the boat soared upward.
“We’ll be theres in a minute,” Flimsk tweeted, smiling.
“Where?” Leo asked, looking around and seeing nothing
but blue sky, while sticking a second stick of gum into his
mouth and chewing hard.
“At the High Home of Swinglashna, which is also my home
till the spring, when I makes my way downs to my summer
home in the blossoms and flowers—the fuchsia is mys favorite
190
because, my beasties, the hummingbirds, comest to visits me

there.” Flimsk went into a very convincing imitation of a
hummingbird, fluttering his wings at a tremendous speed and
making as if he was sucking the nectar from a blossom.
Three seconds later, he perched on the roof of the cabin
and said, “Looks, it’s coming ups above and ahead of us.”
When they looked in the direction Flimsk was pointing, they
saw only wispy clouds. But the closer they got, the bigger the
clouds appeared, as if an unseen hand was painting a giant
bouquet of lilies in the sky. The long, slender petals and sepals
reached out to them like wings, and the boat sailed directly
into the mouth of one of the flowers.
“You canst slow downst now, Swan Boat,” Flimsk ordered,
and turning to Leo, added, “Steer the boats into the darks hole
at the bottoms of the petals.”
Once they passed through the dark blue hole, they entered
the courtyard of an ice castle. The floor and walls were
rounded, as were the stairs, railings, doors, and towers—and
everything was made of ice. Every statue, ornament, bench,
and chair was fashioned from ice. They stood and marveled.
“This is so beautiful,” Annabel gasped, looking at the finely
crafted surroundings.
“How is this possible?” Leo asked. “We’re high up in the
sky. There can’t be a castle in the sky—an ice castle at that.”
“You forgetst two things,” Flimsk said. “First, the high
clouds are madest up of tiny ice crystals. We fairies and sylphs
are partly in charge of them, and canst shape them any ways we
wants. Secondly, our realm hast different laws than your realm.
But enough explanations—let’s gets out of the boat and meets
our grand lady.”
“But we’re in the sky. We’ll fall,” Julie argued.
191
“Didn’t yous hear what I’s said? This castle is madest from
ice, and you’re in our realm. Humans are so slow to understand!
Thinks of its like an airplane. They are high ups in the sky
and you can sits and walks around in them. This is not much
different. So let’s gets to it! Leo, open ups the ethmaroll.”
Annabel didn’t want to say anything, but she was worried
about slipping on the icy surface. Navigating with a crutch was
not going to be easy.
Before they disembarked Leo grabbed his jacket. Both
Annabel and Julie were wearing sweaters. It was cold, and they
shivered, but not for long. As soon as the boat was back in its
bottle, Flimsk said, “Follow me, I’ll leads yous to our Sovereign
Lady.” He beckoned them to follow him through a flower
portal and into a room that looked like a glacial ice cave.
“There you are,” they heard a clear voice sing. “Step up to
my sunny ice deck.” The children looked around, but could
not detect the source of the pure voice, though they could tell
that it came from above them. “And put something sunny on
my sundial.”
“By the tones of her voice, I can tells that she likes yous.
Now be sure to gives her something sunny,” Flimsk whispered.
“Like what?” Julie asked.
“Anything, as longs as its shines.” Flimsk flew straight ahead
until they came to a spiral ramp. They had no idea what to give,
but they followed Flimsk.
Light shimmered through the ice the higher they got, until
they entered a pyramidal room. The sun shone through many
ice crystal windows, which caught the light and split it into
many different colors. Carved onto the window were the most
dazzling shapes, whirling and twirling like wind made visible.
Through the windows, they saw cirrus clouds dancing in the
192
sky, moving hither and thither. It reminded them of the beauty

of Queen Marquellamoosh’s coral castle, except that this was
an ice palace in the sky. A sundial stood in the center of the
sunny ice deck.
“Now quickly, your sunny giftst,” Flimsk urged. Leo and
Annabel looked at each other and shrugged, wondering what
shiny object they could give. Then, Julie had an idea; she
stepped toward the sundial and placed her golden coin from
the dwarfs in its center. “Here, take this. It is both sunny and
precious.” She bowed her head slightly.
“This willst do wonderfully!” Flimsk landed on Julie’s
shoulder and kissed her cheek. Leo and Annabel smiled,
relieved.
“Thank you, girl with the sunrise hair. Now sit down, bold
travelers, and thank you for your offer to help.” Though they
heard the voice clearly, they still could not see anybody except
Flimsk, who had fluttered back onto Leo’s shoulder, having
taken a fancy to him. The only place to sit was on an ice couch
placed between two large icicles.
“Ah, she is so beautiful,” Annabel uttered as they sat down.
She felt embarrassed, having blurted out her thoughts so
spontaneously. Julie and Leo looked at her and saw that her
gaze flitted this way and that. Then, suddenly, they too could
see her, although Swinglashna was barely distinguishable from
the surrounding sun-imbued ice crystals. The Queen of the
Sylphs was as transparent as glass, and every part of her was
in constant motion, like a breeze or wisps of mist in the early
summer morning. At times, she would almost disappear and
reappear. Julie and Leo agreed: She was beautiful. In fact, never
had they seen any living being quite so beautiful.
193
“Now here is what you have to do.” Her voice was barely
audible, though they heard it clearly, coming from within
them, rather than from without, like a feeling or a voice in a
dream. “It is very simple. If you do what I suggest, your work
will be done before sunset.”
Flimsk laughed at this. He fluttered off Leo’s shoulder,
somersaulted in the air, slalomed between their heads, and
landed back on Leo’s shoulder, whispering in his ear, “She trusts
yous, and ups till now she has nots trusted many humans. In
that, she’s like the High One—the Winds of the North, South,
East, and West. It means a lots.”
Swinglashna hovered in front of them, her dancing six-
petaled wings interweaving around her: “Queen Marquella-
moosh, my watery sister, has told me all about you. I was unsure
about trusting any humans till I heard from Flimsk about your
intention to help with the drought in the South. And even
then, I had my doubts. But now, seeing you sitting here, I know
you are true to your word. It will not be easy, but you’ll manage
if you ease your way through, by which I mean: Be open and
trust my instructions. If you do succeed, then you’ll be ready
for the next task—the greater one—the one in which all four
realms will unite and collaborate.” She laughed softly, which
sounded like little glass bells. “We’ll see. One task at a time,”
and she laughed again. “So listen!”
194
48 { The Lily Box
It wasn’t easy to focus on what she was saying because

she was so entrancing to look at. From one moment to the
next, Swinglashna could be anywhere in the room. And when
she did linger in one place for more than a few seconds, the
children got lost in the flowing movements of her wings and
the sway of her graceful body, much to Flimsk’s annoyance.
Whenever one of them got even slightly distracted, he’d fly up
and clip them on the ear with his tiny wings and scold, “Keeps
listening,” or “Didst you hear that?” Sometimes, he had to slap
them a bit harder across their cheeks, or box them on their
arms. Of course, it didn’t hurt in the slightest, but it did help
them focus.
“Please be so kind as to show me the fnumbavats, those
lovely Liquid Light pebbles, those sunseeds that will cleanse
and clear Earth of the toxins that have become too much, even
for us,” the Queen of the Sylphs asked graciously.
Leo took out the flask that contained the grains of Liquid
Light. As soon as he unscrewed and removed the lid, a ray of
light shone from the flask. Flimsk flew up, took out one of the
granules, and held it up in the light. It gleamed like a tiny sun
in between his tiny fingers.
“So it is indeed true. It has finally come to the surface.”
The queen gasped, pressing her delicate hands together and
fluttering up and down. “There have been many stories and
prophecies about the sun from Earth’s center reaching through
Earth’s crust. Yet most of us believed it would not come to pass
for many years, even eons. But here it is, right here!”
Swinglashna halted in front of the shining fleck of light in
Flimsk’s hand. “Yes, powerful seeds of light. They will do much
195
good, if handled and used correctly.” Again, she began to fly

around the sun deck, animated and jubilant, but only for a few
moments before she became serious once more, circling closely
around the children.
“Be sparing with these,” she warned. “Each one is more
potent than you think. Earth’s surface is thirsting for them.
But they will need to be introduced gradually, and it will take
time before their true effect will be felt, just as with certain
medicines that need to be taken over a long period.” Her words
flowed like wind through her hair that danced around her head
like fluttering flags.
“The lakes, rivers, and reservoirs in the South are almost
entirely dried out. You will have to go to the biggest among
them and drop a grain of Liquid Light into each one. But
before you drop the grains, you must put each one into this
container,” she instructed as she rose up to the top of the sun
deck and, from a small ice shelf, retrieved a tiny box in the
shape of a lily. “The fnumbavats will have more power if you do
as I say, because you will receive the help from our realm—the
wind-filled air.” Swinglashna went quiet for a moment. “Place
a grain into the box, close it, and shake it three times. Then
drop the sunseed in the waters you wish to be healed. Once
your task has been completed, place one last grain into the box
and smash it.”
“And then what happens?” asked Leo, who was trying to
keep up with all of her instructions.
“You will see. But go now, so that you have enough time to
visit all the places in need.” Swinglashna flew close to Annabel.
“I choose you to be the keeper of the box. Your hands with the
healing touch will shake it well and prove its worth.”
196
Annabel shyly took the exquisite box into her sensitive dark
hands and stroked it with reverence before putting it into one
of the pockets of her skirt. “Thank you, Swinglashna. I will do
as you say.” She couldn’t help but stand up proudly and bow in
front of the Queen of the Sylphs.
“Can Flimsk come with us?” Leo inquired.
“Flimsk will be your guide and show you where to plant the
little beads of sun. That will save you much time trying to find
the waters in need. Go now, and may the winds be with you.”
Swinglashna gestured for the children to leave as she floated
gracefully into the air.
The children got up and were about to walk down the
spiral ramp when Julie turned around and asked, “Could I
ask you why you are all alone in this castle in the sky? Queen
Marquellamoosh is surrounded by thousands, and so is King
Brathnar. But, apart from Flimsk, I do not see anybody else
here. It is so beautiful, but feels so empty.”
Swinglashna laughed and replied, “Things are not always
as they appear.” Her soft silvery laughter rang through the icy
hallways. “It seems empty only because you are here. We beings
of the air are not wont to show ourselves to humans. But go
now. Fifteen minutes of your time has passed.” To the children,
it felt like an hour.
As they flew out of the mouth of the castle’s crystal lily,
Flimsk said, “Fix your gaze on the castle as we sails away.” As the
children watched, the castle slowly dissolved, and they realized
that it had been made up of tens of thousands of sylphs, each
one flying on an ice crystal.
“What’s going on?” Julie gasped in astonishment.
“Queen Swinglashna madest the castle especially for yous.
Each particle of ice that madest up the castle was a sylph.
197
Theys sacrificed themselves by letting themselves be frozen for

a while—like a bigst ice airplane carried along in the jet stream,
as yous humans call it.” Within three minutes, the entire
castle had vanished into the blue, with not a trace left behind.
Speechless, the children stared at the empty patch of sky where
the castle had been.
After a while, Leo shrugged as if he was getting quite used
to such miraculous things. He turned to the others and said,
“Come on. We have a job to do.”
“And sos we do,” Flimsk agreed, drawing his tiny legs up to
his chin as he settled comfortably on Leo’s shoulder once again.
198
49 { Theft
Swan Boat and its crew followed the coastline south. The
green fields gave way to arid grasslands. Leo had pulled the
tiller up so that the boat would be the size of a normal boat,
which always made them feel a bit more at ease. Now that they
were sailing only a few dozen feet above the ground, Julie also
opened up the ethmaroll. They enjoyed the warm breeze. Leo
took off his jacket and threw it on top of the cabin, while Julie
and Annabel removed their sweaters.
“There’s our first lake.” Flimsk stood at the boat’s prow,
pointing. “Steers the boat toward it and findst a goodst place
to landst. From here, we’ll circle inlandst, until we’s covered all
the main lakes and are back along the coast farther south. It
shouldn’tst take us very longst.”
Leo carefully landed the boat alongside a wharf, or what had
once served as one. Scores of boats, both large and small, lay on
their sides looking like beached whales. Swan Boat appeared
regal next to them, especially because Leo had left it life size
to save time by not putting it back in the bottle. He leaned the
boat against the jetty so that it would not topple over.
Only once they stood on the parched earth did they realize
the full extent of the drought. The earth was cracked and
dusty. The nearby café was deserted. Not a soul was in sight. It
was clear that the drought had taken its toll. What once must
have been a popular holiday resort had long been abandoned.
Desolation was in the air. Flimsk was uncommonly quiet, and
his movements slowed. Leo noticed that his wings looked like
dried leaves, and his ready smile had left him.
“Flimsk, what’s the matter with you?” Leo was concerned.
199
“I don’tst do well in hots and drys weather. I shouldst have

known. Let’s hurry ups and do this. If we wait too long, my
wings will drys up and drops off.”
“It sure is hot,” Julie agreed, taking off her sweater and
placing it carefully underneath the bench where she also put
her cloak from the dwarfs.
“Here, Flimsk, take cover in my pocket,” Leo said, offering
his pocket on the top left side of his shirt.
“Thanks,” sighed Flimsk as he flew into the pocket, glad
to be out of the sun. Annabel took both of her crutches and
the children walked down into the basin of the dried-up lake
until they came to a floating dock that now lay next to the last
remaining spot of water, which looked murky and polluted.
The dry ground was littered with waste: discarded plastic bags,
cups, and bottles; rusty tins, barrels, poles, and tools; outdoor
motors, batteries, and much more. Dismayed, Julie knelt down
and dug a little hole next to the dock, until a slight muddy
puddle appeared.
“Good. Let’s hope that does it,” Julie said. “Now let’s take
out the flask, prepare a grain of Liquid Light, and plant it
here.” Annabel opened the lily box and held it toward Leo.
“Darn it, I forgot the flask. It’s still in my jacket back on the
boat. I’ll quickly run up and get it,” Leo said.
“Well, hurry!” Julie urged. Off he sped in a cloud of sand.
When Leo reached the boat, he grabbed his jacket and felt for
the flask. It was gone! Puzzled, he quickly ruffled through the
other pockets. Nothing!
“I thought I’d put it in the left inside pocket,” Leo mumbled
to himself, worried. He ran back toward the girls and, from a
distance, shouted, “It’s not there!”
200
“What do you mean?” Julie yelled back, annoyed. In answer,

Leo held up his jacket and shrugged. Julie ran back to the boat
and searched through his jacket, just to make sure.
“Nope, it’s not here. Are you sure you put it there?” Fear
crept into her voice.
“Positive!” Leo nodded vehemently. “Maybe it’s somewhere
on the boat. Maybe it dropped out and rolled underneath the
benches or something. I’ll have a look.” He got down on his
knees. “It’s gotta be here. Where else could it be?” But he felt
unsure and his hands shook. What if they never found it and
the fnumbies were really lost? What would Swinglashna, Queen
Marquellamoosh, Rossellippsill and King Brathnar think? It would
prove that human beings were unreliable.
By now, Annabel had hobbled back to the boat and
clambered back on. She was shocked to see how pale Leo was,
and knew this was serious. “It’s okay. We’ll find it,” Annabel
said, trying to reassure him. They searched in every nook and
cranny, but it was nowhere to be found.
“Stops it, stops it!” The children looked up in surprise.
Flimsk, whose head stuck out of Leo’s top pocket, pointed
toward the boat’s stern. They caught a glimpse of a creature
pushing the flask overboard and jumping after it. They rushed
over.
“The mask has stolen our fnumbies!” Annabel cried,
immediately recognizing the ugly creature with the flat face and
stunted legs. Julie looked over the railing and saw a dark crab-
like creature dragging the flask quickly down into the dried-out
bed of the lake.
“After it! Don’tst let it gets away!” Flimsk shouted from his
perch in Leo’s top shirt pocket. He was waving his tiny fists in
the air defiantly. “Yous have no ideas how valuable the grains
201
arest.” Flimsk tried to fly out and give chase, but his dry wings
weren’t strong enough. He fluttered as best he could, but fell
onto the boat’s deck like a fledgling bird. “Go gets it! Gets the
fnumbies back!” he wheezed.
“Julie, Leo, go! I’ll take care of Flimsk,” Annabel said,
bending down and gently lifting the tiny fairy into her soft,
cupped hands. Leo and Julie leapt off the boat and ran after
the mask that had put distance between them and was making
for a large pile of rocks.
“If it makes it to those rocks, it’s going to be impossible
to find him,” Leo shouted, panting. Julie didn’t answer, but
sprinted ahead. Though they had longer legs and could run
faster, they were amazed at the mask’s speed, even while pulling
the flask behind him.
Once they’d caught up with it, they still couldn’t capture it
or retrieve the flask. The creature clasped the flask between its
teeth like a dog holding onto a bone. The mask evaded them
with incredible speed. It would stop for a moment, eyeing
them out with its deep, hollow eyes, and as soon as Julie or Leo
pounced, it scurried to the side. With each attempt, the mask
came closer to the rubble of rocks.
202
50 { Fight for the Fnumbies
Meanwhile, Annabel had remembered Julie’s flask that still

contained a few drops of King Brathnar’s draught of courage.
She took it out from the inside pocket of Julie’s cloak, which
was stored under the bench, unscrewed the lid, and held it
gently against the delicate lips of Flimsk who lay in the crook
of her arm like a hapless baby. “Here you go. This will do you
good.”
“Hmm… more,” Flimsk slurred, smiling dreamily. Though
each sip was just a drop or two, his strength returned almost
instantly. His tiny wings straightened out and gained in color
and flexibility. He sat up. “What is this wonderful drink?”
Flimsk took another few drops, before fluttering around,
testing his strength and ability to fly. “Ah, I’m goods to go.
Let’s helps the others,” encouraged Flimsk as he went through
an impressive bodybuilding sequence.
“Sure, let’s,” Annabel answered, laughing.
“Here we comes!” and without waiting, Flimsk flew off
with the speed of a hummingbird. Annabel followed as fast as
she could over the rough terrain.
By now, the mask was just a few feet from the rocks. “It’s
gonna make it if we don’t catch it!” Julie shouted in desperation.
“It’s too fast for us!” Leo yelled back after another failed
attempt at catching the mask.
Suddenly, they heard a buzz that sounded like a hornet.
From the corner of their eyes, they saw a shadow dashing right
down onto the mask. It was Flimsk, who immediately covered
the mask’s eyes with his wings. “Quicks, pounce on it and grabs
the flask!” he shouted in his high-pitched voice.
203
Easier said than done. The mask jerked to the side and
threw Flimsk off. But before it could reach the rocks, Flimsk,
like a pesky fly, settled on his face, covering his eyes again. This
time, Flimsk held tightly onto the mask’s ears, which stuck out
from its head. The mask frantically tried to shake Flimsk off,
like a bucking bronco, zigzagging abruptly across the cracked
earth, creating whirls of dust.
Julie and Leo circled, arms and legs stretched wide, as if they
were trying to catch a chicken. Leo lunged forward and almost
caught the mask. But with its short, strong legs, it unexpectedly
jumped up and hit him in the nose, throwing Flimsk off.
As the mask fell back onto the ground, Julie tackled it from
behind, grabbing it. Instantly, the mask tried to jerk itself free.
But it couldn’t quite succeed. Julie was able to grasp the flask
and yank it hard. She was surprised how tightly the mask held
on to it; it had locked its jaw into the flask like a bulldog. Both
tugged at it, with the mask kicking up so much dust in the
violent struggle that Flimsk was left fluttering helplessly above
the small tornado.
In the struggle, the lid of the flask loosened and came
unscrewed. Seconds later, the lid rolled off and the honey-
colored fnumbies, like shiny beads, bounced and rolled across
the ground, disappearing into the cracks of dried earth. Julie
fell back with a grunt, landing on her back, empty-handed.
The mask, still clutching the flask between its teeth, scuttled
toward the rocks, as more grains poured from the opened flask.
“It’s getting away!” Leo shouted, recovering from the shock of
the struggle.
“No, you don’t!” It was Annabel. With her left crutch high
above her head, she cracked it hard across the mask’s forehead,
204
and it lay motionless at the foot of the pile of rocks. A second

longer, and it would have disappeared into one of the many
crevices. The children stood and panted. Flimsk was the first to
move, settling on Leo’s shoulder, looking down at the beads of
fnumbies strewn all around.
“Thanks, Annabel. Without you, we would never have
stopped it,” Leo said, breaking the silence. “You saved the day.”
“It was teamwork. We all did our bit. But we’d better pick
up the sunbeads.” Annabel felt proud that she’d been able to
play a part in the rescue. The children squatted and picked
them up, one by one, placing them carefully back into the flask
that Leo had retrieved. But more than half of the precious
grains were lost in the earth’s cracks.
“Do you think I’ve killed it?” Annabel wondered unhappily
once they’d picked up the last of the sunseeds. Flimsk flew
down from Leo’s shoulder and inspected the mask.
“Nopes, yous just beat the nonsense outs of it. It will come
around soon, so we’d better make sure it doesn’t gets away.”
“What should we do with it?” Julie wanted to be sure they
secured the creature so that it couldn’t cause any more trouble.
“Let’s tie it up and wrap it in the cloak.” Leo took out some
string and tied up the little beast’s stumpy arms and legs. From
another trouser pocket, he produced his thin cloak and lifted
the limp mask into it. To the boy’s surprise, the mask hardly
weighed anything; it was like lifting cotton candy. To make sure
the mask would not escape, Leo wound more string around
the cloak and secured it with five knots he’d learned from his
grandfather. “It’s not going to get out of there, that’s for sure.”
Finally, he tied the mask to the side of his trousers so that it
hung there like a pouch.
205
“Good, but we’ve got a serious problem,” Julie sighed.

“Many grains fell into the cracks. We can’t afford to lose so
many.”
“You can’tst afford to lose nots even one,” Flimsk warned.
“This is seriously going to hinder our mission. And we’re
responsible.” Julie looked from her brother’s face to that of
her friend. Worry had pulled their mouths into frowns. Where
would the help come from to solve this problem?
Annabel, exhausted, leaned on her crutches. “We’ve been
through so much and come so far. We have to fulfill our
promise. We can’t afford to fail—even partly. Remember, Queen
Marquellamoosh said that we have to spread the sunbeads
across the different realms. So did Swinglashna. Now we won’t
have enough. We can’t let them down.” She stared at the cracks
into which the sunbeads had disappeared, and tears began to
well in her eyes.
“I wish there was something we could do,” Julie said, wiping
her hair from her dust-covered face. She felt guilty for having
tugged at the flask so violently that the lid had come off.
From close by, somebody spoke: “Don’t lose hope.” The
voice sounded weak, old, and cracked. Who else was there?
They heard it again: “For the moment, there is nothing you can
do. But I can help—if you’ll let me.”
206
51 { Water Fay
The children spun around and saw the most crooked, small,
and shriveled old crone they’d ever seen. She sat crouched on
top of the pile of rocks under which the mask had tried to
escape. At first glance, she looked like a washed-up root of a
dead tree. Never had they seen skin as wrinkled and crinkled
as hers. The few strands of hair still left on her wilted head
were long, gray, and knotted. A faded brown and tattered,
threadbare dress, loosely woven from dried rushes, covered her
shrunken body.
“Who are you?” Annabel asked, slightly afraid of this
withered old woman.
“Unimportant.” Her smoky eyes sat deep in her head, and
a smile flitted across her thin, leathery lips. “The tales of old
are beginning to bear fruit. Good.” Flimsk flew onto Leo’s
shoulder and looked searchingly at the old woman, but didn’t
say a word. Then he lowered his head in a reverent gesture.
“So what can you do? Please help us if you can,” Julie
pleaded, thinking that any help would be better than nothing.
She felt terribly responsible for the spilled sunseeds.
Instead of answering, the weathered woman bent her head
backward and let out a startlingly loud and high squawk, then
cocked her head, as if listening, before squawking again. From
the distance, they heard an answering call and spotted a dark
cloud approaching. A minute later, dozens of sandpipers
landed all around them, piping happily.
The old woman silenced the birds with a gesture of her
bony hand. Then she began to chirp softly to the listening
birds, after which she clapped three times.
207
At once, the little sandpipers went into action, pecking

furiously between the cracks with their long, slender bills.
One by one, they retrieved the fnumbavats and dropped them
into the open flask that Julie held up for them. The children
marveled at their speed. Within minutes, the task was done.
The old woman on the rocks gave a call of thanks, after which
the birds rose and flew off into the distance, peetweeting merrily.
Once they were gone, the old crone turned to speak to the
children in her cracked voice, “Now I suggest you get on with
your task according to Swinglashna’s instructions.”
“How do you know about her and what she said?” Leo
inquired. He was starting to get used to strange beings always
showing up, already knowing about their mission. Still, he was
curious.
“I know all about you. News spreads faster than the wind.”
The clouds in her eyes parted and, for a second, her eyes flashed
mysteriously. “Flimsk knows,” and she peered at him. “But
hurry! You have a seed to plant, don’t you? We are waiting.”
The children did not quite know what to say. Annabel
couldn’t help but bow, though she almost toppled over in the
attempt. They waved, thanked her repeatedly, and hurried back
to the floating dock where they’d dug the hole. “Flimsk, do
you have any idea who that strange woman was?” Julie wanted
to know.
“Of course. She ist the Water Fay. Every lake hast one,
but she ruleses over all the lakeses in the South. My mistress,
Swinglashna, often goest downs to see her. They works closely
together. It ist a great honor for mes to have finally met the
grand and mostest beautiful Water Fay.”
“Beautiful!” all three children exclaimed.
208
“It wast a most beautiful deed, calling on the sandpipers to

helps us. You have to be careful how yous judge others. Now
Annabel, do yous have the little lily box?”
“Yes.” Annabel pulled out the tiny box and opened the lid.
Julie took out a sunseed and placed it inside the box. Annabel
shook the box three times, then dropped the glowing fnumby
into the puddle of water at the bottom of the hole, and Leo
quickly covered it with earth.
“Goodst, now we can go offs to the next lake,” Flimsk said
as he fluttered up in obvious delight.
“And we’d better try to make up for lost time,” Julie added.
As they walked back to the boat, they could still make out the
Water Fay watching them, even though she looked like a dried
root on top of the pile of rocks.
Under Flimsk’s direction, Leo steered the boat confidently,
making the rounds of all the lakes and reservoirs without any
further interruption. The children quickly planted a fnumbavat
in each. To find some sites, they had to sail far inland; but the
last and largest of all was situated right next to the ocean. As
with all the rest, the boats there also lay on their sides, and the
lakebed was scorched. A few people could be seen walking on
the scenic boulevard and more on the beach, some swimming.
After they’d planted the fnumby, Annabel said, “That’s it!
Now we’ve done all the lakes and reservoirs.” She sighed in
relief. “What now?”
“Have yous forgotten?” Flimsk asked with a note of reproach
in his voice.
“Forgotten what?” Annabel asked.
“Oh, I know,” Leo shouted. “We have to smash the lily box.”
“Oh no!” Annabel cried. “I mean, oh, yes,” she added
softly. Annabel did not like the idea of smashing something so
beautiful.
209
Leo got up and looked for an appropriate rock to smash the

box with. “Found it! Can I smash it?” he asked enthusiastically,
not noticing Annabel’s anguished expression.
“No, it musts be Annabel,” Flimsk insisted. “Swinglashna
madest you the keeper of the box.” Annabel still couldn’t bring
herself to do it, holding the box protectively in her cupped
hands. This act would require a different kind of courage than
Annabel had needed before. “Come on. It’s gots to be done,”
Flimsk urged kindly.
Leo gave her the flat rock he’d found on the strip of lawn
between the lake and the ocean. “Hurry,” Julie pressed. “There
are some people walking toward us on the boulevard. We don’t
want them to see us smash things. They might think we’re up
to no good.”
As instructed, Annabel put one more fnumby into the
lily box. This time, she shook the box more reverently than
before. She hesitated. Her chin quivered, but she didn’t cry.
“It’s alright,” Julie comforted her.
“But it’s such a beautiful box. I can’t stand breaking
something so precious.” Annabel’s voice trembled.
Flimsk flew onto her shoulder and said, “Flowers are
beautiful, and I’s live for them. They grows and they wilts and,
whens theys die, theys always leaves seeds for more flowers to
grows, which gives the worlds more beauty. Annabel, you must
thinks of this box likes a flower thats will makes many more
flowers. Remember, its has the most marvelous seed inside
its, all the ways from the Soft Realm. The sacrifice will brings
something goodst.”
Annabel placed the lily box on the ground. She groaned,
lifted her arm, and smashed the box with the large flat stone.
210
52 { Rain at Last
The box shattered and a fine cloud rose up, enveloping the
children. The fragrant vapor faintly resembled rose or jasmine
perfume. They breathed deeply, which left them feeling
peaceful and hopeful, with the promise of something good to
come. Gradually, the misty cloud thinned and hovered above
them, barely visible.
All of nature took a deep breath. Gusts of wind whipped
through the children’s hair and Flimsk found that he had to
hold on tightly to Leo’s shoulder. The wind picked up leaves,
papers, branches, and anything else that lay around. A man
sitting on a bench farther down had his newspaper snatched
from his hands. A little girl’s beach ball was blown into the
dunes, rescued quickly by her father who caught it before it got
away. A woman’s scarf flew by and got snagged in the bushes.
A flag on top of a flagpole flapped violently. Minutes later, the
wind died down again, but the freshness remained, as did the
haze above their heads.
The woman retrieved her scarf, walked by and greeted the
children kindly. “Hi there. That was a funny little wind burst.
Well, what do you think? Will they finally reach the shore
today? I’m hoping they will, if the wind holds.”
“What do you mean?” Julie asked politely.
“You know, the rain clouds. They’re building up again over
the ocean, like they do every afternoon around this time.” She
gestured over to the ocean’s horizon, where they spotted dark
clouds gathering. “Sometimes, they come quite close. You can
even see the rain out there, and the lightning. But they never
make it inland. We could sure use some rain. It’s been over a
year now. Mostly the clouds just move north where they cause
211
floods or snowstorms.” She smiled and walked on, adding,

“We come here every afternoon, hoping the rains will come.
The wind just now was a good sign.”
“You know, I think it’s going to happen today,” Annabel
said, smiling back at the woman.
“That’s sweet of you to say.” And with that, the woman
waved and walked on, joining another group that had gathered
farther along in the shade of a row of palm trees.
The man who’d lost his newspaper had overheard their
conversation. “Well, if it does rain, I’m prepared,” he cheered
as he lifted his black umbrella, smiling as he walked by. It
seemed to the children that hope was in the air.
The vaporous cloud above their heads grew and sailed
partway out over the ocean toward the large dark clouds amassing
on the horizon. As it flew, it grew lighter and more radiant,
and the children were reminded of Queen Marquellamoosh’s
Coral Bay when they’d dropped a fnumby into the water. The
glowing cloud had the same wondrous light quality.
Suddenly, the children thought they saw Swinglashna, the
Sovereign Lady of the Sky, flying with the cloud, beckoning
to the dark storm clouds to approach. The small cloud of
light stood out brightly against the half dome of darkness that
reached across the entire sky over the ocean. By now, the people
on the shore noticed the ball of light and pointed it out. Some
took photos. For once, the dark clouds did not disappear or
move up north. They began to advance, led by Swinglashna,
who was bringing them to the shore. The clouds continued to
approach the shore until the dark mass was directly over their
heads.
As soon as the first heavy raindrops fell, the growing
crowd that had gathered clapped and cheered. Some people
212
spread their arms and lifted their heads to feel the freshness of
the water.
“You were right, little girl!” the woman with the scarf
shouted over to them from where she was standing. Nearby,
the man with the newspaper began to sing, though he didn’t
open the umbrella, choosing to feel the drops of rain they had
all been yearning for on his bald head.
“Come on!” Leo shouted happily. “Let’s get back on the
boat and follow that cloud of light. I want to see where it leads
the rainclouds.”
“Yeah, let’s,” Julie agreed. “You know, it reminds me of the
great big flood that swept the Binagatorials from the sewers. It
feels like a shower that washes everything bad away. But, we’ll
have to find a place where we can get onto the boat without
being seen. There are too many people around. Where have
they all suddenly come from?” Julie worried that they’d be
delayed.
Leo jumped up and down with excitement. “Wow-wee,
look at all those cars parked along the boulevard!”
“Let’s go behind there,” Annabel shouted above the wind
that had struck up again. She pointed to a shack where fishing
tackle had once been sold when the lake still had water and fish.
“Perfect! Come on,” said Julie and she started running,
grabbing onto Annabel’s arm to help her along. Well hidden
behind the shack, Leo uncorked the bottle, and seconds later
they were on the boat.
“Follow the storm!” Leo shouted to Swan Boat, and off
they sailed, trying to catch up with the golden cloud.
213
53 { Quenching the Land
The torrential storm was like a triumphant pageant

parading through the skies, with striking lightning displays
and thunderous rolls of timpani, boosted by snare drum cracks
and belly-beating bursts of bass drums. Winds whooped and
hooted through the valleys and plains, over treetops, rocky
chasms, gullies and gulches with joyful and majestic trumpet
blasts. The drops that fell on the boat’s ethmaroll sounded like
a rejoicing choral of twittering songbirds.
The children looked down on the growing lakes, and from
the places where they’d planted the fnumbavats, they could see
a gentle light appearing, spreading across the surfaces of the
waters. But more extraordinary were the luminous funnels that
rose from the lakes, reaching up into the clouds. Flimsk flitted
about in delight.
All the while, they saw the Sovereign Lady of the Sky,
appearing and disappearing, moving in and out of the clouds
which she directed like a symphony conductor, making sure
that no area received too much or too little rain. She was
helped by a host of sylphs, who looked a bit like her, but much
smaller, and who, always moving in flocks, were guiding the
clouds hither and thither as well. This was not meant to be a
devastating flood but a quenching of the land. The drought-
stricken South was at long last relieved of its thirst.
After a few thrilling hours, the storm subsided. Swinglashna
flew to the boat and beckoned it to follow her. She led them
down to the first lake where they’d had the fight with the mask.
It had filled considerably, though it would still need a lot more
rain to get back to its normal level.
214
They approached the dock next to which they’d planted the

first sunseeds. The row of abandoned boats no longer lay on
dry, cracked earth. Swan Boat landed gently in the water, and
they opened up the ethmaroll. Leo walked to the prow and tied
the rope to the cleat on the dock.
The air felt fresh against their skin. Swinglashna hovered
around them, swaying on the rhythms of the slight breeze
with her six silky wings. “It has begun,” she said in her soft,
enchanting voice. “The new Light, born within the sacred
sanctuary of Earth’s depths, has reached the surface—thanks
to you.” At this pronouncement, Flimsk let out a cheer and
fluttered happily between the children’s heads before settling
on Leo’s shoulder again.
Swinglashna ignored his joyful interruption. “It is a humble
beginning. The Light will soon fade, but not its power. Over
the next few weeks, the South will receive a daily shower of
rain until the lakes will be replenished to their old glory.” At
that moment, they heard the cheerful sound of the sandpipers
arriving from across the lake, as they landed all around
the dock.
Once settled, the children saw something else swimming
swiftly toward them from the center of the lake. At first, they
thought it was an otter, as they saw only a head glistening in
the sun. How surprised they were when a beautiful woman,
tall and slender, stepped out of the water and onto the dock.
Her long, wavy, gossamer hair that covered her bare shoulders
was shiny black on top and radiantly blonde down at her waist
and hips, with many shades in between. She wore a loose dress,
woven from the finest river grass, which glinted in the late
afternoon sun.
215
“The Water Fay!” Flimsk gasped, flying from Leo’s shoulder

and bowing in front of the woman. Glistening drops of water
fell like jewels from her graceful body.
“Indeed, it is the esteemed Water Fay, protector and
venerable steward of the southern rivers and lakes,” the
Sovereign Lady of the Sky said enthusiastically. “Please welcome
my cousin, Fay Lullandahem.” Swinglashna pronounced the
name with a singsong lilt: Loo-lahn-dah-hem.
“How you have changed!” Julie gasped. Annabel and Leo
wanted to say something, but were at a loss for words.
Fay Lullandahem smiled mysteriously. “Yes, the drought
had sucked me dry of life, but now you see my restored and
true self.” She stepped forward and touched each one of them
on their foreheads with her cool, soft hands. She stood a full
head taller than Julie. “I thank you for what you have done.
Your deed has been inscribed into the Book of Nature. We are
indebted to you. We hope that you will continue to plant the
sunseeds. There are many more lakes, rivers, ponds, and pools
waiting for that special drop of Light, here in the South and
elsewhere. It will be slow-going, but do not rush, for it is still
possible that you may stumble.”
Fay Lullandahem was quiet for a moment, looking
thoughtfully into the distance. “Find others to help you.
But be warned: Request only the help of those who have an
understanding of us and our kind, the Invisibles—we, who are
yearning to become visible again. Be on the lookout for those
willing to cultivate a new form of looking. You have been told
that the world will die unless you, the Visibles, begin to work
together with us, the Invisibles. Your collaboration needs to be
repeated often. I thank you again. Farewell.”
216
The beautiful Water Fay turned and stepped softly back into
the water, her glistening hair fluttering slightly in the breeze.
Swiftly, she swam toward the center of the lake, stopping only
to wave before she dove down and disappeared beneath the
surface of the lake, leaving only a few circling ripples. With
that, the sandpipers rose and flew to the far end of the lake
where they vanished from view.
“You have heard her words,” began Swinglashna. “Now, go
back home before the setting of the sun. But take heed of my
warning: There are also many Invisibles who are not as kindly
disposed as Lullandahem, Queen Marquellamoosh, King
Brathnar and myself. We want you to always remember that
there are those who wish to stop the spread of the Liquid Sun
across the surface of Earth.”
The children thought of Zuratrat and the ugly Kraftabots
and shuddered at the memory of being chased by them. “They
will have to be dealt with, and I don’t know how or when. But
watch out, beware, and take action as soon as you are aware
of danger. I trust you, and will help you in whatever way I can
when the time comes.”
With those grim words, Swinglashna twirled and whirled
around them and suddenly disappeared, causing a gust of
wind to blow across their faces and through their hair. The
children felt strangely strengthened by her somber words, filled
with hope that they could overcome their foes, whoever and
whatever they might be.
“This be its for me, as well. I now musts follow my queen.”
Flimsk flew from Leo’s shoulder and kissed each of their faces
with his dainty wings. “Until next time,” he whispered and off
he darted, faster than the eye could see.
217
Their mission now accomplished, the children settled back

in their seats in Swan Boat and Leo set sail for home, though
they did not travel quite as fast as when they’d left that morning.
Just after sunset, they slipped through the window crack.
As soon as the boat was back in its bottle and resting next
to the crystal on the windowsill, Julie lost no time in getting to
the business of making the promised dinner for her parents.
She didn’t want them to become suspicious about how they’d
spent their day; they’d certainly never believe it if the children
told them what had actually happened.
“Right. Noodle time,” she announced. “Let’s surprise Mom
and Dad with the best meal ever. Leo, get out the pots, boil the
water, and grate the cheese. Annabel, you make the salad, and
I’ll prepare the vegetable sauce.”
Never before had they returned from any adventure with
so much energy, and they wondered whether it might have
something to do with the fnumbavats they’d planted and the
Liquid Light that had been released.
As they set the table, Annabel suddenly stopped. “I quite
forgot about the mask. It’s still tied up in the cloak. What are
we going to do about him?” For a moment, it put a dampener
on their good mood.
They looked questioningly at one another when, finally,
Julie suggested, “Let’s take care of him tomorrow. It’s best we
keep him tied up until then. He won’t escape from the dwarf’s
cloak. After he tried to steal the sunseeds, we can’t take any
chances with him.”
Leo agreed. “Good call.” At that moment, they heard the
door open and their parents walked in.
“Ah, smells dee-licious.” Mr. Temple took a deep breath. “I’m
famished.”
218
part seven
In Search of Massud
54 { The Parchment
The next morning the three children gathered in Annabel’s

room. Tentatively, Julie unfolded the dwarf’s cloak. They’d
shut the door and windows, and Leo and Annabel closed in
around her, ready to throw a fishing net over the mask in case it
tried to escape. But there was no need for worry. The creature
lay limp and bound in the folds of the cloth. There was no
more fight left in it, and it peered up at them with fear-filled
yellow-green eyes. What surprised them was the change in the
mask’s appearance. Before, the creature had looked like the
actual wooden mask that still hung on the wall, but now it
resembled a toad covered with a thin layer of tawny fluff.
“I’m sorry for what I’ve done.” His voice sounded weak and
hoarse. “Please untie me. It hurts and I need to stretch.”
“No way! Then you’ll escape,” Leo said gruffly, net still
raised.
“I give you my word that I won’t,” the creature groaned.
“How can we trust your word,” Annabel asked harshly,
“especially after you tried to steal the sunbeads?”
The toad-like creature closed its eyes and sighed. Suddenly,
it stared straight up at Annabel and whispered, “I can help you
find your brother.”
219
“Say again!” she gulped. “You know where he is?” Annabel’s

hands trembled.
“Maybe. I have some clues. You want to see him again,
don’t you?”
“So he’s alive?” She could hardly believe her ears.
“He is. So will you untie me now?” He looked so pitiful
lying in the cloak, his stumpy legs and arms tied up, that Leo
and Julie almost felt sorry for him. But Annabel was not so
easily swayed.
“I don’t know if I believe you. What if it’s all a trick to
get us to free you?” Leo and Julie were surprised how stern
Annabel’s voice sounded.
“No trick. I swear.” The creature met her steely gaze.
“Fine. But if you try to escape, I will take down the wooden
mask in the hallway and burn it. I was going to do it anyway.”
“No, please don’t do that. The mask is my home. It’s where
I live. If I’m away from it for too long, I will lose my strength
and slowly fade away.”
“Good to know.” Annabel’s voice was still firm and cold.
“Okay, untie him.”
As soon as Leo had untied him, he stepped from the cloak
and stretched. “Can I sit on your cushion?” he asked Annabel
humbly.
“I suppose so, but we’ll put it in the middle of the bed
between us, and then you’ve gotta tell me exactly what you
know about Massud. But first, what is your name?”
“I’ve had many names in my life, depending on what I did
and who I was. But since inhabiting the mask in the hallway,
I’m known as Roop.”
“Roop, huh? So go ahead, Roop, tell us what you know
about Massud,” Annabel ordered with an edge to her voice.
220
Part 7 » In Search of Massud
Leo and Julie had never seen this side of Annabel before; they
were impressed by her forcefulness.
Roop settled on the cushion that Leo had placed between
them. “I’m sorry for trying to steal the sunbeads—but even
more, for fighting with you. That’s the least of it. I wonder
if you will ever forgive me,” he said softly as he looked up at
Annabel apologetically. “You’ll know why and understand
better once I tell you the secret of the mask.”
“There’s a secret? What secret?” Annabel asked.
“Yes, every real mask has a secret. But this one is directly
connected to Massud.” Roop hesitated as if he was not sure
where to start.
“Go on,” she prompted.
“Up above the eye sockets, hidden underneath the bushy
eyebrows, there is a small hole,” began Roop. “In that hole, you
will find a tightly rolled parchment. I have been bound by its
curse since it was placed there.”
“Go fetch it, Leo,” Annabel ordered. Leo immediately left
and returned with the mask in his hands. He blew a thick layer
of dust from it.
“Not right here! Out the window,” Julie scolded. The cloud
of dust had caused both girls to cough and sneeze.
“Sorry,” he murmured; he hated being scolded by the girls.
Leo lifted the mask’s bushy eyebrows and saw the cavity. “Ah,
found it.” The thin yellow scroll was tucked tightly into the
hole, and he had to use his fingernails like pincers to pull it
out.
“Give it to me.” Annabel’s hands trembled even more. She
unrolled the scroll, which revealed a number of stanzas written
in green lettering, evenly spaced, on the yellowed parchment.
Annabel read aloud:
221
You, through me,

Have the power to
Thwart all that is good,
To turn it to my gain!
You, through me,

Have the power to
Remove those in my way,
To enslave them to my will!
You, through me,

Have the power
To lame the living,
To render them useless!
You, through me,

Have the power
To promote the death
Of your owner’s kin!
Remain a secret
And you will be safe.
But if the secret is revealed,
I will destroy you!
ahrmaluz
Annabel stared at the parchment in her hand without

uttering a word. Leo and Julie didn’t dare say anything. Tears
formed in Annabel’s eyes, rolling down her dark, shiny cheeks.
Some of them fell onto the toad-like creature sitting motionless
on the cushion. Eventually, she dropped the parchment. “Now
222
I understand,” she declared, glaring at the creature. “It’s all

your fault, isn’t it?” Her voice was almost a shout. Roop did not
answer, but met her eye, looking sad and guilty. “Aunt Miriam
told me about the mask. Now I know why I’ve always hated it,
why it gave me the creeps.” More tears fell from her beautiful
but distraught face.
“Yes, Massud was tricked into buying the mask, which
brought me into your home.” Roop squirmed, but continued.
“Massud was told that it was a power mask and that it would
bring him success. Ahrmaluz gave Massud a good deal.”
Julie got a box of tissues from the nightstand and handed
them to Annabel, who dabbed her eyes and blew her nose.
“Of course, it all makes sense, now. Our troubles started from
the moment you, in the form of the mask, entered our home.
I remember now. Soon afterward, Massud got into really awful
moods; he’d go out often and come back late, till finally he
didn’t come back at all—gone—removed from our lives. Then
my legs slowly became lame. I guess ‘lame the living’ proved true
as well. And it’s all your fault?” Rage and frustration filled
Annabel’s words. “And then my father died, and soon after,
my mother. You have destroyed our whole family!” She pulled
more tissues from the box. Through her sobbing she asked,
“But what I don’t understand is why. Why?”
223
55 { Roop Reveals
“You are right to accuse me,” Roop’s voice wavered weakly.

“I’ll try to explain.” He paused, as if it was hard to remember.
“Before I became a mask, I was an elf, born and living in the
burl of a large old oak tree. You know what a burl is, yes? The
large growths where branches form that some humans say
look like tumors. But ‘tumors’ is the wrong word, for they are
helpful and quite valuable. I worked in the service of the tree
spirit, responsible for the flow of sap to the branches and twigs
growing from one of the boughs.
“One day a burl poacher entered our forest with his
chainsaw and sawed off many burls, including the one that
was my home. You might not know this, but burls, with their
lovely textured patterns in the wood, are cherished by sculptors
and furniture makers for their high quality of wood and their
beauty. Burls are rare and they fetch a good price.
“The poacher was none other than Ahrmaluz. I was caught
inside the burl, which he put in a large sack, together with
many other burls. He took us to the city, where he carved us
into masks.”
Roop found it painful to talk about his past, and his
voice cracked. “There were many other masks hanging on his
walls in various stages of completion. He hung me over a fire
into which he threw different herbs, and for three days I was
smothered in smoke. The stench was terrible, and it changed
the wood’s texture. Next, he soaked me in vile liquids that
smelled even worse than the smoke. This caused me great pain.
I was submerged in a different liquid each night for a whole
week. Tree elves are highly sensitive, and with each bath, the
pain grew more severe. I’d been a normal tree elf, responsible
224
for the growth of one of the boughs, making sure it received

enough sap. Now I was made into a beast, a demon, a minion
in the service of a man with evil intentions: to gain power over
others and feed his greed. Finally, he bored a hole in my brow,
above my left eye socket, and stuffed that parchment with the
evil spell into my head. Never have I felt more pain than at
that moment! The words of that curse left me powerless. My
transformation was complete. I was no longer an elf.”
The three children listened to Roop’s story and couldn’t
help but feel sorry for him, even Annabel. “That’s when he
took me to the flea market and told me to destroy the person
he sold me to—and his family.” Roop’s voice faltered and his
eyelids became heavy.
“What’s the matter?” Annabel asked. Her voice was no
longer harsh.
“When Ahrmaluz first saw Massud, he became tense, and
said, ‘There walks a chief. He will do much good in the world if
we do not stop him. I will make sure he takes you home. Then
you can destroy him and his family.’
“That’s what happened. From the moment I entered
your apartment, I fulfilled the curse of the parchment. I did
his bidding.” Roop’s voice was thick with regret and remorse,
and more tears rolled down Annabel’s eyes, dropping onto
Roop. “Your tears give me strength, though I am sorry that
you have them. Each drop softens my pain, though it is born
from yours.” And indeed, Annabel’s tears, the tears from an
innocent victim, served as a truth serum, making Roop confess
and easing his pain.
“So what happened then?” Annabel gently urged him on.
“It was more difficult to bring harm to you once Aunt
Miriam arrived with the masks of your ancestors. All true
225
masks are powerful, and I was no match against their combined

force. Your aunt’s ancestral masks protected you against me.
But I continued to spy and report back to Ahrmaluz. It was
Ahrmaluz who ordered me to steal the fnumbies, and anything
else that you’d brought back. He knows of their power. But I
failed. I would have destroyed myself had you not wrapped me
in the dwarf’s cloak. But now Ahrmaluz will destroy me, which
is worse because it will give me eternal pain.”
“If we burn the mask, what will happen to you?” Julie asked.
“I will simply disappear. The secret is revealed. I cannot
harm you anymore.” His voice again became soft and weak.
“He will now destroy me, unless…” his voice trailed off.
“Unless what?” Annabel urged.
“Unless you burn the parchment and cleanse the mask of
the poison.”
“And what about Massud? You said you had some clues!”
Annabel was not swayed from her primary focus, despite her
sympathy for the kidnapped elf.
“I do.” Suddenly, Roop’s whole body began to contort. “I…
I… oh no! It has begun. He is trying to destroy me right now!”
“How can we find Massud?” Annabel cried.
“Too late. He’s killing me,” moaned Roop.
“No, tell me something. Anything!” More of her tears fell
on him, which seemed to give him some added strength. He
tried to talk, but his voice rasped and trailed off.
“Burn it! We’ve got to burn the parchment,” Julie shouted.
Leo jumped up, fumbled for matches from one of his pockets,
struck one, and lit the parchment. It burst into flames in a flash.
“Watch out!” Julie shouted. The fierce flames engulfed
Leo’s hand and leaped to his face, singeing his hair. In fright
and pain, he dropped the burning parchment. Luckily, it fell
226
on the tiles and missed the carpet. Julie got the dustpan from
the corner and swept up the ashes and the flaming, sputtering
remnants of the parchment, dumping them into a metal trash
can to smolder and go out. Leo rushed to the window, yanked
it open, and fanned the smoke and stench out as best he could.
As the last bit of smoke dispersed, Roop whispered, “Thank
you. You have saved me. Now I can tell you about Massud.” His
voice trailed off and his eyes closed.
“Stay with us,” Annabel urged, bending over him. His eyes
fluttered, and he tried to speak, but he collapsed.
227
56 { Waiting for Roop to Wake
There was no reviving him. At least he wasn’t dead. Julie

made sure that Roop lay comfortably on the pillow, and covered
him with the dwarf’s cloak.
They took the wooden mask into the bathroom for a
thorough cleansing, leaving Roop to rest on Annabel’s bed.
Leo filled a basin with water and soap, and Annabel proceeded
to scrub the mask with a stainless-steel pot cleaner.
Julie ran upstairs to get some healing herbs that her
mother kept in the pantry. Armed with milk thistle, dandelion,
wormwood, peppermint and eucalyptus, she hurried back
down, and boiled the herbs in Annabel’s kitchen, using a
different pot for each. Julie thought that if they soaked the
mask in these cleansing herbs, it might help to get rid of all the
poisons the mask had been exposed to.
Once the mask was scrubbed, washed, soaked and dried,
Leo took a pair of scissors and cut off its hair and trimmed
the bushy eyebrows, while Annabel made a little bed for Roop.
Julie gently lifted the ailing elf and placed him in the wooden
doll cradle and used the cloak as a bedspread. Finally, they
took the freshly cleaned mask and placed it gently over Roop
to make him feel protected and at home.
Twice daily, the children gathered at Annabel’s apartment
to check on Roop, but he continued lying in the cradle, asleep.
They could think of nothing else to do. No help arrived. It
seemed as if they just had to wait.
Meanwhile, snow continued to fall, and for three days
they were housebound. Leo spent most of his time working
on his train set, creating a landscape on a piece of plywood on
trestles behind the bunk bed. It took up a lot of space to Julie’s
228
annoyance, but she was impressed with the results. Though he

tried to get her to help him, she preferred to read novels or
talk with their mother about plants, especially the medicinal
properties of flowers and herbs. She even requested to read her
mother’s dissertation on the Flora Hermeticus. “Aren’t you a bit
too young for that?” Mrs. Temple had asked, though she was
happy that Julie shared her interests in plants and agriculture.
Annabel spent much of her time drawing and painting.
She especially loved painting underwater scenes, trying
to capture the form and color of the exotic fish she’d seen,
including depictions of Wilamelee, Queen Marquellamoosh
and Loutilias, the leather-backed turtle.
A week later, just before they were going to take Sidney for a
walk in the park, they checked on Roop as usual. But the cradle
was empty. Leo lifted the mask, turned it around—nothing.
“Roop’s gone. Now I’ll never find out anything about Massud,”
Annabel cried with despair, lifting up the dwarf’s cloak and
searching through the doll cradle in case he’d slipped down
the side.
“Yes, you will.” It was Roop’s voice, soft, but distinct.
“Where are you?” Annabel asked, all of them looking
around but not seeing Roop anywhere.
“I’m back in my mask and lying on the bed where Leo put
me.” They turned to the mask, leaning against the pillow. “And
thank you for bathing it in those sweet-smelling herbs. It’s good
to be back in a clean home.” Without the scraggly hair and
thick eyebrows, the shiny, clean mask no longer looked scary.
“I still feel weak and I cannot talk much before needing to rest,
so ask now while I am awake and I will try to answer.”
“How can we find Massud?” Annabel wanted to know.
229
“You’ll have to go to the place where I was made. I was

in Ahrmaluz’s power, so I don’t know what part of the city
that was.” Roop’s voice was still weak and raspy. “But through
the window, I saw a tower with an eagle on top. I heard bells
ringing, so I guess there was a church nearby. And trains, many
trains. Ahrmaluz also had a partner, a woman named Eplyssa.
Cruel woman. Many people worked for them. He often met
them at the Red Clown.” Roop’s voice began to trail off.
“Who or what is the Red Clown?” Annabel wanted to
know.
“I cannot talk any more. Find the Red Clown and you will
find Massud.”
Annabel was not even sure she’d heard Roop’s final words
clearly. “Are you sure that Massud will be there?” No answer.
“Please, will he?” No use, Roop remained silent.
For a while, they sat in glum silence. Annabel gently took
the mask, set it back in the cradle, and covered it with the
cloak. “It will do him good,” she whispered.
They sat for a while longer until Leo said, “How about we
follow up on those clues?” He tried to sound upbeat. “Come
on, let’s go and find Massud. We’ll take Sidney for a walk and
make a plan. Yeah?”
230
57 { Asking for Help
“Okay, so here’s what we know,” Julie began, as the three

of them walked through the park, pulled along as usual by
Sidney. Julie and Leo made sure they didn’t walk too quickly
for Annabel, who was trying to keep up with the lively puppy
as best she could. “There’s a tower with an eagle, some church
bells and a red clown.”
“And the sound of trains,” Leo added, always eager to
mention trains.
“There are hundreds of churches in the city, but not so
many towers that have an eagle on top. So let’s focus on finding
that. We can eliminate all other churches or train stations that
aren’t near an eagle,” Julie reasoned.
“Or we could look for the Red Clown, whatever that is,”
Leo said, pulling Sidney away from a torn paper bag filled with
empty cans, soggy chips, and tomato sauce.
“Could be the name of a restaurant,” Annabel suggested.
“Right, or a toy store.”
“Maybe a nightclub.”
At that moment, they saw Mr. Thompson, the film director,
enter the park, talking loudly to someone on his cellphone,
laughing. “Let’s ask him,” Julie suggested. “He might know
something.”
Their neighbor got off the phone just before he passed
them. “Hey, kids. Enjoying the snow? As for me, I say enough
already. Well, you have a nice day.” As usual, he was in a hurry.
“Mr. Thompson, do you know of a tower with an eagle on
top?” Leo asked.
“What, kiddo? A tower with an eagle on top? Hmm …” He
shoved his glasses onto his nubby forehead. “Can’t say as I do.”
231
“We’re looking for a friend who lives near there.”

“And I take it you don’t know his address,” Mr. Thompson
said.
“Nope. It’s near the Red Clown. Have you ever heard of the
Red Clown?”
“No, haven’t heard of that either. Let me look it up.” He
typed into his cell phone. “There are quite a few Red Clowns.
There’s a café, a bar, oh, and there’s a company that rents and
sells costumes for plays, and a Red Clown comedy studio,
clowns for hire, and a Red Clown toy company. Which one are
you looking for?”
“Don’t really know,” Julie said. “It’s supposed to be near
the tower with the eagle.”
“You should ask Mr. Hoover, you know, the detective on
the second floor. He might help you.” Mr. Thompson’s phone
rang. “Sorry, kiddos. Gotta go. See you, and good luck finding
your friend.” He sauntered off, talking loudly and laughing.
The children found a bench and sat down. Leo unleashed
Sidney and let him run free for a while. “Have any of you ever
talked to Mr. Hoover?” Julie asked at length. “I hardly ever see
him. He’s kind of odd.”
“Yeah, with that sourpuss face, always carrying a newspaper
and umbrella wherever he goes, dressed in his pinstripe suit.”
Leo nodded.
“True, but I think he’s really nice,” Annabel said. “He
moved in only a year before you arrived. When he first came,
he introduced himself to everybody and gave us a box of
chocolates.”
“We’ve got nothing to lose. Let’s ask him.” Leo whistled for
Sidney, who came running up immediately.
232
“He’s getting so much more obedient,” Annabel noted.

“Good boy, yes, good doggie,” and she stroked and cuddled
his head.
“Yeah, because he knows he’s gonna get a treat,” laughed
Leo as he threw Sidney some string cheese, before eating the
rest himself.
Back at their apartment building once again, with Sidney
secured back home, the three children stood nervously in
front of Mr. Hoover’s door. Julie plucked up the courage and
knocked. For a while they heard nothing. She knocked again.
They were about to leave when they heard a cough and shuffling
footsteps. The door slowly opened.
Mr. Hoover looked quite different from his normal self.
He wasn’t wearing his pinstripe suit and black polished shoes.
Even seeing him without his umbrella tucked under his arm
seemed strange. He wore old fur slippers, a colorful cardigan,
and brown corduroy pants. He was not in the least pleased
about the interruption. “Yes?” he asked tersely, staring down
at them with his sharp blue eyes that were as penetrating as his
uncommonly deep voice.
The children hesitated and looked at each other, before
Julie stepped forward. “Sorry for disturbing you, Mr. Hoover,
but we know that you are a detective, and we would like to ask
you something.”
“About what?” They could sense his impatient annoyance.
“You must know this city very well. Can you tell us where
there is a tower with an eagle on top? We’re also looking for a
Red Clown.”
“Are you clowning with me? How should I know? Now stop
wasting my time. Goodbye.”
233
He was about to close the door when Annabel stepped

forward with her crutch. “Sorry, but we’re trying to find my
brother who’s been missing for a few years. We don’t know
where he went and… well, we really thought you might be able
to help us solve this mystery.”
“Ah, you must be Annabel,” and he opened the door again,
slightly.
“I am.” She looked him straight in the eye.
“I heard that your brother went missing. That was before I
moved in. Sad, indeed.” His deep voice was not quite so harsh
anymore. He coughed and cleared his throat. “But I also heard
that he was presumed dead.”
“We don’t think so,” Julie responded. “We recently received
information that he might be alive. We thought you might be
able to help us.”
Mr. Hoover thought for a moment, rubbed his long, bony
nose. “Maybe. But you have to make an appointment.”
“Oh, okay.” Julie was disappointed. Why couldn’t he just
answer their questions now? But she responded politely, glad
that he was even willing to talk to them. “Thank you, when
should we come?”
“Well, how about you come back in say… fifteen minutes.”
Mr. Hoover cleared his throat and ran his fingers through his
gray hair.
“Will do,” Leo blurted out, excited that they got an
appointment with a real detective.
“But it will cost you,” he added. All their momentary
excitement left them. They had no money.
“How much?” Julie inquired.
“Run down to the corner store and get me today’s news-
paper. Oh, and four almond croissants. Tell them that they’re
234
for Detective Hoover and they’ll put it on my account. If you

do that, we’re even. You do like almond croissants?” he asked.
They thought they saw a smile peek through his well-clipped
gray mustache.
“Love them! I’ll go!” Leo shouted. The children looked
at each other with wide eyes and wider smiles. Leo took
off running, with Julie close behind as she wasn’t sure he’d
remember the newspaper.
Exactly fifteen minutes later, they were back at Mr. Hoover’s
front door: Julie carrying the newspaper and Leo the bag of
almond croissants. When Detective Hoover opened the door,
he was impeccably dressed in his pinstripe suit and shiny black
shoes. “Come in to my office,” he said, ushering them in. They
could smell his freshly applied aftershave.
A large mahogany desk took up most of the space. Three
of the four walls were lined with bookshelves, filled to capacity
with books, neatly ordered according to subject matter. Julie let
her eye run across the titles. Apart from books on criminology,
legal studies, and forensics, he had whole sections devoted to
psychology, history, and mathematics. Julie, who loved reading
novels, noticed that he had the complete works of Charles
Dickens and of Arthur Conan Doyle who had written all the
Sherlock Holmes stories. A framed picture of Raphael’s School
of Athens hung on the back wall. In front of his desk were three
chairs, on each of which was placed a small plate and a paper
napkin.
“Now sit down, have an almond croissant, and tell me the
whole story.” His deep, officious voice sounded warmer. “And
don’t spare me any details. There are clues in the details!”
235
58 { The Search Begins
They recapped their story for Detective Hoover. Annabel

told him about Massud’s disappearance almost five years ago,
and how their father had searched for him, only to lose his life,
followed by their mother’s illness and passing.
“What makes you think that Massud is alive?” the detective
wanted to know. Answering this question was a bit tricky and
the children looked anxiously at one another. They did not
want to lie, yet they couldn’t tell him about Roop, let alone
about their adventure to Crystal Canyon and the Soft Realm
from where they’d received the fnumbies and the seeds to the
Flora Hermeticus. Instead, they told him about the note they
found in the mask, and how they got their clues from that
rolled up parchment. They didn’t tell him that the mask, in
the form of Roop, had told them about the Red Clown, the
church bells, the trains, and the eagle. Annabel also explained
that their family troubles had begun soon after Massud had
brought a mask home.
“So we think there is a connection between the mask and
Massud’s disappearance,” Julie concluded.
“Hmm, it’s possible,” mumbled Detective Hoover as he
stared down at the notes he’d taken and tapped his pen on the
desk. “Let me see the parchment.”
“We burned it,” Leo said, remembering the flash of flames.
“What, you burned crucial evidence? Why on earth would
you do that? That parchment could have contained important
clues. Now that was downright silly,” the detective scolded as
he tapped the pen on the desk faster and louder. The children
felt guilty, but they couldn’t tell him that Roop would have
lost his life had they not burned the scroll. At last he said,
236
“It is possible that the mask was some sort of evil totem that
Massud brought home unknowingly.” The children looked at
one another, surprised.
“That’s exactly what we think as well,” Julie agreed. “That’s
why we burned the note and washed the mask.” Detective
Hoover grunted, pursed his lips, and put his finger to his long,
thin nose.
“Be that as it may, first thing we’ve got to do is determine
where this place with the eagle, church and clown could be.”
He poured himself a cup of coffee from his silver thermos, took
a bite from his almond croissant, and stared out the window
for over a minute. They waited in silence.
Suddenly, he grunted, twisted his mustache, and began to
think out loud. “The eagle on top of the tower could refer to a
weather vane. In fact, there’s one on top of the famous Crock
Building.” He made a note of it. “Ah, and there’s a statue of an
eagle on the main building of St. John’s Hospital.” He jotted
this down in his notes too and then paused to type something
into his laptop computer.
“Ah, here’s a wooden eagle perched on the flat roof of
Silver Eagle Warehouse.” He sipped his coffee without taking
his eyes off the screen. “And a bronze eagle on the East End
Municipal building.” He scribbled down the address of each
one. Julie realized he was researching ‘eagles on buildings’ on
the Internet.
Mr. Hoover went back to his laptop. “Thought so,” he
mumbled under his breath. “Yes, and there’s a bronze eagle
on the column in the Liberty Plaza, and two on the left and
right tower of the Cliff Savings Bank.” He clicked around
some more. “Oh, and a marble eagle outside Park Station.” He
237
quickly finished scribbling down the last addresses. He looked

up at the eager children.
“Well, it’s a good start. Check on all of these. See if there’s
a church and something referring to the Red Clown nearby.”
Mr. Hoover handed the paper to Julie. “Wish I could help you
more, but I have other cases that need my immediate attention.”
He shut his laptop, which signaled the end of the meeting.
“Thank you so much for your help and all these leads,”
Julie said. The children got up, still holding their plates in their
hands. “What should we do with these?”
“Just leave them on the chair. I’ll take care of them.” Mr.
Hoover waved their concerns away.
“Thanks for the croissants,” Leo said. “They were delicious.”
“You’re welcome. Now follow the leads and let me know
what you come up with.” Detective Hoover stood up. “For
now, adieu.”
Back in Annabel’s room, the three children pored over a

city map, looking up the places and deciding which route to
take. “Some are quite close to one another,” Julie noted. “I
suggest we go to that cluster first.”
“I agree, and then we can move on to the others. In fact,
let’s get started this afternoon,” Leo proposed. He was ready
for a new adventure.
“Would you mind if I don’t come?” Annabel asked
apologetically. “My legs are hurting today, and I’m feeling tired.
I could stay here and keep an eye on Roop.”
“Not at all,” Julie replied. “No need for you to go all over
the place until we know something more specific.”
“Ready when you are, Sis.” Leo stood up. “I’ll fetch the boat.”
238
“No, not for this. But go up and tell Mom we’re going
downtown to watch the ice skating or something. And ask for
some bus money.” Julie was in planning mode.
“Sure.” Leo dashed out the door and was back in less than
three minutes. “Mom said we should bring back some sugar
and eggs. I’m going to forget, so it’s up to you.”
“Whatever.” Julie rolled her eyes.
“Oh, and can we watch some ice skating?
“Maybe, but let’s first hunt down those clues. The search
has begun!” Julie was ready to lead the way, but Leo squeezed in
front of her and bolted out the door. His sister rolled her eyes
again as she waved goodbye to Annabel.
239
59 { One More Clue
As soon as Julie and Leo had gone, Annabel lifted the

mask from the doll’s cradle and leaned it against the pillow.
From the drawer in her desk, she took out colored pencils and
a drawing pad and began drawing the mask while thinking of
Massud. Is he really alive? What does he look like now? Will we ever
find him? Is he in danger? In between the questions that rose in
her mind, she wiped away a tear or two. Drawing comforted
her, and by the time she’d finished, Annabel felt more hopeful
about finding Massud.
“Let me have a look at your drawing.” She immediately
recognized Roop’s voice.
“Oh, I didn’t think I would hear from you so soon.” Annabel
turned the pad around and showed Roop the drawing.
“You are very skillful. And I am glad that you cleaned me
up and got rid of the straw and animal hair on my head.” His
voice was still weak, sounding like the rustling of leaves. “You
captured the proportions perfectly, and you did not make me
look too fierce, like before. Thank you.” Annabel smiled shyly,
improving on the shading of his chin. “I do have two favors to
ask of you.”
“Oh, and what are they?” Annabel looked up, surprised.
“First, give me one of the gold coins from the dwarfs. It has
healing powers and it will give me strength.”
“Of course,” and Annabel quickly rummaged for the last of
the coins in the lowest drawer, remembering King Brathnar’s
words: Give your golden coin to whomever asks for it.
“Please place it on my forehead.” She did as she was asked.
“Ah, that feels so cool, so good. Thank you.” Roop sighed
in relief.
240
“And what is the second favor?”

“I need to go back home.” Roop looked at her intently.
“I thought the mask was your home.”
“It is and it isn’t. It’s my body, my dress, but only partly my
home.”
“What do you mean?” Annabel was confused.
“Though Ahrmaluz cannot hurt me anymore and has no
power over me, he has weakened and wounded me. I am using
my last bit of strength to talk to you. I need this favor.”
“Of course. Anything.” She was willing to do anything that
might help her to find her brother.
“Take me back to the forest where I belong—to the oak tree
from which I was sawn and severed in such a harsh manner.
I cannot regain my full strength without going back to my true
home, in the care of Tologoka, the tree spirit.”
“Where is this forest?” Annabel asked.
“It’s north of here, near the village of Limia, on the slopes
of Puff Mountain.”
“Puff Mountain. How funny! That’s where Julie and Leo are
from. Their farm was up there. What a coincidence!” Annabel
could hardly contain her excitement.
“I know, and it makes me both happy and sad.”
“Why sad?” Annabel stopped suddenly. Maybe this was
going to be more complicated than she thought.
“If you take me back, then maybe I can make good the
sad.” Roop’s voice began to trail off again. “Oh, and one more
thing.”
“Yes, what is it?” Annabel still felt confused. There seemed
to be more and more things to be considered.
“Keep an eye out for a quill.” Before Annabel could ask him
what this meant, Roop fell into a deep sleep once again.
241
60 { Finding the Red Clown
A couple of hours later, Julie and Leo returned, exhausted.

They had been to the Crock Building, the Silver Eagle
Warehouse, the column in the Liberty Plaza, and the municipal
building. “That leaves Park Station, St. John’s Hospital, and
Cliff Savings Bank. We’ll do those tomorrow,” said Julie, and
she flopped down on Annabel’s bed.
“Either a church or a train station was missing at each place,
Leo added. “And no Red Clown anywhere.”
“That’s okay. Tomorrow’s another day,” Annabel said
reassuringly. “Now I have something important to tell you.”
She told them about her conversation with Roop: how he
needed to get back to the oak tree on Puff Mountain.
“Amazing! What a fluke—to think that he was made from
an oak tree growing on the slopes of Puff Mountain. Anyway,
it’s a great excuse to visit our farm,” Leo shouted excitedly. “But
what do you think would make him sad?”
“I don’t know, but we should take Roop back to his oak
tree. He might not survive otherwise.” Annabel glanced over at
the doll cradle in which the mask lay.
Julie twirled her hair and stared out the window. At length
she said, “I suggest we first check on the last three clues, and
try to find Massud. We’re so close—I’m sure of it. If they don’t
lead to anything, or we don’t find him, then we’ll come back
here, fetch the mask and go to the farm.” She got up. “Anyway,
it’s too late to do anything more today. Besides, we’ve got to get
the sugar and eggs we bought up to the kitchen and help Dad
with dinner, so we’d better go.”
“Oh, there’s one more thing. I don’t know what Roop
meant, but he said we should keep a lookout for a quill.”
242
“Hmm, I don’t know either, but let’s keep it in mind.” Julie

turned to go. Come on Leo, we don’t want to upset Mom.”
The next morning, after Leo walked Sidney through the

park, they met in the corridor. Julie and Annabel were raring
to go.
“I feel much stronger today, and I made some sandwiches,”
said Annabel as she tapped her backpack. “In fact, I’ve been
up for hours, getting ready. I couldn’t sleep anymore, thinking
about Massud. I just hope we find him. I admit I’m worried,
even scared.”
“Don’t be. We’re in this together.” Leo had to restrain
Sidney who was sniffing the backpack. “Down, boy, you’re
getting your slobber all over the place.”
“Are you ready, Leo? We want to go now.” Julie was getting
impatient.
“I’ll just take Sidney back up, but don’t wait for me. Go
ahead. I still need to go to the bathroom. I’ll catch up with you,
or we’ll meet up at Park Station at the front entrance. It’s only
three blocks down.”
“Okay,” Julie shouted after him as he ran up the stairs.
“Hurry!”
Annabel and Julie walked to Park Station, where they
waited for Leo. It took a while before they saw him jogging up,
his pockets bulging with stuff that bumped against his legs with
every step. “What took you so long?” Julie asked.
“Sorry. Still had to do some… you know, stuff. Anyway, did
you find something?”
“No, not yet.” They looked around, but there was no church
near Park Station. They walked to Cliff Savings Bank with its
large bronze eagle on top of the central tower. The entire area
243
was so trendy and modern that it seemed unlikely there would

be a mask-making shed tucked anywhere nearby, though there
was a church that chimed ten times. But there was nothing
that could even remotely pass for a Red Clown—no shop, sign,
restaurant or club.
“That leaves St. John’s Hospital,” Julie reasoned. For
Annabel’s sake and spending their last few coins on the fare,
they took the bus to the hospital that was three blocks to
the west.
“Yuk, what a stench!” Leo wrinkled his nose the moment
they got off the bus.
“Right, and it’s really skanky around here.” Julie fanned the
air in front of her nose. “I mean, look at all the garbage in the
streets and on the pavement.” The trash cans were overflowing,
and graffiti covered the walls.
“There’s the hospital.” They looked across the road to where
Annabel pointed with her crutch. The eagle above the entrance
of the old neo-Gothic hospital was prominently mounted. Two
more eagles were perched high up on steel spire towers, green
with oxidation. “And there’s the church.”
They walked toward the old church. “Oh, and it’s called St.
John’s Church,” Leo said, skipping up the steps and pointing
to a bronze plaque.
“Did you know that Saint John is known as the eagle?”
Annabel asked.
“How do you know things like that?”
“Aunt Miriam told me. I forget why.” She smiled, her white
teeth showing.
“But I don’t see a train station anywhere.” Julie looked
around, while tying up her hair with a black hair tie.
“Nor a red clown,” Leo noted with a furrowed brow.
244
“Let’s look around a bit before we give up,” Julie responded.

“You guys go ahead. My legs hurt. I’ll sit down here on
the church steps.” Annabel wished she’d taken both crutches
instead of only one.
“Okay, we won’t be long.” Julie and Leo set off, crossing the
road to the hospital.
Annabel sat watching people go by, wondering if her brother
was anywhere nearby. Everything around her was rundown and
noisy. Trucks and cars drove by, honking. In the distance, police
sirens blared, a dog yapped with ear-splitting persistence, in sync
with a construction worker drilling into the concrete pavement
with a jackhammer. The brakes of a minivan squealed. It
reminded her of her early years in the ghetto, and how Massud
had always looked out for her, protected her. She’d always felt
safe in his presence. She smiled, thinking of him, his cheerful
face. Down the road, three homeless people stood around an
oil drum in which they’d made a fire, spreading their hands
over the flames to keep warm. The mom-and-pop stores looked
like they were struggling to keep going and make ends meet.
From where she sat, she could look straight down a
cobblestone alley, which clearly had seen better days. It had
pavement only on the left, and that was littered with filth, the
metal trash cans overflowing and without lids. A dented green
dumpster was pushed into a niche, in front of which was a fire
hydrant. The fire escapes on the buildings were mostly rusted,
and parts of the metal railing were twisted, bent or missing.
Julie and Leo returned. “Well, the good news is that there
is an underground train going by on the other side of the road.
You can’t see it, but you can hear it and feel it,” Julie said. “We
asked, and the station is just a block away.”
245
“But the bad news is that there’s no Red Clown anywhere,”

Leo added, pulling out another string cheese, peeling and
dropping the yellow strands into his mouth as if he were
swallowing worms.
“Actually, there is,” Annabel suddenly blurted out. “It’s
right there!” she cried, pointing down the cobblestone alley.
“Where? I don’t see anything.” Julie and Leo squinted but
didn’t recognize anything resembling a red clown.
“Follow me,” commanded Annabel as she pushed herself
up with the crutch and hobbled down the alley. “Yesss, I’m
right. We’ve found the clown!” Annabel hobbled along as fast
as she could, the tapping sound of the crutch echoing off the
walls.
“Where? What are you talking about?” Julie and Leo looked
all around.
“Look, it’s the fire hydrant,” she exclaimed as she came to
a stop in front of it.
“Huh, so it is. Right there—in plain sight,” Julie laughed.
“It’s red and someone painted a smiley face on it, with the huge
eyes and fat red lips of a clown.”
“That’s it, for sure. And it’s really funny.” Leo said,
chuckling at the red clown in front of them. “Look at its little
arms sticking out, the painted waistcoat with the black buttons,
and the funny red-and-white striped hat. Good job for spotting
it, Annabel.”
“Thanks.”
“Sometimes, it’s the things we least expect,” Julie noted,
walking around the old fire hydrant.
“Yup, it’s the place alright, confirmed by the quill. Look!”
Leo pointed to the niche off to the side next to the window
into which the dumpster was pushed. Hanging from the wall
246
was a wrought-iron quill. Three steps led down to a door and a

shop window on which was written The Magick Quill.
“Just like Roop said. This is the place, for sure,” Annabel said.
“You’re right.” Julie nodded. “Well, should we enter?”
“I guess we should,” Annabel agreed in a soft, nervous
voice. Would she find Massud? Or was this just a wild, hopeless
venture?
“Let’s do it.” Leo pranced down the stairs and opened
the door.
247
61 { The Magick Quill
Two little bells chimed greedily. The place had a musty smell
and was cluttered with knickknacks: from diaries, calendars
and maps; knives, daggers, swords, and other weapons, down
to harmless envelope openers. Shelves were crammed with
antique books and indigenous musical instruments covered
with signs and symbols. Dozens of masks hung on the walls
and from the ceiling. Precious goods and cheap trinkets lay side
by side. There were quills, fancy ink holders, and stationery
made from an assortment of papers, parchment, and papyrus.
Displayed in several glass cabinets were ritual bells, chimes, and
chalices; cauldrons, carved bowls, and wands; silk and satin
bags; bottles, funnels, and jars filled with herbs and powders.
How could so much fit into such a small space? From
floor to ceiling, every inch was occupied—candles and ornate
candleholders; trays and dishes; stickers, buttons and board
games; gemstones, pendulums, crystal balls, tarot cards, and
astrological charts; vials with oils and perfumes; posters and
prints. The children gazed and gawked in wonder.
“This place is so awesome!” Leo cried.
“True, it’s fascinating,” Julie remarked, “though the smells
are kind of suffocating. Pungent, my English teacher would say.”
“Feels creepy to me,” Annabel whispered, “but I’d love to
have some of this painting paper.”
“I wonder where the owner is. It’s so quiet. And what are
we going to say anyway when someone comes?” Leo asked. “We
can’t very well say that we’re looking for Massud.”
“Of course not,” Julie scoffed. “Let’s look around for some
clues. And don’t get distracted by all the interesting stuff. Clues
—that’s what we’re after.”
248
“Watch out,” Annabel cautioned as she looked out the shop

window. “There’s a man and a woman coming.” A tall, thin
man wearing a fedora and a trench coat, and a woman dressed
in a fur hat, brown leather jacket, and black jeans, walked
toward the shop. A white woolen scarf was curled around her
neck. They were both sipping coffee from paper cups. They
didn’t come in, but stood next to the red clown. The man put
his leg on the clown’s head.
“Leo, keep an eye on them while we snoop around some
more,” Julie said.
After a minute Leo, who’d stationed himself at the window
behind a glass cabinet filled with little figurines and statues,
whispered, “Another man’s joined them. He’s giving them
a bag.”
“I wouldn’t mind getting some of this jewelry,” Julie said,
fingering the necklaces and earrings.
“Don’t get sidetracked,” warned Annabel, who was focused
on finding something that would lead her to Massud.
Julie replaced the jewelry. “It’s hard when we don’t know
what we’re looking for.”
“Hey, now there are some children talking to the men.”
Leo crouched and peeked out from behind the glass cabinet.
“A whole bunch of them.” He shifted to get a better view.
“Wait, they’re giving the men something—money, I think…
yeah, money. Ah, now the tall man’s taking something out
of the bag—little packages—and giving them to the children. I
wonder what that’s all about. I don’t like it. Those poor kids
look scared.”
Annabel looked up. “Right, and wearing rags. Some are
even younger than we are.” She looked over Leo’s shoulder.
“Oh, now they’re running off.” Annabel felt sorry for them.
249
She turned away and continued to looking around. “Watch

out! The tall guy’s coming; he’s going to enter the shop.”
“Hide!” Julie hissed urgently.
“But where?” Annabel cried, looking around frantically.
Leo left his post and ran behind the counter. “In here.” The
girls followed him through a bamboo curtain. A moment later,
they heard the door open and the shrill tinkle of doorbells. The
children stood perfectly still. They heard the man muttering
to himself.
Moments later he said, “Ah, here it is.” Leo peeped through
the bamboo curtain and saw him remove a little carved box
from under the counter. He was about to walk out again when
he stopped and sniffed. “Somebody’s been here,” he muttered
under his breath. “She should have locked the door.” With
that, he switched off the lights, flipped the sign to read Closed,
stepped outside, and locked the door. The children breathed
a sigh of relief, but then realized that they were locked in. How
would they get back out?
“I wonder if that was Ahrmaluz,” Leo said, trying to focus
on something besides his growing panic.
“Most likely. But now that they’re gone, let’s look around
a bit more,” Julie proposed. Annabel let out a muffled scream,
and they heard her fall.
“Are you alright?” Julie cried.
“Yes, I’m fine. I didn’t see the step behind me. Sorry.” Leo
quickly took out a small but powerful flashlight from one of his
many pockets and shone it toward Annabel.
“Here, grab my arm.” Julie stepped down and helped her
up. “Look, here’s a corridor. We might as well check out where
it leads.”
250
Leo shone the flashlight down the corridor. “Agreed, but

are you sure you’re okay, Annabel?”
“Sure, just a bruise. I’m fine.” She grasped onto her crutch.
“Let’s go.”
Leo pushed himself past Julie and led the way until they
came to a wooden door. They looked at one another, nodded,
and without a word, Leo carefully turned the doorknob.
They entered a large room piled with boxes up to the ceiling.
To their left was a vinyl strip door with dim light behind it.
Leo switched off his flashlight and Julie put her finger to her
lips, motioning for them to be silent. They peeked through
the faded strips of heavy plastic into a long and narrow room,
filled with more boxes. On the shelves were hundreds of musty
books: paperbacks and hardcovers, leather bound. At the far
end of the room stood a desk, and Above the desk hung a
lone yellow light bulb at the end of a long cable, attached to
the cracked and moldy ceiling. A young black man with his
back to them sat at the desk, bent over, writing. More books
lay stacked on the desk and all over the floor. Occasionally the
bulb above him flickered due to a bad connection. He stood up
and turned around. He wasn’t a man at all, but a boy, tall and
thin. Could this be Massud? Annabel thought.
The three children snuck forward to see more clearly. He
rifled through some papers, found what he was looking for,
and sat back down. At that moment, Annabel knocked against
a crate with her crutch. The children froze. At once, the tall boy
sprang to his feet, spun round, and looked about. The children
crouched and hid behind the boxes.
Annabel suddenly remembered the Hall of a Thousand
Grottoes, specifically the last grotto where she’d come across
251
a scene of her brother surrounded by books. Her heart beat

furiously. It had come true! She had found him—of that she
was convinced. Annabel stepped forward and said, “Massud,
my brother, I have found you at last!”
252
62 { Meeting Massud
The boy stared at her, bewildered. If Annabel had expected

a warm welcome, she did not get it. “Who are you, and how did
you get in here?” His words were slow and came from a person
who was not used to speaking much.
“I am Annabel, your sister.” She took another two steps
forward. Leo wanted to join her, but Julie pulled him back.
“I have no sister… not anymore.” He blinked his eyes to see
more clearly.
“But, you do. It’s me, Annabel,” and she took another step
forward.
“Then you must be a ghost. Another ghastly trick to torture
me.”
“It’s no trick. Come, see for yourself.”
“No, no, I don’t believe it. You’re just a figment of my
imagination. Be gone, cruel vision.” He picked up something
from the desk and was about to hurl it toward Annabel.
“Stop! It’s true. Annabel is your sister.” Leo couldn’t hold
back anymore and came forward, followed immediately by
Julie. They both flanked Annabel, ready to protect her. Julie
suddenly remembered the words of Queen Marquellamoosh,
how she’d warned that they might not recognize each other.
“And who are you?” he asked, lowering his arm. “What
other ghosts are there?” Massud’s eyes looked sunken, but they
flickered with life.
“No ghosts at all,” Julie answered. “Just us three people.
I am Julie, and this is my brother, Leo. We are your sister’s
friends. We live upstairs from her and your Aunt Miriam.
Annabel has told us so much about you.”
253
“How you got kidnapped…” Leo added, “…and how your

father looked for you, and…”
Julie tugged Leo’s arm and whispered, “Shh, don’t say
too much.” They stood in silence, staring at one another, till
Massud stepped toward them. His trousers were too small for
him, and the jacket was patched and coming apart at the seams.
“They told me that you had died, that everybody had died.”
He stopped and looked intently at Annabel.
“It’s true, Mom and Dad died. But I’m alive, and I am
standing right here in front of you.” Annabel shrugged as if to
say that this simple fact should prove it all.
Massud took a few more cautious steps toward them, as if
he was afraid that they might turn out to be a mirage after all
and dissolve at any moment. He was half a head taller than
Julie. He stretched out his hand slowly, took another step, and
touched Annabel’s cheek. He lifted the cornrows that partly
covered her brow. Then he smiled. “It is you. It’s still there, the
little scar you got when you tripped and fell on the pavement.”
“Of course it’s me,” Annabel said with a nervous laugh.
She was tingling all over with joy.
“So you are alive after all. It really is you! For the longest
time, I never believed them when they said you were dead. But
in the end, I gave up. I stopped seeing you in my dreams, and…”
He was cut short by the harsh jingle of the doorbells. “It’s them.
They are back. You are in the greatest danger! They’ll know
you are here within minutes.” He looked around frantically.
“There’s only one place to go, and that’s up. Follow me!”
Massud pushed past them and led them through the vinyl
curtain, out the door, and down the corridor. It was dark and
Leo switched on his flashlight. “No, no, put it off. Your eyes
will get used to the darkness.” They felt their way back to the
254
bamboo curtain. Through the curtain, they got a quick glimpse

of the couple taking off their coat and jacket. Massud led them
to a vintage elevator and pulled open the old scissor gate. It
made a metallic noise as it laboriously slid open.
“Who’s that?” the tall man shouted from the shop.
“It’s me,” Massud shouted through the bamboo curtain,
“I have to fetch some more parchment.” Massud pushed the
three children behind him and yanked the concertina cage
shut, hoping to be out of sight before the man entered the back
room. But it was too late.
The man stepped through the bamboo curtain. “Wait, I’ve
got another list of names and addresses for you to write down.
I’ll put them here.” He was about to put them down on an old
crate when he spotted the kids behind Massud. “Hey, get back
here. I told you not to let any more kids in here.”
“I’m just showing them around,” Massud said, trying to
sound unworried as he pushed the button.
“Hey Eplyssa, we’ve got a problem,” he called back to the
woman. “Massud is protecting some kids again.”
As they disappeared up the elevator shaft, they saw the
woman run in yelling, “Well, that’s the last time he does
that. You’re going to pay for it—big time! All of you!” And she
continued screaming after them, “You can’t get away. You’ll
regret it. We’ll put you back in the hole. And you know how
much you liked it last time.” Her voice was piercingly shrill.
255
part eight
The Secret of the Quill
63 { Trapped
“What other children were you protecting?” Leo wanted to

know.
“Later, I have to get you to safety first,” Massud said
dismissively. “They’ll be after us. We have only a few minutes’
lead. You all have to do exactly as I say.”
“Who are they? Do they work for Ahrmaluz?” Julie asked.
“How do you know the name?” Massud whipped his head
around and stared at her in amazement.
“From a parchment we found in the mask you once brought
home,” Annabel answered.
“Ah, that mask! I wish I’d never bought that mask.” Massud
groaned in misery.
“So who is this Ahrmaluz?” Julie persisted.
“He’s the tall man you saw. He and his wife, Eplyssa, have
kept me prisoner since they jumped me—kidnapped me.” They
heard footsteps and shouting coming from below. “They’re
running up the stairwell, just as I thought.” The elevator
stopped. Massud yanked the scissor door open. They entered
into a large workshop. It reeked of toxic smoke, oil, and coal.
Dozens of masks lay about in various stages of completion, next
to skins and hides.
256
Part 8 » The Secret of the Quill
“This must be the shed that Roop… uh, the creature in

the mask… told us about,” Leo said, peering around, hoping
Massud wouldn’t be confused.
“Yes, it’s called the ‘shed’ but no time to look around.”
Massud hurried through a narrow door onto the rooftop. He
ran to the edge of the building, picked up a plank, two by ten
feet long, and plunked the board down so that it connected to
the neighboring building. “Okay, listen up. This is what you
have to do: Crawl over to the other side, and don’t look down.
Understand? Then run to the metal door on the other side. It’s
always open. You’ll find your way out. Now go!”
“Wait. You aren’t coming with us?” Annabel cried, alarmed
at the thought that she might lose Massud again.
“I can’t. I have to keep them occupied while you make your
way across. Go, go, they’ll be here any minute!” Massud began
to push the children toward the edge.
“I’m not going to leave you. Not when I’ve just found you,”
Annabel insisted.
“No choice. You must.” Massud grabbed the crutches and
threw them over to the other building. “Go, before we all get
caught. And you won’t want that, trust me.”
“I’m going only if you come along.” Annabel stood tall and
thrust out her chin in defiance.
“But I can’t,” Massud lamented and he pointed down to
his foot where they saw a thick black anklet.
“Is that a monitoring device so that they can control your
whereabouts?” Julie asked.
“Yes, it’s an ankle brace. But it’s worse than that. It’s also a
shock bracelet.” They could hear the thumping on the stairwell.
They had less than a minute to get across.
“You mean, like an electric dog collar?” Leo exclaimed.
257
“Something like that. Now that you know, I beg you—go!”

“Leo, Julie, you go, but I am staying.” Annabel was adamant.
They’d never seen her so resolute.
“Well, if you’re not going, then neither are we—right, Julie?”
Leo was not going to leave his friend when she most needed to
be protected.
“Right—so where can we hide?” Julie wasted no more time
in trying to change the group decision.
“There is no place to hide!” Massud shouted frantically.
From the stubborn looks on their faces, he realized they
wouldn’t change their minds. “Okay, I’ll come with you and
just bear the shock. It will hurt, but it won’t kill me.” He
readjusted the plank, making sure it was secure. “Julie and Leo,
you go first, and then I’ll go last with Annabel. It will take just
seconds to cross.”
Leo jumped onto the little wall first, and without much
thinking ran over the plank to the other side before Massud
had even finished his sentence.
“There, done it. Come on, Julie.” Leo beamed from the
other building.
“You’re crazy, Leo,” Julie yelled. She wasn’t as reckless; she
went down on her knees and crawled over, keeping her eye on
Leo, without looking down.
Massud took Annabel’s backpack, slung it over his shoulder,
and lifted her onto the plank, “Hold onto the sides and pull
yourself forward.” Annabel might not have had strong legs, but
her arms were perfectly fine, and she scuttled across almost as
fast as Julie.
Massud was about to get onto the wall when the door to
the rooftop flew open and Ahrmaluz jumped out, shouting,
“Wouldn’t do that if I were you. You’re not getting away.”
258
Massud, however, jumped onto the board. Almost immediately,

he felt an electric current buzz through his body. He felt his
muscles jam. The pain was worse than expected. He heard
Annabel scream his name. He lost balance and fell, though he
managed to grab onto the plank with one hand.
Julie bent down, grabbed the crutch and held it out to
him. Massud swung his body toward the crutch and was able
to clutch it with his free hand. Letting go of the plank, he held
onto the crutch with both hands as Julie and Leo pulled him
up to safety. He crumpled on the rooftop, his body in spasms.
Ahrmaluz laughed and ran up to the plank. Leo, seeing he
was going to climb on and cross over, tugged the plank from
its place and gave it as big a shove as he could manage. The
plank plummeted to the cobblestone alley below. “That’s still
not going to help you,” sneered Ahrmaluz.
“Massud, you’ve been with us for five years. You don’t
seriously think you’re going to escape so easily? Tut, tut, you
should know better.” Massud was still convulsing on the
rooftop. The electric current shot through his body in short
ongoing spurts. “I warned you,” Ahrmaluz put one foot on the
low wall. “The shocks won’t stop until you’re back here. So
enjoy this until you come to your senses.” The man snickered,
watching Massud jerking on the other side.
Annabel watched in horror. She had to do something!
Was there no one who could help them? Then she let out
a high-pitched yelp as an idea rose in her mind. She fished
something out of her backpack—the tiny coral chest that Queen
Marquellamoosh had given her. The words of the queen rang
in her ears: If you are ever in need, you may open it up and you are
sure to find something that will aid you.
259
She opened it now, and found a coil of seaweed. Without a

second thought, she took it and wound it around the blinking
bracelet. She was as surprised as the rest of them when she saw
that the electric shocks stopped at once.
“Wow! Thanks, Annabel,” Massud gasped, stunned and
relieved. He got up, brushed himself off, his body tingling. “I
don’t know how you did that, but we’ve got to get out of here.
Come on, Annabel, take your crutch and I’ll carry you on my
back.”
“And where exactly do you think you can run to?” Behind
them stood Eplyssa, the blonde woman, blocking the doorway,
whip in hand. “You’re trapped!”
260
64 { Holding Hands
Eplyssa approached them with a sneer on her face. “No use

trying to make a run for it. You’ll never escape. And if you do—
well, you’ll get a taste of my good pal, Bruno,” and she cracked
the whip, inches away from their heads. “Massud knows what
Bruno can do, don’t you,” she cackled as she cracked the whip
again.
“She’s right,” Massud whispered. “I’ve felt its sting many
times.”
Meanwhile, Leo had put his hand in his pocket and
clutched the bottle that he’d decided to bring along at the very
last moment. Stealthily, he took it out, uncorked it behind his
back, and softly whispered for the boat to come out. None of
the others noticed what he’d done. They were too fixed on
Eplyssa and her whip.
After secretly slipping the corked bottle back in his pocket,
Leo took hold of Annabel and Julie’s hands and whispered,
“Boat’s waiting for us.” Julie caught a glimpse of Swan Boat
hovering behind Leo’s back and immediately understood what
was happening. She grabbed Massud’s bony hand tightly.
“This is going to appear strange, but just go with it—it’s our
only hope,” Julie said to Massud under her breath.
“Hey, no talking. One more word, and you’ll taste the
whip,” snapped the woman as she looked for her companion.
Although she didn’t show her worry, she knew it would be
difficult for her to capture four children alone.
Ahrmaluz had placed another plank between the two
buildings and was crossing it, a coil of rope in his hand. The
children knew that as soon as he crossed over, they would be
tied up and made prisoners.
261
Without losing a moment, Julie, Leo, and Annabel

mumbled, “On the boat,” and at once, the four of them landed
in the boat, leaving Ahrmaluz and Eplyssa baffled. How could
the children suddenly disappear? It took only an instant before
Eplyssa spotted the little boat hovering in the air where the
children had been. She cracked the whip just as Julie shut the
ethmaroll and Annabel shouted “Away boat! Take us to Honey
Creek Farm!”
At once, the boat shot into the air, but not before the tip
of the whip flicked its prow. It spun through the air, knocking
the children off their seats. But Swan Boat quickly regained
control and sped off.
Incredible as the sudden appearance of the little boat had
been and the children somehow having been transported onto
it, now they had disappeared altogether. The tall man’s eyes
darted around like laser beams, searching for them, as Eplyssa
stood ready with her whip. Realizing that the children had
escaped made her shriek with anger, and she lashed out into
the empty air with the useless whip.
“Saved by the boat,” Leo sighed, relaxing and leaning back.

He was more than proud of himself for thinking to bring the
boat along.
“I have to admit you saved the day too, Leo—you thought to
bring Swan Boat,” admitted Julie, admiringly. “Good work all!”
Massud, who’d fallen to the floor, pulled himself up by
the mast and sat down on the bench next to Julie, speechless.
He looked around at the boat, then over the railing, down at
the city passing below him. Lastly, his eyes came to rest on his
newly found sister and her two companions. Taking in a deep
breath, he finally spoke, “If I weren’t actually sitting here with
262
you, I would never ever believe this could be possible. Never!

You have some explaining to do,” he laughed, breaking into a
broad grin.
“Right. We have a whole lot of stuff to catch up on,”
Annabel responded, smiling.
“But wait!” Julie interrupted. “Before we explain things, and
before we can go to Honey Creek Farm and Puff Mountain, we
have to go back home to get the mask.”
“No, we don’t. I’ve got the mask right here in my backpack,”
exclaimed Annabel and she tapped it with her knuckles. “I
thought it would save time, whether we found Massud or not.”
She looked up at her brother and, after a few seconds, flung
her arms around his neck, crying, “It is so good to see you
again, to be with you! I never gave up hope, although I often
felt hopeless.” She held on for a long time, just hugging him. At
last, she released him and said, “Let’s celebrate with something
to eat and drink.” Annabel opened her backpack and took
out the sandwiches and thermos she’d thought to bring.
Once they’d enjoyed the snack, Julie turned to their new
companion and smiled. “So Massud, tell us your story.”
263
65 { Massud’s Story
“I was hoping that you would first tell me what this is all
about, but I guess I can wait.” Massud returned Julie’s smile,
and Annabel locked arms with him and squeezed tightly.
She could feel how thin he was and a wave of sorrow washed
over her for a moment as she imagined him imprisoned in
that building, alone, tortured, and neglected. Leo bit into his
sandwich and looked at Massud expectantly, while Julie poured
hot chocolate from the thermos into paper cups. “I’ll give you
the short version. We can always go into the details later.”
Massud cleared his throat and began. “One afternoon, I’d
decided to go back to the old neighborhood where we used to
live. On the way, I passed a flea market and stopped to look at
some masks and stuff. I didn’t want to buy anything, but while
I was browsing, the woman—who turned out to be Eplyssa—
handed me a cup of tea and, for a small fee, offered to read my
fortune in the tea leaves. I declined until she said she would
do it for free. So I drank the tea, and she told me to throw the
dregs on a small dish she held out.
“After looking at the tea leaves for a while, she prophesied
that I was born to help others and that I had the heart of a
leader, but that powerful adversaries would stop me unless I
remained awake. Then a man, who had been sitting behind
the booth watching the proceedings, got up, handed me one
of the masks, and said it would protect me from any harmful
opponents. That was Ahrmaluz.
“I refused to take the mask and started to feel weird, I mean
physically not well. They must have put something into that
tea, because I felt lightheaded and nauseous. The man started
to press me to buy the mask even while I kept saying no. But he
264
was insistent, saying I could have it for a reasonable price. I still

didn’t want it and began walking away. But Eplyssa stopped me
and said I could have it for a small donation. So I gave them
the few coins I had left. I admit, I rather liked having the mask.
It reminded me of my African heritage and the other masks at
home.” Massud looked at Annabel with regret in his eyes.
“And that was the big mistake,” Annabel said, remembering
Roop’s words.
“Correct. The funny thing is that Eplyssa had told the truth.
I should have been more awake, and there were adversaries. I
just never thought that they were the people I had to watch out
for. She’d tricked me. But, as with many things in life, I realized
that only afterward.”
Massud took a small bite of his sandwich and chewed slowly,
shaking his head at the memory. “Anyway, a few days later I was
drawn back to the flea market. Since having the mask, I’d felt
uncomfortable, as if I couldn’t think straight anymore. Even
worse, I had this urge to go back to them, give myself up to
them, offer my services, and work for them. So I went to their
stall.
“Ahrmaluz was not surprised to see me and told me to meet
him at the red clown in front of The Magick Quill in an hour.
It was only two blocks down, so I went there early. As I looked
through the window of The Magick Quill, I saw Eplyssa drag
a little boy behind the counter, shouting at him. I couldn’t
hear what she’d said, but I saw her beat the boy. That’s when I
realized that something was not right.
“Instead of meeting Ahrmaluz, I ran home, determined I
would have nothing more to do with them.” Again, Massud
stopped and looked up. “Yeah, but it wasn’t that easy.” He took
another bite. They waited until he finished chewing.
265
“The very next day, on my way to school, another boy

stopped me and gave me a note, before running off. It said to
meet Ahrmaluz at the red clown that afternoon. Again, I felt as
if I had to go, needed to go, was forced to go. But I fought that
urge and did not go.
“I don’t know how they found out where I lived, but two
days later, Ahrmaluz and Eplyssa grabbed me—it was right in
front of our corner store—and pushed me into their car. They
took me to The Magick Quill, where they’ve kept me prisoner
ever since.”
“So what did they make you do?” Julie wanted to know.
“And why?”
“I’ll tell you more of what happened, but first tell me about
this amazing boat of yours and how you were able to find me
after all these years.” Massud clearly needed to rest.
“Well, that’s also a long story,” Annabel said. “But like
you, we can tell you the short version and fill you in on the
details when we get back home.” She leaned her head against
his shoulder and smiled. She noticed that his clothes were
threadbare and dirty.
Julie and Leo began. They told him about finding the boat
on Honey Creek Farm and how they got to know Annabel,
followed by their adventures with the dwarfs, the Binagatorials
and Queen Marquellamoosh. They even gave a brief account of
their latest adventure.
“Now I have even more questions.” Massud laughed
and nodded. “Wow, what a story! Again, I’ve got to admit, I
wouldn’t believe a word of what you’ve just said if it weren’t
for the fact that I’m sitting in this boat with you at this very
moment—flying through the air. I mean, really?” He stopped
laughing and his face turned serious. “But then again, I have
266
witnessed weird things at The Magick Quill, though it was

never to help others, but magic of the worst kind.” Annabel
shivered at his words.
“There, I see Honey Creek Farm below us,” Leo shouted.
“That was quick. Time flies when you’re having fun.”
They all looked down, and Julie gasped, “Oh no, that’s
terrible!”
267
66 { Returning the Mask
A large tract of forest on the back slopes of Puff Mountain

had been logged. A logging road cut through their former
property, bending round to the far side of Puff Mountain
where hundreds of trees had been felled. The slopes looked
like a partly sheered sheep.
“That must be Mr. Phipson’s doing,” Julie hissed. “I was
right, Mom and Dad should never have sold the farm to him.”
Leo steered the boat farther down. They also noticed that a
large wire fence had been erected around the farmhouse and
the surrounding barns. The whole place looked forlorn. “At
least they didn’t log everything.”
“But that might still happen. It’s only a matter of time.
They’ll most likely start up again when the snow melts,” Julie
stated flatly.
“I’m sorry about the logging,” Annabel empathized. “Let’s
find a place to land. Remember, we’re here to return the mask.”
“Bring back the mask?” Massud queried. “You mean my
mask; the mask we’ve been talking about?” Annabel nodded
and explained how they had helped the creature within it to
escape from its curse and that it had requested to be brought
back to the place where it had come from. For a moment,
Massud looked at Annabel in disbelief, but then just nodded.
“But where could that be?” Leo asked. He looked helplessly
at all the fallen trees. “He might not even be able to find his
tree anymore.”
“Over there, at the foot of Puff Mountain, where they began
logging. See, there’s a pond and a large oak tree,” Julie said.
“It’s pretty spectacular, even without the leaves… the way the
268
boughs and branches sprawl up and around the thick trunk.

Funny, I never noticed it before.” Julie loved trees.
“That’s probably because it was hidden in the forest,” Leo
reasoned. “Besides, we hardly ever went walking in that part of
the woods—and there weren’t any paths.”
“You’re right,” Julie agreed. “There’s hardly any snow next
to the oak tree, so let’s land there,” she suggested. “Looks to me
like they burnt all the slash quite recently. Check out all the ash
from those leftover tree limbs.”
They landed and disembarked. “What a beautiful pond,”
Annabel declared. “Look, you can see the fish swim around
underneath the ice.” Leo picked up a pebble and threw it over
the ice. It sounded as if it were bouncing off a sheet of steel as
it skipped its way across, causing the fish underneath to dart
about in fright. “And this oak tree is even more spectacular up
close. It must be centuries old. It’s definitely the one.”
“What do you mean, Annabel?” Leo asked, throwing
another flat pebble over the pond.
“There, you see. Someone sawed off a burl a long time ago.
It must be the burl that was carved into Massud’s mask—into
Roop.” They walked up to the tree. “This is where we’ll leave
the mask. Roop will be back in the forest where he belongs.”
Annabel opened her backpack and brought out the mask that
she had wrapped up in a blue silk scarf and King Brathnar’s
cloak.
“I know exactly where it should go,” Massud said, which
surprised them, since he had not said anything up until then.
He stretched out his hand to Annabel. “May I?” She gave him
the mask and he stiffly climbed up the tree. It had been a long
time since he had been free and able to move about with his
usual strength and grace. Massud secured the mask in the fork
269
of three large boughs, right in the center of the old oak tree.
“Done!” he cried out proudly as he swung himself down. “No
wind or storm is going knock the mask down. Trust me.”
The mask blended perfectly, snuggled up as it was in the
tree’s lap. While they looked at the mask, they could make out
Roop’s faint, but distinct voice: “Thank you for bringing me
back.” They immediately stepped closer to the tree trunk to
hear his words. “Now I hope to regain my strength with the
help of the oak tree, my home. I have been the cause of much
pain, especially for you, Massud and Annabel.” Roop paused.
“But maybe joy will still come of it all. There is a reason for
everything, though it may remain hidden for a while. All things
are interconnected, like your friendship with Julie and Leo.
Now that there are four of you, the last mysteries can be solved.
Remember the words of wise Queen Marquellamoosh… yes,
I too know them: Big deeds are achieved through the persistence
and courage to face the small hurdles along the way. Nothing is too
insignificant. I repeat: All things are connected, the great and
the small.” The voice was getting weaker, and they huddled
even closer around the old oak, looking up.
Roop continued. “I have a task for each one of you, but
be sure to help each other. These will be my last words to you
before I go into a long, deep sleep.” By the sound of his failing
voice they wondered if he would even have the strength to say
what he needed to say.
“Julie, your task is to take out the Flora Hermeticus seeds and
spread them in the field of ashes you see around this tree.”
“But I don’t have the seeds with me,” Julie answered,
disheartened.
“But I do,” Leo answered. “The reason I was late this
morning was because I decided to bring along a bunch of
270
stuff, like the boat and the flask filled with the Flora Hermeticus
seeds.”
“Shh, don’t interrupt Roop. Let him finish,” Annabel said
kindly, squeezing Leo’s hand to let him know she was proud of
him for bringing the seeds along.
“Leo, I want you to bore a tiny hole in the ice. Annabel,
you must drop a sunbead—a fnumby—through the hole into
the water.” Again, he paused; the children held their breaths,
wondering whether Roop would speak again.
They were about to turn away from the tree when they
heard Roop utter in a surprisingly strong voice, “Massud, you
must return to The Magick Quill once more to find the sacred
object that is the key to unsolved mysteries.” Massud caught his
breath, not wanting to reveal the fear that rose up in his throat
at the thought of returning to that awful place.
The strain was getting too much for Roop, and with
a wavering tone he added, “Retrieve it and the power of
Ahrmaluz and Eplyssa will be broken.” His voice trailed off.
Massud nodded, resigned to his fate but buoyed by the sudden
thought that, this time, he would not be alone.
The four gazed up at the mask above them. They wondered
what Roop meant. What object was Massud supposed to find? As
if Roop knew their thoughts, he answered, “You will recognize
it when you see it.” And then, in the faintest of whispers, he
said, “Return to this very place at the spring equinox, but not
one day before.” They waited in silence, but no more words
sounded from the mask.
“Let’s get to it,” Julie said, always the one to get things done
as soon as possible. “Leo, hand me the Flora Hermeticus seeds.”
Leo reached into his pocket, but stopped. “Hang on, what
about the fnumbies? We don’t have them with us.”
271
“Wrong again,” Annabel answered. “After they were stolen

the first time, I vowed to carry them with me at all times.
They’re right here in my backpack.”
“Kudos to both of you. I guess Roop must have known that,
otherwise he wouldn’t have given us the instructions. Anyway,
let’s do some planting.” Julie gave each one, including Massud
who was happy to play a part, a handful of the Flora Hermeticus
seeds. At once, they spread themselves out and sowed the seeds
in the field of ashes, avoiding the half-burnt roots and branches
jutting through the thick gray carpet.
Next, Leo walked to the pond’s center and started to bore
a hole through the ice with his pocketknife. The ice was thick,
and he had to scrape, pick, hack, and drill with his sturdy blade
until he’d pierced through the solid layer that covered the pond.
The others joined him on the ice. Annabel carefully
removed a crystalline fnumbavat from the flask and cere-
moniously dropped the shiny seed through the icy hole into
the pond below. The children peered through the ice and saw
how it slowly dissolved and spread a golden glow across the
entire pond. It was as if they were standing on a golden disc
enveloped by light. Massud’s eyes were ablaze with wonder and
the reflected golden glow.
In this hallowed moment, Leo took out the bottle and
uncorked it. Together, they called the boat to come out. They
held hands and boarded her. “Take us home!” they called
out in unison. As Swan Boat rose and turned gracefully back
toward the city, each crew member was lost in thought about
the remaining task and about returning to the pond at the
spring equinox.
They flew back in silence. Annabel could hardly wait to
introduce Massud to Aunt Miriam. What would she say?
272
67 { Dinner Party
Of course, they would have to do a lot of explaining without

revealing Swan Boat’s secret or the truth behind the mask, let
alone their escapades with the dwarfs. But at the moment, they
were too happy to worry about that.
Aunt Miriam wasn’t home yet from the hospital. Massud
took a quick shower and put on fresh clothes that were still in
his room awaiting his return. They were a bit too small for him,
but he looked much better than when he’d been discovered in
the shop.
Then the small group of children went upstairs and
introduced Massud to Mr. and Mrs. Temple, who welcomed
him with the greatest show of warmth. Mrs. Temple immediately
began to organize a festive dinner for the occasion. Julie was glad
that her parents didn’t ask any probing, awkward questions, but
focused instead on making Annabel’s brother feel welcome.
Massud, who was not used to this kind of attention, just let
it all happen to him. For the last five years, nobody had done
anything nice for him, and he couldn’t quite fathom what all
the fuss was about—why anything special was put into motion
on his behalf. He was simply glad to be part of a family again.
“Apart from Aunt Miriam, there is one more person we
have to invite,” Leo suggested.
“And who might that be?” Mr. Temple asked, flicking his
hand through his thick black hair.
“Mr. Hoover, the detective. Without him we would never
have found Massud.” Julie and Annabel nodded in agreement.
“Righteo!” responded his father, always ready to be friendly
with a neighbor. “Leo, you and I are going to see him right
now and invite him. I’ve often thought of asking him over.
273
Here’s our opportunity.” Off they went. To Leo’s surprise, the

detective was more than happy to come for dinner.
While they were gone, Massud took Annabel and Julie
aside and quietly asked, “Is there a way my ankle brace could
be removed? It will need some special tools. I’ve tried all sorts
of things, but I’ve never succeeded.”
“Sure. I know just the man for the job. Come on, we’ll find
him right this minute.” Julie jumped up.
“Find who?” Annabel asked, while Massud looked hopeful.
“Mr. Travers, of course.”
“Of course. Perfect.” Annabel smiled at Massud. “He used
to be a bus driver, but now he’s retired. He can fix anything.”
“Ask him to come to dinner as well, if he wants to,” Mrs.
Temple shouted from the kitchen.
“Will do,” Julie yelled back as she hurried out and down
the stairs with Massud.
On the way they met Mr. Thompson, the filmmaker. When
he saw Massud he stopped and said, “Ah, Julie, this must be
your friend. So you found him,” he observed. Nodding, he
introduced himself and shook Massud’s hand.
“You helped us find Massud by telling us to go to Detective
Hoover. He helped us with the clues we had,” Julie said, smiling
up at him. She really liked Mr. Thompson.
“Well, I’ll be darned. That’s just dandy.”
He was about to turn away when Julie said, “We’re having
a welcome home dinner party for Massud at around 7 o’clock.
Please come. We’d love to have you.”
“Hmm, let me see,” he muttered, whipping out his iPhone
and checking his schedule. My next appointment is not until
10 tonight. So, yes, I’d be glad to come for a while. See you,
kiddos.” Mr. Thompson hurried off, as usual.
274
Mr. Travers was surprised to see them, and even more

surprised to see the ankle bracelet. “I’ve never seen one like
this before. It looks homemade—but professionally done,
nevertheless.” He took some heavy-duty pliers and tried to
break it open, but failed. Using shears also failed. “Well, well,
they really did not want this to come off, did they?” Lastly, he
took a metal saw, and even that took longer than expected.
“You’re not in some kind of trouble with the law, are you?” he
asked while sawing away. “I’m not one to help escaped convicts.”
“Mr. Travers, that’s not such a nice thing to say,” Leo
frowned.
“Just joking, munchkin. Any friend of yours is a friend of
mine.”
“That’s great, because we would like to have you over for
dinner. Then you’ll hear more about Massud’s story. Detective
Hoover and Mr. Thompson are coming, and Aunt Miriam, of
course. How about it?” Julie asked.
“Well, I’d be delighted. Absolutely delighted.” By then he’d
sawn right through the monitoring device. “There you go—a
free man.” Massud rubbed his ankle and beamed appreciatively
at the friendly man.
“Great! See you at seven,” Julie chirped. “Oh, and thanks
Mr. Travers. We knew we could count on you!” Had they not
rushed off so quickly, they would have detected tears in his
eyes, for Mr. Travers was a lonely man who had not received an
invitation in a very long time, not since his wife had died, and
that was many years ago.
Of course, there was much to be done. Leo was sent out to
buy groceries and ice cream for dessert. Annabel helped Mr.
and Mrs. Temple in the kitchen. Julie vacuumed the carpet
in the living room, and Massud lengthened the dining room
275
table. Julie also swept and mopped the corridor and set the
table with Massud.
“You know,” Julie remarked, once it was all done, “we’ve
never actually had a dinner party here before.”
“You’re right,” Mr. Temple agreed. “So it’s high time.”
And it was going to be a special time. In between all the
tasks that she helped with, Annabel peered out the window to
see when Aunt Miriam was coming home. The sun had already
set and it was dark outside. All too often she had to work late.
At last, she saw her. “She’s coming!” Annabel shouted.
“Good. I will walk down right now and personally invite
her to dinner,” Mrs. Temple said.
“Don’t tell her why,” Julie called after her mother. “Let it
be a surprise.” Minutes later she returned with Aunt Miriam.
Annabel could not contain herself. “Aunty, I want to
introduce you to someone.”
“Oh, that’s very nice. Is that why we’re having dinner
together?”
“It is.” Annabel clapped her hands in joy and waved to
Massud, who was in the kitchen, to step forward.
Aunt Miriam had never met Massud because she had
arrived from Africa only after his disappearance, yet as soon
as he entered the living room, she cried out, “Massud, it’s you,
isn’t it? You have returned!” she exclaimed, opening her arms
wide and bursting into laughter that quickly turned to tears.
Massud relished the warm welcome and they hugged,
with Aunt Miriam mumbling words in her own language. Mr.
Temple took a tissue from a box and blew his nose, and Mrs.
Temple smiled, swallowed, and breathed deeply.
“My, you look so much like your father,” Aunt Miriam
said at last, taking a step back and looking him up and down,
276
before she let out another groan of happiness and stroked his
cheek. She thought: This boy is thin and sad, despite his smiles. But
he is home now, and we’ll soon put everything right again.
“Well, I can see my mother in you,” Massud answered.
“Thank you for coming to care for my sister. I thought I had
lost my entire family, but today I have found more than just a
family—I have found a community.”
At that moment, Mr. Travers knocked on the door, and
the other guests were right behind him. Introductions were
made, and soon they were all sitting around the table. They
were about to start dinner when there was another knock on
the door.
“Who can that be?” Mr. Temple wondered, getting up.
To his surprise, it was the twin sisters, Irma and Edith
Brooks, looking sheepish and flustered. “Um, sorry to disturb
you,” said the one.
“Yes, terribly sorry, but um, we’ve locked ourselves out of
our apartment,” added the other.
“We tried calling Mr. Travers who has helped us before, but
he’s not in,” said the first.
“Then we called Mr. Hoover, but he wasn’t in either,” said
the second.
“So we thought, um, that maybe you could possibly help us.”
“I would be glad to help you,” Mr. Temple answered,
smiling. “But why don’t you first join us for dinner. In fact,
it would make the party complete, because the others in our
building are here, too. That’s the reason you couldn’t find Mr.
Travers or Mr. Hoover.”
“Hmm,” said the first twin.
“Hmm,” echoed the second.
277
“Is that a yes?” Mr. Temple asked, gesturing for them to

enter.
“Oh no, we can’t possibly impose on you,” Irma argued.
“Indeed, that would amount to an imposition,” Edith
confirmed.
“On the contrary, it would be a downright pleasure to have
the two of you join our happy table.” Mr. Temple looked at
them with a twinkle in his eye. “So will you?”
“We’d love to,” they both sang in chorus, breaking into
smiles.
“Everybody! Please welcome the Brooks sisters,” Mr. Temple
called out. Julie got up to add two more place settings. “This is
turning out to be quite the party—a fitting tribute to Massud’s
homecoming.”
They ate, drank, talked, and laughed way past the
children’s bedtime. Massud told his story again, interrupted
by many questions asked and answered, though he kept much
to himself. Finally, when Leo and Massud looked as if they
would fall asleep in their plates, it was Aunt Miriam, with a
nod from Mrs. Temple, who called an end to the party. The
guests welcomed Massud home one last time and thanked their
hosts profusely as they tumbled out the door and back to their
own apartments with full bellies and full hearts.
That night, Massud slept in his own bed again, with fresh
sheets lovingly supplied by Aunt Miriam. How strange to be
back in his own bedroom after five long, lonely years. Nothing
had changed—every toy was in its place, exactly as he’d left
them. But he was too tired to look around, and he slept better
than he had in all those years.
278
68 { Followed
It was a chilly morning, but the four children did not mind
as they walked Sidney through the park. There was not enough
snow on the paths to pull Annabel along on the sled, so they
walked slowly and leisurely. This time, however, Annabel used
both her crutches.
“This is my first full day of freedom,” Massud said, smiling
as he looked around the park and at the people skating on the
frozen lake. “I rarely got to go outside, except on the rooftop
and a few outings accompanied by Ahrmaluz. This is beautiful.”
“I can’t imagine what that must have been like,” Julie said.
“What did you do all day long?”
“As I said, mostly I was in that room where you found me,
doing book work. I was always good with numbers, so they
made me do a lot of accounting and some computer work too.
Though, as you saw, many things were off the record. They did
not want anybody to hack into their database. Anyway, I was
always writing down a lot of names and numbers. I also kept
stock of all the inventory in their shop, which was just a cover-
up, of course.”
“For what?” Julie wanted to know.
“Mostly, illegal substances, such as toxic chemicals that
poison the earth and the atmosphere, and pharmaceuticals—
pills and powders of all kinds, medications for any condition
you can imagine.” Leo did not exactly understand what Massud
was talking about, but he did not interrupt. “Through their
shop, they’d lure people who were seeking alternative remedies
or lifestyles. But down at the docks they had a factory and
warehouses where they made and stored many of the chemicals
that they then sold, especially to farmers, for a lot of money.
279
They hired homeless children and teenagers from the ghetto

and off the streets to work for them. It was my job to write
down all their names and exactly what they did—always on
parchment. Ahrmaluz and Eplyssa believed that once their
names were in those books, they had special power over them.”
“Well, I believe that,” Annabel said. “After our experience
with the mask. They most likely cast some weird magic spell
over those books of names.”
“You’re right,” affirmed Massud. “Understand, those two
people are like vampires; they get their power at the expense of
others, sucking warmth and light from them. I felt their force.”
He took a deep breath. “It was difficult to resist.
“The ink I used was not just any kind of ink either. Every
man, woman and child who worked for them had to undergo
a medical exam. Ahrmaluz and Eplyssa would wear white lab
coats so they’d look like doctors, and during the exam, they
would draw a syringe full of blood. Part of this blood was
mixed into the ink that I used to write down their names and
everything they did. I don’t know what that conniving pair did
with the rest of the blood, but I suspect that it was the blood
that gave them power over the people they hired, especially the
children.”
As they walked along, Annabel had a strong feeling that
they were being watched. She turned around casually, as if to
enjoy the view from the hillock and, out of the corner of her
eye, spotted a man wearing a fur coat and an Irish tweed cap.
She’d seen him before, when they’d first entered the park.
The man quickly looked away and sat down on a park bench.
But as soon as Annabel continued walking, he got up and
followed them.
“Did you also go to the warehouse?” Julie asked.
280
“I worked in the warehouse and the factory before they

discovered how good I was with numbers and how neat and
orderly I could write. I was forced to mix and boil chemicals in
huge containers and to stand at a conveyor belt together with
the others, filling boxes and barrels with all kinds of stinky
substances. At the end of the day, I had to clean the heavy
machinery, the vats and boilers. When I wasn’t doing that, I had
to load trucks or trains with pallets piled high with the poisons.
Many people got sick, broke out in rashes or developed lung
problems. Some just disappeared. Later on, when it became my
job to write down the names in the logbooks, I saw that their
names had been crossed out and the ink had turned green.”
“Sounds terrible,” Julie said. “What do you think happened
to them?”
“I don’t know, but I think they died or were disposed of.
Once, when I asked what had happened to a boy who’d gotten
sick and disappeared, I was told it was none of my business.
Trust me, Ahrmaluz and Eplyssa are not good people.”
“Evil’s the word! I have no doubt,” Julie said forcefully,
“especially if I think of those poisonous chemicals they sell to
farmers. No wonder they wanted to stop the sunseeds from
getting out into the world.”
“Yes, the sunseeds are a threat to their thriving business.
But the fnumbies are also powerful. Ahrmaluz and Eplyssa
surely wanted to use that power for their own evil purposes.”
Massud looked sideways at Julie. A slight breeze blew her hair
back from her face, and he admired her determination. He
wondered about the adventures she and the others had had
recently.
Julie caught his eye. Massud smiled and quickly turned
away. To cover up his momentary embarrassment, he said,
281
“You’ll have to tell me more about the fnumbavats and how

you managed to get hold of them.”
“We’ll have plenty of time for more stories, now that you’re
free,” Julie assured him.
They were walking on the far side of the park, and Annabel
kept her eye on the man with the tweed cap behind them,
keeping his distance. “Don’t look back, but we’re being
followed,” she said at last.
“You’re right,” Massud confirmed with a glance. “We
should make our way back home, but don’t let on that we
know. I recognize that man. His name is Phisto—he’s a friend
of Ahrmaluz’ and a bad guy. He beats the children more than
Eplyssa.” They turned down the next path. “I’m not surprised
to see him. I knew they’d hunt us down. They know where we
live.
“Besides, they have hundreds of masks all around the
city that can tell them more than any monitoring device
or surveillance camera could. They are the ears and eyes of
Ahrmaluz and Eplyssa. The children are ordered to hang the
masks in special places. In fact, there are most likely some
right here in this park. Others hang in subways, train stations,
airports, busy streets, and malls—everywhere, and always well
hidden. Their power is big—and growing.
“At first, it was only in this city, but it’s spread to other
cities. They are opening new factories. Their plan is to spread
their evil wares across the country and, eventually, the world.
There are many other pharmaceuticals and chemicals used
throughout the world, but their products are the strongest and
most harmful. You were lucky that you could transform the
demon in the mask with your kindness.”
282
For a while they walked in silence. The man in the tweed

cap kept following them. What was he planning to do? Were
they in danger? They chose to take the main path back with
more people around.
“So how can we stop them from doing such bad stuff?” Leo
finally asked, breaking the silence.
“It’s clear,” Massud answered. “I need to get back to The
Magick Quill and find whatever Roop was referring to, which I
hope, will break their power.”
“And solve all the mysteries…” Annabel added, “…whatever
they are.”
“One thing is for sure, we’ll definitely go with you,” Julie
stated firmly.
“No, the mask said that it was my task.” Massud shook his
head vehemently.
“Yes, but Roop also said that we needed to help one
another,” Julie argued.
“And don’t forget, we have our own magic, the good kind—
that helps rather than hinders,” Julie said. “We also have the
boat that makes us invisible.”
“And some other things, like our caps from King Brathnar.”
Leo chimed in.
“And of course, the fnumbies. They are a kind of magic,
too.” Julie concluded.
“Anyway, it’s not likely that you’d get back in there unless
you are invisible. So you need us, and yes, we’re going together,”
Annabel stated firmly.
Massud smiled at his sister and newfound friends.
“Together it is!”
The man followed them all the way back to their apartment
building. Once they went inside, he got into a van but did not
283
drive away. It was clear he was not going to let them out of
his sight. “He’s on a stake-out, observing our activities,” Julie
said. “So let’s go off to The Magick Quill right now. If we leave
with Swan Boat, he’ll never see us leave. He’ll sit there thinking
we’re still at home.”
“Good.” Massud said. “Let’s go and see what we can find.”
284
69 { Breaking and Entering
They arrived as the bells of St. John’s Church struck twelve.

Leo landed Swan Boat on the flying buttress of the church
from where they had a clear view of the alley and the red clown.
“They usually lock up at 12:05 p.m. punctually, and as soon
as they do, we’ll enter.” Massud was right. At exactly 12:05
p.m. the couple exited the shop and walked down the road to
their favorite restaurant, the Hot Platter. “Time to go. We have
exactly one hour. No more.”
“Where to?” Leo asked, looking questioningly at Massud.
“To the rooftop. They never lock the door to the stairwell
during the day.” They sailed over, landed at the door, and
disembarked. After the boat was back in the bottle and corked,
Leo stowed it safely in the deep front pocket of his khaki cargo
pants.
Massud, meanwhile, tried to open the door, but it was
locked. “Ah, they’re playing it safe. No matter.” He put his
hand up the drainpipe next to the door and took out a spare
key. “I saw them put it there when they thought nobody was
looking.” He quickly opened the door, but kept the key. “Okay,
down we go.”
“Wait,” Annabel said. “I’ll stay here. I’ll be your lookout. It
will take too long for me to hobble all the way down those stairs
with my crutches.”
“But you’ll get too cold,” Leo said.
“Not if you stand right next to the chimney,” Massud
assured her, pointing to the red brick chimney near the shed.
“It looks like they’ve got a good fire going to smoke some more
of their masks. From there, you’ll have a good view of the streets
down below.”
285
“Done. If I see anything I’ll shout down to you.” Annabel

felt proud that she now had an important role to play.
“Better yet, take this little whistle,” Leo offered, hauling out
an ocarina, a small clay form in the shape of a nightingale with
holes in parts of it. “Blow into the tail to make it whistle three
times to signal us.”
“Where do you get all these things from, and how do they
all fit in your pockets?” Annabel chuckled. Nevertheless, she
was glad Leo was so well prepared.
“Never mind that,” Massud said. “I think it’s a good idea.
A whistle won’t tip them off the way your shout would. Take
it. Okay, let’s go.” The three disappeared down the stairwell
while Annabel made herself comfortable next to the chimney,
leaning against the warm red bricks while keeping an eye on
the alley below.
Once they were down in the shop, Julie began searching the
back, while Massud and Leo searched the front. “It’s just like
last time,” Leo noted, “when we looked for clues that would
lead us to you. We didn’t really know what we were looking for
then, either.”
“Well, now we’re looking for something that will break
their power,” Massud reminded them.
“Whatever that might be,” Julie said with a shrug. She
wondered how Massud felt being back in the shop.
“I guess we’ll know when we find it—that’s what the mask
said,” Massud said with anger in his voice.
Whenever Julie or Leo held something up, like a gemstone
engraved with runes, an exquisitely carved tusk, a mahogany
jewelry box inlaid with mother of pearl or a Chinese lantern,
and asked, “What about this?” Massud would just shake his
286
head. He seemed to be confident that he’d know when they’d

found what they were looking for when he saw it.
After a while he said, “Time’s running out and there’s
nothing here. Let’s think. Maybe it’s something… or someplace
we least expect.”
“Right, somewhere in plain sight,” Julie added.
“Indeed, in plain sight,” came a deep voice from behind
the bamboo curtain. “In plain sight, just like the three of you.
So hold it right there. You’re trespassing, which is against the
law.” A man swished through the bamboo curtain, and they
immediately recognized him as the one who’d followed them
that morning, even though he wasn’t wearing the tweed cap
anymore. How did he get here so fast?
“You thought you were so smart. You thought I was still in
the van when you left. You were right in part: The van is still
there, but I doubled back here as soon as you went inside. We
knew you’d come snooping around here again. We have our
sources.” He sneered. “Massud, you were careless. You should
have known that.”
He took out his cellphone, dialed a number and said, “Got
’em… yup… ready to be picked up.” He put the phone back in
his pocket and gloated. “There’s no way out. The door’s locked
and I’m standing right here. So don’t even think of running,
or you’ll get hurt.” The man was clearly pleased with himself.
“So, Massud, how did you enjoy your one and only day
of freedom? As for the two of you… well, you’ll end up as a
statistic in the missing-persons file. They’ll pin flyers of you on
street corners and in the post offices. You’ll have your ‘fifteen
minutes of fame’.” He laughed at his own clever joke.
At that moment, they heard the three warning notes of
Annabel’s whistle.
287
70 { Treasure Lost and Found
Annabel had gotten cold on the rooftop, despite the warm

chimney. Time had passed slowly, and she had started to doubt
whether the others would find anything. Suddenly, she spotted
Ahrmaluz and Eplyssa approaching earlier than expected.
Immediately, she opened the door to the stairwell and played
the three notes on the ocarina, as planned.
Annabel expected Massud, Leo and Julie to come running
up the stairs or take the elevator, but they didn’t appear. By
now Ahrmaluz and Eplyssa were inside the building. Were they
hiding from them? Had they found something? Did they come up
with a different plan? After ten minutes, she knew something
was wrong and, after fifteen minutes, she knew she had to do
something.
She pushed open the door and went down the stairs,
careful not to make any sound with her crutches. Standing on
the landing of the floor above the shop, Annabel heard voices,
but couldn’t make out what they were saying. Holding on to
the railing, she quietly stepped down a few more stairs and
peeked around the corner into the back room. To her horror,
she saw her brother and her two best friends tied up, duct tape
across their mouths. What to do?
Then she remembered the cap from King Brathnar that
she’d put into her coat pocket that morning. If there was ever
a more opportune moment to wear it, it was now. She took it
out, put it on her head and pulled the tassels. Smoothly the
cap slid over and covered her entire body, and she was invisible.
Scared that her crutches would give her away she tried walking
without them. Whether it was the magic of the cap or her own
determination she did not know, but she found she had more
288
strength in her legs than usual. Not much, but enough. The
change gave her the confidence she needed.
Carefully, step by step, she approached the room, steadying
herself against the wall with her hands. Not only were they
tied up, but Swan Boat and the flask of fnumbies were out on
the table.
“So you really thought you could get the better of us, did
you?” Ahrmaluz asked sarcastically, walking around them,
while Eplyssa and the other man, who Annabel immediately
recognized as the one who had followed them in the park,
leaned against the wall. “Well, your plan has backfired.”
“Our mask told us about the boat and the precious little
sunbeads or fnumbies, as you call them, before he betrayed us
and joined you,” Eplyssa hissed.
“But we don’t care about that traitor anymore. We have
you, and better still, we have the boat and the beads,” Ahrmaluz
gloated as he waved his hand over the flask and the boat. Strewn
across the table was also a big pile of bric-a-brac—the contents
of Leo’s pockets. Annabel couldn’t help but smile at all the
funny things he kept in them.
“Now, Phisto,” commanded Ahrmaluz, nodding to the man
who’d followed the children, “go and get the van, so we can get
rid of these nuisance kids. We’ll take them to… well, you know
where,” and the three adults broke out laughing. “While you’re
gone, we’ll continue to interrogate our ‘guests’ a bit more.”
As Phisto left through the bamboo curtain, Annabel saw
her chance and quickly followed him, slipping through the
bamboo curtain before its rattling came to a rest. She watched
him unlock the front door and walk out. He left the key in the
door, which gave her an idea. She quietly removed the key and,
ever so carefully, opened the door so that it wouldn’t bump
289
against the doorbells. She squeezed out and closed the door
soundlessly, waited a few seconds, and then knocked loudly.
As expected, Ahrmaluz appeared, opened the door and
looked out, but saw no one. He went back inside, cursing.
Under the magic hat, Annabel smothered a laugh.
Seconds later Annabel knocked again, even more loudly.
Ahrmaluz again rushed to the door, opening it so that the
doorbells clanged angrily, and ran up the stairs to the alley
to try to catch the person who’d knocked and run away. He
was so fast that he almost bumped into her. A minute later he
returned and went back inside.
Annabel wondered how she could knock and be out of
the way more speedily. She looked around and spotted the
wrought-iron sign of the quill hanging right above the shop.
She unhooked the iron quill from the copped brocket to which
it was attached with two small hooks. Stretching, she once again
banged loudly against the door, this time with the iron quill,
while standing on the upper step. This time, both Ahrmaluz
and Eplyssa came running, throwing open the door with force.
Annabel immediately ducked behind the dumpster.
“You go left, I’ll go right,” shouted Ahrmaluz to his wife.
“We’ll catch those jerks this time, and they’ll get what they
deserve,” she sneered as she shook Bruno, the whip.
As soon as they ran off, Annabel limped as fast as her lame
legs allowed, back into the shop, locking the door from the
inside. She rushed through the bamboo curtain, threw the metal
quill on the table and pulled off her cap. Even though their
mouths were taped shut, and their hands and feet were tied,
she could see the surprise in her captured companions’ eyes.
“Sorry,” she murmured as she pulled off the tape; she
then tried to untie them, but the knots were too tight and
290
well tied. She looked around frantically. Glancing at the table,

she noticed that the quill resembled a scimitar. Glad for its
serrated edges, Annabel started sawing away at the rope around
Massud’s wrist.
It proved more difficult than she thought. “You can do it,
Annabel,” Massud said. “And as soon as I’m free, I can help free
the others.” The rope was thick, and cutting it was slow going.
“Hurry, before they come back,” Julie urged. Annabel
could imagine the danger they were in and sawed away with
renewed vigor. Suddenly, they heard Ahrmaluz trying to open
the front door. They could hear the angry couple shouting and
hammering against the door.
“They’ll break it down,” Leo cried. Desperately, Annabel
hacked, tugged, and sawed at Massud’s rope.
“I’m almost through,” she panted. But she knew that, even
if she managed to free Massud, it would take too long to free
the others. They all felt a growing helplessness.
“Use my pocketknife,” Leo urged. “It’s lying right there on
the table.”
“Good idea, but I’m almost done.” Annabel made one last
frenzied attempt when, to her surprise, the metal quill clattered
to the ground, leaving her holding a gleaming, slightly curved
dagger. The metal quill was nothing more than a sheath hiding
the blade underneath! Annabel needed only one slice of the
dagger to cut through the rope.
Once his hands were free, Massud took the dagger from his
sister. In an instant, he slashed through the rope around his
feet—it needed only one thrust. At that moment, the door was
bashed down, and they heard the doorbells clanging shrilly.
Had their time run out? Massud did not lose his concentration;
but turned his attention to the others.
291
Meanwhile, Annabel had uncorked the bottle, releasing the

boat. Massud skillfully freed Leo and Julie, who grabbed the
flask of fnumbies. Leo wanted to stuff all his knickknacks back
into his pockets, but Massud said, “No time, leave them.”
“Okay, okay!” Leo agreed, though he managed to grab the
little chest he’d received from Queen Marquellamoosh and his
grandfather’s pocket watch.
“Hold hands!” Julie shouted. Massud quickly bent down,
picked up the metal quill and sheathed the dagger before
grabbing onto Julie’s hand.
“On the boat,” they said, just as Ahrmaluz and Eplyssa
stormed through the bamboo curtain, snarling as they caught
just a quick glimpse of the boat before it disappeared.
“Success! We got what we came for,” Massud shouted in
triumph, as they shot between the heads of Ahrmaluz and
Eplyssa and out through the broken-down door into freedom.
Swan Boat made a quick stop, allowing Massud to grab
Annabel’s crutches before it rose up between the buildings
along the alley and into the blue sky above.
“Annabel, you were amazing! Who knew I had such a smart
sister… and brave, too.” Julie and Leo raised their voices in a
loud cheer and Swan Boat gave a gentle rock to and fro to join
in. “Thank you. You’re really special,” murmured Massud as he
hugged his sister tightly. Annabel wiped a tear from her eye and
smiled at the peaceful feeling she felt in her heart for the first
time in five years.
292
71 { The Dagger
“What do you mean we got what we came for?” Julie asked.

“The dagger in the sheath, shaped like a quill, of course!
That’s what Roop wanted me—or us—to find,” said Massud.
“It’s the key to the unsolved mysteries. I’m sure of it!” He
smiled and lifted up the finely wrought-iron quill. “Ahrmaluz
and Eplyssa’s power is now broken.”
The children squeezed closely together on the bench and
stared down at the quill. Massud held the handle and pulled
at the quill. It didn’t budge. Then he noticed a little knob on
the lower part of the handle. He pressed it with his thumb.
Immediately, he was able to slide the gleaming dagger from the
sheath. He grinned broadly and held up the steel blade.
It was indeed a most skillfully crafted dagger, engraved with
complex patterns that streamed along the sharp blade so that
it appeared to be fluid, with many swirls and whirls weaving
in, out and under. “I have seen many things in the The Magick
Quill but nothing like this—not even close.” Massud shook his
head in admiration.
“But what mysteries is it supposed to solve?” Leo wondered
aloud.
“No idea, but I hope we’ll find out.” Massud brought the
dagger down to inspect more closely.
“You’re right about having no idea—even more than you
think,” Julie exclaimed. “What you have in your hand has been
missing for hundreds of years.”
“What do you mean?” Leo asked, puzzled.
“Just take a close look at the handle,” Julie instructed.
Massud put the dagger on his knees so they could all get a
better view.
293
“Ah, I get it,” Leo said, his voice filled with understanding,
as if everything was clear now. “There’s the purple flower with
the seven petals!”
“Exactly! The Flora Hermeticus.” Julie sat back with a look of
deep satisfaction spreading over her flushed face.
“So this belongs to the dwarfs of the Bricanus Mountains,”
Leo gasped, his astonishment growing by the second. “But how
do you know it’s been missing for such a long time?”
“Don’t you get it? This is what Grandpa was looking for.
This is what Curly Beard asked him to find, what all the dwarfs
have been searching for, and what Grandpa asked us to look
out for. Well, here it is!” Julie declared triumphantly, spreading
her arms as if to take in the whole joy of discovery. She was so
moved by the find that she almost choked on her own words.
“But wait,” Leo argued. “What Grandpa asked us to find
was a key.”
“Exactly, and this quill is not only a quill, this dagger is
not only a dagger, but this is also a key. You can tell by the
engravings. It’s large and it’s pointy, just like Grandpa said.”
In her enthusiasm, Julie picked up the dagger off Massud’s
knee and pointed out the finely fashioned indentations. “Yes,
this is most definitely the treasured key that King Brathnar has
been searching for!”
“We’ll have to let the dwarfs know as soon as possible,”
Annabel said, peering at the relic with renewed respect.
“We will. But do you know what else it means?” Julie turned
to her younger brother.
“No,” Leo answered, looking up her quizzically.
“That we’ll finally be able to return to Honey Creek Farm!”
Julie said, smiling brightly.
294
“What? Uh, great! Uh… how come?” Leo was happy, even
though his sister’s words left him confused.
“Remember Queen Marquellamoosh’s prophecy? She said
that our wish to return to the farm would come true once the
key is found. And, ta-dah, it is!” Julie had no doubt of her
assessment of their find.
“Hmm, I think you might just be right.” Leo sat back and
grinned at his sister.
“Sometimes, I am right, little brother. But let’s put the
dagger back in its sheath.” Julie gave the dagger back to Massud
who slid it effortlessly into the metal quill.
They sat in silence as the boat neared their apartment
building. They looked down upon their neighborhood as they
sailed above it, each lost in his or her own thoughts, but all glad
they could again feel safe there. After a while, Julie spoke up.
“I think it’s time we told Detective Hoover about Ahrmaluz
and Eplyssa.”
“I agree,” Massud confirmed, nodding. “Let’s see what he
says. Maybe there’s enough evidence to have them locked up.”
“We’ll go to him as soon as we get back home. You never
know what that evil pair will think of next.” Annabel wanted
to be sure she’d never have to face them unexpectedly again.
“Right, we should not underestimate them. They are
resourceful. I’m sure they are planning something as we speak.”
Massud couldn’t help but worry, after all he had been through
and all he had seen.
“But don’t mention anything about the dagger,” Leo warned.
As soon as they were back in Annabel’s room, they hid
the dagger in the bottom drawer of her dresser, where she also
stashed the flask of sunbeads. Leo ran up to Detective Hoover’s
295
apartment to request an emergency meeting. To his surprise,

the detective agreed to meet the four children immediately. He
gave Leo some money for half a dozen assorted pastries and
told him he’d be ready for them at 4 o’clock sharp.
When the weary group arrived, Detective Hoover had
made tea for all. Although the children didn’t usually drink
black tea, they joined him and enjoyed the pastries that Leo
had chosen. Detective Hoover and Leo smiled at each other
conspiratorially.
Instead of sitting in his office, this time the detective,
dressed as usual in his pinstriped suit, bade them sit around his
mahogany dinner table. It was set neatly with English teacups,
plates, and starched white napkins. Once the tea was poured
and everyone felt revived by the delicious little feast, they told
him of the latest developments.
Detective Hoover listened intently, asking questions in
between each child’s contribution to the story and getting
increasingly interested and excited. Most questions were
directed at Massud, who told him everything he knew about
the contents of the books, the warehouse, the factories down at
the docks, and those they planned to establish in other cities,
as well as about the abuse of the homeless children and adults
who worked for them. Massud, however, left out some of the
details relating to their use of magic for evil purposes. The
detective scribbled down many pages of notes on his yellow-
lined legal pad and recorded some of the conversation on his
portable recorder.
At the end of it all Detective Hoover said, “Rest assured,
these men and that woman will be locked up safely for a very
long time. However, we will have to conduct a lengthy and
thorough investigation, which could take months. Massud,
296
you will most likely be called in to the precinct for further

questioning, though I will do everything in my power to spare
you from having to testify in court. In fact, I think we will
have enough incriminating evidence to convict them without
involving any of you children.” The detective looked immensely
pleased. “This is going to make headlines. It will be all over the
news. It’s going to make a big splash, you’ll see.”
As soon as they were alone again, the children decided to
contact the dwarfs. “They have to know about the dagger, but
how are we going to tell them?” Julie wondered. She was getting
too tired to even think clearly.
“I know,” Leo said. “Let’s write them a note, and leave it
next to Swan Boat like we did last time.”
“Good idea.” Annabel went to her desk and got some white
drawing paper and her calligraphy pen. She handed them to
Massud. “You’ve had more practice in writing than any of us,
so would you do us the honors of informing King Brathnar
that the key has finally been found?”
“With pleasure,” Massud said as he sat down and wrote the
note. When he was done, all four of them signed their names.
That evening, before going to bed, Julie and Leo cere-
moniously placed the folded note next to Swan Boat. Next
morning it was gone, and in its place was an ocher scroll, wax-
sealed with the stamp of the Flora Hermeticus.
Julie and Leo were excited, but they wanted Annabel and
Massud to be with them when they opened the scroll. After
breakfast, in the company of their new friends, they broke the
purple seal and unrolled the scroll in which they also found a
purple Flora Hermeticus. Julie stood up and solemnly read aloud
the message:
297
When the flower fades

And the last fnumbavat
Has found its rightful place,
The time for the
Ceremony of the Sacred Key
Will be at hand.
Their mission was not finished. There was still more to be done.
298
part nine
Meeting the Sun Dragon
72 { Relaxing in the Park
School started up again and Aunt Miriam enrolled Massud.

He adapted with ease. Even though he had missed a great deal,
he was a quick learner and steadily caught up, receiving tutoring
at school and at home from Irma and Edith Brooks, the twin
sisters. As librarians, they eagerly offered their expertise and
assistance.
In between school, tutoring and homework, Massud was
called in for questioning by the police regarding the arrest of
Ahrmaluz and Eplyssa, as well as a number of other men who
had been involved in their plot, including Phisto.
The children who worked in the warehouse and factory were
freed and housed temporarily in shelters, while investigators
tried to contact their next of kin. Many of them turned out to
be children who had been reported missing, and some happy
reunions were celebrated.
All the chemical products and other goods were
impounded. The influence of the underground business cast
a long shadow, and many more associates were implicated. In
fact, the whole operation was much larger than Massud had
known or even imagined. Ahrmaluz and Eplyssa had other
factories and warehouses all over the country. Some of them
299
produced synthetic drugs that were known as the most lethal

and dangerous drugs on the streets. Massud was more than
happy to play a part in bringing the criminal enterprise to
an end.
One Friday after school, Julie, Leo, Annabel, and Massud,
together with Sidney, were sitting on the banks of the lake with
a view of Lion’s Rock. By now all the snow had melted and the
grass was green and lush. A warm, early spring sun shone down
on them.
“Have you looked at the flower recently?” Massud asked.
“Every morning, Leo and I take a quick peek. No change.
It’s the same as before. It hasn’t faded. The purple is still as
vibrant as ever.” Julie flicked back her long hair, which was
golden-red in the afternoon sun.
“I still don’t really understand the note from the dwarfs,”
Leo admitted.
“The way I see it,” Julie continued, “is that we have to make
good use of the sunseeds. Maybe the sowing of the last sunseed
will coincide with the fading of the Flora Hermeticus.”
“And also with the spring equinox—remember, that’s when
Roop said we should return to the farm,” Annabel reminded
her.
“I think you’re both right,” said Leo. “Still, I’m feeling a bit
guilty about all those fnumbies just sitting there, unused. But I
have been really busy with school.” He flicked a flat stone over
the water, making it skip seven times.
“Yeah, but that’s no excuse,” Annabel responded.
“So what are we going to do? Nothing has jumped out at
us, like with the drought,” Julie said. “There’s no clear task.”
“Maybe we just haven’t been awake enough,” Massud mused.
“Maybe.”
300
Part 9 » Meeting the Sun Dragon
They sat in silence. “Or maybe we’re just forgetting,” Leo

suggested. “All the other times we’ve been prodded, reminded
or called on by one of the Invisibles.”
“Right,” Julie responded. “Maybe we’ve lost the sense of
urgency. Our adventures in the in-between realms seem to
have faded somehow. Curly Beard and Grilpy have repeatedly
warned us about not forgetting them. Likewise, we can’t forget
our task. Maybe they’re waiting for us to take action without
any prodding.”
“Well, we sort of did with the drought in the South,” Leo
corrected.
“Barely. Flimsk appeared almost immediately, urging us on.”
“Yes, but only after we came to the decision by ourselves,”
Annabel said defensively.
“I guess,” Julie conceded. “But we haven’t done anything in
a while, and we need to find the right time and place to sow our
fnumbies. We owe it to the dwarfs, Queen Marquellamoosh,
Rossellippsill, and the Sovereign Lady of the Sky.”
“Amongst others,” Annabel sighed.
“I haven’t been on any of your big adventures, but I’ve
heard enough by now to know that we’ll know when to act.”
Massud looked around at his friends. “We need to keep our
eyes and ears open. I also know that, although Ahrmaluz and
Eplyssa are locked up, it doesn’t mean there won’t be others to
take their place. I feel so grateful to be free, and I want to make
sure that I do my part in making this world a better place.” His
voice had begun to quiver with emotion. Julie put her hand on
his shoulder and patted him comfortingly.
Leo lay back in the grass and let the sun warm his body. He,
for one, was glad to have a break from any adventures. “Ah, it
301
feels almost like spring. And we’ve got a weekend ahead of us.
So I say, we still have time to relax.” He closed his eyes.
But Leo had spoken too soon. That evening, it became
evident what had to be done—where their fnumbavats would
be most needed. There would be no more time to relax.
302
73 { Out West
Since that first meeting with Detective Hoover, Leo always

brought him the morning newspaper. Today, when the others
went back inside, Leo quickly darted off to get the Daily Mail.
As usual he read the headlines. Seconds later, he broke into
a sprint, ran upstairs, and banged on Annabel and Massud’s
apartment door. While still in the hallway, he shouted. “Here
it is! Just what we’ve been talking about!”
He rushed inside and showed them the newspaper. The
headlines were in fat, bold print: Wildfires Scourge the West,
accompanied by a photo of a forest consumed by flames.
“Here, give it to me,” Julie said, snatching the paper from
Leo. “I’ll read the article aloud.” She read about the dozens of
wildfires that had flared up in the West, burning thousands of
acres of forest, destroying houses, and threatening many more.
“But how would the fnumbavats help put out the fire?”
Massud asked.
“Well, the sunseeds helped take care of the drought down
South,” Julie responded, still standing, holding the newspaper
in her hands. “So why not the fires? The sunseeds are very
powerful. We’ll drop the them into the lakes and rivers of the
West near the fires and hope that the rains come and put out
the fires.”
“I say we go and find out,” Annabel agreed. “Those fires
have to be stopped. If there’s even the slightest chance that we
can help, then we should at least try.”
“Absolutely, and I am eager to be part of it this time,”
Massud said, standing next to Julie. “I want to help any way I
can. I’ve been cooped up for years, helping criminals. I want to
make up for that.”
303
“Great! You guys start making a plan while I take the paper
up to Detective Hoover.” Leo folded the newspaper as neatly as
he could before he dashed off.
“It’s decided,” Julie declared when Leo returned. “We’re
leaving tonight. We’ll have a sleepover here. We haven’t had
a sleepover since school began, so Mom and Dad won’t mind.
As soon as Aunt Miriam is asleep, we’ll sail west.” Julie looked
around at her friends. They all nodded. “Good, we’ll see you
after supper.”
“Come prepared,” Annabel stressed. “Remember to bring
the caps, cloaks, and everything—you never know.”
“Of course.” Julie and Leo went back upstairs.
After supper, they met in Annabel’s room. As usual,
Annabel had taken care of food and drinks. Leo’s pockets were
bulging once again, though he sorely missed some of the things
that Ahrmaluz and Eplyssa had taken from him, especially
his pocketknife. Most importantly, Annabel had the flask of
fnumbies.
“Now we definitely won’t be back before our parents and
Aunt Miriam wake up, so we’ll leave a note for them,” Julie said.
“What are we going to write?” Annabel asked, who hated
any form of lying.
“The truth.” All agreed that this was the best approach, so
Julie wrote:
Dear Mom, Dad, and Aunt Miriam,

We’re off on an adventure. Don’t worry about us.
We took some food and money along.
Don’t get upset if we get home late.
Love you all,
Your Favorite Four
304
They all signed their names below the note. “Good, that
should hold us over for a while.” Annabel propped the note on
the kitchen table against a vase of flowers where Aunt Miriam
would be sure to see it.
“We could, of course, go through the Great Gates of the
Carved Dome again,” suggested Leo, who thought it highly
unlikely that they’d return home any time soon.
“Without Curly Beard or Grilpy, we’ll never find it,” Julie
reasoned. “No, this is one we’ll have to manage by ourselves.”
“Wait. I have an idea.” Massud looked around at the others.
“You’re right about having to manage things by ourselves, but
we’ve forgotten one thing.”
“What’s that?”
“The boat.” Massud answered, as if this explained
everything.
“What about the boat?” Leo asked.
“Well, maybe we won’t be able to find the Great Gates of
the Carved Dome, but …” Massud didn’t have to finish his
sentence.
“The boat will!” the others shouted.
“You’re right,” Leo laughed. “Why didn’t we think of that
earlier? Of course, the boat will remember the way to Skull
Mountain. Then we won’t have to worry about being late and
we can take all the time we need.” Leo was so excited that he
jumped up and down.
“It’s worth a try,” Julie agreed. “Nevertheless, let’s head out
as fast as we can—the way Flimsk would have ordered.”
“Great! Let’s do this,” Leo said and uncorked the bottle.
They held hands, boarded the boat, and Leo asked the boat to
take them to Skull Mountain … “And get us there as fast as you
can,” he commanded, happy to captain the boat once again.
305
The boat glowed with pleasure, slipped through the crack in

the window, and sped out into the starry night.
Swan Boat knew exactly where to go, and within half an

hour, they could make out the massive cloud in the distance.
Skull Mountain looked even more spectacular than it did the
first time they’d seen it. The entire skull shone in the night sky
as if it was lit up from within. At first it appeared silvery, like
the moon, but the closer they got, the more golden the light
appeared. The mist behind the great cloud formation emerged
like giant wings behind the skull. “Wow!” was all Massud
could say.
Again, the massive jaw opened with its parapet of enormous
teeth. Leo took out his grandfather’s watch and noted the time:
8:34 p.m. Swan Boat slowed down as they entered. The grand
lady inside was no longer green; this time, her skin gave off a
golden light and her eyes, though distant, sparkled. Her lips,
slightly open, curved into a faint smile. Her thick, luscious
hair radiated and cascaded down her back like a sun-drenched
waterfall. Swan Boat made straight toward her nose, and
seconds later, they sailed through a funnel of milky light.
The horse within the next chamber was as magnificent
as before. It seemed surprised to see them, its ears pricking
forward. Swan Boat tacked, disappearing into the left ear. For
a moment, they were engulfed in darkness. Seconds later, they
found themselves in the large dome.
In contrast to the first time, the large hole—the oculus—in
the center of the dome was dark and everything else was lit up.
They sped toward the dark eye, and almost instantly, they were
again flying through the night sky. Looking back, they saw the
Great Gates of the Carved Dome dissolving behind them, and
306
with it the light that had emanated from within. Each of them
was awed by the sight, but they kept it to themselves, as if words
would sully the experience.
“Get some sleep. I’ll wake you up when we get to the fires
you told me about,” Massud said. They were glad to take him
up on his offer. Annabel and Leo went into the cabin and lay
down on the narrow cots, while Julie stayed with Massud.
It was a quiet, cool evening. They’d closed the ethmaroll,
because of the tremendous speed at which they were going.
Above them, the stars twinkled. For a while, the two of them
chatted. Julie told Massud about her life on Honey Creek Farm.
He asked her many questions, telling her that it had always
been his dream to live and work on a farm. After a while, she
got drowsy and, using her jacket as a pillow, she lay down on
the bench. Her head had barely hit the pillow when she fell
asleep. Massud gently covered her with his coat.
307
74 { Approaching the Fire
At first Massud thought they’d sailed into clouds, but he

quickly realized it was smoke. He woke the others up. Leo took
over the post at the tiller and they reduced speed and circled
down. For a while, they didn’t see any flames, just a constant
haze mixed with billows of thick smoke. “There,” shouted
Annabel, who was sitting at the prow. “Look! That entire hill is
raging with fire.” In the distance, they spotted another fire and
beyond that yet another.
“There’s a lake down there. Let’s land there,” Julie suggested.
They sailed down. The closer they got, the more they saw how
fiercely the fires burned. Part of the fire had foraged its way
right to the edge of the water. They landed on the far side that
was still untouched by the flames.
The moment they opened the ethmaroll, they were hit by a
heat wave, even though the fire was quite far away. The smoke
hurt their eyes, making them water, and the children cringed at
the acrid smell that burned into their noses. Swan Boat floated
in the still waters toward some protective reeds. As they watched
the flames on the other side of the lake, they saw how the
breeze carried a whole slew of sparks in their direction. More
and more sparks arrived, coming closer and closer, sizzling and
sputtering as they landed in the water.
“Once the sparks drop on these reeds or the dry underbrush
on this side of the lake, the fire will continue spreading,”
Massud observed anxiously. “We’re not safe here.”
Although the others agreed, no one moved, mesmerized by
the beauty of the sparks as they filled the sky like uncountable
stars, dancing in the night. The flickering, glowing sparks
looked harmless enough, except for the roar of the unstoppable
fire that was consuming the forests on the hills in front of them
308
with vicious speed. They could hear the bigger sparks whistling
as they fell dangerously close to the boat. It sounded almost
like jumbled melodies—sharp, high-pitched warbling, ending in
soft, husky whispers as the water snuffed out the sparks, leaving
tiny ripples.
“It’s almost as if they were singing something,” Annabel
said, after one particularly bright shower of sparks.
“They are,” Leo confirmed. “Listen.”
The next shower of sparks was almost on top of them,
and as the sparks floated and flitted down, they heard the
words, “Enter the flames, enter the fire.” The rain of sparks
increased. Not only were they beckoning the children to enter
the flames, but a tiny fire spirit rode on the back of each spark.
“Join us,” they sang. They laughed as they sang, circling around
the children, like teensy will-o’-the-wisps. More spirits danced
on and in the tufts of steam that rose around them. Strangely
enough, not a single spark fell on the boat, though the sparks
now rained heavily all around.
“I think we need to fly into the heart of the fire to see how
best to serve!” Julie shouted.
“But we’ll get burned,” Massud said, firmly against the idea.
“What if they’re trying to trick us?” Leo looked worried, his
eyes darting at the flurry of sparks falling around the boat.
“Trust the boat,” Annabel assured them. “I think Julie is
right. This boat can withstand a lot. The ancient wisdom of the
dwarfs has been magicked into it. We have seen the strength
of this magic.” Massud and Leo, impressed by her conviction,
were convinced.
Without a word, Julie closed the ethmaroll and took her
place on the bench. Leo put his hand on the tiller, commanding
Swan Boat in a clear, strong voice: “Take us into the heart of
the flames.”
309
75 { Piercing the Flames
With the ethmaroll firmly shut, they closed in on the storm

of flames. These appeared fierce enough from afar, but up
close, they were a menacing beast. The growl and roar of the
burning forest reverberated through the boat. Heat forced the
air to rise and the boat was swiftly swept upward, together with
the ashes and embers.
The biggest flames raged in the valley between two hilltops.
They knew they had to fly straight into that explosive cauldron.
Leo lifted the tiller to increase their size and weight. Then,
without a word, he steered the boat into its thousand flaming
tentacles.
Each massive flame, appearing and disappearing in flashes,
was like a warrior whose face was determined and angry. The
flames devoured the tallest and grandest trees, lashing out at
them with flaming hands, ripping them apart, casting them
down. They appeared like angry demons, pitilessly erasing the
hills and plains of everything living—destroying all life in their
path. Out of all the things that Julie, Leo, and Annabel had
seen, these fire demons were the scariest of the lot. Would
Swan Boat survive this trial by fire? It had survived the depths
of the ocean, but never such a vehement onslaught of heat.
It wasn’t long before the fire demons saw that something
in their relentless path was resisting their attack, and it fueled
their anger. Swan Boat, in defiance of the flames, grew in size—
the piercing swan eyes meeting the flames with its own piercing
gaze. In response, the demons unleashed their assault on the
boat, enveloping it with curls of flames, twirling and spinning
it around, lashing at the boat from every side—whipping and
pummeling the intrepid vessel with smoke and fire arrows.
310
Swan Boat tried to avoid the assault as best it could. The

children felt that it wasn’t entirely immune to the scorching
heat, which slowly but surely penetrated through the hull and
the ethmaroll from below and above. The heat increased so
much that the children could no longer sit on the benches or
touch any part of the hull. Leo had to let go of the tiller. The
heat penetrated the soles of their shoes. Even the mast was as
hot as a coal stove in midwinter.
Wherever they looked, they saw flames, sparks, and smoke—
whistling, lashing, darting, crashing, and beating around them.
“Clear out, be gone, before we destroy you,” they snarled and
screeched. The heat was becoming unbearable.
Swan Boat was losing control, the flames slamming into
the hapless vessel with furious force. The children pulled their
sleeves over their hands, but that barely stopped the searing
heat from burning them when they grabbed onto the mast
or the railings for support. The flames threw the boat helter-
skelter between one another. The children were hurled onto
the deck.
Leo was knocked against the door of the cabin. It flew
open and he rolled inside. Luckily, it was a bit cooler inside
the cabin. He pulled the blanket from the bunk bed and rolled
himself up in it to avoid the hot floor. Frantically, he felt for
Queen Marquellamoosh’s tiny chest. It was tucked under many
other items, and for once he wished he didn’t always stuff his
pockets so full. Finally, he hauled it out, opened it immediately,
and whispered, “Please help us—anything, just don’t let us
burn up!”
A little conch lay in the chest, and from its mouth a blue
vapor rose, enveloping Leo in a cool, refreshing mist. He got
up and walked out of the cabin, the mist spreading throughout
311
the boat, floating around Massud, Julie, and Annabel, spraying

them with refreshing drops of water. Swan Boat felt the
invigorating force and almost immediately regained control
and stability.
“Leo, you’re brilliant! I thought we were going to burn up,”
exclaimed Annabel. “Thank goodness you thought of Queen
Marquellamoosh’s gift.” The others were about to express their
relief as well, but were interrupted by a booming voice:
“Who is so foolish as to fly into my flaming feathers?” they
heard from above. “Who risks life and limb to roll in the reek
of my breath?” came the voice from below. “Who is willing to
be lashed by my thousand tongues,” the voice now roared from
starboard. “Who dares to bore down into my belly to ignite
the ire of my fire?” they heard it howl from behind. “Who has
a craft that can withstand the wrath of the supreme element?”
thundered the voice from port side. “Know you not that I am
the one who rules all—that the air, water, and earth must follow
my will? I say and demand to know WHO?” The words were
hurled with the greatest speed and now came from all around.
“Who dares to pierce through the flaming fortress of my realm?
Who? I demand to know! SPEAK!”
“Four children in a little boat, that’s who!” answered a
small but steady voice.
312
76 { Zeerfitz, the Fire Dragon
Annabel stood firmly balanced on her crutches, staring

defiantly at the raging fire all around the boat. The other three
children looked at her in surprise and awe. Annabel seemed to
have grown, and her face had suddenly taken on an authority
beyond her years. The flames reflected off her shiny dark skin,
and Leo thought she looked like a princess wielding royal
power. “The four of us and Swan Boat. We have come to put
an end to the fire’s destruction,” she announced.
“And why would you be so foolish as to attempt that?” the
fiery force inquired. They looked around to find the source of
the voice, but saw only raging flames. Swan Boat knew what to
do. At once, it spiraled upward to give them a clearer view of
who was addressing them. From their new vantage point, they
beheld a fiery dragon, his red-hot scales pulsating through a
massive serpentine body. The feathers of his vast outstretched
wings were made of fiercely fuming flames that burned in
many different colors. The gleaming eyes in the molten lava
head hovered like zeppelins, and fiery breaths shot out of its
crater-mouth like volcanic explosions.
“You are destroying everything in your path, with no
concern for the animals in the forest, the humans in their
homes, nor all the plants, great and small. You are scorching
fields and forests, orchards and gardens. You have no regard for
life. You are spreading death.” Annabel’s courage seemed to be
growing with each sentence she uttered.
“Wrong! I—Zeerfitz, the Fire Dragon—am spreading life. I
am making room for life. I am life. I am clearing house. I am
laying waste to waste in order to reduce the waste.”
“But why so much destruction?” demanded Annabel.
313
“To save Earth from greater destruction.”

“But must so much perish in the process?” Annabel stood
straight, unrelenting, standing up to the mighty dragon that
undulated and circled Swan Boat.
“It is not my wish; it is a necessity. I am the great equalizer.
You humans are the sole cause of my ire. You do not care for
the planet. You do not care for the land. You do not even care
for the space around you. Not only do you pollute the waters,
you suck it out of Earth’s depths, just like you suck up oil and
dig up minerals, to feed your greed.
“Your greed is what calls me to act. Your factories send
fumes into the air. You even send waste out into the far reaches
of outer space. No, brave little child, I am merely sweeping
away Earth’s debris, the waste that humans have not bothered
to take on themselves. My flames are the swords with which I
fight for a clearer and healthier tomorrow.”
The dragon flapped his great wings, which sent the boat
hurtling toward the burning forest below. It took all of Swan
Boat’s effort to steady itself. “The sun that shines its fire down
to Earth wills me to burn chaos into the earth, so that you
humans will wake up and become better custodians of this
planet.”
The children had heard similar words from King Brathnar,
Curly Beard, Queen Marquellamoosh, and Rossellippsill. But
Annabel was not finished yet. “The outer sun has ordered you
to do this because up to now there has not been another way to
bring balance. But that is no longer true. Times have changed.
Long ago, Earth reached a turning point, which mostly went
unnoticed for hundreds of years. But now the inner sun is
coming to the surface. Zeerfitz, great Fire Dragon, listen to me
314
when I tell you: There is another way, a way without so much

destruction.” Annabel no longer sounded like herself.
“And what might that be?” asked the mighty dragon, peering
down at them from above, his fiery wings beginning to settle.
“Seeds of the sun called fnumbavats have surfaced
from Earth’s depths: little seeds, the size of the beads in my
cornrows. Seeds that are not regular seeds, but the Water of
Life condensed. These special seeds will clear and cleanse
Earth. They have been harvested from the Tree of Life, through
which runs the Water of Life—the Liquid Sun—that wells up
from Earth’s marrow, near its center.” While she talked, as if
a greater being was speaking through her, Julie took out the
flask. “See for yourself,” Julie declared and unscrewed the
flask, holding it toward the dragon.
With that, the children witnessed the unexpected. The
fiery giant reptile that had covered half the sky, shrank to the
size of an eagle. “Take one out and let me see the sunbead more
clearly,” requested the fantastic creature.
315
77 { D’Ahura, the Sun Dragon
Julie took out a marble-sized fnumby and held it up. The

dragon put his fiery head close to the ethmaroll, fixing his
fierce eyes on the shiny seed. It suddenly uttered a piercing
call of surprise. “Ah, it is made from the creative substance of
the universe. I do not know how you obtained this marvelous
thing, but you have convinced me the turning point has arrived.
“I knew that one day it would surface, but I did not know
how or when or in what form. Least of all did I expect four
human children and a flying boat to be the bearers of the new
Light—light that can penetrate all darkness and overcome death.
It is a great honor that you show me the first evidence of the
Light that will never be doused.” The mighty dragon spread his
flaming wings and swelled in size once more. His serpentine
body soared gracefully through the night sky. Moments later,
he glided back.
“Now in turn, I will give you a glimpse of the power you
are holding in your hand. Follow me.” The dragon flew swiftly
off, high up into the sky, far above the fires still raging below.
The dragon shot like a meteor through the night sky. Swan
Boat immediately followed the flaming dragon. “Here, you are
safe from the heat of the flames below, and it is safe to open
yourself to me.” The children wondered what he meant. What
was about to happen?
“Of all the elements, fire is the oldest, and I am a creature
of fire.” He had stopped and was now gliding gracefully to
and fro in front of them. “I go back to the very beginnings
of things, before Earth had its present form, when there was
only warmth. It was a time before time, long before air, water,
and earth were born. Those three elements are the children of
316
fire and, in the distant future, they will again become flames.
Everything comes from fire and will return to fire. Earth, with
all its minerals, is nothing but frozen fire.
“The age-old prophecy is finally coming true. The old Light
will slowly dim and die, only to give way to the new Light,
rising from the center of Earth. It will take on many forms,
each according to the four root realms of earth, water, air, and
fire. The time has come when a new power will take the place
of the old.” As the dragon spoke the children could observe
the feathery flames coming to rest across his magnificent body.
“Throw me the sunbead and observe.”
The children hesitated, looked at each other, and wondered
whether it was the right thing to do. They wished Grilpy
or Curly Beard were there to help them decide. After a few
moments of silence, they nodded in unified agreement. Leo
cautiously opened the ethmaroll. At once, they felt and smelled
the hot and smoky air. Julie quickly threw the marble-sized
fnumbavat toward the dragon. The dragon dove down, caught,
and swallowed the tiny glowing orb.
Immediately, the feathery scales of the dragon flared up.
The colors were so dazzling that the children squinted, and
Swan Boat instinctively turned around. To their utter horror,
they saw the dragon go up in white-hot flames, accompanied
by loud shrieks, sharp whizzing whistles, and loud crackling
noises—ending in an ear-splitting explosion. After the blinding
burst of light, they saw the mighty dragon reduced to a dark
red ball, plummeting from the sky, the bulky clump finally
dissolving into ash. “What have we done?” cried Annabel.
However, to their surprise, the thick gray powder spread
and took on color and shape. In front of their very eyes, the
children witnessed a new serpent body forming out of the ash,
317
its golden scales and wings shining ever more brightly. From
the ashes, another dragon rose and was reborn.
It flew up to Swan Boat, no longer looking fierce. Its eyes
were gentle, though still commanding. Its magnificent body
glowed from the inside out. It spread its mighty wings, and
four feathers floated down onto the deck. It gestured to the
children that these were a gift and they should pick them up.
The children did as they were bid, despite their fears that the
feathers might be hot. But they were warm and soft, like down.
On impulse, Leo stuck his feather in his hair, and the others
followed suit, smiling. Straightaway, they felt a surge of courage
course through their veins.
“Zeerfitz, the Fire Dragon is no more,” sang the newly
formed dragon in a voice that felt like a sunrise. You, through
your brave deed, have helped to fulfill a prophecy. I am
d’Ahura, the Sun Dragon, herald of a new age to come, and I
am ready to aid you in your task.” As he spoke these words, the
glow from within his huge body intensified. “Now come, you
intrepid warriors, fires must be extinguished while bringing
new life to the soil. Follow me—there’s work to be done, and a
battle to be won.”
318
78 { Dropping Sunseeds
D’Ahura descended slowly toward the fires below, his clear

sovereign voice penetrating through the ethmaroll. “Fires start
quickly when it is dry. A lightning strike or the carelessness
of some campers can start a raging fire within minutes. I let
the fires spread. Once they are started, I cannot put them out.
They need to run their course. But now, through your deeds,
there is a chance to change the course of these fires.”
“Can we help?” Massud asked, impressed by the might of
the dragon, his transformation, and the words he had spoken.
His voice sounded different—not as harsh—and his entire body
glowed with the gold unique to the light of the fnumbavats.
“Yes, not only do we need your help, but I will call on the
High One, Lord of the Winds, Queen Marquellamoosh, and
King Brathnar. The four elements, separated for eons, can now
work together in a new way. You, the bearers of the sunseeds
bring us together once again—in the service of a new Earth,
which transforms into a mighty sun, greater even than the sun
that shines down from the heavens. All this lies in the infinitely
distant future, made possible by your acts of today. The here
and now—on which the future depends—defines that future.”
“But what must we do?” Massud asked once again. “What
is our task?”
“Go to every lake, river, and stream and throw in one of
your sunseeds. These will serve as a rejuvenating balance instead
of the destruction through fire. Hurry! There are hundreds of
lakes and rivers along the coast that you must visit. Go, and be
well, for I must summon additional help. I will see you when
the battle reaches its mightiest heat.”
319
The dragon flew off in a flash. Sorrow filled the children

at his sudden disappearance, but this was quickly replaced by a
blazing inner fire to extinguish the outer inferno.
“Let’s look for those lakes,” Leo said when the children
came out of their daze from witnessing the transformation of
the immense dragon. He steered the boat toward the very lake
where they’d first landed. By now, the fire had spread across
and around the lake. They landed in the middle of the lake,
opened the ethmaroll a crack—which immediately let in a cloud
of smoke—and Annabel threw the first of the sunbeads into the
water. Instantly, Julie shut the ethmaroll, and they flew away in
search of the next lake.
“I wish Flimsk were here.” Leo sighed, pointing through the
flames to another lake, immediately steering toward it. “We’re
going to waste so much time looking for the lakes and rivers.”
The second lake was smaller and totally engulfed in flames. It
was impossible to land in the water and they could open the
ethmaroll for only a split second, just long enough to drop the
sunbead. In defiance, the flames reached up and tried to engulf
the boat.
Just before Julie shut the ethmaroll, an ember managed
to squeeze through and land on Leo’s shoulder. Instead of
burning into Leo, it stood straight up, shook its wings, and
chirped, “I heardst your call and I camest. I thoughtst you’d
never ask. Now, the next lake is overs the hill, starboard. Go!”
“Flimsk!” three voices all shouted at once. The little fairy
smiled. Flimsk was introduced to Massud who bowed slightly,
his eyes filled with wonder.
“How did you manage to come so quickly?” Leo asked,
overjoyed to see his little friend again and to have him sit back
on his shoulder.
320
“You forgetst that I canst travel around the world before

yous canst finish saying travel around the world.” Flimsk fluttered
upward and twirled happily, returning to Leo’s shoulder, which
was clearly his favorite perch.
“Well, it’s a treat seeing you again.” Annabel stroked
Flimsk’s soft wings gently with her finger, which made Flimsk
hum with delight.
“I likes to be where the excitements is, and I have broughtst
news,” Flimsk turned serious for just a moment. “You shouldst
know that Swinglashna, the Sovereign Lady of the Sky, hast
joined her father, the High One, and they are coming to helpst
as well. But we needst to fill the waters with fnumbies before
they canst help. So far you’ve donest only two. In the time it
tooks you to do two, we wouldst have donest two hundred.
Let’s go!”
With Flimsk’s good guidance, they quickly located all the
lakes and rivers into which they dropped the sacred fnumbavats.
The children may not have accomplished their task as quickly
as Flimsk would have liked, but much faster than they would
have managed on their own.
However, the more sunseeds they dropped, the angrier it
made the demon flames. In fact, it enraged them. Emerging
from all sides and armed with their sharp red flaming weapons,
they were clearly on a rampage, closing in on the suburbs on
the outskirts of the city near the coast.
“I thought d’Ahura, the Sun Dragon is the ruler of the
flames. Why can’t he just order them to stop?” Julie anxiously
wondered aloud as she dropped another sunseed into a
large reservoir that served as a buffer to a farmhouse on the
other side.
321
“He allowedst the fires to startst, but fire draws out all
the vagrants demons. They will never stopst on their own.
Theys have to be stopped. I rather likest their passion.” Flimsk
answered as he pointed to their left. “There ares three ponds
ands a river over there. Go!” Annabel could hardly keep up
with Flimsk’s fast pace. One after the other, she picked out the
sunbeads from the flask and handed them in fast succession to
Massud, Leo and Julie.
By now, they’d dropped a few hundred beads all along the
coast, and still the fire raged without the slightest sign of slowing
down. On the contrary, the fierce fire was spreading even more
rapidly, in defiance of their sunseeds. Finally, they reached the
delta of a great river that ran to the coast and fanned out like
many blood vessels flowing into the ocean.
“We have only two sunseeds left!” Annabel announced,
giving them to Julie and Massud. She held up the empty flask.
“Let’s throw one into the delta and the other into the
ocean,” Massud suggested. Flimsk agreed. It was dawn when
Julie dropped the last shiny sunseed into the ocean. The very
moment it disappeared beneath the water’s surface, the sun
appeared over the horizon.
Exhausted, hot, and helpless, they’d done their part. The
fire continued to rage without abating, and they saw the wall of
flames encroaching upon the city—but there was no magic left.
Their last fnumbavat was spent. They could do nothing more
than wait to see what would happen next.
322
79 { Zuratrat, the Molten Dragon
The children did not understand what they were seeing. It

was Flimsk who explained that below them was a battle that was
only just starting, yet it was one battle of a long war that had
been going on for many years. “The fire demonst haves no idea
what hast been droppedst into the lakes and waterways along
the fire beltst of the West, but it hast stokedst their fury. They
sensed interference—something unfamiliar and disturbingst.”
Flimsk sounded compassionate.
“Butst, there is more to know ifs you’re to understand
what’s really happening,” continued their little friend. “The
fire demonst haves been stunned by the suddenst loss of
Zeerfitz, their leader. They heardst that the Fire Dragonst had
burnst up in hist own flames—completely burnst. The trillion-
tonguest wildfire spread the news of hist abrupts disappearance,
causing a host of fire demonst to slips away, down through lots
of cracks and fissures of Earth’s crust. The flaming demonst
spedst through the sea of moltens lava untils they reached
the realmst of the mighty Zuratrat, the Molten Dragonst of
the Underworldst, where they informed him that hist twin
brotherst, Zeerfitz, the Fire Dragonst, wast no more. Zuratrat
rejoiced at the news. Finally, he sawst his chance to take the
place of hist twin brotherst and rulest Earth from both above
and belowst.” Flimsk took a deep breath. He had hardly ever
talked so much on one go.
“’You seest,” he continued, “millennias ago, they hadst
both beenst partst of the sun, but hadst comes to Earth to
gives warmths and fire to the humans and to lightst up the
darknesst. For eons they ruledst togethers, but as Earth cooled,
Zuratrat, the Molten Dragonst, begans fighting for dominionst,
323
and repeatedly tried to kill Zeerfitz, the Fire Dragonst. Volcanic

eruptions designedst to cover him and snuffs his flames with
layers of lava had failedst.
“A fierce battle betweens the two brothers ensuedst, which
resulted in Zeerfitz hurlings Zuratrat downst a volcano. Cast
outs and caged deeps beneathst the surface, buried underst
the hardened earth, Zuratrat built up a powerful realmst. He
joinedst forces with the Kraftabots and their neighbors, the
Krafooms. For centuries, he’st been waitings for this momentst
whenst he couldst rise and takes dominion over Earth.”
“Flimsk,” interrupted Massud, who was trying to figure out
what was happening at this very moment as the flames and
fires raged around them, “what will happen now that the Fire
Dragon is dead?” Flimsk did not have a chance to answer before
they heard a tremendous rumbling. Then, in the distance,
they saw the mighty head of the Molten Dragon, Zuratrat, rise
briefly out of the steaming top of Mount Lock.
The dragon flexed his reptilian wings and seemed ready
to uncoil from his fiery lair deep beneath Mount Lock, the
volcano under which the Fire Dragon had forced him to
retreat. Then his head disappeared. “He willst rise again!”
shouted Flimsk. “He hast just crouchedst to the molten base of
the crater, ready to be launched to Earth’s surface with the next
powerful eruptionst!”
When Mount Lock blew off its head, the plume of ash
billowed and soared miles into the sky. Sparks rained down,
igniting more fires. “Look,” shouted Leo, “there it is again!”
Zuratrat slid over the edge of the newly active volcano, and
with his fat, serpentine body, slithered down the mountainside.
The long-imprisoned dragon had lost his ability to fly long ago,
and his wings flapped helplessly at the sides of his body as he
324
slithered down the volcanic slopes, making straight for the city.
Legions of Krafooms—grotesque dwarf dragons with talons
and stunted bat wings—rode, clung, and swarmed around on
Zuratrat’s snaky, gargantuan back. Clunky Kraftabots by the
thousands marched on either side of the fat dragon. It was a
fearsome sight to behold.
When the devastating explosion happened, it had shocked

the children. Fearlessly, Leo steered Swan Boat toward it at
once so they could get a better look at what was happening. As
they neared, they saw the red tongue of molten lava zigzagging
down the mountain. It looked like nothing would stop the fire
demons’ flames and the Molten Dragon with his armies.
The heat of the lava from Earth’s depths was even more
intense than that of the forest fire. “Leo, a volcanic eruption
is unpredictable,” warned Julie. “I don’t think we should be
here.” Leo nodded as he pulled on the tiller; he could sense
that not even Swan Boat dared go too close.
Frantic, the children wondered what to do. They’d run out
of sunseeds and were helpless against the relentless lava flow
worming its way toward the exposed city. They all turned to
Flimsk with panic in their eyes, but he seemed quite calm.
“There’s nothings more we canst do for the moment,”
Flimsk stated. “Finds a cool place to lands and rest.” Swan Boat
liked the idea and sailed toward the ocean, touching down in a
secluded bay at the end of a tributary. The passengers loosened
their grips on the boat and let out a collective sigh of relief.
“This place is as good as any,” Julie said matter-of-factly,
and she opened the ethmaroll. In the distance, they could
still make out the faint roar of the fire. The children’s hearts
were heavy.
325
Yet Flimsk whistled a happy tune. “No worries. Helps is

coming; the others are closingst in.” For now, at least, they were
safe from the fire and the lava; the children had to take comfort
in that, despite their worries around Flimsk’s confidence.
The boat floated on the calm waters, and a cool breeze
blew across the bay, which was refreshing after the intense
heat they’d endured. As they sat wondering what to do next,
they heard a plaintive song rising above the hiss of far-off
flames, accompanied by gentle waves breaking on the beach.
The song had a haunting melody, and it resounded across the
bay through the morning mist and smoky haze. As it neared,
they could make out the words, and it sounded like a blessing,
an invocation:
For goodness we fight

In the service of truth,
As we rise with the light
On the wings of splendor.
We’ll march through thorns,

Fly forward without fear,
Blow boldly our horns,
And endure to the end.
We will not be beguiled

By traps or trickery;
May peace comfort the mild,
Once the battle has been won.
326
Through the morning mist they could make out the

silhouette of a leather-backed turtle, perched on a protruding
rock not far from them across the bay. “It’s Loutilias!” Annabel
cried in surprise. “He’s the one singing… and sitting next to him
is Wilamelee.” Annabel pushed herself up and waved to the
sea turtle with a raised crutch. “Yoo-hoo, it’s us!” she shouted.
“Fancy meeting you here!” The water sprite broke into a wide
smile and beckoned them over with her dainty webbed hand.
327
80 { Conference on Fist Rock
The reunion was short, happy, and heartfelt. The children

introduced Loutilias and Wilamelee to their new friends,
Massud and Flimsk. Of course, the children wanted to know
exactly how and why Loutilias and Wilamelee came to be sitting
on that very rock so close to their boat.
“Very simple,” Wilamelee answered. “We heard the call
and came, just like many others. You’ll meet them shortly. We
knew you’d be here.”
“What made you so sure?” Massud asked, amazed at the
coincidence.
“Again, quite simple,” Wilamelee gurgled happily, “It’s all
thanks to Swan Boat. She might not say much beyond jiggling
her riggings, but she knows a great deal. She lets you steer
her, but often she steers you when the need arises. As soon as
you landed, Loutilias started singing the battle hymn, which
is more of a song of good tidings.” Wilamelee giggled again.
“I might add that Loutilias composed the song himself.” She
stroked the turtle’s ancient head and neck, which made him
blush deep green.
“It is an honors to meets you both,” Flimsk said in his high-
pitched voice. Flimsk felt an immediate kinship with these two
water beings. “And I hope to hear you sing again some day.”
“Gladly will I sing for you, and thank you for your warm
and welcoming words. But more singing will have to wait for
another day.” The slow, deep words of Loutilias filled them all
with warmth.
“True, for first there is work to be done—a battle to be fought
and won,” Wilamelee declared, her face suddenly turning
serious. “Queen Marquellamoosh is on her way to quench the
328
fire with her ocean power. She’ll drench the shore with mighty
waves, and with the help of the High One, Lord of the Winds,
will drive the rainstorms inland. Look, there she is.”
They stared over the ocean and saw mighty swells rolling
toward them. Above the waves, hefty dense clouds gathered,
alive with veins of lightning—twitching, flashing, and flickering
ceaselessly, reminding Julie, Leo, and Annabel of the huge
storm after they had conquered the Binagatorials. But this was
far bigger, stretching for miles along the coast—ready to drench
the hundreds of wildfires burning out of control and causing
so much destruction and havoc.
“Before Wilamelee goes, she will guide you to Fist Rock,”
cooed the water sprite as she pointed up at the high cliffs that
reached out into the ocean, ending in a clenched fist, hundreds
of feet above the turbulent ocean. “Come, Wilamelee will
lead you,” she offered, jumping on the boat. At once, Swan
Boat sailed off, leaving Loutilias to finish humming his deep,
resonating battle hymn, before slipping quietly into the water.
They sailed to the rocky promontory that looked like it was
covered with thousands of birds, their wings gleaming in the
morning sun. However, as they approached, they saw to their
surprise that it wasn’t birds, but an army of dwarfs dressed for
battle, their axes at the ready and wearing helmets instead of
pointy hats.
“Land on that plateau,” Wilamelee instructed Leo, pointing
to a pool of water right in the center of Fist Rock, surrounded
by dwarfs. As they landed, the familiar faces of Curly Beard
and King Brathnar met them. Next to King Brathnar stood
three other regal-looking dwarfs, all as tall and fierce as
King Brathnar.
329
Julie, Leo, and Annabel were overjoyed to see him again,

in spite of the somber situation. They were overcome with
thankfulness and relief. They wouldn’t have to fight the battle
alone, which would have been futile. As promised, help had
arrived, more help than they’d ever expected.
“We meet again, children of intrepid hearts,” King
Brathnar’s voice rang out clearly over the rumble of waves
and snarl of fire. “And I see that one more human has joined
your group, who I can tell will be a great leader of people in
the future.” He gestured to Massud, who bowed his head in
deference and respect.
“It also gives me joy to see a water sprite and a fairy sitting
together,” added the king. All eyes focused on the two little
beings perched close together on Leo’s shoulder. “This bodes
well, especially at a time when all the realms must come
together to ward off a common enemy.” Wilamelee and Flimsk
smiled, but did not dare interrupt King Brathnar. Instead, they
both stood and bowed, which made the throng of dwarfs smile
and hum from the depths of their throats, while tapping their
chests to show their affection.
“We do not have time to get acquainted. We will have
to wait for the time of celebration. This will come, when we
can talk words of glory. But now it is time for action.” King
Brathnar paused ever so slightly. “Before we go into battle I
wish to introduce to you King Primsen, King Moorstoff, and
King Trettermoss—rulers of the Southern, Eastern and Western
Realms. They will join us in this battle against the awakened
and resurfaced Zuratrat.”
The three kings beat their chests and stomped their boots,
echoed by all the dwarfs. Like King Brathnar, they were taller
than most dwarfs and wore long deep green robes over their
330
armor, varying only slightly in shade. What differentiated them

were their beards. King Primsen from the South was swarthy
and had the widest gray beard the children had ever seen,
extending a full handspan past his shoulders. King Moorstoff
from the East had the thinnest blonde beard they’d ever seen,
like a baby’s fluff, except that it was long and swaying lightly
down to his knees. King Trettermoss’s rope-thick, brown beard
was tied into a pretzel, and his mustache into two symmetrical
spirals. The four kings made for a regal and formidable sight.
King Brathnar lifted his hands. “We are in time. As you
can see from this great cliff, Queen Marquellamoosh is sending
mighty waves toward the shore. The waves, coupled with a
torrential rainstorm will not cease until the fires along the coast
are wiped out.” The four children saw the mighty waves hurtling
toward the shore, accompanied by the thickening storm.
“Once they have reached the shore, we will rush in to attack
Zuratrat, the Molten Dragon, and his devious demon hosts.
They are the ones who have threatened our kingdom and the
precious Liquid Light. Now they are threatening your human
kingdom as well. If we do not put a stop to Zuratrat, then the
fires will gradually extend over the entire Earth, destroying
and conquering country after country. Worse, if he and his
hosts have their way, their destructive force will threaten the
inner sun from rejuvenating Earth with new life. This cannot
happen!” intoned King Brathnar. The other kings nodded in
agreement and raised their weapons to the sky. “We cannot let
that happen! Not for us, and not for you humans!” He raised
his voice louder with each statement. “The dwarf kings of
the four realms will ride and fight with you,” he pledged and
stepped forward, followed by the three other kings. “Allow us
to board!”
331
“You want to join us on our boat?” Julie asked, surprised

at the mere thought of the four dwarf kings joining them on
Swan Boat.
“We do. It would be an honor to fight shoulder to shoulder
with you on Swan Boat against Zuratrat,” responded the king.
“The honor is all ours,” Annabel rejoiced. “Please step on
board.” Each child held out a hand and welcomed the four
mighty kings on board. It was a tight squeeze on the small boat.
“What about Curly Beard?” Annabel asked, disappointed
that he wouldn’t be joining them.
“He will remain with the dwarfs and lead them in the
ground battle. He has been preparing for this for a long time,
and that is why you have not seen him until today. Though he
does not know it yet, one day he will take my place as King of
the North,” King Brathnar said quietly so that Curly Beard
would not hear. “Everything has its time and place.”
Curly Beard bowed low to them so that the curls of his
beard floated on the pond water, dripping a little waterfall
when he stood back up. “I will see you later, chosen children,
who once were two, now are four, and soon will be more. We’ll
meet where the waters and light cross within the field of petals.
Until then, I bid you…” His last words were lost in the first
onslaught of wind that flung the storm ashore.
“It begins,” yelled King Brathnar, and he lifted his axe above
his head while blowing four quick blasts on his bugle, followed
by a long one, which was immediately answered by thousands
of bugle calls from the vast army of dwarfs assembled on
Fist Rock.
332
81 { Prepare to Strike!
Their confidence was boosted when they peered up and

saw the Sovereign Lady of the Sky bringing the storm with her,
leading the clouds over the sea toward the burning shore. In
the midst of the storm, they saw the High One blowing the
thick rain clouds with his four mighty heads from behind
and from the sides. “It’s times for me to joins them,” Flimsk
yelled as he shot off, faster than a bullet, to join the fray from
the skies.
Below, the children saw Queen Marquellamoosh and her
entourage producing the biggest waves they had ever seen.
Although Fist Rock was hundreds of feet above the ocean, the
waves that pounded against the sheer cliff almost reached the
uppermost ridge. They witnessed the first wave roll over the
burning shore, a large tract of fire extinguished with one sweep.
They would have continued watching the waves and the
wind beat down on the burning land, but King Brathnar
signaled that it was time to depart. He sat down at the boat’s
tiller and pulled it up, which made the boat grow in size. Then,
to their astonishment, he yanked the tiller to the left and up
some more, as if he were changing gear. The boat grew even
bigger, so that it grew as large as a full-sized galley. The swan’s
head was now like a towering statue leaning into the wind.
Swan Boat was still full of new mysteries. All the children were
amazed, but Massud most of all, of course.
As Swan Boat lifted off, King Brathnar shouted, “Take
down the sail! Otherwise it will be ripped to shreds. It will
only get in the way.” None of the children had ever done this
before, and they looked helplessly at one another. They also felt
helpless in the face of the battle ahead: How could they be of
333
any use? With what were they going to fight against Zuratrat?
Would they too just be in the way?
They couldn’t lose any time now wondering about their
effectiveness and modes of battle. Massud sprang into action.
“You heard him. Take down the sail.” He ran to the nearest
brace, tack, and sheet lines on deck that controlled the sail,
loosened, and untied them. Leo followed suit, running to the
other side of the deck and doing the same, while he shouted,
“Heave ho!” He didn’t quite know what that meant, but he
had heard a pirate shout it in a film he’d seen, and it seemed
the perfect thing to say now. Julie stepped in and began rolling
up the sail. Annabel helped as best she could. Within minutes,
the huge white sail was completely furled. Massud, being the
tallest, climbed up the mast and bound it tightly to the yard.
Swan Boat was tossed inland. By now, the rain was
thundering down in thick blankets, dousing some of the fires
below, together with the supersized waves that pummeled the
shore again and again. The children now had room to walk
and run on the deck, though they got drenched, as there was
no ethmaroll to cover them. “There’s the volcano, still smoking
and shooting plumes of lava into the air!” Massud shouted
over the din around them. He was still in awe of all that was
happening, proud that he could play a part in the drama.
Suddenly they got a glimpse of Zuratrat, the Molten
Dragon. Though his movements were clumsy, he crept along at
a good clip toward the city. The rains and winds could not stop
him, and the water just sizzled off his back, causing plumes of
steam to rise, often hiding him from view. Leo pointed out that
the fires that were extinguished had restarted. The children
wondered how on earth they could manage to be of use—
to help.
334
“There is no stopping him with water,” explained King

Brathnar, “but we can slow him down with this.” He hauled
out a large, leather pouch the size of a backpack. He quickly
opened it, holding it so that the other passengers could see its
contents. It glittered.
“Gold!” Massud gasped.
“No, not gold,” corrected the king.
“No, something much better than gold,” Annabel yelled in
delight, clapping her hands. “Sunbeads. Am I right?”
“Yes, indeed,” King Brathnar confirmed. “Given to us by
Grilpy. He received special permission from Rossellippsill to
harvest them. He has gathered thousands of fnumbavats for us.
We will use these against the Molten Dragon. In fact, nothing
else on earth can stop him.
“If he reaches the city, it will burn to the ground, and
millions will perish—lose everything they own. From there,
he plans to move on to the next city, leaving vast devastation
behind him. Destruction gives him strength, making it more
difficult to stop him. We cannot and will not let that happen!”
The three other dwarf kings and the children stood in a
circle around the open bag of glowing fnumbavats and listened
to King Brathnar’s grave words. “Take heed! It will not be as
easy as dropping them into a lake or river. Each one must be
true to its mark—every fnumbavat must make contact with
Zuratrat. Any miss will be a waste. Although only humans can
plant the fnumbavats, we can all use them against Zuratrat.
Now load up and brace yourselves for battle.”
Massud, Leo, and Julie filled their pockets with the
fnumbies. Annabel filled her flask with them. The four dwarf
kings used leather pouches to arm themselves for the daunting
task that awaited them all.
335
82 { United in Battle
Swan Boat sailed low over the molten serpent as it undulated

through the fire, leaving a black trail of scorched earth in its
wake. The four children and four dwarf kings leaned over the
boat’s railing, took careful aim, and threw the sunbeads down
on the monster’s back. Every time a fnumby struck, the dragon
winced, shuddered, and released a burst of hot steam from his
wide nostrils. However, it neither stopped him nor slowed him
down. Instead, it made him heave along more rapidly.
Nobody needed to steer Swan Boat for this task. She knew
exactly what to do—where and when to swoop down and rise
again. Every time the boat lunged, its crew of courageous
passengers flung the tiny sunseeds in fast succession. They
had to act fast, because the heat issuing from Zuratrat was
unbearable, even for the tough, steel-clad dwarfs.
Leo took out his slingshot, and shot the hard little fnumbies
into the rolling dragon. Zuratrat’s scaly skin was thick, but
Leo’s fnumbavats pierced right through. The more he shot, the
better his aim. As for the rest of the fnumbies, they stuck to
crusty scales like hot gum.
But Julie faltered. Her first sunseed missed hitting the
mark, by far. Luckily it fell into a pool of water next to the slow-
moving dragon. But this was not today’s purpose and she was
upset that she’d missed her true target. She knew how essential
it was to hit the mark. She’d never been good at throwing,
and she remembered how badly she’d pitched during softball
games at school. She always lost against Leo when they threw
stones at a target.
Julie didn’t want to waste another sunseed. But she had to
fight, had to contribute. Even Annabel, who flung the sunbeads
336
while sitting on the railing, had a strong arm and hit the serpent
without fail, letting out a little whoop every time she did.
Julie retreated to the back of the boat, away from the others
and threw again. To her horror, she missed again. It fell wide,
and this time there was no pond, lake or river to catch the
sunseed. She knew of their mighty power, and she’d just wasted
one of these rare sun-bullets. Should she just give up? What
would she do then? How could she contribute to the battle?
She took out another sunseed from her pocket. It glowed
beautifully in her hand, lighting up her fingers in gold. “Please,
don’t go to waste,” Julie whispered. “Please, hit the mark.” She
lifted her arm behind her back, paused, took aim, and cast the
glowing marble-sized bead as hard as she could. Unfortunately,
she threw it a bit too hard, and the sunseed flew right over the
back of the serpent, landing in the fire. A group of Krafooms
cheered at her failure, and she saw how they buzzed around
across the dragon’s back, triumphantly waving their fists at her.
Their cheering angered Julie to no end, but she felt powerless.
She certainly wasn’t going to waste any more sunseeds.
As she stood on the deck, with the rain slashing into her
hair and face, Julie put her cold hands in the pockets of her
jacket to warm up. Maybe her aim would improve with warm
hands. As she moved her hands around in her pocket, she felt
Queen Marquellamoosh’s chest. “Of course, the chest! Now’s
the time to open it,” she muttered.
Julie remembered the queen’s words: If you are ever in need,
you may open it up and you are sure to find something that will aid
you. She took out the little chest, steadied herself against the
wind and rain, and opened it. Inside, she saw a thin, small tube
made from a piece of sturdy, hollow seaweed. She took it out
and held it up. “Ah, it’s a peashooter. Perfect!”
337
And perfect it was, because the sunseeds fit exactly into the
slightly elastic tube. She found she could stretch it out so that
it was straight and long. Julie ran over to the railing, loaded her
seaweed blowpipe, and blew. The fnumbavat shot out almost
as fast as Leo’s slingshot. This time it hit its mark, knocking off
a Krafoom in the process. From that moment onward, no shot
went amiss, and in her steady hands, the reed became a lethal
blowgun. Julie now launched each fnumbavat with the greatest
accuracy, every time knocking two or more Krafooms from
Zuratrat’s back. Now, like Annabel, she whooped and hollered
after every shot.
With all eight shooters launching a constant stream of
fnumbavats from Swan Boat’s gunwales, their supply of sunseeds
ran out quickly and they had to stop to replenish their stash
from the large bag. Suddenly, from right above, they heard a
loud, piercing screech, and saw the transformed Sun Dragon
diving down to join the attack. Despite the terrifying roar, the
children and the dwarf kings held their stances and replenished
their supplies of ammunition with cool concentration.
D’Ahura, the Sun Dragon opened his large mouth, and a
beam of pure light streamed forth, aimed at the head of Zuratrat.
This was the dragon’s White Breath—a powerful weapon.
As the light shaft struck Zuratrat, he recoiled and rose like
a snake, trying to avoid the light. Simultaneously, he opened
his huge gaping maw and shot out bombs of lava and magma,
trying to scorch, weigh down, and obliterate the body and
wings of the Sun Dragon. However, d’Ahura, too fast for
Zuratrat, soared back up out of reach, only to dive down with
even greater force, blasting the Molten Dragon with another
annihilating breath of light.
338
“Keep hurling the fnumbavats,” King Brathnar ordered.

“Don’t let up!” The four children and the three other dwarf
kings did not need reminding and pelted Zuratrat until their
arms were stiff and sore.
Every sunseed hit its mark, entering or sticking to the
serpent’s molten back. Nevertheless, Swan Boat had to be
careful not to get too close to the dragon, whose mighty tail
whipped up unexpectedly in wild attempts to cast the boat
from the sky. In addition, though the Krafooms could barely
fly, they could still rise high enough to get up close and hurl
their hot missiles of lava balls.
With the relentless attack of Swan Boat from above and
behind, and the repeated frontal attack by d’Ahura, Zuratrat
at last slowed down and began to writhe and squirm, his long
body bending and buckling, lashing out with its head and
tail. The collaborators didn’t let up, and under their constant
barrage, they could detect a gradual weakening of his strength.
When and wherever a fnumby struck, it froze and lamed a
part of the dragon’s body. Initially, it hardly made a difference;
but now, after hundreds of fnumbavats had lodged themselves
across his colossal bulk, coupled with the Sun Dragon’s White
Breath, the efforts to defeat the Molten Dragon began to
prevail. Zuratrat’s movements slackened and slowed, though
he struggled and strained against the attack, wriggling and
flapping his stunted wings as best he could.
The Kraftabots and the Krafooms constantly relit the fires
that had gone out, replenishing them with dried limbs and
branches they found in spite of the heavy rain. In some places,
this was not needed—the fire was so strong that the rain had
little effect.
339
But the fires were not their main concern; the destructive
creatures had to contend with the dwarfs who had appeared
by the tens of thousands. Aiding them was the High One, who
would come in close with one of his four heads and release a
mighty wind. Whole squadrons of Krafooms were blown off
Zuratrat’s back and clumsy Kraftabots were sent toppling over
one another. What a sight it was to see them hurling through
the sky or falling to the ground in a mangled mess!
Forging ahead over fallen bodies, the dwarfs raised their
axes and lashed into the remaining legions of Kraftabots.
Dwarf archers shot the remaining Krafooms from the back of
Zuratrat, while Swinglashna, the Sovereign Lady of the Sky,
with her host of elves and fairies, attacked the Krafooms from
above. One of the fastest was Flimsk, who dashed back and
forth at the speed of light, armed with a tiny bow and arrow,
the little darts finding their mark every time.
The battle raged for hours, until at last the Molten Dragon
stiffened and froze completely—firmly stuck within himself.
With his last breath, it seemed as if time stood still. And then,
there was a new sense of energy in the very air.
The elves and dwarfs closed in on the retreating Kraftabots
and Krafooms, chasing them back up the volcano, where they
jumped from the crater’s edge into the gaping cavity to escape
to their molten realm far below.
Meanwhile, the storm softened to a steady, mild rain. The
High One blew out the last few scattered fires that still raged
here and there. At the coast, the waves subsided and Queen
Marquellamoosh and her host withdrew back into the depths
of the ocean.
When at last all had quieted down, King Brathnar sat down
by the tiller and steered Swan Boat back to Fist Rock. They
340
landed in the same rock pool as before and met up with the
returning dwarfs, singed and battle-weary, but content. Before
stepping off the boat, King Brathnar pulled the tiller to the side
and down, shrinking the boat back to its normal size.
Then the exhausted, but still mighty king thanked the
children and bid them farewell: “You have shown great courage
and endurance. Know now that we could not have won this
battle without your help. It is time for us to return home. We
thank you in the name of all who live within our realm. We are
too spent for mightier words. That time will come.”
Together with the three other dwarf kings, he gave the royal
salute with both hands. This was immediately answered by the
throng of dwarfs. “We will meet again for the Grand Opening
of the Old Treasure.”
King Brathnar stepped off the boat, about to leave, but then
he stopped to address the children again, adding, “Excuse my
sparse words. What you have done has been witnessed by the
beings beyond our realms, and they are pleased and grateful.
We will see you at the well of your wishes. Make haste and get
back to your home. Something awaits you there. We too must
return for we must prepare the triumphant feast of the four
realms.” With that, he struck his staff onto the rock and was
gone, together with all the dwarfs. From one moment to the
next, the children found themselves from being in the company
of many to suddenly being utterly alone.
The sun shone down upon them as they sat in the boat.
They looked over the calm ocean. The clouds had scattered,
and behind them the forests and fields looked bare, black, and
burnt. Funnels of smoke rose in patches, but there were no more
flames. None of the children uttered a word. An overwhelming
feeling of relief and exhaustion settled over them. They knew
341
they should go, but, too tired to move, they tarried and bathed
in the mood of calm and peace. At length, Massud nudged
Leo, who got up to man the tiller. Julie closed the ethmaroll
and sat down on the bench next to Annabel. Without a word,
they lifted off and flew back home.
342
part ten
In the Garden
Where Fire and Water Cross
83 { Back to the City
The fires had spread right to the border of the suburbs and
had been doused just in time. As they flew overhead, Julie, Leo,
Annabel, and Massud saw firefighters working to control the
smoldering embers.
Later that week, when the children watched the TV news
or saw articles in the newspapers about the fires, they were not
surprised to see the media attribute the quenching of the fires
to the heavy rains. If the reporters only knew of the real battle
that had been waged! However, there was one puzzling piece
of evidence that made front-page news all around the world:
the frozen serpent. Hours after the children were back home,
the reporters, in the bright morning sunlight, were filming the
massive remains of the arched and twisted tongue of hardened
lava, which people likened to a downed dragon.
There was a terrible beauty to the snake of lava as it
sprawled across the inland valleys in its contorted shape. The
end of its tail stood like a tower, frozen there as it had tried
to flick Swan Boat from the sky. Its head was caught in the
moment of defeat, its mouth wide open, its molten-glass saliva
hanging down like icicles. Its stumped wings with the blunt
scales formed organically shaped roofs. The entire length of
343
the winding body was streaked with gold and silver, where the
sunbeads had struck and melted into the dying body, creating
beautiful patterns that looked like a Persian carpet. Only the
four children, mesmerized by the photos on their TV screen,
knew that the gigantic serpent was frozen in the moment of its
defeat by the Sun Dragon.
Within days, tourists would begin arriving from all over
the world to view the natural wonder, especially the unique
shape of the igneous tongue, which would become the
most photographed natural phenomenon in the world. The
following year, the area around the ‘Molten Dragon’ would
be declared a national park and called Serpent National Park.
It would quickly prove to be of special interest to geologists
and other scientists who would continue to study the natural
marvel for decades to come. Of course, their studies would
spawn only more questions, and numerous scientific treatises
would be written.
What turned out to be of special interest to the scientists
were the golden streaks. (There was, of course, no way for them
to know these had been caused by the sunbeads.) They noted
how they underwent change, especially after every storm. Over
time, the streaks began to glow as if they had a light of their
own. This attracted even more people, who wanted to view the
natural wonder by night as well as by day.
Furthermore, the area around the serpent, extending for
hundreds of miles, would gradually develop into the most fertile
ground in the country. This would be a blessing especially to
the farmers who had lost entire crops during the wildfires.
From then on their harvests would improve every year, and
they would come to realize that they did not need any fertilizers
or pesticides for their crops any longer.
344
Part 10 » In the Garden Where Fire and Water Cross
Hence, Zuratrat, the ugly dragon from deep beneath the

earth, had changed into something spectacularly beautiful, not
only catching and reflecting the sunlight, but glowing from
within, as each spot where a fnumbavat had struck had become
a source of golden light.
But on that fateful day just after the battle, Leo circled a
few times around the petrified molten serpent, the magnificent
victory monument of their recent battle, before they sailed on.
Although its terrifying beauty struck the children, they were
dismayed and dejected by the widespread devastation. They
sailed over miles and miles of destroyed land where many
farmers had lost whole crops, and often their homes. They did
not know that bumper crops would soon compensate many
of the farmers in the future, and that no one had been killed,
though some had suffered severe burns. Sadly, they witnessed
that many animals had not survived the flames.
After seeing enough of the petrified serpent and the miles
of destruction, they asked the boat to carry them back home as
fast as possible. At once the ground below turned into a blur
and Swan Boat shot homeward.
Only a few short minutes later, Swan Boat slowed down
again. They wondered why, because there was no town or city
to be seen, but seconds later Annabel shouted, “Of course,
how could we forget Skull Mountain?” Right in front of them,
the white clouds that formed the Great Gates of the Carved
Dome glistened and loomed large. Now, for the fourth time,
they entered the great hole on top of the skull. But instead of
passing through the majestic horse and the lovely lady of green,
the cloud dissolved as soon as they entered. They were puzzled.
Why was it different this time? What could it mean?
345
Leo looked at his pocket watch and noted with a satisfied

smile that it read 8:34, just as he expected. “But something’s
wrong,” Leo determined. “My pocket watch says 8:34, the exact
time we entered Skull Mountain, but now it’s daylight. We
entered at night. Something’s weird. I wish we could ask Grilpy
or Flimsk what’s going on.”
“Didst someone calls me?” a little voice inquired. There,
right outside, on the head of Swan Boat sat Flimsk. Julie quickly
opened the ethmaroll and let him in. When Flimsk heard the
question he laughed and explained: “Ah, that’s easy to answer.
There ist lawfulness to everythingst, and different places haves
different laws. What holdst true to the kingdoms of the dwarfs,
elves or fairies, does nots holdst true for what happens in your
world.
“Now the time in which those fires happenedst could nots
be changed. Had they happenedst in King Brathnar’s realm, in
Crystal Canyon or the Soft Realm, then yes, but notst up here
on the surface. So the time of your journey was timeless, that’s
all. Instead of 8:34 in the eveningst, which is when you entered
Skull Mountain, it became 8:34 in the morningst. And that’s
why Skull Mountain dissolved withoutst yous going through
the magnificent horse and the Lovely Green Lady.
“Anywayst, that should answer your question. You shouldst
be back home just after nine in the morningst. It was goodst
speaking to yous. Gots to go now.” Julie opened the ethmaroll,
and Flimsk zoomed off. She grinned at Massud who had a
confused look on his face—it was still all too weird and magical!
346
84 { The Reward
It was a beautiful sunny early morning when Swan Boat

sailed over the city. The leaves on the trees had the light sheen
of early spring, and the grass was fluffy and green. People
were boating on the lake. Leo landed in the park and they
disembarked where the trees and rocks were thickest, away
from most people.
Once the boat was corked and bottled they strolled home
through the park. It felt so peaceful, something they relished
after the furious battle they’d just fought. On their way they
spotted Mr. Temple returning from the corner store, carrying
a bag of the cinnamon rolls that he loved to munch with his
coffee. “Hi Dad,” Julie and Leo shouted, casually.
“Oh, there you are! We wondered where you were.” He
waited for them at the front door. “Aunt Miriam and your
mother are desperately looking for you. You must have just
missed them. They went to the park with Sidney only minutes
ago. I’m surprised you didn’t see them.” Mr. Temple looked
relieved, and there was a twinkle in his eyes, which meant they
weren’t in deep trouble. “Ah, here they come, from the west
entrance.”
“We walked all over the park—twice—looking for you,” Mrs.
Temple yelled from a distance. Aunt Miriam looked anxious.
“I wish you’d let us know of your whereabouts. You had us
worried stiff.” As soon as Sidney saw them, he leapt forward
and pulled so hard at the leash that Mrs. Temple had to let
go. The hound hurtled toward them, yowling with joy and
jumping up on all the children, even Massud, and covered all
four of them with his slobber.
347
“And do not just leave us little notes,” Aunt Miriam added,

once she’d caught up. “Besides, I didn’t even hear you leave,
and I’ve been up for hours. What have you been up to? Where
have you been?”
“Sorry, you’re right. We should have been clearer.” Massud
saw Aunt Miriam’s troubled expression. He understood her
concern, especially in the light of his abduction.
“But what’s all this about, anyway?” Julie asked.
“It’s Detective Hoover. Early this morning he asked to see
you,” Mrs. Temple began with a calmer voice. “But you were
already gone when we looked for you. He wanted to talk to
you before leaving for work. Every few minutes after that he
came knocking at our door to see whether you’d come back.
Finally, he couldn’t wait any longer and said you should come
straight down to the 11th Street Police Precinct Station on your
return.” Mrs. Temple caught her breath. “It has something to
do with the people they arrested… you know, those horrid
people responsible for abducting Massud.”
“Where have you been all this time?” Mr. Temple asked,
removing a cinnamon roll from the package and taking a bite.
“You all smell of smoke. Have you been making fires?” Mr.
Temple joined Sidney and sniffed. “Kind of reminds me of
camping.”
“No, we haven’t lit any fires. Actually, we put out a fire,”
Massud said, truthfully.
“We can tell you about all that later,” Julie hastily added,
wanting to avoid getting into a muddle with the truth just now.
“Let’s go to the precinct and see what Detective Hoover wants.”
Without further delay, they walked the three blocks to the
precinct and asked for the detective. When they said who they
were, they were ushered immediately into his office.
348
Detective Hoover sat behind a desk, talking to the police

sergeant. “Ah, there you are. Very good. Take a seat, all of you.”
There weren’t enough seats and the police sergeant brought in
more chairs.
Once they were all comfortably settled, Detective Hoover
began: “As you know, we arrested Ahrmaluz and Eplyssa, as
they call themselves. As it turns out, their names are Adrian
Park and Becky Wexler. They are some of the most wanted
criminals in the country.
“After thorough investigation, we discovered that these
crooks were involved in even more crimes than we’d supposed.
The stolen and illegally manufactured goods found in the
warehouse and in The Magick Quill surprised all of us.
Their flagrant abuse of the homeless—homeless children
especially—was widespread. Their illegal dealings extended not
only throughout this country but internationally. And they
functioned under many false names.” He paused, turning over
some loose pages on his desk. “I won’t bore you with all the
details, but here’s the thing…”
Again he paused and looked up at the four children
sitting attentively in front of him. “Over the years, we’ve had
numerous people come forward, offering generous rewards
to anybody who could supply information that would lead to
the arrest of these very criminals. Not only that, but the state
government also offered a substantial reward to anybody who
aided in the conviction of these two criminals, which you have
done. Initially, we didn’t realize how interconnected these
cases were. Needless to say, your information was crucial and
led directly to their arrest. So…” Detective Hoover took a deep
breath, “…we have combined the various rewards offered and
hereby give you a check—a reward that is your due and that you
349
well deserve. Share it amongst yourselves. You may do with the

money as you please.”
He smiled broadly and handed an envelope to Massud, who
immediately held it out to Annabel. “It was really the three of
you who deserve this money, not me.” Annabel wanted it to be
passed on to Julie, so she stepped back, keeping her hands on
her crutches.
“No, go ahead, take it Annabel—open it,” insisted both
Julie and Leo.
Annabel carefully opened the sealed envelope and pulled
out the check. When she saw the amount, her lips quivered.
She tried to speak, but couldn’t. She passed it on to Julie, who
took it. Julie shook her head in disbelief. “Am I reading this
correctly? Is it really this much? Does that number mean what
I think it means?” She handed it to her dad.
“Half a million, that’s what it says.” Mr. Temple whistled
and handed the check to Aunt Miriam. She glanced at it,
nodded, and wiped a tear from her cheek as she passed it on to
Mrs. Temple, unable to say a word.
“And there might be more to come.” Detective Hoover
stood up, smiling. “Congratulations!”
After it had sunk in that they’d indeed received such a large
sum of money, there was a whole lot of hugging, laughing, and
shaking of hands going on, mixed with tears. “Be warned. You
won’t escape the media. Journalists and TV news reporters will
hunt you down,” Detective Hoover said as he opened the door.
“But before that onslaught, all of us here at the station want to
thank you for your part in helping to get these criminals off the
streets. Rest assured, they won’t ever disturb the public again.
Thanks for coming in. The sergeant will show you out.”
350
85 { The Decision
Detective Hoover was right. Journalists from every major

newspaper wanted their story. Furthermore, the children
were asked to appear on numerous TV shows. They turned
down most requests, even though some of the stations offered
lucrative deals. They knew that in every interview they’d have
to leave out many important details, such as the true nature of
Swan Boat, Roop, the dwarfs, elves, and all the other spirits
from the Invisible folk. They feared getting caught up in
questions they didn’t want to answer or in answers that might
be contradictory. They most certainly did not want to lie; they
already felt bad enough about not revealing the whole truth to
their parents and Aunt Miriam.
The children were in a bit of a quandary. Hadn’t the dwarfs
told them that the time had come for the world to know about
the nature spirits and the little folk in order for Earth to
survive? Weren’t humans supposed to start working together
with them?
The children talked over these questions with one another,
and they eventually agreed that this collaboration would take
time, that they needed to wait for the right moment. Being
children, they were not likely to be believed or, worse, thought
to be fantasizing, making up stories instead of telling the truth.
Nevertheless, they did accept a few invitations and appeared
on select TV and radio shows, approved by their parents and
Aunt Miriam.
A week later, on a Thursday afternoon just before dinner,
they heard Mrs. Temple shout from the living room, “That’s
it. I’ve done it.” She clapped her hands above her head and let
out a little squeal of joy. It was very unusual for her to express
351
her emotions so openly. The sudden outburst startled Julie and

Leo who were doing their homework in their bedroom.
“What’s up?” Julie shouted from her desk, while Leo had
already jumped up and run to the living room.
“What’s all this yelling about?” Mr. Temple called from the
kitchen, adding to the commotion. He was preparing dinner—
mushroom and leek soufflé.
Mrs. Temple smiled. “I’ve finished my thesis. If my review
committee accepts it, I’ll have my doctorate. She shut her
laptop with finality. “What a relief.”
“Celebration is in order!” Mr. Temple took out his wallet
and handed his son some bills. “Leo, go down to the store and
get some sparkling cider.”
“On it,” Leo sang out, snatching the money and whistling
for Sidney to join him. To his surprise, Julie, who’d come out
of her bedroom, offered to go with him.
Once they were out in the hallway Julie whispered, “You
know, I think this might be the perfect moment to ask Mom
and Dad.”
“Ask them what? And you don’t have to whisper.” Leo
rolled his eyes.
“You know,” she still whispered.
“You mean what I think you mean?” He clearly remembered
the discussions they had recently had with Massud and Annabel
over what to do with the reward money.
“Exactly!” Julie spoke normally again. “So, it’s settled. We’ll
ask them after dinner.”
“Settled!” Leo cried as he fist-bumped Julie.
For dinner they laid out the crystal glasses, brought out only
for special occasions. Mr. Temple poured the sparkling apple
cider and made a toast in celebration of his wife’s successful
352
completion of her doctoral thesis. After dinner, when they’d

refilled the glasses, Julie stood up and said, “And since we’re
celebrating, Leo and I have something to ask. Well, it’s more
of a proposal really.” She cleared her throat. “Anyway, we think
this might be the perfect opportunity to approach you with a
request.” Julie was trying hard to sound formal. She hesitated.
“Ask us what?” Mr. Temple looked at Julie with questioning
eyebrows.
“Well, the four of us—that is me and Leo, and Annabel and
Massud—have talked it over and we’ve decided what we want to
do with the reward money.”
“Oh, interesting—and that is?” Mrs. Temple leaned back in
her chair, her head cocked to the side.
“But we need your help and permission with it,” she
continued.
“We’re all ears,” Mrs. Temple said, leaning forward in
anticipation.
“The idea actually came from Annabel and Massud, but of
course Leo and I want it too—real bad.”
“Julie! Don’t keep us in suspense. Out with it.” Mr. Temple
leaned forward and rubbed his stubbly chin.
“Okay, so here it is: We want to use our reward money
to buy back Honey Creek Farm.” Julie stuck her fingers into
her blue jeans and smiled. She waited for a moment to let her
words sink in. “Well, what do you think?”
There was a long silence. Leo and Julie studied their parents’
faces, especially their mother’s, to see what they thought, but in
this case they couldn’t tell. Mrs. Temple just sat there, her eyes
staring off in the distance. At last, Mr. Temple spoke: “I’ll speak
for Mom,” and he gave her a sidelong glance, “if you don’t
mind, Angela.” He turned back to them. “If you must know,
353
it’s Mom’s greatest wish to be back on the farm, to take up that

work again, to be directly involved in agriculture again, and…”
“Then it’s a yes! Yes?” Leo interrupted him.
“Wait, wait.” Mr. Temple smiled at Leo’s enthusiasm, but
immediately grew serious again. “However, we cannot accept
your money to buy back the farm. Besides, it’s also Massud’s
and Annabel’s money. Wouldn’t they rather use it for college?”
“No, no,” Julie cried. “They want it just as badly as we do.
Leo and I really want to go back there. We’ve been thinking
that Annabel and Massud could come with us, of course.”
“So can we do it?” Leo pleaded. “Do you think Mr. Phipson
will sell it back to us? He will, won’t he?” Leo turned to his
father. “Dad, say something. Don’t you want to go back too?”
“I admit, I wouldn’t mind. And if it made Mom happy,
then yes, absolutely.”
“So, Mom, what do you say?” Leo almost fell off the stool in
his impatient excitement.
“Of course, I would love to go back.” Mrs. Temple sat back
in her chair, unable to show her delight in her face… and Julie
could see that there was lingering doubt there too.
“Then it’s settled,” Julie exclaimed, before Mrs. Temple
could say another word.
“Now wait a minute. Nothing’s settled.” She turned to her
husband. “I don’t know. Can we really use their reward money
to buy back the farm, Gerald? What about the other children
coming too?”
“Angela, the children all want to go, you want to go, so let’s
do it.” Mr. Temple smiled broadly and threw his hands up in
the air as if he was tossing away his resistance.
“Yes!” the children screamed. Both jumped up and slapped
their palms hard together, beaming at their parents with delight.
354
“I’ll call Mr. Phipson first thing tomorrow morning and

make an offer,” Mr. Temple shouted as he stood up and slapped
the table with conviction.
“One he can’t refuse,” Julie added, hopping over to her
mother and kissing her on the cheek. “So, Mom, what do you
say? Happy?”
“Dad’s right. I never wanted to leave the farm. And yes, I’m
happy.” She wanted to say more, but choked up. Instead, she
poured herself some more cider.
“Another toast is in order,” Julie proclaimed, lifting her
glass. “To Honey Creek Farm!”
“To Honey Creek Farm!” they all responded in chorus.
They clinked their glasses and emptied them to the last golden
drop.
Above them, on top of the yellow clock in the shape of a
teapot, sat Curly Beard. The dwarf smiled, lifted his pipe, blew
some smoke in their direction, and disappeared. Nobody had
noticed him, though they all imagined the fresh smells of their
farm in springtime.
355
86 { The Truth Revealed
Mr. Phipson had not done as well with the farm project as
he’d hoped. The person he’d hired to manage the farm had
cheated and deserted him. Crops had failed, and to make ends
meet he had allowed a logging company to log part of the forest
behind Puff Mountain. But the sale of timber had not given
him the money he expected, and when he came down with
a bad case of pneumonia, he started thinking of selling the
whole farm.
It just so happened that he had decided on this course of
action exactly when Mr. Temple called to make an offer. To
Mr. Temple’s surprise, Mr. Phipson was ready to sell and didn’t
even haggle over the price. “The farm will be back in our hands
by spring break!” announced Mr. Temple. Julie and Leo could
hardly believe their good fortune.
“Have you noticed,” began Julie one afternoon after school,

as they sat around the Temple’s kitchen table drinking cranberry
juice with Annabel and Massud, “that one by one, our wishes
have come true—the wishes that Queen Marquellamoosh
promised us?”
“You’re right. We’re getting our farm back …” Leo chimed
in while opening a packet of chocolate chip cookies.
“And I got my brother back,” Annabel interrupted Leo,
giving Massud’s arm a tight squeeze.
“And we found the dwarfs’ secret key,” continued Julie,
laughing. Suddenly, they fell silent as they all remembered that
one wish remained unfulfilled: Annabel’s legs were still mostly
lame, even though they’d gained in strength since the summer.
None of them dared mention her legs, least of all Annabel.
356
Instead, Julie said, “The spring equinox is coming up in

ten days. That’s when the dwarfs said we should meet up at the
oak tree.”
“As did Roop,” Annabel reminded them.
“How cool would it be if we started moving back in at the
same time? It’s during spring break, so we could go to the farm
with our parents,” Leo suggested.
“And Aunt Miriam,” Massud added. “I’m sure she’d love to
see it, and it would be good for her to get out of the city for a
change.” He grinned. “And she might just fall in love with the
place. But of course, we’d have to ask her, and it might take
some convincing for her to move out to the farm.”
“Well, it will have to be discussed with our parents, too.
But here’s the thing.” Julie leaned back and rearranged her
hair, which her brother and friends knew meant that she was
thinking about broaching a difficult topic. “I think the time
has come to tell them of our secret.”
“Our secret! You mean, like Swan Boat?” Leo jumped up
from the table, wide-eyed with arms outstretched in disbelief.
“That’s exactly what I mean, Leo. And not only about Swan
Boat, but about Curly Beard, Grilpy, King Brathnar, Wilamelee,
Queen Marquellamoosh, Roop, Flimsk, Swinglashna, and
everybody else.” Leo put his hands on his head and ruffled
his blonde hair, pulling a face that said, “You must be out of
your mind!”
“I totally agree with Julie and I’m glad she brought it up.”
Annabel breathed deeply. “I, for one, have never felt good
about keeping anything from Aunt Miriam. She’s sacrificed so
much for me. She came all the way from Africa after…” and she
swallowed, “…well, you know.” The others nodded.
357
“But will they believe us?” Leo asked and sat back down.
“It’s too crazy.”
“Maybe they won’t, Leo,” Julie responded, “but at least
we’ll have tried.” Again they fell into silence, staring into their
half-filled glasses.
At last Massud spoke up. “I agree with Julie and Annabel.
If they don’t believe us, then we just say that it’s true in our
imagination and in our minds. Nobody can deny that.”
“That’s right,” Leo chuckled. “Both Mom and Dad love
stories, and Dad himself tells some really ridiculous ones.”
“So if we’re all agreed, we should tell them as soon as
possible,” Julie declared, nodding firmly.
The opportunity arose the very next day when Mr. Temple
went down to borrow a blender from Aunt Miriam. “Sure you
can, Gerald, but I’ve just made a batch of sweet potato fritters,
soup and salad, so why don’t you and Angela come down for
dinner. The children are here anyway. I owe you one.”
“Won’t say no to that. Hmm, and something smells
really good.”
“That’s the carrot cake in the oven, which we’ll have for
dessert.” Aunt Miriam shouted over her shoulder, “Boys, girls,
set the table, please. The Temples are coming for dinner.”
“Here’s our chance.” Julie got up with the others. “We’ll
tell them tonight.”
Fifteen minutes later, they were all sitting around the
kitchen table. Julie couldn’t help notice how well Mom got on
with Aunt Miriam. After dinner, Aunt Miriam brought out
the carrot cake and placed it on the table. “Massud, do us the
honors and cut the cake, please.”
358
“Happy to,” he said from his seat at the head of the table.
He took the knife and was about to cut it when he stopped.
“Actually, before I cut the cake, we have something to say to
you.” Massud paused, not knowing how to continue. “On
second thought, I think it’s better if Annabel speaks,” and he
gestured to her.
“Oh, okay.” Annabel paused, hesitating from being put
on the spot. “Yes, we do have something to tell you. In fact,
we all do.” She stopped again, looking flustered. “But I think
we should start at the beginning, so…” and she stared at Leo
and Julie, “if one of you could start?” Leo shook his head and
looked at Julie.
“Must be a really interesting story if none of you can even
start,” quipped Mr. Temple.
“And it is… alright, here goes.” Julie leaned back and twirled
her hair into a bun. “So….” She took a deep breath. “The story
starts on the day we left the farm…” and Julie launched forth,
telling them about the voices they’d heard that morning, the
significance of finding the Flora Hermeticus, and their meeting
with Curly Beard and Ektanaan. She went on to tell them
about the discovery of Swan Boat, how they’d learned to sail,
and of their adventures, beginning with the Binagatorials and
the cleansing of the waters in the sewers. As she unfolded their
story, Leo and Annabel chipped in with relevant details.
Julie described their trip through the Great Caves to the
realm of King Brathnar and their journey to the Seventh Island
to find Queen Marquellamoosh, and how they’d met Wilamelee
and freed Curly Beard. On and on she told of their adventures.
Not once did the parents or Aunt Miriam interrupt, except for
an occasional “go on” or to ask a question for clarity.
359
Julie continued, describing their second visit to King

Brathnar and their participation in the 77th Earth Council,
after which they had descended into Crystal Canyon and been
chased by the Kraftabots. Aunt Miriam gasped outright when
she heard about the attack.
Not wanting the adults to get really worried, Julie decided
to leave out some of the more harrowing details, telling instead
of the Soft Realm’s beauty and of their meeting with kindly
Rossellippsill, who led them to the sunseeds and the fields of
Lughshmarah, filled with the Flora Hermeticus.
At that point, Julie took a break and Leo took over,
telling them of Coral Castle and their meeting with Queen
Marquellamoosh. He told them of Flimsk, Swinglashna, and
their trip to the South to save the land from drought.
Annabel eventually picked up the story and spoke of Roop,
their search for Massud, The Magick Quill, and their capture and
narrow escape. Aunt Miriam just shook her head in disbelief.
Finally, Massud told them about the wildfires in the West,
their encounter with d’Ahura, the Sun Dragon, and their last,
great battle against Zuratrat, the Molten Dragon. Massud’s
story made it clear that they had won only because of all the
help they’d received from the leaders of the four realms of
nature and the power of the sunseeds.
“Now we have been invited to attend a ceremony on Honey
Creek Farm that will take place at the large oak tree next to the
pond on the far side of Puff Mountain,” Julie finished. “So
there you have it—the short version.” She leaned back again,
freed her hair, and let it roll down her back.
The three adults looked at the children with wide, astonished
eyes. Finally, Aunt Miriam broke the silence. “I need a minute
to absorb all of this. Massud, cut the cake now. We’ve waited
360
long enough. After all that, I, for one, need some dessert.” She
got up. “While you do that I’ll put on the water for some tea—
and Gerald, for you a strong cup of coffee, yes?” She moved to
the sink. “And then I have something to tell you, too,” she said
firmly, looking at the children and nodding for emphasis.
“Well, I sure could do with a proper cup of coffee after that
epic tale.” Mr. Temple leaned back and stretched. “And it will
go perfectly with that carrot cake.”
“Yes,” Mrs. Temple agreed. “How about I whip some
cream?” She got up to join Aunt Miriam. “Oh, and I too have
something to say.”
361
87 { The Adults Speak
The children could not tell how their story had affected
the adults. Once everybody had been generously supplied with
carrot cake topped with whipped cream and peppermint tea
(except for Mr. Temple who hugged his mug of coffee with both
hands), Aunt Miriam began.
“We all have our secrets. You told us your secret story, and
that took courage. Everything has to come out sometime.” She
looked at Massud and Annabel. “Now the time has come for
me to share something about your own heritage.” Annabel had
never seen her aunt look so serious.
“You come from a long line of chiefs and high priests. Royal
blood flows in your veins at least fifty generations back. It is
not a line of minor chiefs, but chiefs of chiefs. But over time,
the power of our family weakened. Tribal warfare caused much
pain and loss. Family members were persecuted and forced to
flee their homeland. Your parents left only a few years before
you were born and left everything behind: their possessions,
their people, their heritage. Your father was the last great chief
of our country.
“Both of your parents had been fully initiated in the rituals
and ceremonies of their tribes that include the invisible world,
the realm of the spirits that populate every community, the
kind of spirits you talked about in your experiences. To people
in Africa, the spirits are a reality, just like plants, animals, and
fellow human beings; they have their own names for them.
“Every tribe has healers and sorcerers. They have been
called witchdoctors, which is an unfortunate term, and it does
not honor them the way they should be. They are members of,
often the leaders of, secret societies. I belonged to one of them,
362
and so did your mother. During the tribal wars, the secret
societies were destroyed, broken up. As you know, I am now a
nurse, so I still heal and serve the sick, but I have knowledge of
other healing methods.
“So you see, your tales ring true. I can see the chief and
the healer in both of you. It makes me proud. Your story
reminds me of the threats our family has endured, but also of
our relationship to the spiritual realm. The connection to the
invisible world is slowly being lost in Africa. It must be regained.
That’s all I have to say for now,” Aunt Miriam concluded.
Mrs. Temple let Aunt Miriam’s words settle before she smiled
and said, “My turn.” She paused, deciding where to begin.
“First of all, I am glad that you told us of your adventures—and
I’m still dazed by the magnitude of them. Most adults would
not believe you. But remember, we are not ‘most adults.’ I
am, after all, Julie and Leo, your grandfather’s daughter. I also
heard all those stories he told you. Your grandfather taught
me to love nature, just like he instilled that love in you. It is
because of him that I studied agriculture. In fact, my doctorate
is dedicated to him.” She took a sip of tea and stared at the
crescent moon through the window.
“The stories my father told about dwarfs, fairies, and elves
were my favorites. When I was young, I could see them and
played with them. As I got older, I told my friends at school
about the little ones, expecting them to know what I was talking
about. Instead, they just laughed at me. That’s when I began
to doubt that Grandpa’s stories were true… instead, that they
were childish. I know that he was sad when I mentioned that to
him. After that his stories stopped, and I never saw any dwarfs
or elves again.”
363
Mrs. Temple looked down, staring into her teacup. Julie

thought she saw a tear in her mother’s eye. “There’s one more
reason that I believe your story.” Mrs. Temple looked up at
Julie and Leo. “We’ve never talked about it, but as you know,
you had an older sister who died soon after she was born. We
named her Sophia. I often dream about her, and sometimes I
feel her so close to me.” At this point, she could not control the
tears anymore, and they rolled down her cheek.
“Here you go, Angie.” Mr. Temple handed her a tissue from
a packet he kept in his pocket.
“Thanks.” She dried her eyes and wiped her cheek before
continuing. “At times Sophia talks to me—not like a daughter,
but more like a sister, a friend.” Mrs. Temple took a deep breath.
“But, strangest of all, she sometimes appears in a boat, and
when she does, she asks me to come sailing with her. It looks
a little bit like the boat you have in the bottle.” She laughed at
the memory and wiped away another tear. “In other words, I
believe your story, every bit of it.” She took the last bite of the
carrot cake, and leaned back. “Scrumptious cake, Miriam.”
Julie gave her mother’s hand a squeeze and then turned to
her dad. “So what about you?”
Mr. Temple smiled his usual mischievous smile, combed
through his thick black hair with his bony fingers and said, “I
don’t know how you could possibly have come up with such a
wildly complex story, so there must be some truth to it.” His
eyes twinkled. “I’ve traveled all around the world and seen
many strange places and things. I’ve met quacks, swindlers,
impostors, cons and frauds, too. I’ve also seen people walk over
hot coals while in a trance, heal people with a touch of the
hand, go without food for years, bend metal with their minds,
or prophesy the future correctly. So… why should I not believe
364
what you’ve said? I am a teacher and I have an open mind. One

sees more with an open mind.” He nodded and pursed his lips
thoughtfully.
“On the other hand… I am not gullible, either. I have never
seen dwarfs, fairies, or anything else like that, but I do feel
the difference in mood when I go out in nature—whether the
environment around me is alive and vibrant or dead, joyful or
sad. And sometimes, I feel I am near something special, you
know, touched by an angel, or something.” Mr. Temple looked
around the gathering to see if anyone might have had a similar
experience.
The children all nodded. They had not expected such a
positive response: Rather than doubting the story, the adults
had told of their own experiences of an invisible world. They
could believe!
Leo couldn’t help but blurt out, “So we can all go to the
spring equinox ceremony together, yes?” All the children looked
eagerly at Aunt Miriam and the Temples.
“Why not, if we’ll be welcome,” Mr. Temple said, and Aunt
Miriam and Mrs. Temple smiled and nodded.
All the while, Curly Beard had sat cross-legged on top of
the large wooden coffee grinder, stroking his long beard. As
the two families joined hands around the table and laughed
happily at their shared decision, he stood up and smoothed his
green tunic. Then grinning slightly, he disappeared.
365
88 { Back on Honey Creek Farm
The idea of going back to Honey Creek Farm on this sunny,

spring morning filled everyone with excitement and hope. A
week had gone by, the sale of the farm was underway, and the
final papers would be signed on arrival. Aunt Miriam was set
to ride along with Mr. and Mrs. Temple in their car, while the
children would travel on Swan Boat with Sidney. Julie looked
at her parents and smiled. “We’ll be there before you.” Seeing
her mother’s frown, she added, “Don’t worry, we’ve done this
many times before. We’ll arrive safe and sound, you’ll see.
Trust us.”
They helped pack their parents’ car and waved goodbye.
“See you soon!” Leo shouted after them, as they drove off.
“Don’t get stuck in traffic,” he laughed. “Flying is way better.”
The children went back inside to pack up what they’d need
for the weekend. Massud carefully wrapped up the dwarfs’
sacred relic—the key in the quill—in Annabel’s cloak and then
stowed it in his backpack. Within ten minutes they were ready
to go. Julie and Leo were so excited they could hardly contain
themselves. For them, it was a dream come true.
“Hey, look, the Flora Hermeticus has faded,” Massud
observed. The others crowded around the ocher scroll from
the dwarfs. “That must mean that the time for the ceremony of the
sacred key is at hand.”
“You’re right, the flower has faded, and the last fnumbavat
has found its rightful place,” Annabel noted.
“True! And the spring equinox is tomorrow. Remember,
that’s when Roop told us to be back at the pond.” Julie gathered
up an armful of things to put in the boat.
366
“Of course, we remember. Well, we’d better get going.” Leo

picked up the bottle from the windowsill and quickly uncorked
it. They loaded up their arms, nodded to one another, and
happily shouted, “On the boat!” Seconds later, they sailed out
through the open window and headed north toward Honey
Creek Farm.
This time they sailed leisurely. Leo pulled up the tiller to
make the boat bigger—always a more comfortable way to travel—
and they left the ethmaroll open. People in the streets below
spotted them straight away, wondering whether it might be a
blimp or a special type of newfangled, silent drone. The four
of them didn’t mind or care, even waving to the people below,
some of whom took pictures.
As predicted, the children arrived before their parents. Mr.
Phipson was nowhere in sight, but he’d left the house open.
“Come on, we’ll show you around,” Julie said, leading the way,
first through their old farmhouse that now stood empty, and
then around the farm. Sidney scampered all over, thrilled to be
off his leash and free to roam around and explore all the new
smells.
Sadly, the place looked neglected. It was clear that the
manager had not taken good care of the place and that Mr.
Phipson had not been able to keep up with all the work,
especially once he’d become ill. Leo and Julie, overjoyed to
see their animals again, could tell immediately that Loppy and
Harpy, the cows, were thinner. The chickens looked happy, but
the brood was reduced by half. Willy and Wooly, the sheep, had
not been sheared and looked shaggy. Googoo, the goat, stared
at them accusingly, as if to scold them for having stayed away so
long. Their biggest joy was seeing Pericles, their donkey, again.
367
“Oh, you poor little thing, you really need to be brushed

down—how dusty you are.” Julie stroked him on his forehead
and tickled him behind the ears, while Leo fed him a carrot.
After introducing the animals to Massud and Annabel, Leo
said, “Let’s go to the old oak tree near the pond and check on
Roop.”
“No,” Julie hastily responded. “Roop explicitly said we
should return only on the spring equinox, and not one day
before. Remember? We’ll just have to wait until tomorrow.”
“Yeah, I guess.” Leo and Annabel looked disappointed.
Massud then asked, “Where is the tree house you spoke
about, where Swan Boat was hidden?”
Julie twinkled at Leo and shouted, “Let’s go!”
They ran over to the tree house with Massud following,
straggling on purpose to stay with his sister on her crutches. The
ladder was not to be seen, so they climbed up, while Annabel
waited for them at the bottom. Massud loved the tree house. It
looked none the worse for wear, except for a colony of spiders
and a pile of leaves and twigs on the floor.
“Let’s sleep here tonight—what do you say, Massud?” Leo
looked out the little window.
“Yes, let’s.” Massud agreed as he leaned out the window on
the other side.
“You can do that, but I’ll sleep with Annabel in the
farmhouse,” Julie stated firmly, with an eye on the spiders.
“Hey, they’re here!” Leo yelled. “I see them coming up the
driveway.” They climbed down and ran toward the adults, with
Annabel tottering up behind them.
“Hi there. You did get here before us! Help me get the car
unloaded, please,” Mr. Temple said as he got out of the car and
stretched. “Well, here we are again. So Angie, what do you say?”
368
Her husband opened the car door for his wife and spread his
arms wide, as if he were giving her the whole world.
“Ah, the fresh country air. It smells like home.” Mrs. Temple
stepped out onto the grass, closed her eyes and breathed deeply.
“And listen how quiet it is. No traffic, no sirens, just the gentle
breeze rustling through the trees. The sounds and smells of
home,” she sighed, smiling as she looked up at the aspens, their
light green leaves quivering in the breeze.
“I haven’t been out in the country since I arrived in the city
five years ago.” Aunt Miriam said, beaming and also breathing
deeply. She looked around. “What a beautiful farm this is.
Already makes me feel ten years younger.”
“We’ll show you around later, but let’s get inside and have
some food now. I could do with a little something and a cuppa
coffee.” Mr. Temple grabbed hold of a suitcase and hurried
inside, followed by the children, who helped bring in the rest.
Aunt Miriam and Mrs. Temple lingered a while longer.
Without a word, they linked arms and joined the family going
into the house.
369
89 { Annabel Steps into the Water
Annabel got up before dawn on the day of the spring

equinox. Her legs ached. Maybe she’d walked around too much
the day before. Without waking Julie, she got dressed, took her
crutches and quietly stepped outside, taking a few careful steps
to gently stretch her muscles.
She hobbled over toward the apple orchard, the clusters of
soft white and pink blossoms on the trees catching the morning
light. It was so beautiful that she forgot the pain in her legs.
Never had she heard the birds sing so clearly. It was still cool,
though she could tell it would be a warm day. There was a slight
haze in the air, which gave the surroundings an otherworldly
appearance. A bit of dew hung on the grass and flower cups.
She turned her head and looked up at Puff Mountain—not a
puff in sight.
“Beautiful, isn’t it?”
Annabel turned around with a start.
“Sorry to startle you,” Mrs. Temple said, stepping out of the
barn and walking toward Annabel.
“Yes, it is beautiful. More beautiful than I had imagined.”
Annabel smiled dreamily. She was glad to see Mrs. Temple.
“You’re up early.”
“I know. Couldn’t sleep.” Annabel did not tell her about
the pain in her legs.
“Nor could I. I’ve already fed the animals and gone for a
walk to the graveyard. Being back makes me realize how much
I’ve missed Honey Creek Farm. It’s good to be here.” Mrs.
Temple looked more relaxed and happy than Annabel had ever
seen her.
370
“I’m so glad for Julie and Leo. They’ve wanted to come

back here so badly.”
“I’m hoping that you, Massud, and Aunt Miriam will also
move here with us. There is plenty of room for all of us, you
know. The farmhouse is large enough. Besides, we can build
additions if we need them. We have become like one big family
after all!” She hugged Annabel.
“That would be the best ever, but I don’t know what Aunt
Miriam would do here, or if she’d agree,” Annabel added.
“Well, I have a bit of a plan.” Mrs. Temple cocked her head
and her eyes twinkled. “Why don’t we go back inside and make
some pancakes? It’s what we had for breakfast the day we left
the farm.”
“Sounds great. Let’s do it.” Annabel swung around with
her crutches and followed Mrs. Temple to the kitchen.
Unexpectedly, the others had risen early as well, even Leo,
who usually liked to sleep in. The smell of pancakes lured him
down from the tree house. The kitchen table had not seen such
a merry group since the day of their departure, and the stack
of pancakes disappeared quickly, including one that Sidney
hastily slurped up with relish.
After breakfast, they put on their boots and, following a
deer trail, walked around to the other side of Puff Mountain.
The ache in Annabel’s legs had worsened, and she hobbled
along slowly and deliberately, hiding her pain. Everybody else
was too excited to notice. Sidney ran off ahead, and Leo gave
chase. Julie strolled along next to Massud, pointing out this
and that, telling him stories of what they’d done when they’d
lived on the farm. He asked many questions and seemed to
drink in everything around him.
371
Although they all knew about the felled trees behind Puff
Mountain, Mrs. Temple gave a cry of dismay as soon as they
stepped out of the forest into the large patch of logged land.
The destruction of the natural habitat pained her, and Mr.
Temple took her hand, reassuring her that they’d plant more
trees as soon as possible.
They continued walking along the edge of the clear-cut in
silence, their excitement subdued. The last stretch of the trail
zigzagged through a rubble of large rocks, the result of a massive
rock and mudslide hundreds of years ago. Rounding a huge
boulder, they stopped in their tracks, rewarded with a sight
that more than made up for the devastation that had left them
feeling heavy of heart.
A grand old solitary oak tree stood tall and noble, lush with
fresh spring foliage, its limbs reaching for the skies. Next to the
giant oak a pond glowed golden in the morning sun, with mist
rising slowly from the smooth, clear surface. Only a few weeks
earlier, a thick gray layer of ash, caused by the slash fires, had
covered the entire area around the pond. But now, hundreds
upon hundreds of purple flowers, the Flora Hermeticus—one of
the rarest, most unique flowers in the world—grew where the
ashes had been, swaying gently in the morning breeze. Julie,
Leo, and Annabel were immediately reminded of the fields of
Lughshmarah in the Soft Realm.
They walked down to the oak tree and stood reverently
on the banks of the large pond. Now, in the shade of the old
oak and close to the water, they saw that it was not just the
reflection of the sun that made the water golden, but the light
coming directly from the depths of the clear, amber water—the
result of the fnumbavat that they had dropped through the ice
hole during the winter. There were wisps of mist that looked
372
like slow, cool flames, twirling upward in slow motion. As they

gazed reverently at the misty, glowing pond through which the
light from above and below shone, they could see the form of a
cross in the middle of the lake.
Leo leaned over to Annabel. “You know what this means,
don’t you?”
“I don’t dare say it.” Nor did she want to say anything, since
the painful throb in her legs had increased.
“Remember the words, Look for the flower garden where fire
and water cross. In the eye of that cross, your legs will regain their
rightful strength. That’s what Queen Marquellamoosh said.
Remember?”
“Leo’s right,” Julie affirmed as she stood on Annabel’s right
side. “And here we are in the beautiful flower garden.” Julie was
overcome with the gravity of the moment, as were the others,
all of them stepping close to the water’s edge, careful not to
trample on any of the flowers. Mr. and Mrs. Temple and Aunt
Miriam were not sure what the children were talking about, but
they all looked at Annabel.
Without a word, Annabel sat down on a rock and tried
to untie her boots. By now the pain was shooting like electric
currents up her legs; she grappled to get her boots off. Leo
saw her struggle and bent down to help her. Once the boots
were off, Julie gently removed her socks. Annabel smiled at her
friends with appreciation.
Clumsily she got up, helped by Massud. When Aunt
Miriam realized that Annabel intended to walk into the water,
she wanted to stop her, but Massud gently held her back.
Annabel took the crutches and slowly waded into the
water, deeper and deeper, tears of pain in her eyes. They all
watched as she waded toward the center of the pond, her white
373
dress drifting loosely in the water. She didn’t stop until only
her head showed above the surface of the water. She paused
briefly, and then moved forward, ever so slowly, inch by inch,
the water rising above her chin. The colorful beads in her
extensions glittered in the hazy morning sun, fine films of mist
still hovering over the water.
To everybody’s surprise, she suddenly took a deep breath
and disappeared under the water. For a while, they saw only
ripples and air bubbles spreading across the pond. Just as they
began to get anxious, Annabel resurfaced at the eye of the cross,
water dripping from her motionless head.
They thought she would go under again, but suddenly
Annabel started swimming… swimming through the rising
golden mist, releasing ripples with each stroke, the tiny waves
gurgling across the pond and lapping against the pebbles along
the bank. Smiling, she swam in growing circles around the
pond, till she arrived at the grassy bank and stepped out of the
water without her crutches, the glistening water dripping like
pearls off her dark, glimmering skin. “I can walk,” she shouted
jubilantly. “I can walk, I can walk!”
374
90 { Handing over the Key
As they cheered and clapped for Annabel, a rhythmic five-

tone bugle call rang across the valley, answered immediately by
hundreds of other bugle calls. The air blurred and thickened,
and suddenly a multitude of dwarfs appeared, covering the
logged slopes of Puff Mountain. On a nearby boulder that
stuck out of the water, King Brathnar emerged, wearing his
long purple gown, which blended perfectly with the field of
Lughshmarah surrounding the lake. Sewn across the gown was
a crimson band of sparkling jewels. In the center of his tall
hat was a large diamond, above which was stitched the Flora
Hermeticus. As soon as he lifted his staff, the bugles fell silent.
“Welcome all on this day of fulfillment. Welcome all on
this day of seasonal balance, where day and night are equal.
Welcome all on this day of beauty, where inner and outer
harmony become one.” King Brathnar raised his arms upward
and turned slowly in a circle to address all who had gathered.
“I welcome all on this day of truth and goodness, where the
past and future can meet in the crossing point of the present.
Welcome!”
As he spoke these warm words of welcome, a cloud of
scintillating light descended over the lake, and a horde of
elves appeared, forming a diaphanous arch above the glowing
lake, with Swinglashna, the Sovereign Lady of the Sky, gliding
down and landing on the pond’s biggest lily pad, close to King
Brathnar. With the elves came flocks of fairies, settling on the
leaves and petals of the Flora Hermeticus. To Leo’s delight and
surprise, Flimsk settled quietly on his shoulder.
“We have come together on this significant spring equinox
to bear witness to this moment in time. All of you have come
375
as you were bidden. Today we can rejoice in having even more

humans present.” King Brathnar turned toward Julie, Leo, and
Annabel. “Our first meeting marked a new beginning—a new
beginning of our relationship with humans. Today marks the
first fruits of that new beginning. Together we can celebrate
the accomplishments. It is indeed unexpected to have three tall
humans, or three old children, present and willing to take part in
this hallowed moment.” He gestured toward the Temples and
Aunt Miriam.
Up to that moment, they had not seen or heard the dwarfs,
elves, and fairies clearly, but with these last words all came into
sharp focus. The sight startled the adults, but it also seemed
perfectly normal, like coming across a rainbow or a natural
wonder such as the Northern Lights, when the aurora in its full
grandeur appears and disappears in a slow dance across the sky.
“It is rare for people to behold us in-between folk, but here
we are, aware of one another, which is proof that the time is at
hand for the working together of all the different realms.” The
king bowed low in acknowledgment of the humans.
“This morning we saw the healing forces of the Liquid
Sun,” King Brathnar continued, “through the power of the
fnumbavat planted in this pond. We have also witnessed the
overcoming of the drought in the South, the wildfires in the
West, and the conquering of Zuratrat, the Molten Dragon.
The true effects of these seeds of light will be revealed only
over time. A new age has begun, and with it, new wonders and
possibilities.”
King Brathnar paused and removed a big, brown woolen
bag from under his cloak. “But many more fnumbavats will
have to be planted around the world. Here is another bag of
sunseeds from the sacred Tree of Life, Ahrumkarista, harvested
376
by Grilpy, who cannot be here today, but sends his rootiest

regards.” He turned to Julie, Leo, Annabel, and Massud. “I
hand this over to you with great trust. You children will
continue to be their custodians.
“The fnumbavats will heal the wounds of Earth, restore
balance, and fill all life with a gentler force, which will pulsate
through the earth as fresh new light-blood. We give thanks to
you, for you were the ones who found the Tree of Life, which
is also the Water of Life—the Light of Life. We will keep on
bringing you seeds until the liquid has had time to reach the
surface of Earth of its own accord. That, however, will happen
only in the next epoch. You are the chosen preparers for that
time to come. Find like-minded helpers. Without them, you
cannot hope to succeed. With them, you will surpass your
expectations, as you already have with the presence of the tall
humans, your elders, by your side.”
King Brathnar held out the bag. “Step forward and receive,”
he commanded as he looked at Annabel, who got up and walked
with ease up to the boulder and took the bag into her arms.
The dwarfs hummed a low tone of appreciation, harmonized
by the higher humming of the fairies and elves.
Massud chose this moment to step forward. Julie saw what
a regal figure he made, standing tall, his dark skin contrasting
with the golden water and the whirling ribbons of morning
mist. Though still a boy, she could see the man in him, the
future leader. “It is a great honor to have my eyes opened to
the wider world by you and my newfound friends. I have been
freed inwardly and outwardly. I have gained a different kind
of knowledge of the world through my recent experiences,
one that is alive and limitless… the kind of knowledge that
377
promises a safer, healthier, and kinder future… a future I can

barely fathom.”
Massud took a deep breath and looked around at the
vast assembly of dwarfs, fairies, and elves. As he peered at the
colorful gathering, he noticed other beings appear, scarcely
visible. He first thought it was the haze around the pond. These
faint beings had no clear form or shape, but were in constant
motion like wind made visible.
The sight of them made his heart feel warm. With a soft joy
welling up, he continued. “On behalf of my sister and my two
new friends, I would now like to present to you, King Brathnar,
the key that has been lost for eons.” Massud unfastened the
metal quill from his belt and handed it to the dwarf king with
both his hands. The king beheld the boy before him with great
respect and reverently took the gift from his hands. He held the
quill and felt its weight. He took the handle and unsheathed
the key like a sword.
The dwarfs gasped as the bright blade glinted in the morning
sun, free of the last vestiges of mist. At once the dwarfs softly
beat their chests with their fists and uttered runic words: “Resh-
te-ke… phaito-mam… ho-la-hash… froon-ko-resh.”
King Brathnar then spoke in a loud and vigorous voice
that soared above the deep chanting of the dwarfs. “Today is
indeed a day of festive convergence, where many paths meet to
fulfill the will of our times. We can give this day, this hour, this
moment in time many names, but there is one that embraces
and unifies all: the Ceremony of the Sacred Key.
“This key, that was forged back in the ancient Palta-Yugom
Age, has finally returned to us after being stolen by the enemies
of light and life.” He turned around for all to see the glistening
blade. “This dagger-key that cuts through the hardest steel…
378
this lost key that can open any and every lock… this key that
has been the scepter for many kings… can again open the Great
Treasures that will give new power to us and all the dwarfs of
the world. In this key, we have hope lost and hope regained.”
He held the dagger-key out in front of him and spoke
directly to the sacred relic: “Lapi-sopya-krus, you have returned
to us, and now you can return to the true sheath that protected
you for eons.” King Brathnar stopped and looked to his side.
“Come forward, Ribbadon, Lord of the Cave.”
Ribbadon, who the children knew as Curly Beard, stepped
forward carrying a magnificent sheath, fashioned from the
most precious metals, adorned with sapphires, emeralds, black
opals, red rubies, diamonds, and other gemstones and polished
jewels. King Brathnar was about to put the gleaming key back
into the original sheath when he heard a soft but penetrating
voice call, “Wait!”
379
91 { Treasure
All fell silent. Even the birds ceased their cheerful chirping.
Who dared interrupt King Brathnar at such a sacred moment?
“Wait!” the voice repeated more urgently. “Let the key open
the first of many locks, the first of many treasures.” The voice
came from the large and many-boughed oak tree behind the
children, the place where Massud had hung the mask a few
months back.
Now that mask had merged and become one with the tree,
it no longer looked like a toad with stunted legs, but more like a
woman with fine rounded features and the wisdom of the ages
in her eyes. The children were astounded. No trace of Roop was
left in those delicate features. The gentle but penetrating voice
of the transformed Roop continued. “The Lapi-sopya-krus not
only opens any lock, but also finds that which has been lost.
Spin the dagger-key and find the place that has been hidden.”
King Brathnar set the dagger-key down on the boulder
before him and ceremoniously spun it around. It twirled many
times, the blade twinkling in the sun, until it came to a stop,
pointing to a large rock beneath the tree around which its
biggest root curled. “Massud, you with the strong arms, dig
with the dagger-key between the root and the rock. Do not fear,
for the blade will not be damaged.”
King Brathnar handed Massud the dagger-key and he began
digging. The earth seemed to move by itself, and within a few
minutes, the dagger-key struck something hard and metallic.
Massud quickly cleared the earth away with his hands to reveal
a large chest. Mr. Temple helped Massud lift the heavy trunk
from the hole in the ground. They placed it on the grass at the
380
edge of the pond. The dwarfs gasped as one, and the elves and
fairies warbled in approval.
“Boy with the many pockets, you as the youngest, may
now unlock the chest.” King Brathnar gestured for Leo to
step forward. Massud gave him the dagger-key. The lock was
small and the dagger-key large. With some effort, Leo carefully
inserted the thin tip of the key until it wouldn’t go any further.
He turned the key, and with two soft clicks the lock opened.
Flimsk, still on Leo’s shoulder, struck a heroic pose and clapped
his wings.
“Now it is your turn to lift the lid,” King Brathnar said,
pointing to the girls. “Yes, you with the dark hair and you with
the fiery hair.” Annabel and Julie stepped forward, arranged
themselves on either side of the chest and opened the heavy
lid. The girls almost dropped it, surprised as they were by the
splendors revealed. The dwarfs broke out in impulsive laughter
and applause, which took the form of slapping their leather
tunics and stamping their feet.
The open chest glimmered with the most finely crafted
jewelry—bracelets, necklaces, diadems, rings, earrings, and
more—similar to what the girls had seen in King Brathnar’s
treasure chamber. All these riches were amidst hundreds of
gold and silver coins. The elves and fairies joined the dwarfs,
with more warbling and fluttering of wings. “The prophecy has
been fulfilled! We have witnessed the first Grand Opening of
the Old Treasure,” the dwarf king intoned over the stirrings in
the crowd.
King Brathnar looked over to Swinglashna, Sovereign Lady
of the Sky. They shared a smile, after which King Brathnar
lifted his staff. Immediately, silence was restored. “Listen all
and be witness to my words.” He looked all around, taking his
381
time. Everybody present felt that they were seen and recognized
by him, not only the children, the Temples and Aunt Miriam,
but also every dwarf, elf, and fairy.
“This treasure has long been lost to us, to the treasure
chamber of the dwarfs of the North. But it is only a small part
of the treasure that the dagger-key will once again find for us.
And so, I bequeath this treasure to the seven of you—the seven
human witnesses to this singular and unmatched ceremony of
the spring equinox.
“You are like the seven petals of the Flora Hermeticus, each
one of you bringing a specific strength and gift. The money you
children received from the reward allowed you to buy back the
farm. This treasure will allow you to build up and develop its
potential. May it be an oasis in this desert world of ours.
“It is the least we can do after all that you have done for us.
We will now be able to return and retrieve all the treasure we
lost to those who have threatened us over the ages. Our treasure
chamber shall be filled again. The key will lead us to our most
prized possessions: the seven planetary seals, each one forged
from the metals of the planets. These seals are the truth behind
the Flora Hermeticus, the earthly embodiment of all the healing
forces in the world, which are reflected in the seven liberal arts
in the schools of the humans.
“Once the retrieval of the seven seals has been achieved,
the key—Key Hermeticus, or Lapi-sopya-krus—will be restored
to its rightful place on the black marble plinth in the reservoir
of Liquid Light, deep under the Bricanus Mountains.”
With that, King Brathnar took the key and placed it into
the precious sheath that Ribbadon had brought. As soon as
the dagger-key was sheathed, the center of the pond began to
bubble and froth.
382
92 { Parting
The churning of water increased, the spurts rising higher

and higher, until the golden fountain reached the height of the
grand old oak tree. Suddenly, water sprites were seen twirling
and swaying between the cascading jets and drops of water that
plumed into the sky. One of them swam right up to the bank
where the children, the three adults, and King Brathnar stood.
“Wilamelee!” Annabel cried with joy.
“Wilamelee it is, with friends who have accompanied me
from distant oceans. Queen Marquellamoosh sends her best
wishes and baptismal blessing, as does Quellanish, King of the
Ocean. This fountain is her gift to you. This pond is now a
spring, and it will give you the freshest water you need.
“In the future, this spring will be the first spring to bring
you the Liquid Light from the depths of Earth straight to the
surface. It will still take many years, but with the help of King
Brathnar and the dwarfs, water that now flows only through
King Brathnar’s land will also bubble forth here. Until then,
spread widely the fnumbavats… those lovely sunbeads… those
sunseeds of life that will nourish Earth.”
At this, Swinglashna joined Wilamelee and said. “We will
keep the air pure, tingling, and fresh for you, so that your crops
may grow and your animals prosper. We will do this for the
health of one and all.” With that promise, she linked arms with
Wilamelee and the two began to dance, skimming lightly over
the water’s surface. Flimsk and a host of elves joined them, and
above them the hazy beings that Massud had seen—those shyest
of air beings from the highest jet streams in the sky—formed a
swirling, spiraling canopy.
383
No sooner had the air beings joined the dance than the
fairies rose as one from the purple fields of blossoms and
danced with them around the fountain, forming striking
patterns. More elves emerged from the tree and followed suit,
singing. The dwarfs needed no prompting. They beat rhythms
on the ground with their boots and blew melodies with their
bugles. As the music got lively, King Brathnar swiftly changed
into Ektanaan and started to dance on the boulder, joined by
Curly Beard.
Thrilled to be able to move her limbs so easily, so fluidly,
Annabel was the first of the humans to break into dance.
Nobody could have guessed that her legs had been lame less
than an hour ago. She danced as if she’d danced for years.
Leo, impressed, took hold of Annabel’s hands and tried
to keep up with her, though he often stepped on her toes.
Emboldened, Julie offered Massud her hand, which he gladly
clutched, and the two of them moved with the rhythm, capering
around, laughing.
Although Mr. Temple was not much of a dancer, he saw
that his wife was swaying to the tempo, so he took her into
his arms and they soon skipped and hopped in circles like a
young couple. Ektanaan, seeing Aunt Miriam standing alone,
jumped from the boulder, ran up to her, grasped her hands,
and the two of them cavorted around with the others on the
patch of green between the oak tree and the pond. Soon elves
and dwarfs joined together in the dance, something which had
never happened before. It was a joyous sight to behold!
As the singing, clapping, and stomping continued, a loud
and piercing cry broke through the dance. Looking up, they
saw d’Ahura, the Sun Dragon, approach between the white
clouds that now puffed above Puff Mountain. “In the name of
384
all the fleeting fire spirits, great and small, I give my blessings,”
he pronounced as he circled majestically around the pond. “It
is a rare event indeed when representatives from all four realms
can celebrate together. It seals our firm bond with the human
realm. From now on, let it be our goal to cultivate this bond, to
let it grow and strengthen. Let relationships build and multiply
like the Flora Hermeticus that once was rare and now fills this
field, this garden.”
D’Ahura glided down close to the children. “Your ground-
breaking work will go down in history, stored in the memory of
the elements, through everlasting eternity. However, the threats
will continue and the attacks will increase in severity. Earth will
still be abused. But I have come to tell you that you and Honey
Creek Farm will be protected. I give you my word.”
The Sun Dragon’s lofty words found approval. From the
throats of all the dwarfs, elves, and fairies came whoops of
support. “As you see, the realms are with you. You are in good
hands. So, with warmth and light I leave you.” With three
mighty flaps of his glistening wings he was gone, which signaled
the end of the festivities.
Ektanaan changed back into King Brathnar. He lifted
his hands into the air, struck a three-tiered sign and shouted,
“Krash-ma-rook!”
“Eoma-klado-mie!” the dwarfs answered in one mighty voice,
followed by the entire crowd stomping their boots three times.
After that, they slowly faded from view.
Flimsk flew down and sat on Leo’s shoulder again, stroked
his ear and bade them all farewell. For once he was loath to
leave, hopping onto each one of their shoulders, even those of
the adults, promising that he would be back.
385
Swinglashna, who looked like the most beautiful lily,

hovered just above them. “You might not see me, but you’ll feel
my touch in every breeze and gust of wind, and when you look
up at the distant clouds above you, there too, I’ll be. You’re
never alone. You have proven yourselves to us. Keep proving
yourselves to the world. Farewell.” She waved and was gone,
together with the host of elves, fairies, and shy beings of the
haze. Flimsk, who’d landed back on Leo’s shoulder, stood up,
bowed, and flew off after the Sovereign Lady of the Sky.
Lastly, Wilamelee, sitting on the rock where King Brathnar
had stood, said, “Wilamelee almost forgot, but Tortoise
Loutilias sends his singiest regards. Had he been here, he would
have sung you a song especially composed for the occasion.
Wilamelee will visit often. Come to the fountain, the Sun
Fountain, and call my name three times. If Wilamelee can,
Wilamelee will come. Goodbye,” she whispered as she swam
over to the fountain. She let herself, together with the other
water sprites, be spouted up into the sky by the force of the
fountain’s spray before they cascaded back down into the pond
and disappeared.
Now the humans were all alone, just the seven of them. For
a while, they lingered, listening to the sound of Sun Fountain,
before Annabel, without a word, picked up the big bag of
fnumbavats and led the way back to the farmhouse. Massud
and Mr. Temple carried the treasure chest between them. Once
they were gone the wise woman in the old oak tree, who once
had been Roop, whispered, “Life truly is full of surprises,
changes and wonders.”
386
93 { Plans, Visions, and Waiting
That night Annabel slept in the tree house with the others.
It was a tight squeeze, but they didn’t mind. Early next morning,
before breakfast, they ran down to Hawk Gorge to watch the
sun rise. They crossed Elm River on the fallen hickory tree
and trotted up the dark narrow gorge until they came to Sun
Catcher, the large boulder that jutted into the deep and clear
rock pool.
“Well, here we are again,” Julie cheered, taking off her well-
worn boots and rolling up her jeans. “Never thought I’d ever
sit here again.”
“Especially not with our new best friends,” Leo added,
throwing a pebble into the water, before plunking down next
to the others who were already dangling their bare feet in the
refreshing water. The first rays of sun appeared through the
crack at the top of the gorge.
“Ah, this is the life,” Annabel sighed, closing her eyes and
letting the warmth of the sun caress her cheeks.
“And the best thing is that we can come here whenever we
want.” Leo added as he took out some stale bread, broke off
little pieces, and threw them to the fish that swam up to nibble.
“I can see why you love this farm so much and why you
wanted to come back here so badly. It makes me feel so free.”
Massud smiled. “I want to get to know every inch of this farm.”
He faced the others and the emerging sun. “A year ago your
parents were forced to sell this place because they couldn’t
make ends meet. That’s never going to happen again—I want to
make sure of that. Whatever it takes, I want to help make this
farm as prosperous as it can possibly be.”
387
“I’m with you on that,” Julie agreed, splashing some water

into the middle of the rock pool with her toes. “And we’ll show
you everything on this farm, starting with Puff Mountain.”
“But first, we’ve gotta have breakfast,” Leo groaned. They
all laughed.
“First one to the kitchen door gets an extra pancake!”
shouted Annabel as she took off running.
After breakfast, they climbed Puff Mountain, stopping
off at Lost Cave. Leo took out his flashlight and led the way
past Thief’s Throne (the flat slab of stone that had cracked in
two the last time they’d entered the cave) to the back of the
cave and through the craggy gap into the secret chamber. They
peeked through the hole that dropped down into a tunnel and
led through the underground caverns for untold miles. Julie,
Leo, and Annabel told Massud how, guided by Grilpy, they had
walked through those caves.
Massud, although he didn’t say anything, was determined to
explore those caves someday. But that would have to wait. The
others were already on their way back out. They all squinted
in the bright sunlight as they emerged and continued on their
way.
At the top of the mountain, they started a second stone
pillar next to the one Grandpa had started. It was a cloudless day
and they had a clear view of the Bricanus Mountains. “One day
we’ll have to visit King Brathnar and show you his kingdom,”
Julie remarked to Massud, as they enjoyed the expansive view.
“I’d like that,” he answered, warmed by the thought that
she wanted to share not only the farm with him, but also the
wondrous things the others had told stories about.
Meanwhile, Mr. and Mrs. Temple went over to Mr.
Phipson’s house to settle the paperwork, while Aunt Miriam
388
fed the animals for the first time, after which she prepared an
elaborate meal with some of the vegetables that were growing
wild in the untended garden.
That evening, after supper, they all spent many hours
talking and dreaming about the future. It was an evening filled
with lots of laughter and crazy plans, some of which would
eventually come true. But of one thing they were sure: They
would all move to Honey Creek Farm in the summer… and the
summer couldn’t come soon enough.
Reluctantly, they returned to the city in the morning. Over
the next few weeks and after many more late-night discussions
that included all seven of them (though Leo and Annabel often
fell asleep or went to bed early), a concrete plan was developed.
With the extra money from the treasure, which turned
out to be even more valuable than they had ever anticipated,
they planned to establish a school for children, directed by
Mr. Temple: the Honey Creek Farm School. It would emphasize
and foster the connection to the land, which would include
their invisible friends. Additionally, they would launch an
agricultural research institute, led by Mrs. Temple. But there
was another part of the plan as well.
Julie, Leo, Annabel, and Massud were determined to create
a summer camp on the farm for all the homeless, orphaned,
and poor children who had been picked off the streets and
forced to work for Ahrmaluz and Eplyssa. Tracking down the
children proved difficult, but Massud, with Detective Hoover’s
help, was able to locate every one of them. In the afternoons,
in between doing their homework and their chores, the four of
them wrote cards, inviting the children to a six-week summer
camp—all expenses paid.
389
Meanwhile, Mr. Temple, who handed in his resignation at

the university, took charge of getting cabins built on the farm
and preparing not only for the summer camp but for their
move back to Honey Creek Farm. There was much to be done,
and sometimes he stayed away for days on end, ensuring that
the construction went according to plan.
As for the four children—they could barely focus on their
schoolwork during their last semester. At last the day arrived;
school let out and summer vacation began. They could finally
pack up and return to the farm.
390
94 { Honey Creek Farm School
A few weeks into the summer vacation, busloads of

children arrived at the farm. Most had never left the city before
and they couldn’t get enough of Honey Creek Farm with its
open spaces, fresh air, animals, forests, ponds, and meadows.
Many of their parents, some of whom had also been forced
to work for Eplyssa and Ahrmaluz, accompanied the children
and served as counselors and chaperones. It proved to be the
highpoint of their lives, and there were many tears when camp
came to an end. Luckily, for most, it was not the end of their
time at the farm.
That fall, Honey Creek Farm School would open its doors.
When the children who had attended the summer camp heard
about the school, they all wanted to enroll. Of course, they were
all accepted, and many of their friends as well. Mr. Temple had
not bargained for so many students, and extra arrangements
had to be made to accommodate them all.
The period between summer camp and the opening of
school was a busy time for them all. Until new school buildings
were completed, the lessons would have to be held in the barn
and the farmhouse. This meant constructing partitions in the
barn, painting walls, buying desks, chairs, shelves, sharpeners,
pens, papers, and many other supplies. The four children
helped out wherever they could, all of them driven by the
excitement of the venture.
But it was clear they wouldn’t be able to manage running
a school without some extra help. But who, and how would
they be able to get reliable assistance at such short notice? As
they pondered the problem, Annabel suddenly shouted out, “I
391
have the perfect solution!” Excited at her idea, she got up and
danced a little jig.
“So tell us, already,” Leo said, laughing at her antics.
“Simple! Remember our neighbors from our apartment
building? Let’s ask them! Wouldn’t it be great to have them
here? Besides, I miss them.”
“Brilliant idea!” Mr. Temple pulled out his cellphone. “I’ll
call them right this minute, yes?” True to his word, he called
them on the spot, one old neighbor after the other.
Mr. Travers immediately agreed to become the caretaker
and groundskeeper of Honey Creek Farm School, as well as
the school bus driver.
Irma and Edith Brooks, the twin sisters who had given
Massud such excellent tutoring, were asked to join the faculty
as the English and history teachers. They hummed and hawed,
saying they needed at least a “fortnight” to think about the
offer. Ten minutes later they called back and accepted, on
the condition that they would also be the school librarians,
building up a school library and developing it.
Mr. Temple, who had befriended Detective Hoover, per-
suaded him to give up his work as a detective and become the
math and science teacher. That had taken some extra coaxing.
Finally, after many phone calls, he agreed, arriving only the day
before the first day of school. Months later, he confided that
he had been considering resigning anyway, thinking it was time
for a new challenge and wondering what else life had in store
for him. It turned out that his skill at teaching and solving
math problems gave him as much satisfaction as solving crimes.
Aunt Miriam, who helped wherever she was needed,
became the school nurse, as well as the head of the dormitory,
which was one of the first buildings to be completed. She was
392
glad to give up her job at the hospital where she had worked
long hours away from Annabel and Massud. Now, even though
she had many responsibilities, she would be close to her niece
and nephew and see them many times throughout the day.
It must also be mentioned that, one year later, Mr. Travers
would marry Edith, and Mr. Hoover would marry Irma—a
double wedding, just before the summer vacation, celebrated
at Sun Fountain midst a sea of purple flowers. It was a festive
event, witnessed by all the students.
Mrs. Temple, however, devoted most of her time to the
Hermeticus Agricultural Research Institute, or HARI, as they
called it for short. It was situated on the other side of Puff
Mountain, so that it would not interfere with the school. She
focused mainly on developing tinctures, salves, ointments,
lotions, and creams made from the Flora Hermeticus, of which
they now had a great supply. She consulted with the dwarfs,
elves, and fairies about the flower’s medicinal properties. Julie
often joined her mother after school, and they found a strong
collaborator in Swinglashna, who was eager to help them.
Over the years, the healing properties of their products
would become world famous, and with time, Honey Creek
Farm also became a retreat center. Sun Fountain became a
sought-after place, as its soothing and restorative powers also
gained a growing reputation, with many ailing people coming
from around the world to bathe in the glowing pond.
The curriculum of the Honey Creek Farm School required

that all the schoolchildren work on the farm and learn how to
care for the land and the animals. Over time, the children were
introduced to the dwarfs, elves, and fairies, celebrating with
them the seasonal festivals, mostly held around Sun Fountain.
393
Honey Creek Farm would gradually become world

renowned for its extraordinary bumper crops. Moreover, it
became common and widely accepted knowledge that the
students worked and played with the Invisible folk on a daily
basis, studying many of their secrets, which they could then
apply later in life. There was no need for pesticides or chemical
fertilizers as the invisible elements helped the farm to grow
large and lush vegetables. They taught of preparations that
potentized the earth and the light for strengthening the crops.
Soon, other farmers, scientists, doctors, and healers took note
and inquired about the methods used on Honey Creek Farm.
Over the years, many of the parents joined the school
to help in one way or another, working as bakers, farmers,
cheesemakers, shepherds, beekeepers, artists, therapists,
researchers, and teachers, or just helping out wherever they
could. The community around the farm grew rapidly. A farm
store was opened in Limia, the village a few miles down the
road, though still on the farm’s land.
One morning, Mr. Phipson requested a meeting with

Mr. and Mrs. Temple. They were surprised to see him, as he
had kept to himself since their return. They invited him in,
wondering what he wanted. But he didn’t want anything.
Instead, he wanted to give them something—his own farm. All
he asked for in return was to be allowed to live in his house
for the rest of his life and to bathe in Sun Fountain, which he
hoped would relieve his rheumatoid arthritis and the weakness
left in his lungs from his bout with pneumonia.
The Temples were overjoyed at the news and accompanied
him to the pond for his first swim in the golden waters. The
ugly wire fence that Mr. Phipson had erected, and which had
394
divided their properties, was immediately taken down. From

then on, he was a close family friend. It turned out, to the
children’s surprise, that he knew many stories that everyone
loved and which he gladly told on long winter evenings.
Shortly after Mr. Phipson’s visit, the Temples had another

unexpected visitor. They recognized him as soon as he stepped
out of his car and pushed his glasses onto his forehead, on
which a second pair was already resting. “Hey, kiddos!” he
said, which made them all laugh as they had not heard this for
so long.
“Mr. Thompson!” Leo, Annabel, and Julie, shouted together
and immediately ran up to him. He was clearly pleased at the
warm welcome. “I don’t have much time, but I’ve heard so
much about Honey Creek Farm that I had to check it out for
myself.”
When Mr. and Mrs. Temple came out to greet him, Mr.
Thompson continued, “Hi Gerald and Angie. I’ll cut to the
chase. I want to make a film about this place. How about it? If
you say yes, I’ll have my crew out here within the week.” They
laughed and agreed without a second thought. The children
showed Mr. Thompson around, after which he sped off to his
next appointment.
All four children very quickly settled into their new lives.
The old oak tree next to Sun Fountain was their favorite spot.
One, if not all, of them could often be found lying in the shade
of its lush foliage, overlooking the field of purple flowers or
bathing in the fresh water.
Unbeknownst to them, an old man often looked down
from Puff Mountain, smiling at all the happy children and their
395
activities in the valley. Ektanaan and Curly Beard sometimes

joined him, all three smoking their pipes, puffing away, blowing
aromatic vapor into the air that turned into wondrous shapes
that told stories of dragons, volcanoes, caves, monsters, heroes,
and fnumbavats that needed planting.
They knew that soon it would be time for another
adventure. Grilpy’s woolen bag filled with sunseeds was waiting
patiently in the treasure chest. Swan Boat knew it too. On the
windowsill, up in the tree house, the boat in the bottle had
already begun to glow ever so faintly.
396
The Invisible Boat
The Invisible Boat

Ever wonder about the living beings who drive the wild untamable fires
and the
in the west? Here is a tale that makes pictures for us all of the powerful
beings driving such natural events forward! These are important pictures
and the
to draw us close to nature in a different way from our ordinary thinking.
Molten Dragon
The children who helped the elemental world to clean the water and release
Molten Dragon
the water sprites from the Binagatorials in first The Invisible Boat, are called
upon once more in this tale of suspense and adventure to help our living Earth
to tame the Molten Fire Dragon. Using their invisible boat, a gift from the
beings of the earth and their own grandfather, they navigate to the place of
most need on the earth — the center of the raging fires in the West. The dwarfs
of earth show themselves only to those whom they can trust not to dismiss
them as imaginary.
The author continues the fun, thrills, and lively characters from the series
opener (The Invisible Boat, 2014) in this follow-up for fourth graders and up.
Müller’s ending nicely brings all the good guys together for a conclusion that’s
logical and satisfying. The author’s descriptions, especially of settings, are a
joy, with well-chosen details to linger over, whether the location is a fantasy
landscape, a magic shop, or a detective’s office. As before, the book has an
urgently serious message of ethical responsibility to the environment, but it
doesn’t feel preachy thanks to the story’s highly colored adventures.
Eric G. Müller waldorf publications

A fine tale with well-conceived quests, strong characters, exciting
confrontations, and a delightful resolution.
Eric G. Müller teaches high school literature and

drama at the Hawthorne Valley Waldorf School in New
York, and he is the director of Teacher Education at the
Alkion Center there. Born in Durban, South Africa, he
studied literature and history at the University of the
Witwatersrand, Johannesburg. He continued his studies
at Emerson College, England, and the Institute for
Waldorf Pedagogy in Witten-Annen, Germany, where
he specialized in drama and music education. He has
published two novels and a collection of poetry. His love
of the living earth and of children is abundantly clear in
this story! www.ericgmuller.com
by Eric G. Müller
ISBN 978-1-943582-98-3
38 Main Street
Chatham, NY 12037 9 781943 582983

Molten Dragon For OWL

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Molten Dragon For OWL

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Invisible Boat

The Invisible Boat

Eric G. Müller waldorf publications

Eric G. Müller teaches high school literature and

© 2017 by Waldorf Publications

On the Eve of the Winter Solstice

1 { Voice of the Birds

A feral pigeon cooed softly outside the window, patiently

“It hasn’t snowed here in three years,” Annabel remarked,

true source of the voice. Was somebody hiding between the

2 { Thus Spoke the Ice

As soon as Leo attempted to get up, the ice cracked again.

Suddenly, a large branch from a pine tree, heavy with snow,

“I wonder what we’re supposed to remember,” Julie mused

“What?” Leo and Annabel asked.

acute sense of shame. Now it all flooded back to them. They

4 { Preparing to Set Sail

“Curly Beard!” they shouted in happy harmony.

5 { Through the Great Gates of the

a light sleep. Julie’s head rested against the smooth ethmaroll,

Curly Beard said festively, as they ascended toward the first of

6 { To the Bricanus Mountains

“Food, anybody?” Annabel asked, grabbing the brown

bears, which dissolved as soon as they touched their noses. “It’s

Enjoying their sandwiches and hot chocolate, the children

7 { Guided by the Hawk

“An abandoned mine land site, to be exact,” Julie added.

8 { Into the Mineshaft

The children shrieked in fright at the sudden attack. “No

“Well, it pays to pay attention in school.” Julie cleared her

collapse.” As he said that, Curly Beard almost rammed into a

At a junction of the many shafts, the colony of bats flew one

and Leo counted the seconds, though once he reached one

of the broken drill bit. “In the miners’ attempt to discover

10 { Through the Ear

“Oh, it looks like a large ear,” Annabel observed as the

“I know where we are!” Julie cried and smiled.

spotted, even from afar. I sense them penetrating the King’s

Attending the 77th Earth Council

11 { King Brathnar’s Hall

From high above King’s Valley they sailed down rapidly,

hand around the coins, chuckling. “Feels truthful.” When he

before. The silence was intense. Slowly, he scanned the crowd,

The dwarfs stepped back to make a large space in the center

Annabel gasped in amazement, “Look at what they’re

King Brathnar grew in size as he stood and stared across

becoming needs light, and since the beginning of time we have

vapors in the sky. Some places on Earth will be plagued by

hovering above the multitude of dwarfs. Again, the hall was

Leo felt a shiver go up his back. Julie swallowed and pursed

“I spoke of the outer light that is being threatened, but the

15 { Off to Crystal Canyon

Torches mounted on the walls lit their way as the group

King Brathnar led them down the narrow spiral staircase,

16 { Close to the Edge

already been set up, with more under construction. Thousands

couldn’t get enough of the feast of colors that spread beneath

Ektanaan led the way past many mounds of mined crystals

wall of vapor into the Mists of Def-a-Khan on their previous

“But they are very effective,” Ektanaan said with a smile.

He touched each of them lightly on the shoulders with

In the Depths of the Canyon

18 { The Long Fall